5 0 99 MB
jm '
-o
•-
'"
' .
'.;
.
V
•
.
j&n ——mum mamH ^ManeBasBM »
~
v-
~niw iifi.j
;
i
*
•"
>
r
L
vamwm*..I.z
—
.-
.
.
1
-
i
Digitized by the Internet Archive in
2015
https://archive.org/details/timesaverstandar00dech_0
BURLINGAME PUBLIC LIBRARY 4C0 PRIMROSE ROAD BURLINGAME. CA 94010
For Reference Not
to be taken from this
room
WITHDRAWN FROM SURLINGAMh PUBLIC LiBRARV
Time-Saver
Standards for
Building Types
Other McGraw-Hill Books of Interest
Binder
•
Corporate
Facility
Breyer
•
Design of
Wood
Burden
Entourage
•
Callender Colley
Time-Saver Standards
•
Manual
Practical
•
Planning
Structures
of Site
for Architectural
Design Data
Development
De Chiara Handbook of Architectural Details for Commercial Buildings De Chiara Time-Saver Standards for Residential Development De Chiara and Koppehnan Time-Saver Standards for Site Planning •
•
•
Ehrenkrantz
Halse
•
Architectural Systems
and George
Harris Harris
and Dines
Izenour
Leach
Merritt
Architectural Rendering
•
Time-Saver Standards for Landscape Architecture
Theater Technology
•
Photographic Perspective Drawing Techniques
•
Merritt
•
Dictionary of Architecture and Construction
•
•
Building Design
Nolon and Dickinson Simonds
and Systems Handbook
Standard Handbook for
•
Common
•
Civil
Engineers
Walls/Private
Homes
Landscape Architecture
•
Spaulding and D'EHa
•
Advanced Marketing Techniques
Firms
Went/ing
•
Housing By
Lifestyle
For more information about other McGraw-Hill materials, call
1
-800-2-MCGRAW
countries, call
in the
United States.
your nearest McGraw-Hill
In
office.
other
for Architecture
and Engineering
Time-Saver
Standards for
Building Types Third Edition
Edited by
JOSEPH De CHIARA and
JOHN HANCOCK CALLENDER
McGraw-Hill, Inc.
New York Caracas
Montreal
St.
Louis
Lisbon
New
Sydney Tokyo
San Francisco
Auckland Bogota
London Madrid Mexico Milan
Delhi
Paris
Toronto
San Juan
Singapore
—
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication
De
Data
Chiara, Joseph, date
Time-saver standards for building types / edited by Joseph
De Chiara and John Hancock
Callender.
— 3rd
ed.
cm.
p.
ISBN 0-07-016279-4 1.
Modular coordination
Standards.
I.
NA2760.D42 729'
Copyright
(Architecture)
Callender, John Hancock.
2.
Building materials
II.
Title.
1990
.2— dc20
©
89-39819
1990, 1980, 1973 by McGraw-Hill.
Inc.
All rights
reserved. Printed
in
the United
States of America. Except as permitted under the United States Copyright Act of 1976, no part
may be reproduced
of this publication
data base or
34567890
or distributed in
any form
or
by any means, or stored
in
retrieval system, without the prior written permission of the publisher.
HAL/HAL
895432
ISBN O-DV-QlbEVT-M
The editors for
was Suzanne
Printed
this
W
book were Joel Stein and Stephen M. Smith, and
the production supervisor
Babeuf.
and bound by Areata Graphics
Information contained
in
Holliday.
work has been obtained by McGraw-Hill,
this
believed to be reliable. However, neither McGraw-Hill nor
its
Inc.
from sources
authors guarantees the
accuracy or completeness of any information published herein and neither McGraw-Hill nor authors shall be responsible for any errors, omissions or
its
this
information. This work
is
damages
arising out of use of
published with the understanding that McGraw-Hill and
its
authors are supplying information but are not attempting to render engineering or other professional services.
If
such services are required, the assistance of an appropriate
professional should be sought.
For more information about other McGraw-Hill materials, call
1
-800-2-MCGRAW
countries, call
in the
United States.
your nearest McGraw-Hill
In
office.
other
a
Contents Contributors
xiii
Organizations
XV
Preface to the Third Edition
xvii
RESIDENTIAL
i
Dimensions of the Human Figure
5
Living Areas
6
Living
Rooms
7
Furniture
7
Furniture Sizes
8
Furniture Arrangements Furniture Sizes and Clearances
9
16
Dining Areas
17
Combined Living-Dining Spaces
27
Combined Dining Area-Kitchen
28
Bedrooms
29
Combined Living-Sleeping Areas
41
Home
43
Office or Study
44
Kitchens
Adaptable
53
Laundry Rooms
62
Bathrooms
69
Handicapped Lavatory /Water Closet
80
Adaptable
81
86
Closets
Apartments
98
Apartment Buildings Central Laundry
2.
3
Basic Activities
Rooms
107 119
Housing Densities
121
Housing for the Elderly
126
Housing for the Handicapped
140
Group Homes
159
Senior Citizens' Center
162
Mobile Homes and Parks
169
Youth Hostels
180
Site Planning
186
EDUCATIONAL
201
Nursery Schools
203
Children's Center
207
Child Care Centers
208
v
Contents
Elementary and Secondary Schools
209
General
209
Site Selection
213
Site Planning
213
Busing
214
Parking
214
Recreation Facilities
215
Drainage
216
Planting
216
Safety
216
Kinds of Schools
218
Administration Suites
225
Learning Resource Centers
228
Classrooms
230
Multipurpose
Rooms
235
Student Lockers
237
Language Laboratory
240
Science
240
Facilities
245
Arts
Music
Industrial
Home
246
Facilities
and Vocational
Facilities
250 251
Arts
Food Service
252
Physical Education
258
Auditoriums
269
Guidance Services
271
College and University Facilities
273
Classrooms
273
Gymnasiums
276
Physical Education and Sports
280
Facilities
House
281
Dormitories
282
Handicapped Students
295
Libraries
297
Individual Study Carrels
314
Student Unions
322
Computation Centers
330
Communications Centers
333
Field
Regional Education Center
(Supplementary)
Resource
Facilities (Library)
Large-Group
Facilities
Audiovisual
335 337
340 351
Theater-Arts-Laboratory Teaching Station
Programs and Programming 3.
357
360
CULTURAL Museums Small Museums
372
Exhibition Spaces
377
Visual Arts Facility Libraries
365
378
380
Diagrams of Essential Library Elements
VI
380
Branch Libraries
382
Space Requirements
383
Service and Space Relationships
386
Library Location
387
Contents
Accessible to Handicapped
389
Branch Buildings
390
Bookmobiles
390
Bookstack Data
391
392
Theaters Sight Lines
402
Stage Space
405
Music and Drama Centers
411
House
411
Basic Seating Data
419
Stage
423
Space
for
Dance
429
Community Theaters
433
Amphitheaters
439
Music
442
Facilities
Arts and Crafts Centers
451
Performing Arts Center
463
HEALTH Hospitals
467
Introduction and Flow Charts
467
Bedrooms
467
Nursing Units
474
Surgical Suite
475
Nursery
477
Pediatric Nursing Units
480
Diagnostic X-Ray Suite
484
Pharmacy
490
Teletherapy Units
492
Electroencephalographic Suite
496
Physical Therapy Department
497
Occupational Therapy Department
500
Community Mental Health Center
503
Laboratory
503
Labor-Delivery Suite
509
Radioisotope Facility
511
Outpatient Activity
513
Emergency Activity
528
EDP Unit
530
Rehabilitation Centers
533
Mental Health Centers
548
Homes
554
Nursing
Child Health Station
561
Medical Schools
562
Dental Schools
583
Nursing Schools
600
Youth Treatment Centers
616
Multiphasic Health-Screening Centers
622
RELIGIOUS Churches, General
631
Churches, Lutheran
638
Churches, United Methodist
643
Temples and Synagogues
655
Chapels
662
Church Schools
665
VII
Contents
6.
GOVERNMENTAL AND PUBLIC City
and Town
673 675
Hails
Courthouses
680
Fire Stations
700
Firehouses
703
Police Stations
708
Police Facility
718
and Prisons
725
YMCA Buildings YWCA Buildings
741
Jails
742
Boy's Clubs
755
Recreation Centers
761
Neighborhood Service Centers
767
Embassies
769
Post Offices
773
Access Ramps for the Handicapped
774
Public Toilet
Rooms for
the
775
Handicapped
COMMERCIAL
777
Regional Shopping Centers
779 796
Shops
Retail
796
General Principles of Retail
Shop Design
796
Interiors
796
Layouts and Dimensions
798
Show Windows
807
Women's Wear Men’s Wear
808
Bookshops
812
Shops
812
Jewelry Shops
813
Barber Shop
815
Gift
and Cleaner
Tailor
811
815
Beauty Shop
816
Shoe-Repair Shop
816
Florist
Shops
816
Drugstores
817
Liquor Stores
818
Shoe Stores
820
Supermarkets
823
Banks
825
Restaurants, Eating Places, and
Foodservice Facilities
843
Offices, General
855
Furniture
857
Work
859
Stations
Private
and Semiprivate
871
Conference Rooms
873
Layout
874
Space
875
Planning
876
Clearances
Washroom
viii
827
Kitchens
Facilities
887
889
Medical Offices
891
Radiology
896
General Practice
898
Contents
Pediatrics
899
Internal Medicine
899
Ophthalmology
900
Plastic Surgery
900
General Surgery
901
Orthopedic Surgery
901
902
Dental Offices
General Dentistry
905
Orthodontics
908
Law
909
Offices
Ophthalmological Offices
913
Parking
916
Automobile Dimensions
922
Parking Lots
934
Automobile Service Stations
938
Automotive Shop Gas-Filling
942
and Service Stations
Automobile Body Shop
944 947
Truck Dealer and Service
956
TV
Facilities
960 967
Stations
972
Hotels
Space Allotments
991
Guestroom Floor
993
Guestroom Design
Computer (EDP)
Facilities
Photographic Laboratories Funeral
998 1004
Motels
9.
943
Automobile Dealer Centers
Radio Stations
8.
916
Parking Garages
Homes
1017
1020 1021
TRANSPORTATION
1023
Airports and Terminals
1025
Airport Cargo Facilities
1075
Air Cargo Terminals
1079
Airport Service Equipment Buildings
1081
Aircraft Fire and Rescue Station
1085
Heliports
1087
STOL Ports
1099
Seaplane Terminals
1103
Bus Terminals
1111
Truck Terminals
1117
Truck Types and Dimensions
1123
Docks
1125
INDUSTRIAL
1133
Industrial Parks
1135
Industrial Buildings, General
1141
Industrial Plants
1148
Industrial Railroad
Docks
1154
Research Laboratories
1155
Warehouses
1167
Waterfront Warehouses
1170
Airport Industrial Park
1174
Industrial Plants, Parking
1178
IX
Contents
10. RECREATION
AND ENTERTAINMENT
and Playgrounds
Playlots
Badminton
1183 1192
Basketball (AAU) Basketball
1181
1193
(NCAA)
1194
Biddy Basketball
1195
Goal-Hi Basketball
1196
Boccie
1197
Ball
Croquet
1198
One-Wall Handball
1199
Three- and Four-Wall Handball
1200
Hopscotch
1201
Horseshoes
1202
Hockey
1203
Lawn Bowling
1204
Roque
1205
Shuffleboard
1206
Deck Tennis
1207
Platform Tennis
1208
Paddle Tennis
1209
Tennis
1210
Tetherball
1211
Volleyball
1212
Official Baseball
1213
Ice
1214
Baseball
Bronco League (9-12
Pony League (13-14
yr)
yr)
Colt League (15-16 yr)
League (9-12
Little
Field
yr)
Hockey
1215
1216 1217 1218
1219
Flickerball
Football
1214
(NCAA)
1220
Touch and Flag Football
1221
Golf Driving Range
1222
Lacrosse
1223
Men's
1223
Women's
1224
Soccer
1225
Men's and Boys'
1225
Women's and
1226
Girls'
Softball, 12-Inch
1227
Softball, 16-Inch
1228
Speedball
1229
Team Handball
1230
'/4
-Mile Running Track
Shot Put
1231
1232
Hammer Throw
1233
Discus Throw
1234
Throw
1235
Javelin
Long Jump and Triple Jump
1236
Pole Vault
1237
Jump
1238
High
Archery
1239
International Shooting Union
Automatic Trap
x
1240
Fixed Nets and Posts
1241
Fence Enclosures
1242
Typical Grading and Drainage Details
1243
Typical Playing Surfaces
1244
Contents
Baseball and Softball Backstops
Movie Theaters
1245 1246
Handicapped Seating
1251
500-Seat Movie Theater
1253
Drive-In Theaters
1255
Bowling Alleys
1257
Swimming Pools
1266
Public
Swimming Pools
1266 1269
Diving Pools Residential
Swimming Pools
1271
50-Meter Recreational Swimming Pool
1273
25-Meter Recreational Swimming Pool
1274
25- and 50-Meter Indoor Pools
1275
Health Clubs
1277
Locker Rooms
1278
Bathhouses
1280
Gymnasium
1282
Zoos
1283
Aquariums
1293
Indoor Tennis Building
1300
Sports Arenas
1301
1310
Golf Courses and Clubhouses
1318
Rifle
and
Rifle
and Carbine Ranges, Outdoor
Pistol
Ranges, Indoor
1325 1329
Shooting Ranges, Outdoor Trapshooting
1329
Skeet Shooting
1329
Trap Field
1330 1331
Skeet Field
Combination Skeet and Trap
Field
1332
1333
Marinas
Camps and Camp
Facilities
1343
11. MISCELLANEOUS
1363 1365
Farmsteads
Farms and Farm Buildings
1367
Animal
1371
Facility,
Laboratory
Greenhouses
1375
Horse Barns
1376
Horse Stables
1379
Riding Schools
1385
Kennels
1387
Nature Center
1389
Handicapped/Basic Human Dimensions
1392
Wheelchair Dimensions
1393
Clearances
1395
Handicapped/Anthropometrics
1398
and Urinals
1398
Drinking Fountains
1399
Elevators
1400
Stairs
1401
Convenience Controls
1402
Walkway Clearances
1403
Ramps
1404
Toilets
Credits
1405
Index
1407
XI
Contributors Iris
Alex, AIA
John
AIA
Richard M. Adler,
Building Consultant
Egmont Arens
YWCA
Industrial Designer
W.
Francis
James W. Atz Associate Curator, Museum of Natural History Geoffrey Baker
Architect
Richard U. Gambrill
Armstrong
Leslie
J. Fruin, Ph.D.
Bruno Funaro
the American
AIA
Bryant Putnam Gould IMoyce
Architect
Gencorelli,
John
E.E.
L. Griffin,
J. Grosfeld,
AIA
Vilma Barr Victor Gruen,
AIA
J. L. Gruzen,
AIA
Herbert Behrend, P.E. Richard M. Bennett, AIA
Don Halamka
Frederick Bentel, AIA
Raymond
Maria Bentel, AIA
Housing Research Center.
Charles M. Boldon l\l.
Breger,
Keith
I.
Hibner,
E.
AIA
US
August Hoenack
Conrad Associates
Public Health Service
Joseph Horowitz,
AIA
Dept..
Charles
The Perkins & Will Corporation
Ernest J. Hasch
Cornell University
William
Harrison
Morton Hartman, AIA
Chester Arthur Berry, Ed.D.
Glenn H. Beyer
Gruzen and Partners
Manager. Facilities Engineering P.E. Columbia Broadcasting System, Inc.
Broudy
George A. Hutchinson, AIA Gladys
L.
Brown
Health. Physical Education,
and
Recreation Consultant C. William Brubaker,
AIA
Emmet The Perkins &
The Perkins &
wm
Corporation
Ingram, AIA
The Perkins
&
Will
Corporation
wm David Jones
Corporation
Harold Burris-Meyer
Edward A Kazarian
Charles A. Chaney
Aaron
Alonso W. Clark, AIA
Alexander Kira
l\l.
Architect
Kiff
Housing Research Center.
Cornell University
Harold differ, AIA F.
Joseph Kleinman
G. Cole
Robert Walter
L.
L.
Architect
Knapp, AIA
Cook
William J. Cronin,
Jr.
A. Frederick Kolflat, Corporation
AIA
J. J. Koster
Marvin Cutler, AID
Lendal H. Kotschevar
P.Deis
Architect
Morris Lapidus, AIA
Lathrop Douglass, FAIA
Betsy Laslett
Max
Fred
W.
R.
Architect
A. Peter Florio
Designer-Consultant
and Partners
Lawson
Stanton Leggett
Ferguson
wm
Alan Lapidus, AIA
Clyde H. Dorsett, AIA
Fengler
Luckman Associates
The Perkins &
Architect. Gruzen
Laurence Curtis
T.
Charles
Educational Consultant
Ronald Mace, AIA
xiii
Contributors
James Mackenzie
Richard
John Macsai
Walter A. Rutes
Jain Malkin
Christine
Francis Joseph McCarthy,
William McCoy, AIA
Gordon
P.
FAIA
F.
The Perkins & Will Corporation
McMaster
Roti
F.
F.
Salmon, AIA
Cuthbert Salmon, AIA
Maurice R. Salo, AIA Consulting Architect Lutheran Church in America
Architect
Ben Schlanger
Frank Memoli
Myron
E. Schoen, F.T.A. Director. Commission on Synagogue Administration
Architect
Keyes D. Metcalf
Max
B. Schreiber
Jo Mielziner Stage Designer
Walter
William A. Mills
Samuel Selden
Architectural Consultant
Maurice Mogulescu
Architect
Architectural Consultant
Schultz
E.
Peter C. Smith
Associate of the Royal Institute of
British Architects
Bruno Molajoli R.
Roger Morgan
George Muramoto
Jackson Smith, AIA
Bernard Spero
Architect
William Staniar, M.E.
Richard Muther Clifford E. Nelson,
Newman
Wilbur R. Taylor
M.D.
Margaret
Architect
Raymond
C. Ovresat, AIA The Perkins & Corporation
James
Architect and Theater Consultant
Architect
Emmanuel Mesagna
Oscar
to the
A. Paddock
wm
Dober. Paddock. Upton
James
Architect
E. Terrell
G. Terrill, Jr.
George H. Tryon and
Donald
B.
Tweedy
Associates. Inc.
Howard JuliUS PanerO
P.
Vermilya, AIA
Architect and Urban Planning Consultant
Joshua H. Vogel, AIA
W. Russel Parker
Architect
Mildred C. Widber Richard H. Penner Philip Will, Jr.,
AIA
The Perkins & Will Corporation
Robert Perlman Frank Harrison Randolph, P.E.
Professor of Hotel
Engineering, Cornell University
Kenneth
Ricci
Architect
Scott Turner Ritenour
Herbert ROSS
XIV
Industrial Designer
Richard M. Williams Director, National Building Consultation and Supply Services, Boys' Clubs of America
Mary Worthen
Architect
Martin Zelnik, AIA
Organizations American Association for Health, Physical Education, and Recreation American Association of Port Authorities American Association for State and Local History American Association of Zoological Parks and Aquariums
American Bar Association American Library Association
American Medical Association American Psychiatric Association American Trucking Associations, American Youth Hostels,
Inc.
Inc.
Association of College Unions -International
The Athletic Institute Boy Scouts of America Boys' Clubs of America
Brunswick Corp.
Canada Mortgage and Housing Corporation Canadian
Museum
Association
Center for Architectural Research, Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute
Conference Board of Mathematical Sciences Civil
Aeronautics Administration
The DeVilbiss Company Educational Facilities Laboratories
Eno Foundation Federal Aviation Administration
Federal Housing Administration
General Motors Corporation
General Services Administration
Housing and
Home
Finance Agency
Housing Research Center, Cornell University
Humble
Oil
Institute of
&
Refining Co.
Outdoor Drama, University of North Carolina
Institute of Traffic Engineers
International Association of Chiefs of Police International City
Managers' Association
International Youth Hostel Federation
Kelley
Company,
Inc.
Michigan State Housing Development Authority
xv
Organizations
Mobile
Homes Manufacturers
Association
Mosler Safe Co.
Motor Vehicle Manufacturers Association
of the U.S., Inc.
Music Educators National Conference National Association of Engine and Boat Manufacturers, Inc. National Association of
Home
Builders
National Council of the Young Men's Christian Association of U.S.A. National Council on the Aging National Crushed Stone Association National Education Association National Fire Protection- International National Fisheries Center and Aquariums National Institute of Mental Health National Golf Association National Office Products Association
National Recreation and Park Association National Rifle Association National
New New
Swimming
Pool Institute
York City Housing Authority
York State University Construction Fund
Philadelphia Housing Association Rite-Hite Corporation
Texas A &
M
University, School of Architecture
United Methodist Church, Board of Global Ministries U.S. Department of Health, Education, and Welfare (now called U.S. Department of Health
and
Human
Services)
U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development U.S. Department of the Navy U.S. Public Health Service University of California University of Oregon University of Washington, Bureau of Government Research and Services
Urban Land Institute
Western States Arts Foundation
XVI
Preface to the Third Edition
TIME-SAVER STANDARDS FOR BUILDING TYPES buildings.
It
criteria for,
not, as
and
illustrates the functional relationships
do most architectural books, present the
material
is
intended to be used to assist
building functions properly for
The
a
is
handbook about the architectural planning
describes each building type, such as a school, a
third edition of
its
in
museum,
between,
final aesthetic
its
or a theater,
component
made
The
first edition,
the process of designing the building and to ensure that the
published
in
1
973, established for the
1
in
in
amount
all
major types
of essential planning
It
added new building types and updated
the book. This third edition continues to expand and revise the information on those
building types that
A word
time a comprehen-
order to create more successful buildings. The second edition, published
980, greatly expanded the scope and depth of the material.
ones already
first
and standards of
available to the architect and designer an extensive
data to analyze and organize, in
book does
particular use.
sive source of reference material dealing with the functional analysis It
parts. This
expression of a particular building. The
Time-Saver Standards for Building Types continues the tradition of a unique and
significant publication.
of buildings.
of
and presents general
have seen significant changes over the years.
of caution
spatial relationships,
on the use of this handbook: The material presents basic or general principles,
and design
criteria for
each building type. This information should be used only
as a reference point from which individual or specific design solutions can be established. This material is
not intended to give definitive schematics, rigid formulas, or final designs that will automatically
provide the solution to a specific design problem. Rather, these standards and criteria should only be
the starting point for further analysis, evaluation, and review of the interrelationships of the elements of
each type of building. Primarily, the material
in this
designer, student, or related design professional
to assist in developing building
to establish preliminary space allocations
3.
to study general
5.
handbook
and specific functional relationships
and projects
The future presents many new and exciting challenges
to the architect
and the entire design profes-
Notable are the rapid technological developments that are having strong influences upon the use,
functions, and forms of in
intended to be used by the architect,
assist in the preparation of preliminary architectural designs
to assist in the evaluation of proposals
sion.
is
the following manner:
programs
1.
2.
4. to
in
new
buildings. Equally important
is
the search for
new
aesthetic expressions
architecture and their interrelationships with painting and sculpture. The introduction of
ods, techniques,
and materials
will provide a solid
will significantly influence
new
new meth-
construction. Hopefully, this handbook
base from which these challenges can be successfully pursued.
Joseph De Chiara
Residential
DIMENSIONS OF THE BASIC ACTIVITIES
HUMAN
FIGURE
3 5
LIVING
AREAS
6
LIVING
ROOMS
7
LAUNDRY ROOMS BATHROOMS
62
69
Handicapped Lavatory/Water Closet Adaptable
7
CLOSETS
Furniture Sizes
8
Furniture Arrangements
9
APARTMENTS APARTMENT BUILDINGS
16 Central Laundry
DINING AREAS
17
COMBINED LIVING-DINING SPACES COMBINED DINING AREA-KITCHEN
27
BEDROOMS
81
86
Furniture
Furniture Sizes and Clearances
80
Rooms
98 107 119
HOUSING DENSITIES HOUSING FOR THE ELDERLY HOUSING FOR THE HANDICAPPED
121
29
GROUP HOMES
159
COMBINED LIVING-SLEEPING AREAS HOME OFFICE OR STUDY
41
SENIOR CITIZENS' CENTER
162
43
169
KITCHENS
44
MOBILE HOMES AND PARKS YOUTH HOSTELS
Adaptable
28
53
SITE
PLANNING
126 140
180 186
Residential
DIMENSIONS OF THE DIMENSIONS OF ADULTS
of
The dimensions and clearances shown for the average adult (Fig. 2) represent minimum require-
section of this
ments for use furnishings.
If
in
planning building layouts and
possible, clearances should
be
shown on the next page
authorities prefer 2
6 Vi
ft
6
in,
5 in; some or sometimes 2 ft is
2
ft
in.
Since doorways and
passageways must normovement
mally be dimensioned to permit the
Fig.
Fig.
1
2
book
Age
relating to furniture sizes.)
Height,
in
Age
Height,
44
11
6
46
12
58
physical propor-
7
48
13
60
tions as adults, especially during their early years,
8
50
14
62
and
vary greatly, but their space
9
52
15
64
requirements can be approximated from the following table and from Fig. 1. (For heights of chil-
10
54
16
66
Children do not have the their heights
same
FIGURE
of Children
5
DIMENSIONS OF CHILDREN
in-
creased to allow comfortable accommodations for persons larger than average. The height of tabletops
Average Height
furniture, they should seldom be designed merely on the needs of the average adult. (See
HUMAN
in
56
dren's furniture and equipment, see section on
“Schools.")
Dimensions and clearances for children. Source. “Time-Saver Standards,"
Dimensions and clearances for adults. Source: "Time-Saver Standards,"
1st ed., F.
1st ed., F.
W. Dodge
W. Dodge
Corp.,
Corp.,
New
New
York, 1946.
York, 1946.
3
Residential
DIMENSIONS OF THE
Fig.
4
2
(cont.)
HUMAN
FIGURE
Residential
BASIC ACTIVITIES
Two
Walking between two high walls (space adequate
men and women) for
both
— 40 Walking with elbows extended (space adequate for both men
people passing
(figure derived; twice the space for one person to
walk between two high walls)
Walking between high wall and 30" high table (space adequate for
both
men and
women)
\
Kneeling on one knee (woman only)
Man
bending
a right
at
angle
and women)
One person using coat closet
Two persons using coat closet in foyer area with space for one person walking
5
Residential
LIVING
AREAS
LIVING AREAS Planning Considerations •
Through
should
traffic
be
separated
To sleeping area and main en t ranee
from
activity centers.
Openings should be located so as enough wall space for various
to
give
furniture
arrangements. •
Convenient access should be provided to doors, windows, electric outlets, thermostats, and supply
grills.
Furniture Clearances
To assure adequate space for convenient use of
To dining and k tchen a rea
furniture in the living area, not less than the fol-
i
lowing clearances should be observed.
60 24
between facing seating where circulation occurs between
in in
furni-
ture
30 36 60
in for in
in
use of desk
main between
for
traffic
television set
and seating
Seating arranged around a 10-ft diameter circle makes a comfortable grouping for conver-
(Fig. 1)
sation. Figure 2 indicates clearances, circulation,
and conversation
areas.
Fig.
1
Plan. Source: “Manual of Acceptable Practices," Vol. 4, and Urban Development, 1973.
U.S. Dept, of Fiousing
Minimum clearances, circulation and con2 versation areas for living rooms. Fig.
6
Residential
LIVING
between
FURNITURE
2
GENERAL
ft
General
3.
Typical furniture-group units
practical
While the typical furniture arrangements presented
means cover the ties,
pages
following
the
in
range of
entire
by
no
possibili-
they do cover the fundamental uses to
which
and sleeping spaces
dining,
living,
are put. From the suggested schemes furniture
arrangements can be developed
any particular problem or
may be
with which a designer
Furniture
indicated
set of
may vary
sizes
to suit
problems
confronted. those
slightly;
are the averages commonly met
upper middle-class homes, and are
with
in
little
affected by changes in style or similar
6
ft
serve
is
traffic
lane: 3
increases,
space
the
over:
or
ft
4
scale
in.
the
is
the
in size,
order
in
of
a in
to
pre-
room.
The
lane between an entrance door and
major group unit width.
It
is
preferably generous
is
desirable to place doors so
that the central
become major
portions of
traffic
rooms do not
ways between
group:
television
According to the price of a house and
may be
and a
all
of the furniture-group units
included. The fireplace
wall):
3
ft
is
has been included
a
tolerance, which permits one per-
son to pass back of an occupied chair. This
minimum does not
so closely
is
associated with living room furniture that
portant,
minimum
in
rooms are im-
living
people use the
of
room, and narrow lanes between furnitureunits
quate
traffic
are
uncomfortable.
An
between the
main
constitute a major traffic
lane
trance and the major seating group
wide;
in.
Specific space allowances
4
6
ft
in.
groupings,
furniture
be-
it
LIVING
ROOM
comes obvious that certain clearances are required.
Spaces,
furniture-group
Minimum
been
of
dif-
Typical
distances
room are as
planners.
maximum
cases,
quirements
for
distances
human
been incorporated ing
of
These,
in
some
in
based upon
re-
and
2.
applicable
A
list-
to
3.
1.
Single
between low
Single
conversation
normally
sofa
group:
grouped
chairs
around
the
Secondary conversation group: chairs seat at end of
room or
Reading group or groups:
in
passage objects, in. is
passage
(not
a
such
as
traffic
a
sofa
lane)
and
the minimum. (not
a
traffic
4.
corner
chair, otto-
5.
lane)
space
Music
chairs,
group:
bench,
ft
8
wide. For every inch
to the size of the fireplace,
added
to the
1
in.
is
site
minimum clearance space.
a wide sofa the
is
fireplace,
placed directly oppothis
storage
group
A 6-ft tolerance is the maximum because
is
often
spread.
usually consid-
ered
it
is
difficult to
carry on a conversation over a greater
dis-
tance.
A
considerable
in
flexibility
location
and
of
all
wall
pieces can be shifted. Doors flanking a
fire-
is
possible,
place are to be avoided
bookcases piano,
pieces
4
is
added
doors and windows
Writing or study group: desk, lamp,
one or two
ft
ft
The
living
man, lamp, table
coffee table: 18 2.
the
follows:
Primary
and love
all
rooms follows:
in
fireplace
have
intercourse,
the diagrams.
generally
those
and
groups
If
by
established
1.
numerous
furniture
between
naturally
units.
have
comfort
for
paths
or
lanes,
develop
types
ferent
for a fireplace 3
in.
en3
preferred.
is
a fireplace group
of furniture in
ade-
is
minimum clearance between facing studying
it
schemes.
all
numbers
since
group
4
In
two
allotted to the living room,
cubage
or three or
Traffic tolerances in
desk
a
and
set
Clearances
lane.
matters of individual preference.
Television
7.
Seating areas, confined (for instance,
between
and four
table
differ-
ent parts of the house. 4.
game
group:
seating for several people
the traffic
Game
6.
chairs
the minimum.
minimum. As rooms increase
minimum
this
in.
height
hip
objects,
tall
to 2
ROOMS
furniture
group
may
in
order that the
be
concentrated
around the fireplace opening.
7
BREAKFRONT BOOK CASES •t
m mm
TTTT •
W.lrY
small HEIGHT
rtA
/m
I ••.
' •
LARGE 4'-0" 6'-6"
D H
.
.3
J mL
25
*
,1
5« CONSOLE
END
L
-8"
L
D H
I
D
l’-8" 2'-0"
3'I'-
2'-
0" 6" 6"
HIGHBOYS
imps 26
'
•ytwV'A-W 28
|
-
AVERAGE
ARGE
2-6" 2'-6" 1
a«i
CIRCULAR
-•
SWAN TOP
2'-8" .
1
j
l'-8"
3-2"
3‘-0"
L
D
l'-6"
0
l'-6"
H
7-0"
H
5'-0"
3'-0"
DIAM HEIGHT
37 CONCERT GRANO L
D H 38.
D H
L D H
3'-4" 41
7'-0" 5'-0"
3'-4"
39 PARLOR GRAND L
6'-0"
0 H
5'-0" 3'-4"
3-0 r-6"
DIAM. 3‘-0"
H
2'-6"
DIAM
3'-0"
H
t
-6"
40 BABY GRAND
9'-0" 5'-0"
MUSIC ROOM GRAND L
PIECES
FLAT TOP
L
PIANOS
42.
5-6" 5-0"
.
'v-.i.V.-'
,-y,
3'-4“
DUMBWAITER LARGEST OIAM
CONSOLE L
5-0
D H
2'-0‘
H
2'-0" 2'-6"
42
4'-3"
MINATURE L
4'-8"
D H
3-0"
l'-7"
if! :
ib.
LAMP TABLE DIAM
__
8
\
1
H
W|
l’-6"
-.i'
2'-0" 3" l'2'-0"
L
L 5-0" D 1-6" H 7’-0"
l'-6"
•
,
I
END
LOWBOYS
LENGTH DEPTH HEIGHT
21
I
J-.h:
LENGTH DEPTH
TABLES
-
H
2-0" 2-6"
ROUNDABOUT SEAT DEPTH OF SEAT DIAM 4-0"
f-6"
Residential
LIVING Furniture
ROOMS
Arrangements
2.
Clearance between low coffee table (23) and easy chairs ought to be maintained at 3'-4" even though table is low, because the aisle here constitutes a major traffic way.
(6)
windows may be used as focal
points, instead of fireplaces.
4.
3.
For larger families, or for those who entertain often, 5. seating for 7 to 8 persons in the primary group is a reasonable design limitation. Off-center location of game group provides for a corner entrance door.
If sofa opposite fireplace is omitted, primary group can be brought closer together. In schemes to 4, note that wide groups permit conversation without twisting to see speakers seated on sofa; here this restriction is removed. I
room which must contain a baby approximately 20*. If minimum clearances of 3' between desk (15) and I' between piano and wall, and room length must be increased. maintained, wall, are to be
6.
Minimum
grand piano
length for a
is
Here, presumably, doors at ends of room indicate use of one side of room as a traffic route. Primary furniture is grouped closely about fireplace; wall pieces are all that can be used on opposite side.
9
Residential
LIVING
ROOMS Arrangements
Furniture
/
J
\
V
o fO
22 '- 6 ":
7.
Grouping for door locations at both ends of room; -ft clearance is desirable between piano and wall.
ideally,
Chairs
I
(6)
are smaller than those previously listed, 2'-6"
/
x
3'-0".
8.
If
living
room has
a
/
V
23 - 0 "
"dead end"
(no doors), primary unit
may be spread to include entire end of room. music or game group would demand more area.
Inclusion of
\
24’- 7" ;
Primary group shown is one of most popular arrangeSecUnit placing suggests entrance at left end. ments. ondary conversation unit often becomes music or game group. 9.
26‘-0"l
Ten persons can be comfortably seated in this type of 1 1. arrangement, in which primary and secondary conversation groupings almost merge into one.
10
Arrangement designed to permit door locations on side Angled chairs (6) are small size noted in Fig. 7, and often used in other arrangements. 12.
walls rather than ends.
Residential
LIVING Furniture
13
.
shown schemes arranged symabout centered fireplaces; on this and the folpage are schemes for cases when foci cannot be
Previous diagrams have
metrically
lowing
ROOMS
Arrangements
14 Off-center rooms often divide naturally into two parts: primary group, and other groups combined. Clearance no greater than 2' will not accommodate a major traffic lane. .
centered.
15. If primary, music, and game groups are all to be conHere game tained in a small area, one must be curtailed. group consists of table and only two chairs.
2-6' x 3-0 17. Two smaller upholstered chairs (6), each might be accommodated at the right of the fireplace in this
room with only
a slight increase in
room width.
16.
In this
case the primary conversation group
is
curtailed
to permit inclusion of a grand piano; use of corner bench for game group may result in some loss of comfort.
18. In a room with only one door the minimum traffic lane of 3'-4" needs to be increased to at least 4'- 10", which will accommodate two persons side by side, without crowding.
11
Residential
LIVING
ROOMS
Furniture
Arrangements
20.
19.
21'- io";
Another example of wide entrance lanes. Placement of doors so that at least 10" is allowed between room corners and door trim will permit installation of "built-in" bookcases.
Several doors may be accommodated with this type of traffic lane is assumed furniture-group unit arrangement. to exist at the left end of the room.
21.
22.
same
Notice that a game-table group occupies almost the Placement at an floor area as a baby grand piano. angle is intended for informal rooms.
units;
23.
24.
Fireplace chairs set 3'-6" back from center line of
place permit occupants to gaze at the
General
12
traffic
fire
cannot be accommodated
in
fire-
comfortably. a
2-ft
lane.
A
Larger rooms
may be
may
contain four or more furniture-group
desirable to increase clearances. chairs set at angles requires increased areas. it
Use of
By using love seats instead of pairs of chairs at sides of considerable space can be saved even though seats are not placed the minimum distance apart. fireplace,
Residential
LIVING
/
\
Furniture
rooms with fireplaces in end walls, as in the schemes immedi25.
In
ately preceding, furni-
ture arrangements often
two
27.
fall
naturally into
distinct groups.
In this
ROOMS
Arrangements
26. One of the two groups may be adapted for
dining,
eliminating
need for a separate dining room. Minimum clearance around dining table should be 3 '- 0 ".
scheme, by
placing the sofa on the
long axis opposite the fireplace,
furniture
held together as
two obvious It
is
positions
entrance door.
possible to
back
the sofa against group of windows.
J
a
There are
single unit.
for an
is
a
28. Backing mary - group
the
pri-
furniture
against walls eliminates
behind
passage
and width
reduces to
a
them
room
minimum.
\
the and end
30. Placing the sofa against one
opposite the fireplace are available for doors. Piano should, if
side of the room tends to open up the primary group
29.
Here
left side
possible,
be
placed against an inside wall.
in
effect,
with
to
merge
the secon conversation
it
dary group furniture.
13
-
Residential
LIVING
ROOMS
Furniture
Arrangements
The entire area may be treated as a
32. Here the placing of the desk group (14) allies it
furniture
closely with the fire-
31.
single unit, 6
6
6
all
being brought into the principal group.
place unit. units
are
Four
included.
o'- 6":
33. By interchanging the positions of
the fireplace furniture in
Fig.
32, a grand piano can be accom-
modated.
35. Type of sofa shown is becoming in-
creasingly popular. Chairs (6) may be units which can be added to sofa,
14
if
desired.
34. Completely symmetrical ar-
rangement in comparatively small space; music group might replace items 14 and 25.
36.
"Unit" types of
sofas are particularly suited to corner
groupings. Scheme shown contains three
group
units.
Residential
LIVING ROOMS and Clearances
Furniture Sizes
SPACE FUNCTION
FURNITURE REQUIREMENTS
Primary and secondary activities that usually take place in living rooms or spaces are:
occupants are to be able to carry out their normal activities in the living room, the size and configuration of the space must accommodate both the furniture and its use. Passive activities, such as listening to music and watching television, will not require as much space for movement in front of furniture as will less sedentary activities like
Primary
Secondary
Activities
Activities Dancing Hobbies and
Entertainment
Watching
crafts
television
Listening
Eating
to music Reading
Parlor
If
entertaining or playing.
games
Mending and sewing
Writing Studying Relaxing Resting
Playing music Giving parties Projecting slides or films
Children's
Operating
play
home
computer
2 100 7
-
mm
0"
1
Television
Chesterfield
“mm
200
1
I
medium 800
mm
t
I
1
2 8"
5
b
y
mm
650
mm
-
mm
0"
large
CO 900
Bookcases
Coffee table
Armchair
I
500
I
450
1
22 I
I
r-6"
E
B
8 End table
Occasional chair
r-6'
Desk
Fig.
1
Typical living
room
Chair
Scale
1:50
furniture
15
Residential
ROOMS
LIVING
Furniture Sizes
Scale
and Clearances
1:50
Fig.
5
Grouping of seats for social interaction: recommended clearance 2 600
•
3
000
mm Fig.
3
Recommended clearances
for general access: (2 -10") limited access: (2 -O')
$
*=* 1
=31=3
There should be no through circulation in
this area
This distance varies according
Windows should
not be in this location
Scale
Fig.
4
(2 -O')
16
Limited access between a table and other furniture:
recommended clearance
Fig.
6
screen
for television viewing. The television set should be placed where the not reflect light and where it can be seen from the main seating group
Space will
1:50
Residential
DINING AREAS GLENN
By
AND ALEXANDER
BEYER
H.
KIRA, Housing Research Center, Cornell University
ROOM
DINING The
PASSAGE BEHIND CHAIRS
principal
factors
be
to
considered
The
planning the dining area are as follows:
in
Number
(1)
Space
(2)
and
type
and
glassware,
for china,
table;
passage
for
furniture;
of
the
at
Recommended
be
to
arrangement;
Seating
(4)
persons
used
chairs
for
of
(6)
space
mum
OF
PLACE
of 5
must
be
chair
when leaving
dimensions,
of
up
29
to
freedom
in.
adequate;
wide
be
to
minimum depth in.
These
china,
desirable
is
this
A
placed
a satisfactory width 25-in. -wide
width
25-in.
6
dimensions
tension (See Fig.
vided and
silver,
sage on
sides
all
if
ommended
is
place
36
W
is
in.
are
rec-
table lengths are as follows:
Minimum,
Recommended,
in.
6
10Hx14
=
147
8
1014x16
10
1014x18
189
12
1014x20
= = =
no one
If
is
to
60
the
table,
the
141,4
6
79
84
2
(21 sq
ft).
space
for
8
104
108
elbow
ex-
10
129
132
12
154
156
1).
drawers
6
knives,
forks,
tablespoons,
4
soupspoons; serving
12
teaspoons,
ft
18
spoons, 3-piece carving
set,
forks,
knives,
Depth, 18
in.
Height , 2
1
and
20
may be reduced by
of
required
dishes
and use,
supplies
of
for
moderate
everyday and guest
liberal
for
space
shelf
families, for both
glassis
as
follows: 12-in.
in.
*
20-in.
shelves, ft
Moderate
21-0
2
Liberal
36-9
Drawer space
3
shelves ,
ft— in.
in
14V^»
be seated at either end of length
Linear feet
pieces
spreaders, soupspoons;
each
in.
11
12 each forks, knives, salad forks or others, butter
12
,
210
Storage space
for storage of silverware
Width
Item
168
in.
54
and
ft
126
4
allow
sq
=
The
is
— Area
L
1014x12
pro-
Adapted, from Indoor Dining Areas for Rural Homes in the Western Region, Report 118, University of Arizona Agricultural Experiment Station, Tucson ( June 1955).
each
table,
4
seated at each
minimum and
then
X ft
ware,
8
42-in. -wide
a
of
36
is
44
to
settings
one person
of the table,
Persons
19
Inside dimensions of
1.
space for pas-
42-in.
required sizes are as follows:
medium-income
Table
above
With the same conditions noted
and with an ample
is
chairs
apart.
in.
end
greater
for
for a place setting
glassware,
each
for
permits
area
for total dining
Persons
however, a width
in.;
movement.
of
usually in.
21
is
the
the table (See Fig. 3).
The minimum width recommended
If
place setting
back
pushing
Space
mini-
depth of the chair
for
in.
satis-
passage
If
proximately 4
end of the
at either
may be reduced by ap-
Size of table
based
in.;
needed
width
provided
in.
for
seated
is
the length
linen.
SETTING
minimum
The
25
a
in.;
not required, a
plus the
in.
22
is
to
is
Storage space
on recent research, are provided below. SIZE
22
is
and
and
silver,
range
behind the chairs
them;
Size
(5)
recommended
space
behind chairs
factory
Space
behind
minimum
passage
seated;
(3)
no one
If
table,
Table
linens
is
1.
2
for storage of silver
Space
shown
in
for
Table
storage
is
shown
of
table
2.
teaspoons, 6 table21
serving pieces
3
soupspoons,
salad
forks
17
or
19
2
:
j
"-
29
"
1
*
butter spreaders; 24 teaspoons, 6 tablespoons,
6 serving pieces
Table
Dimensions of stacks of folded table linens
2.
Adapted from Storage Space Requirements for Household Textiles, .4. Woolrich, M. M. White, and M. A. Richards, Agricultural Research Bulletin 62-2, U.S. Department of Agriculture-, Washington, D.C. (1955). Dimensions given are front-to-back, side-to-side, and height. Space 16 Item 2
large
tablecloths.
guest 2
medium
Minimum,
in.
in.
Space 20
deep
Maximum,
in.
Minimum
,
in.
in.
deep
Maximum,
14x19x3
14x36x2
19x14x3
19x28x2
15x19x1
1
3x28x1
19x10x1
18x28x1
14x10x3
14x28x1
10x14x3
15x14x2
14x10x2
14x28x1
10x14x2
15x14x2
7x10x3
7x10x3
lOx 5x3
1
8x10x2
8x10x2
lOx 6x2
10x10x1
13x19x1
13x19x1
19x13x1
19x13x1
13x21x3
1
3x2 1 x3
13x21x3
13x21x3
in.
use tablecloths.
everyday use 4
small
tablecloths.
everyday use 3
small
tablecloths.
guest use 12
small (2
12
large napkins (2
6
napkins
Ox 9x2
stacks of 6)
stacks of 6)
place mats, everyday use
1
table
pad
17
Residential
DINING AREAS SPACE FUNCTION
FURNITURE REQUIREMENTS
Primary and secondary activities that usually take place in dining rooms or spaces are:
Primary
Secondary
Activities
Activities
Typical pieces of furniture are listed below, together with their horizontal dimensions. Tables with seating on two sides are generally larger than those specified for seating on four sides. However, seating on two sides will usually re-
Setting the
Children's
quire less total
table
after
room space.
play
Serving food Eating Cleaning up
Reading Writing Studying and
meals
homework
Storing
Entertainment Board games
dishes
Pattern cutting
and sewing Watching television Ironing clothes
200
1
I
mm
I
40 I
mm
900
t Small bullet
Table
Table
lor lour
lor six
1
800
mm
6 0
"
-
I mm
200
1
Table
Fig.
4
18
Typical dining
room
furniture
lor eight
Table
lor ten
Scale 1:150
Residential
DINING AREAS CLEARANCES Clearances should be provided in front of and in the dining room to allow activities to take place efficiently and in comfort. In some cases, greater clearances are required to accommodate the needs of elderly people, wheelchair users and invalids. Recommendations for clearances around furniture are shown in Figs. 5 to 8.
sometimes around furniture
Fig. 5
Limited access behind a chair
in
cul-de-sac circulation space
850
Fig.
6
a chair in through circulation space
Access behind
mm
2 8
"
-
appliances
or
Cabinets
Scale
Fig. 7
Access behind
a table
and a wall
1:50
Fig.
8
Access behind
a chair
and cabinets or appliances
19
Residential
DINING AREAS
450
mm
I
1
200 4
J
mm
I
0"
900
mm
3 -0 ' I
850
I
2
-
mm 10
"
J
mm
850
T
mm
800
1
T mm
100
1
Fig.
20
10
Eight-person household.
Recommended
net area: 13.87
m
2
Residential
DINING AREAS
—
Dining areas must accommodate furniture portable or built-in
—
either
for eating, sitting, serving
--Hi
and
possible storage. Equipment for these dining functions
may
also be
requirements for
adapted this
meet other possible
to
space
—
as studying, gameleaves
playing, etc.
Table space requirements per person are as
fol-
4
crowded seating, l'-lO" on the table’s perimeter; for comfort, 2'-0". Adequate clearances lows: for
for use
are indicated on diagrams.
with
roundtable
Furniture Sizes: foot
round {A): diam.
Portable Tables, 2'-7" to 5'- 10"
Portable Tables, rectangular
4 (
C
)
for
2'-6" to 4'-0" by 3'-6" to 8'-0"; or 2'-0" to 4'-0" square
Dining Chairs, I
'-6" to 2'-0"
Serving Table 2'-6" to
3'-6"
portable:
by
'-6" to
I
I'-
10"
(B):
by
to
l'-9"
Sideboard or Buffet (B): 4'-0" to b'-b" by l'-5" to
2'- 1"
l'-2"
China Cabinet (B): '-2" to 2'-8" to 3'-8" by I
I
'-9"
k-Approx.e'-O"
With
4
leaf extension
(Crowded Seating)
-10 1
21
Residential
DINING AREAS
Furniture Clearances
To assure adequate space
for convenient use of
the dining area, not less than the following clear-
ances from the edge of the dining table should be observed.
32 38 42 24 48
in for
chairs plus access thereto
in for
chairs plus access
in for
serving from behind chair
in for
passage only
in
and passage
from table to base cabinet
(in
dining-
kitchen)
Figures 11, 12, and 13 illustrate proper clearances. Various arrangements appear on the next page.
Fig. 1
1
Dining room for 6-person, 3-bedroom living unit.*
To
ki
,x tchen
Fig.
1
3
for dining areas, (a) one end of table against from one end and one side of table. Source: "Housing for the Elderly
Minimum clearances
wall; (b) serving
Development Process," Michigan State Housing Development Authority, 1974,
* From "Manual of Acceptable Practices," Vol. 4, U partment of Housing and Urban Development, 1973.
22
S.
De-
Residential
DINING AREAS
2.
1.
3.
.
Minimum
requires
2-ft
buffet
one side only; 3' more needed for extension table.
Typical dining-room suite, as used West Coast, requires
space
on
in
length
is
furniture space on
East and on
two sides of room.
5.
Long narrow area with some waste results when wall pieces are at ends, and end entrance is needed. space
6.
.
IT - l"
*
II’-
4
Solid lines indicate minimum room with corner cupboards, no wall furni-
Dotted lines indicate space for 3' breakfast table. ture.
added
The same set of clearances apthe seldom used round table as to the more popular oblong table.
7
plies to
7"-.
Table-and-passage unit 8. ner permits use of
in
one cor-
minimum space
for
may be
re-
multiple activities; piano
placed by desk, love seat, etc.
Arrangement of
typical suite
Spaces smaller than the usual min9. imum can be utilized if built-in seats are
included;
seating
and
table-
service comfort are sacrificed.
in
larger-than-minimum space, when a screen is used at serving door.
Dining rooms with fireplaces have be larger than minimum for the comfort of those seated at table. to
23
Residential
DINING AREAS
r— 1
WALKING
—— EDGING
past seated person
44”
i
*
"
past seated person
32
Jo"
ARMLESS CHAIR 20"x 21"-
«
'
l
"
ARISING AND DEPARTING PROJECTION
—p CHAIR
36 t
1
L (seated person)
MAXIMUM FOOT EXTENSION 32"
h
*
Rising from table, armless chair (armchair 2" Fig.
Armless chair
more)
in place at table
14
WALKING EDGING
past seated person
past seated person
ARISING AND DEPARTING CHAIR PROJECTION
ARMCHAIR 22"x 23”
(seated person)
MAXIMUM FOOT EXTENSION Foot extension, knees crossed, not at table Fig.
Armchair
15
EDGING past seated person
Using tables and chairs 24
in free area
in place at table
Residential
DINING AREAS
Tablet and Chaira Dining areas for eight persons with free-standing 72 by 40 in, one armchair, and seven arm-
table
on the basis of edging space on sides where there is not serving space, so that all persons can leave their seats without less chairs (calculated
disturbing others).
Serving space on two sides and one end
Serving space Fig.
16
Fig.
all
around table
17
25
Residential
DINING AREAS
Chair only
Human passage only
Passage for Pray service
A B A B A B
DINING 2'-0“i
Allow
4"
©§
4'-10" 3'-
2, Z/2,
2"
BUFFET
26
18
© Varies
T-T
square
ROOM
person
W.
.
CHAIRS
H 7
.
h
4-1070 6'-6" v-y ro 2-r
L D
4'-0"
MWsllMUM KNEE
3’-6"ro
CLEARANCE
W 2'-6" ro L
8'-0"
DINING TA-B LES
Dining room furniture. Source: "Manual
2'-q"ro3'-2"
4.-070 5-0“ l-8"orl'-q"
—
3 -4"
X
4 -0"
of Acceptable Practices," Vol. 4,
U
S,
Table for eight Dept, of Housing and Urban Development, 1973.
=
-
10“
ro3'-3"
ro
5'-IO"
DINING
SIDEBOARD
2-q-ro 3-3"
Table for eight
Fig.
3.4
Feet
CLEARANCES for DINING TABLES
h L D
2 lineal feer per
3-4" 1-8“
ROOM TABLES
3 -4" X 6 -0" or 4 0"
X 4
-0"
W ro
D
V-6" 2-0"
V-6"
ro r-io"
Residential
COMBINED LIVING-DINING SPACES
COMBINED SPACES Often several compatible living functions can be combined advantageously in a single room. Some of the benefits of such arrangements are that less space is used but it is used more intensively, its functions can be changed making it more flexible and serviceable space, it is adaptable to varied furniture arrangements, while visually it can be made more interesting and seem more gener-
ous than
if
the
same functions were dispersed
into separate rooms.
For adjacent spaces to be considered a combined room, the clear opening between them should permit common use of the spaces. This
usually necessitates an opening of at least 8 ft. Figures 1 and 2 show combined living-dining
rooms.
27
Residential
COMBINED DINING AREA-KITCHEN A combination dining area-kitchen is preferred by some occupants of small houses and apartments. This arrangement minimizes housekeeping chores and provides space which can be used as the family's day-to-day meeting place.
21" sink counter combined with 21" range counter
Combined dining area-kitchen, 2-bedroom living
Fig. 2
unit. Source: "Manual
of
Acceptable Practices," Vol .4, U S
Dept, of Housing and Urban Development, 1973.
One
of the primary functions of the kitchen
has been to provide a place for informal or family eating. This ing
in
is
different than guest or formal din-
a separate dining room or area. The infor-
mal dining generally consists of breakfast, lunch.
snacks, or just serving coffee to a neighbor. This eating area should be clearly defined as a sepa-
various possible arrangements. Another arrangement is the kitchen-family room.
rate functional area.
A frequent and desirable arrangement is the combined kitchen-dining area. Figure 4 shows the
’
22
Fig.
4
Minimum clearances
for dining area in kitchen. Source: "Housing
Development Process," Michigan State Housing Development
28
OUtSttig.
Authority, 1974.
for the Elderly
Residential
BEDROOMS SPACE FUNCTION
FURNITURE REQUIREMENTS
Primary and secondary activities that usually take place in bedrooms are listed below:
There are minimum requirements for furniture and space if occupants are to be able to carry out their normal bedroom activities. These are listed below, together with the horizontal dimensions of
Primary
Secondary
Activities
Activities Reading
the
Writing Studying
fied:
Sleeping Dressing/undressing Storing clothes Personal care
Working Watching
1)
television
furniture.
basic types of
bedrooms have been
2)
Caring for infants
identi-
the single occupancy bedroom, which will
accommodate one
Listening to music Children's play Knitting,
recommended
Two
single bed;
the double occupancy bedroom, which will accommodate one double bed or two single beds.
mending and
sewing Ironing
Telephoning Drawing and painting Sitting and entertaining
Doing exercise Resting and convalescing Hobbies and crafts Keeping pets Storing bulky items and seasonal clothes
TWIN SIZE 78 X 80 78 X 84
TWIN SIZE 39 X 84
60 X 80 60 X 84
54 54
BUNK BED
CONVERTIBLE SOFA
CHAISE LOUNGE
32 X 75
32 X 74 32 X 82
32 X 60
CHEST
DRESSER 21 X 48
X
X
80 84
39 X 75
39
X
80
CRIB
24 X 60 32 X 60 I
I
DRESSING TABLE 20 X 42
18 X 36 18 X 48
21 X
60
29
r
r
Residential
BEDROOMS BEDS
CHESTS
CHEST 4'
Single bed 3 -0" X 6 -10"
Twin bed 3 -3" X 6 -10"
-
0"
0“
x 2'-
Double bed 4 -6"
X
6 -10"
Three-quarter 4 -0 X 6 -10"
*
TABLES -
SMALL CHEST
;
3'-
J
KIDNEY 3'-
0"
x
l'-
SMALL 6"
4'-
2'-
0"x
0"
V- 2" 6" l'-
SMALL OCCASIONAL 2'-6''x 2'-
6'' l'-
MEDIUM NIGHT
NIGHT
LARGE DRESSING
0"x
x
l'-6"x l'-6"
6"
CHAIRS
Cha r '-6" x
Dresser
i
1
I
'-6"
BENCH
SIDE r-6"xl'-6"
Easy cha -6" x 3'-0"
DRESS'G
1
'-6" X 3'-6"
1
'-6" x
or
TABLE
,
2 -0"xl'-6”
i
2
r-6"xl'-6''
'
V-V ill
[
L_
H
j
r .
h-
End table '-6" x 2' -6"
jLJ
L- -
DRESSER
I
TABLE
T D ±
—
r
DRAWERS f
D i
'-8" x wi th chai
Desk
I
1
3
-6"
H L
3-5" To 4-8" 2-8” ro 3-4"
d
r-6 ro r-io"
M
D
no
U
h
J
I
J
L
v-4"ror-7" 4-0" to 5-6"
D
2-0"
H
2'-2" To
L D
3-0"ro 4-2"
2-6" '
r-3" ro
r- 10
H
30
w
Television
-
W
V-6"
to 3-1"
3-0' To 4-0"
r-6'To r-10"
BOUDOIR CHAIR
r-q"ro
Typical average furniture sizes.
-
r- 2 "ro
H
2-8" to
W
2-6" ro
i
3-4" 1
2-0"
D
r-crro 2'-0"
D 1
h
\
t
Fig.
2-8
2’-6"
A 1
H L D
ro 2-4"
NIGHT TABLE
Crib 2 -6" x
i
"i
2 - 10
D
2'-
"
8" ro
3-2"
Residential
BEDROOMS
mm
2 100
I*
7
-
0
'
I
500
I
T
mm
7
I
18
-
CLEARANCES Primary Activities
I
S
S
Clearances should be provided in front of and around furniture in bedrooms so that primary activities can take place efficiently and in comfort.
«?
In
some
cases, greater clearances are required to
satisfy the needs of elderly people, wheelchair
Bedside table
users and invalids.
Single bed
Single dresser
Double dresser
Scale 1:50
Fig.
3
Space
for dressing
Scale 1:50
Typical
Fig. 2
bedroom
furniture
Desk and chair
1:50
Scale
Fig.
4
Access between bed and dresser and between bed and desk
Fig.
5
Access between bed and closet and between bed and wall
31
Residential
BEDROOMS
.
1
000
mm
3 4
1 T
"
1
300
mm
4 -4
1
1
000
"
mm
3 4 -
1
1
-
450
mm 1
-
6
-
1-6"
I
mm
300
3
Fig. 8 Single occupancy bedroom in combination with another space. Net area: 5 m ! Adults are most likely to be found in this type of bedroom .
Scale
Fig.
9
Single
occupants of
occupancy bedroom. Net area: 8.5 m 2 The most likely bedroom type are: the elderly, adults, teenagers, and the
pre-adolescent child
32
.
this
(i.e.,
the school age child, 9 to 12 years old)
1:50
Residential
BEDROOMS I
700
mm
2 4' I
I
T
1
“mm
300
I
000
1
mm
3 4'
I
I
450
I
T”“i
mm
100
2
I mm
200
1
Double occupancy bedroom. Net area: 11.5 m 2 1 24 most likely occupants of this type of bedroom, which is often referred to as the master bedroom Fig.
10
{
SF). Adults are the
"
mm
10 -
450
14
4
Double occupancy bedroom. Net area: 14.7 m 2 1 60 The most likely occupants of this type of bedroom are adults, school age children of the same sex, children of different sexes who are less than nine-years old, and Fig.
1 1
(
SF).
preschoolers
33
Residential
BEDROOMS
BEDROOM Diagrams indicate should be provided
minimum
clearances
that
bedroom
furni-
for use of the
ture shown, dimensions for which are listed below. Many types and sizes of furniture are available;
common and can
but those listed are most
serve
as a basis for bedroom design. At least 2 in should be allowed as clearance between walls and furni-
between
ture; 3 in
furniture units.
A
Twin
i
3'-0" to 3'-3" wide; 6'-10" long. 3'-3" wide; 6 -10" long.
(F),
Three-quarter 6'-10" long
(E),
(B),
4 -0” wide; 6 -10” long " 'to 4 -6” wide; large, 4 2
Double-deck bed
Double, 4 -6" wide, 6 -10" long. 3" Roll-away beds, (A): 2 -0" by 5 -0" on edge, clearance on all sides
Bed Tables
(G):
l'-2" to 2'-0" by
1-0"
to 2'-0"
Bedroom Chairs
(H): 2'-6" Small, l'-8" by l'-8"; larger, by 2'-8" to 3'-2"
to
2'-
10"
Dressers (3-drawer) (D): 3 -0" to 4 -0" by 1-6" to 1-10"
Chest of Drawers (4-drawer) (D): 2'-8" to 3'-4" by l'-6" to l'-lO"
Chaise Longue: 2'-0" to 2'-4" by 4'-0" to 5'-6"
Bed;
2'-9" to 3'-3" by 6'-2" to 6 -8"
Dressing Table: l'-3" to l'-lO" by 3'-0"
Minimum
34
varies
(C),
Three-quarter
Day
_!L
y
Beds; Single
6’
to 4'-2"
clearances for twin-bed group
6"
k
Residential
BEDROOMS STUDIO COUCHES
Making studio couch
Opening and edging-out space (type tested needed to be out from wall to be opened; some do not)
moved
9-1
-
'
22
1
STUDIO COUCH
CLOSED
o
- 22
75" x 34'
'
^OPENING AND MAKING SPACE i
T j
•o
48'
CLEANING SPACE
16" I
OPENING AND EDGING OUT SPACE
STUDIO COUCH
OPEN
75" x 60"
i
1
22 f
Fig.
12
"
BEDMAKING SPACE 35
;
Residential
BEDROOMS
USE
SPACE
1
^
48
"
Cleaning under bed
(In the drawings, ‘‘limited space” allows space
open
closet door and remove garment space” allows space to open closet door, remove garment, and put it on) to
“liberal
Fig.
36
13
Residential
BEDROOMS 9'-2'
BED-DAVENPORT
M6"-
78" x 36" CLOSED 78" x 36" 78" x 91 OPEN
-16
tn CLEANING I
T
SPACE
I
I
76
Q«„
type
L/>
be located as near the center
closet should
of
each
at 4J
vacuum cleaner
of
another, the cleaning
to
0^
or canister;
for
Since
11.
large
cleaner
in
vacuum
of
upright,
ommended in
depend
will
type
the
V < D o 0 o2
mensions of the storage space needed for cleaning
oo v/>
< * oi
coat
for
equipment: The
cleaning
lor
CL CL
10 and 14.
Figs.
in
the
damp when hung
garments which are often in
around
circulation
air
liberal
lists
of articles of bed-
Minimum Property Standards for One and Two Living Units, Federal
the floor;
ding
that
require
storage,
and the
mini-
dimensions of the space required, are
shown
Table
in
1
may
replace
twice
this
cially
if
4so"
.
1
such
D.C., revised July, 1959.
Fig. 12.
r GOOD
POOR.
of
the
shelves.
amount
a
is
recommended, espe-
combined
A suggested linen
closet
is
layout for
shown
in
r
*
Z'-b"
Dl
.
r
,
AM-
|
1
A
An
shelves fold into the space in front of the hat and storage shelves.
with a high pole for long dresses. Two drawers below the shorter hanging garments. Depth of closet permits a door type shoe rack and a hat rack. Wide hats can go on upper shelf.
small closet with shoe racks at the side under short hanging garments. Additional shoe pockets might be placed on the door under the hanging shelves. These handy
alternate
minimum
,L
arrangment
closet
STORAGE S
WIDE HAT Z HATS PRS
fc
D-l
I
WO oh ^x §5
D-l
0-2
D-Z
Xz
D-b D-l
D-l
-o
SECTION
ELEVATION '
icr
.
r-8"
r
b
HINGED MIRRORS
oO
-
A l'~b"
'-
-
Z b
-
ENCLOSE SHELVES
CJ
"
r
?-o"
I
T-o'
2 -2
"
r
1
J
PLAN
o
Alternate to closet above. It provides a high pole for hanging evening dresses and a lower pole for other dresses and suits. A large hat shelf is provided above the low pole as well as a hat rack and shoe pockets on the door. Fig.
7.
Bedroom
closets for
|
PLAN A
four-foot closet combining hanging and shelf space with drawers for stockings, underthings, and what-not. Shoes are easily
seen and chosen from the almost eye-level Hat storage
cleat rack above the drawers. on the shelves.
women
91
Residential
CLOSETS
f
'
r,
—
z '°“
2
“
'
( I'-O')
2‘ . (
r~*“.
2 - 0*)
PLAN
HALL CLOSET FOR
SMALL CHILDREN
2"
Residential
CLOSETS
Miscellaneous storage large variety of other articles that are
Included
category are books, maga-
phonograph
zines,
and
screens
tools.
located
adequate
equipment,
not
is
then portable units (furniture)
be used
projectors,
provided,
have
will
for this purpose.
Book storage
books (85 per cent) can shelves
8
deep
in.
fit
the
in
(front
comfortably on to
need
10-in.
and
cent)
require
few
per
(5
spacing
Vertical
shelves.
varies from
16
8 to
in.,
some
back);
books (10 per cent) a
shelves,
between
12-in.
shelves
with the greatest
the 10 to 12-in. range. Horizontally,
in
books average 7 to 8 volumes per linear foot of shelf.
Phonograph records (12 and a depth
in.
(14
cardboard
in
in.
may be widely
vary
average also
be
Table
is
large as 36
as
thick
in.
when
the
30 by 16 by 3
provided
in.,
are
toys
in.
cards,
for
a separate closet for a suggested
justified;
Fig.
in
this
purpose may
design
shown
is
entrance
which
and
Tools
items
should,
the workshop,
in
which
hazard, are best stored out-
fire
General storage items,
from outdoors)
is
75 cu
plus
ft
outdoor
per bedroom, of which
ft
should
cent
be
more
requirement;
Again,
indoors.
should be emphasized that
mum
storage
requirements are 200
25 per cent and not more than 50
at least
per
and
general
FHA minimum
space. cu
such cases, the archi-
in
should take particular care to provide
this
it
a mini-
is
recommended.
is
The standard elements of closet storage are
drawers,
shelves,
special
be stored
efficiently
and
hooks,
poles,
Practically
fixtures.
any object can
by one or another of
is
of the fixtures
nature of the materials to be stored.
(i.e.,
directly accessible
Shelves:
sprays,
sleds,
rakes,
equipment; ladders,
hammocks, croquet tricycles,
scooters,
amount and
bulky,
boxes,
as
required for lawnmowers,
and
depend on
for
trunks,
required
such
pensive effort
to
many
storage
snow
cially those of
and
sets;
for
bi-
and perambula-
articles, etc.
types
odd
a
and
of
inex-
minimum things,
to
of
the
espe-
or bulky shape, folded
and, of course, books, magazines,
However,
if
open, they are exposed to
dust. Also small objects
hind one another
A
tors (see Fig. 14).
of
simple
and are adaptable
use,
other
the
require
install,
for
screens,
are
Shelves
to
and
storm windows; for outdoor furniture, bar-
cycles,
tect
furniture.
Outdoor storage
becues,
these spaces, and,
these means. The choice and arrangement
side the house.
and extra
and
garage. Modern houses may have none of
of
every house must have. Paints, because of
odor and
the tradiattic,
Basic elements
associated
be stored
course,
in
house by the basement,
tional
most
is
used by the family.
and
cards.
bags,
golf
Such a closet should be located
13.
near the outside
shovels
score
especially
and camping equipment, may present
and are
Space should
Toy storage
used.
a serious storage problem. For some fami-
be
two types of storage (general
last
adequate
Sports equipment,
tools
fair
pro-
bedrooms and wherever
regularly
wheelbarrows,
a
be
should
to other use.
skis,
These
(see
etc.
be designed for future conversion
should
garden
but
storage
children's
in
square
in.
folded. Folded chairs
dimension,
in
for long-
folders).
Card tables are usually 30
2 to 3
albums
in
in.)
a clear height of 14
of 15
playing records
but
game
seldom-used
require shelves with in.
vided
lies,
required
usually
is
room, study, and each bedroom. Most
living
use
to
chess,
and outdoor) were provided
Toy and
and conveniently
storage
built-in
slide
sports
toys,
film, If
and
records, card tables
games, movie and
chairs,
and
in this
chips,
Fig. 13).
regular use must be stored somewhere.
in
poker
books,
rule
A
12-in. shelf
is
if
become hidden be-
the shelves are deep.
usually
adequate
for most
Storage requirements for bedroom linens and bedding,
1.
including allowance for handling Median number
Minimum dimensions
,
in.
Article
Limited
Liberal
Depth
Width
Height*
Sheets, double bed
Everyday use
—
6
12
14
12
4
12
14
9
Everyday use
5
5
12
8
8
Guest
3
3
12
8
6
4t
4t 23
19
26
23
38
14
9
Guest
6
use
Pillow cases (pairs)
use comforters,
Blankets, Pile of
quilts
4
2 piles of 2
Bedspreads, double bed Cotton damask
2
2
16
15
Chenille
1
1
18
16
8
3
18
26
17
Pillows
*
For storage on
deduct
1 to
fixed shelves.
For storage on
sliding shelves or in drawers,
2 in.
t Number of warm bed coverings owned is normally larger than can be stored in less accessible location than linen closet.
W
this,
but balance
oolrich, Mary M. White and Margaret A. Richards, Storage Space Source: Avis Requirements for Household Textiles, U.S.D.A. Agricultural Research Bulletin 62-2, Washington, 1955.
Upright type Canister type Horizontal type
W = 28 W = 35 W = 41
in. in.
in.
95
i
Residential
CLOSETS
things.
places;
depth
dimensions
larger
of
Articles
greater
have
should
are frequently
for instance,
linens,
folded for a 16-in.
in
popular-
because they accommo-
closet design
date numerous articles with a minimum of
maximum
space and a provide
practically
present
a
dust-free
and depths make
A
ness.
even
when
possible classified "filing"
of different items, in
and
storage
Drawers of different widths
carelessly used.
saving
They
of convenience.
appearance
neat
thus
and an
time
cabinet
providing a great incentive to orderli-
made up
of a
battery of
standard drawers, selected for the storage of the
A
recent
known possessions
outcome
logical
of
drawers
tic
tached. All that is
variety
a
in
stock
of
sizes.
be
can
materials
various
of
at-
required of the builder
is
the construction of the supporting en-
——
closure.
ii
Hanging pole length can be
Poles:
mated roughly at 3 (4 in. for
suits
hanger
floor
of
average 64
I-?-
in.,
be adjusted to the individual.
but should
should be 3
in.
should
and
pole
Hardwood have
length. Consult
be made from a comprehensive
list,
facturers for special-purpose
ft
in
1
intermediate
ports
over 4
shelf
poles
can
if
per
in.
Height
clothing.
should
Clearance between
diameter
esti-
per hanger for men's
women's
for
above
pole
in.
heavy coats) and 2
user,
of the
situation
this
has been the development of molded plas-
Fronts
shelf.
Drawers: Drawers are growing ity in
or
special
their
above in.
in
SECTION
sup-
manu-
8 SHEETS
t.
easily
made
with allowance
for the accumulation
of additional items.
best
skillful
under
all
brackets,
variety
of
rods,
is
craftsmanship and the
shoe and hat racks and miscellaneous racks
must
operate
freely
seasonal and climatic conditions.
are
on
the
market
and
*
8" high)
3
KEG. TURKISH TOWELS
4
REG PILLOW CASES
available.
Special features: Such special features as
cabinetwork
is
18"
(lo"
2
etc.
hooks
re-
They
materials.
poles,
A
Hooks:
Drawer construction quiring both
extension
hanging
(lo", 16", 8"
(9'/2", 14", 4"
high) high)
5
REG HAND TOWELS (7" 14" 4" high) REG WASH CLOTHS (2 PI LE S) (6'x 6 3" h ) REG BATH MATS (22" lo“ 4" high) SMALL HAND TOWELS (6" , 12" , 2" h igh)
6 7
,
'«
8
,
9
greatly increase
,
,
10
convenience
in
storage.
BLANKET COVERS SHOWER CURTAINS PILLOWS SUMMER BLANKETS MATTRESS COVERS WINTER BLANKETS
11
12 13
14 15
16
(18 x lo" , 4" high) (18", 9". 3" high)
(26 x (2o\ 04".
17"
«
9” high)
16". 8" high) 18". 6" high)
(34"« 18". 9" high)
1
2-4"
reserve pace AND TOILET TISSUES
,
(N
BED
:
$
BATH LINEN
,6" , «
:
—
0 |
V
9.
PLAN
;
1
BATHROOM
COD
Community
combined
designing an apartment building may be graphically depicted in a general way as in Table 1. This article will be developed in the same sequence as Table 1. It must be borne in mind that, as with any design development, the evolution of an apartment building design is not a sequential process but a process of continuing interaction, feedback, and
1
1
"
Comparative Program Elements -Market Range
Living
of
1
'
Orientation
degree of vertical servicing).
The process
STRUCTURAL! SYSTEMS
1
'
Building
TABLE 2
>
V BUILDING PLANNING 1
1
BUILDING DESIGN
V
\
)/
|
C
> A
c
v
Support In
Few
apart-
ment
extras
limited to security
and development.
facilities
Intercom,
Doorman and telephone,
door signal,
large balconies,
balconies,
central air conditioning,
unit air conditioners
service entrance,
servants' quarters
PROGRAM
Laundry
In
Market Analysis
building.
.
.
.
facilities,
minimum lobby
A market analysis and program formulation may precede the retention of an architect;
Laundry room,
Attended parking,
commercial space,
convenience shopping,
community room,
service elevators,
central storage
however, to an increasing degree clients solicit the aid of an architect in these areas. An investigation of the potential market should consider
valet service,
meeting rooms, health club,
market conditions and trends with
existing
sheltered swimming
regard to 1.
Type
.
doorman, closed-circuit TV security system,
of
occupancy
facilities
Rental Open parking,
Secure open or sheltered
drying yard
parking,
recreation areas,
outdoor play and
country club
3.
sitting area,
amenities,
4.
swimming pool
swimming pool
2.
.
Cooperative
c.
Condominium
Price (rent, maintenance, etc.)
Amenities Apartment size (area and number of rooms)
Site
Gardens,
107
Residential
APARTMENT BUILDINGS
5.
Building types
6.
Vacancy
7.
Public facilities (transportation, schools,
AND 2 STORY ROW OR CLUSTER HOUSING 4 AND 5 STORY WALK-UP GARDEN 1
rates
APARTMENT DEVELOPMENT
shopping, recreation) Program items to be resolved include is
Price range. What segment of the market the project to be aimed at?
Table 2 as support and closely interrelated with price
Amenities. Identified facilities
in
range.
How many
CITY THEORETICAL
Fig.
1
Comparative densities.
Fig.
2
Zoning map example.
Funding In
many cases
a
market analysis
will
conclude
conventional private financing is not economically feasible and that some type of public or semipublic assistance is required if a project is to proceed. There are a number of sources of such assistance at both federal and state levels. The FHA (Federal Housing Administration) and PHA (Public Housing Administration) are wellknown examples of such agencies. As a rule, an agency which provides assistance also requires conformance to agency standards, and frequently such an agency will require approval of or participation in program develthat
opment. While
the
client,
funding sources
local
authorities,
and
usually institute basic program direction, it nevertheless remains the responsibility of the architect to catalyze these decisions and formulate the finished program. will
Density
Figure
1
compares
relative densities of various
urban and suburban situations. It is helpful to “have a feel" for the physical reality of density figures as an aid in visualizing possible solutions and to anticipate implications of decisions which formulation.
are
made during program
ZONING AND CODES General
Zoning and building codes are of basic importance to any project; and of all types of projects, those which involve housing tend to be regulated to a greater degree by zoning ordinances and codes. Appropriate local and regional authorities should be contacted in order to determine the type and extent of limitations or controls which may be imposed on a project and, further, to gauge the discretionary powers and flexibility of the governing authorities. To an increasing degree, the philosophy of zoning is changing from one of restrictive limits and controls to an approach which attempts to lead and influence community growth. Many communities and regional authorities have guiding master plans which deal with long-range development and evaluation. The conceptual and planning freedom of the architect is linked with these considerations. Failure to pursue a thorough
investigation
of these controls can result in serious prob-
lems
later
on
in
project development.
Controls
Zoning
is
concerned principally with questions and location.
of use, bulk, density,
Use, bulk, and density are usually controlled
108
°~ 4 ° DU/ACRE
150-175 DU/ACRE
mWAWmWMWTOM200 DU/ACRE
Distribution. Percentage of each type of unit.
Building type or types.
wYXKVkN
70-110 DU/ACRE
DEVELOPMENT
NEW YORK
units?
r
„ COMBINED HI- AND LOW-RISE ESTATEtTTXWXKW/sSI HOUSING WITH ISOLATED MED-RISE TYPICAL URBAN DENSITY FOR COMBINED HI- AND LOW-RISE DEVELOPMENT TYPICAL HIGH URBAN DENSITY HI-RISE
Scope.
_1°~ 20 DU/ACRE
425 DU/ACRE
MAX
Residential
APARTMENT BUILDINGS
on the basis of districts which are generally shown on maps and explained in an accompanying text (Fig. 2). Uses may be designated as, for example, residential, commercial, manufacturing, and, in some cases, park or recreational. Mixed uses are frequently allowed, and for large housing projects it is considered advantageous to incorporate retail shopping, entertainment, and dining facilities into a program. to
Location of buildings is controlled in order prevent oppressive proximity of building
masses. Formulas or diagrams which relate to variables such as building height and density are applied to locate buildings with respect to property lines and/or one another. (See Figs. 3
and
4.)
Density regulations limit the number of people per site-area unit. The basis for density determination will vary from regulation to regulation. Density may range from a low of ten or fewer people per acre in low-density districts to a high of up to 1,500 or more per acre in the highest-density districts.
ADDITIONAL
SETBACK MAY ALLOW GREATER HEIGHT AND/OR AREA
SITE CONSIDERATIONS
Site Elements
Site Characteristics
Figure
Physical characteristics of a site may impose limitations on a building program; therefore an early analysis of site data and conditions
should be undertaken by the architect in order to ascertain and evaluate such limitations. Borings and samples taken at the site will provide information regarding location and extent of rock, bearing capacity of the subsurface strata at various levels, and the level
water table. survey indicating boundaries, contours, or spot elevations is necessary and, in the case of difficult sites, such a survey may indiof a
A
cate terrain and other conditions which will strongly influence design decisions. Limitations imposed by difficult terrain — in addition
imposed by local laws or ordinances — may limit such items as location of driveways and parking entrances. to those
among
diagrams possible relationships layout elements which normally apartment development. As suggested
5
site
occur in by the diagram,
desirable to limit cross elements such as vehicular access and pedestrian access and to maintain proximity or easy access among activity elements such as the dwelling unit, recreation, and parking. The relationships may be horizontally or vertically arranged, depending on density or tightness of a site. Emphasis on the importance of certain relationships may vary with the program; however, the basic elements and relationships remain. Figure 6 shows examples of different arrangements of the site eletraffic
among
it
is
circulation
ments — arrangements which
program
Building Access
Figure 7 diagrams various
Utilities
reflect
density relative to site area.
means
of building
Availability,
and internal circulation, each with different advantages and degrees of suitabili-
utilities
ty to specific
access adequacy, and location of site enter into basic decision making. A
design solutions.
REQUIRED FRONT YARDS OR SETBACKS
SIDE
BETWEEN BUILDINGS FREQUENTLY CONTROLLED
SPACING
BY FORMULA
Fig.
4
Building spacing and location diagram.
Bulk ratio,
is
frequently controlled by floor-area limits total buildable floor area
which
as a multiple of the site area. In contemporary zoning regulations, floor-area ratio for apartment buildings will range from a low of 1 or less to a high in the range of 1 4 to 18 in dense metropolitan areas. Building codes are less regional and vary less than zoning regulations. Many localities adopt national or state building codes as their standard. Such codes are concerned with health and safety requirements such as light and air, access, egress, construction standards, minimum dimensional standards, fire detection and protection, and fire equipment access. 1
Fig. 5
Site element diagram.
may be located so as to minimize expensive service runs. Inadequacy building or buildings
or unavailability of certain services
may
require
on-site generation or disposal facilities.
Standards
Large Scale
Similar to zoning and codes and equally important in many cases are governmental agency standards, which apply when public or semipublic funding sources are involved or mortgage standards if private funding is involved. The need for a thorough initial investigation
Large-scale residential developments involve special problems and opportunities. Closing or rerouting of streets wholly within a project is frequently undertaken and can free up area, eliminate restrictions of a street grid pattern, and generally change the scale and feeling of a project. When through streets within a project are closed or otherwise restricted, compensatory widening and improvement of peripheral roads is usually in order not only to offset the effect of the closings but also to accommodate the increased traffic flow generated by the project itself. Similarly, shutting down a utility line and adding to demand generally requires
and continuing review for conformance with controls imposed by zoning, codes and agencies cannot be overemphasized.
Note Local fire departments and fire insurance groups may exert more restrictive controls than the above-mentioned codes 1
compensatory improvement.
Building Orientation
Building orientation may be influenced by a number of factors such as site, view (desirable or undesirable), sun, and prevailing winds. Closely interrelated to building orientation is the question of internal circulation and floor layout of the building. Figure 8 indicates how different layouts lend themselves to solutions of site
problems.
BUILDING CONFIGURATION Floor
Shape and Size
The shape and
size of an apartment building can have significant influence on the cost and consequently the feasibility of a project. The shape of the repetitive typical floors influences the cost of constructing and enclosing the floors. For purposes of economy and efficiency, building shape should be such that expensive exterior walls are minimized in
109
Residential
APARTMENT BUILDINGS
•X-X-X-X-X--X-X-
PARKING
>
APARTMENT ACCESS
> *
BUILDING ACCESS
ACTIVITY RECREATION
^22 Fig.
6
Site element relationships.
)
4
X
XI
X
M M
X XI
M
XI~~
XT~ >4
THRU FLAT EXTERIOR CORRIDOR
Fig. 8
no
Orientation influences.
>4 THRU DUPLEX EXTERIOR CORRIDOR
XI
x x X V V
^ THRU FLAT SKIP
STOP
1X1
^
DOUBLE-LOADED
INTERIOR CORRIDOR
INTERIOR CORRIDOR
THRU DUPLEX
INTERIOR CORRIDOR SPLIT AND FLAT COMBINATION
Residential
APARTMENT BUILDINGS
1
i
i~'
I
'-'
|
1
1
|
I
I
Horizon House, Fort Lee, N.J. (1963)
Court Elevation and Section hester South East Loop (1972)
TYPICAL FLOOR PLAN
Luna Park,
New
York City Housing Authority (1957)
Chatham Green, New York
Frawley Plaza, Fig.
9
New
Examples
City
(1962)
York State Urban Development Corporation (1972) of housing plans. (Gruzen
&
Partners.)
111
—
.
—
Residential
APARTMENT BUILDINGS
ratio to area enclosed and that breaks and direction changes in the perimeter are mini-
mized. (See Fig.
STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS
9.)
Steel
Although much less common than cast-inplace concrete, steel frame structures are also employed in the construction of apart-
Concrete
Area of a typical floor may affect costs. For example, pouring of a typical tier in a castin-place concrete building is a continuous process and requires a full concrete crew throughout. The area of a typical floor or part thereof should be such as to efficiently utilize the day's productivity of a concrete crew. Similar analysis and considerations should be applied to other building techniques or systems.
The most common structural system presently employed for medium- to high-rise apartment
£—
Building Height of a building may be affected by building height. A building may be of such height that it exceeds prevailing capacities
The cost
in terms of available construction equipment and contractor experience. In addition to considerations of what is possible, there are considerations of what is practical and efficient from a cost standpoint. Of the various mechanical systems which serve an apartment building, each has various increments and “stepup” points. For example, there is a situation such that the addition of a single extra floor
could require a substantial increase in elevator service either through an additional elevator or an expensive increase in elevator speed.
should be solicited.
of
simplicity of erection for use in extremely
strength
and
relative
may recommend
tall
steel
structures or for use
locales where there is limited experience the use of concrete. Steel structural frames tend to be laid out in a regular grid pattern, and this in turn reguin in
-o-
6-
—
-6— -cT
— — — '-t£
ir
-b-
Typical concrete construction
(a)
I-1
D
3
1
1
i 1
1
Similar situations exist for heating, cooling, plumbing, and ventilating systems, and opinions of the various consultants in these areas
ment buildings. The advantages
construction is flat-plate cast-in-place reinforced concrete with randomly placed columns. This structural approach has certain advantages which make it particularly adaptable to apartment construction. (See Fig. 11.) 1 The horizontal services normally required in apartment construction may be imbedded
i
[
i
i
i
1
1
i
1
i
l
i
3
T-
"T
1
C
i
1
1
1
1
i
i
1
1
i
i
1
1
i
•
e
i
[ 1 i
I l
Length and Width
i
1
1
1
Additional costs resulting from an increase of building length or width are generally proportionate to increase in area, However, as with other such items, there are step-up points at which there are disproportionately large increases in cost for slight dimensional increases.
Wind Bracing
Wind bracing becomes a structural design consideration in buildings beyond the 10- to 12story range, and one must then consider measures which may be introduced to resist the overturning tendency due to wind loads. Wind bracing may be achieved by introduction of various structural measures. The extent and, therefore, the expense of these measures may be reduced if the building shape itself contributes to wind bracing. As the diagrams (Fig.
10)
indicate,
certain
building
shapes
obviously have a greater inherent resistance to overturning.
!
i
1
i
i
3
I
[
(b) Typical steel construction Fig.
11
Steel and concrete structural systems.
within the concrete slab, thereby eliminating the need for a hung ceiling and allowing the flat underside of the slab to serve as the finished ceiling of the space below. This reduces floor-to-f loor and overall building height and eliminates the separate construction of a hung ceiling.
The possibility of placing columns randomly adapts well to the inherently irregular module generated by a typical apartment floor 2.
layout.
Columns may thus be “buried"
in
con-
venient locations within an efficient layout. 3. As a rule, openings for vertical services may be located at will in this type of structure; however, large openings near columns should be handled with care so as to assure continuity of vertical and horizontal reinforcing.
twt
larizes the
apartment layout. One should bear
in
mind that in this type of structure mechanical and structural lines may not coincide. Limitations
As a rule of thumb, spacing between concrete columns may economically be in the range of 12- to 1 8-ft centers and spacing for steel columns may range from 6 to 24 ft. 1
Figure 12 may serve as a guide for sizing of concrete columns in preliminary layouts. Three common bay sizes or center-to-center distances have been shown for various building heights. Sizes are for internal columns, expressed in square inches. Peripheral and corner columns will be smaller. The smallest dimension per side considered acceptable for concrete columns is 10 in., and 4 ft is the limit which normal concrete framework can easily accommodate. Columns with larger dimensions become, in effect, walls and are forhied differently. It is significant to note from the chart that an internal column in a tall building may be on the order of 2 by 3 ft. Such a planning element cannot be overlooked even for preliminary sketching.
0zr Systems Approach
Any discussion
of structural considerations conjunction with housing must recognize that the housing industry appears to be at the beginning of an era of greatly increased prein
which is leading towards full systems building and industrialization of the
fabrication,
Fig.
112
10
Building shapes.
building process.
Residential
APARTMENT BUILDINGS
There are four variables involved in elevator selection 1. Travel distance 2. Elevator speed 3. Elevator capacity 4. Building population Travel distance is represented on the graph “Number of stories” based on the assumption of normal floor-to-floor heights. Possible speeds for buildings of different heights are shown. Building population is represented on the graph as “population per floor,” with curves shown for typical floor populations. In determining population, two persons per bedroom are assumed.
as
Egress and Safety
Except
in
rare circumstances, relatively
little in
the realm of egress and safety is left to the discretion of the architect. In general, the architect may choose only among accepted and approved procedures as set down in codes.
Prefabrication and systems building has been applied widely in European countries for a number of years, and there have been many prototypical developments and limited applications of techniques in this field in the
United States. It is anticipated that, able
future,
virtually
all
the
foresee-
European
housing
within
be the product of some type of system. It would appear inevitable that progress toward industrialized construction will likewise continue in the United States. At what precise point the utilization of systems building will become a major consideration in apartment design and what system or systems will survive to become a standard of the future is uncertain; however, is
a
significantly
union acceptability, adaptability to minor and guarantees regarding erected
variations,
costs.
Plumbing
VERTICAL SERVICES
will
it
bility,
growing
field
which
In most codes, two means of egress must be provided within specified distances from each dwelling unit (Fig. 1 5a-c) except in the case of duplexes, which frequently require an additional means of egress off the corridors, usually by means of an escape balcony (Fig. 1 5e). Figure 1 5 d diagrams a scissor stair which, as shown, is an arrangement which allows for construction of two stairs in one fire enclosure. This is an efficient and cost-saving solution to the two egress requirements. Most codes, however, effectively preclude the use of scissor stairs, in many cases by limiting the allowable length of dead-end corridors. Fire escapes are usually required for construction that is not fireproof; and sprinklers, smoke doors, fire detectors, and alarms are additionally required for various classifications of construction in some codes.
Elevators
Figure 14 may serve as a preliminary guide in determining number and type of elevators necessary for an efficient solution.
plumbing risers and waste lines (or “plumbing stacks”) are expensive due to both material and labor costs. Reduction in the number of stacks saves money and is, therefore, to a greater or lesser extent advantageous and advisable. Vertical
will
be watched closely by practitioners in the housing field. Of the number of systems which are presently available, the following categories may be drawn 1 Steel or concrete frame with precast planks, self-formed concrete deck or metal .
deck 2.
Poured-in-place
concrete
tiers
utilizing
special reusable forms for transverse walls or
columns 3. Long-span or short-span precast panel/ plank and bearing wall 4. Prefabricated floor-size truss or beam systems with clear span capabilities. modules, prepared off 5. Preassembled site or on site, for stacking or insertion in a
structural frame
Figure 13 shows a composite structure including the categories described. Any proposal to use a building system should be preceded by a thorough investigation as to availability, code and market accepta-
113
.
Residential
APARTMENT BUILDINGS
20
16
24
NUMBER OF STORIES Fig.
14
Elevator guide.
Reduction in the number of plumbing stacks accomplished by doubling or even tripling up on each stack at each floor. Figure 1 6 shows common bathroom and/or kitchen layouts with order-of-magnitude dimensions shown. These dimensions, it should be remembered, are for rough layout purposes only and should be verified by consultants. is
Ventilation
spaces such as bathrooms, interior kitchens, and public halls require mechanical exhausting. Figures 17 and 18 may be used as Interior
guides, in making preliminary layouts, to determine the floor area to be allocated to exhaust ducts. Figure 18 indicates the area of exhaust and Fig. 17 shows buildup of fireproofing and
around the area of exhaust. The ratio of dimensions should be as close to square as possible and should not exceed a ratio of 3:1 A mechanical engineer should be consulted to determine final data regarding size and locafinish
tion of ducts.
water pipes or electric conduit. Pipe risers as shown in Fig. 19 occupy a space of approximately 3 to 4 sq ft, are located at an outside wall, and generally, if possible, “run out" in two directions to serve two units at each floor. It is desirable to avoid having a common riser between separate apartments.
Heating and Cooling In most cases, planning and spatial layout are not significantly influenced by heating and/or cooling units and their lines of supply. The most common exception is the case in which ducts deliver conditioned air from either a central source or a unit in the apartment. In such a case, ducts may be of such size as to become a planning factor. Otherwise, heating or cooling units are served either by hot and/or chilled
DETERMINATION OF A TYPICAL FLOOR General In
discussing determination of a typical floor
and specific apartment layouts, the most com-
mon structural type — poured-in-place flat-plate concrete construction with repetitive typical floors
— is
assumed. The principles
m (o)
Spaced stairs at exterior
r ni
a
V (f)
114
Typical fire escape
of the pro-
Residential
APARTMENT BUILDINGS
10'/2"
1
)
) }
.
7"
- 11/2
(
I
k
nor J
t
j
i
1
i
_LL
Note: Dimensions shown ore clear dimensions for high-rise buildings up to Fig.
16
25-30
stories.
Plumbing chases.
co UJ
CLOSET OR
^ CORRI DOR
CABINET DIMENSION ntI
UJ or
o co
\f
560
460
*
0
^
j
/
240
X^
*'
140
at least
beyond the beginning and
end of the ramp to assist persons with poor and they should be returned to a wall or an upright post for safety.
,
,
preferable)
vision,
r"
Housing for the Physically Impaired, Department of Housing and Urban Development, Washington, D C 1968
min; they should extend
in. is
and distant traffic; and automobiles are
in
general
turn at the platform.
Consideration should be given to the exist-
(See Fig.
The
be in a straight line; however, a more desirable and safer arrangement would be a 90 or 180°
ing
least
sites.
night-lights,
hills,
of planes, boats, trains
level platform at least 5 ft-6 in. long, to provide ample rest space. Such two-run ramps may
MAX. 20 DIS! KABLP
D£5JPA5LE^ /Z" M)hl\
I
Residential
HOUSING FOR THE HANDICAPPED automatic door opener can usually be reduced by flanking the automatic doors with hinged doors for use of the physically unimpaired. Safety glass vision panels are recommended for solid panel building entrance
of the
doors. (See Fig. 4.) For those who have poor vision or are blind, the floor directly inside or outside the entrance doors to multifamily buildings should either
be slightly ramped or have a finish of a difcolor, distinguishable from the surrounding floor and of a different texture that will provide more grip for shoe soles, thus suggesting caution. Recessed floor mats meet these requirements. Exterior doors should be covered by a canopy or hood of ample width. A porte-cochere may be feasible. A canopy or roofed-over service entrance also should be provided for ambulances if the development is for elderly and impaired persons. Other entrances may be made from parking areas and grounds. If a clinic is included, a separate entrance should be provided so that persons outside the project who come to the clinic will not use the main entrance lobby. The operating hardware of entrance doors should be 2 ft— 1 0 in. to 3 ft above the floor. Door checks or closers should be the adjustable tenferent
Fig. 3
Parking.
Wheel bumper not recommended as
car overhangs vary.
walk and parked cars to protect people, particularly those with poor eyesight, from accidents caused by colliding with car bumpers. For wheelchair users, the minimum width of parking bays is 1 ft (12 ft is desirable). Other orthopedic equipment users will require at least a 9 ft width. The wider bays should be 1
nearest the building entrances. For these tenants, covered parking is desirable. Parking bays for the nonimpaired may have a minimum width of 8 ft-6 in. under unusual, restricted circumstances. However, the general rule should be 9 ft. Parking areas should not be permitted to obstruct or dominate views from indoor recreation areas or dwellings.
Amenities such as a water fountain or a be included if funds are available. Also, it may be possible to encourage donations of sculpture and other works of art from civic-minded local groups interested in making this housing a visual asset to the residents and the entire community. Future ease of grounds’ maintenance should be kept in mind during the planning and design stage. However, achieving the best possible living environment is the primary objective. reflecting pool can
DWELLING STRUCTURES Entrances
OUTDOOR AREAS.
LIGHTING.
AND PLANTING
and areas (walks, ramps, drives, parking and recreational areas, etc.) should be sloped for drainage and be properly Outdoor
facilities
illuminated for safe circulation. Lights should be placed and angled to permit good perception from inside the building. Existing trees, streams, or rock outcropping
should be retained where possible in order to preserve natural beauty. Planting (a few large specimens skillfully located), with emphasis on recreational and sitting areas, of the site
contributes to enjoyment and creates a more pleasant environment. Planting around parking area will enhance the site. The surfaces of concentrated use areas should be paved for maximum safety, use, and interest. For large paved areas, several materials of varied color, design, and texture are recommended to provide a pleasant visual diversity. Nonslip surfaces are desirable — rough surfaces generally present in fieldstone are not recommended. Rest or sitting areas should be protected from winter winds and excessive summer sun. Some of them should provide a view of the street or of other places where there is animated activity. The best way to provide shade is to
Entrance doors to multifamily structures, community centers, and other public-use space should provide a clear minimum width passage of 3 ft. Entrance doors to individual dwellings should provide a clear minimum width passage of 2 ft - 0 in. Thresholds that project above the floor should be avoided when possible. If a projection is unavoidable, it should be no higher than /2 in., featheredged to the floor, and 5 to 1
6
in.
sion type, set for minimum pull to assist persons using wheelchairs and other orthopedic devices. Pull handles, push bars, and panic hardware bars with curved ends are best because they contain no hooks or sharp angles to catch clothing. A lever handle which curves close to the door surface is a most suitable operator for latch or lock. Kickplates 12 in. high help to reduce door maintenance by preventing abrasions caused by footrests and axle hubs on wheelchairs, etc. In multifamily buildings, entrance doors normally used by tenants should be provided with key locks which could be set to operate as latches (no keys needed) for daytime use and as key locks at night. A tenant's key would operate these locks and his apartment door lock. Master keys should be provided for management use.
Public Corridors, Galleries
wide.
Hinged entrance doors
most economical and
to
dwellings are the
doors should never be installed; they must be collapsed for wheelchair users and are particularly hazardous for users of other orthopedic equipment. For entrance doors to a multifamily building, it is best to have automatic door openers, with floor mat activation, flush with floor. Such mechanisms should fully open the door without restricting the clear 3-ft minimum passage. If the opening mechanism fails to function, the door operation should automatically revert to manual operation. Maintenance safest. Revolving
mild climates, galleries might be appropriand desirable for cross ventilation, tenant circulation, relaxation, visiting, etc. Galleries should be at least 7 ft wide to allow enough room both for tenant sitting space and two-way traffic of persons using crutches or wheelchairs. Handrails of a bright color or material in bold contrast to the walls should be provided on corridor walls. Such handrails are especially helpful to people with poor vision and to blind persons. To avoid hazards, doors should not swing into public corridors Doors to public corridors In
ate
use large trees or small, attractive shel-
ters, or both.
Flowering trees and shrubbery can enhance pleasantness and potential enjoyment of the setting.
One-story structures,
dwelling
buildings
and
other
where appropriate, should have
outdoor flower planting areas for the tenants, preferably at or near entrance door. Every effort should be made to have a sheltered bus stop located at the development A mail depository box at the same location would be desirable.
Fig.
4
Building entrance doors and doors to public space should have vision panels.
141
Residential
HOUSING FOR THE HANDICAPPED should be located on the basis of walking distance, climate, and convenience.
Laundry
rooms must accommodate the nec-
essary equipment: work table, ironing board which is adjustable for standing or sitting, hanging rack, table and chairs for rest and sociability.
Tenant General Storage Central storage is not recommended for dwellings with one- and two-person occupancy — the general storage provided within the dwellings will suffice. Fig.
5
Interior stair.
Mailboxes
developments, where mail is delivered to the individual dwelling unit, a mail receptacle must be provided. The best type is the mail slot with a receiving box inside, the top of which is 2 ft-10 in. to 3 ft above the In cottage-type
should be identified by raised, brightly colored letters to aid the blind and those with poor vision. An important safety precaution is identification of doors not intended for normal use which would expose blind persons to danger if used. Such doors, when key locked, may provide sufficient protection. No columns, radiators, drinking fountains, telephone booths, pipes, or other projections should protrude into public corridors.
Public Stairs or Fire
Towers
lower-level entrance, the approach should be through a rear or side door in the elevator, thence to the service entrance to the ambulance.
Self-service elevators should level automati-
and have automatic sliding cab and hoistway doors with delayed closing, plus two push buttons both overriding the delay timing, one holding doors open, the other to close the doors. An emergency sound alarm system and a cab telephone for emergency use should be installed in each elevator. Cab handcally at landings
rails are required.
There should be no stairs or steps in the structure except those contained within fire towers for emergency use. Even such stairs Single-run should be especially planned.
between floors are not desirable; at one landing should be used, two in floorto-floor height over 9 ft. Straight runs between floors are not advisable; runs with 90 or 180 turns at landings are recommended. The most desirable stair would have a 6- to 6y2 -in. riser and an 11-in. minimum tread. The 11-in. tread stairs least
places the ball of the descender's foot inside the stair nosing. A safety nosing should be used which does not project beyond the riser and which is distinct in color from the rest of the tread, preferably lighter. Risers should slope forward between 1 and \/z in. to permit the ascender’s heel to rest safely on the tread. (See Fig. 5.) Stair wall handrails should continue around the platform to help anyone using the stair who is blind or has poor vision. The rails should carry a 6-lin-in. marking for hand feel 2 ft before the first down riser at both floor and landing levels. Steel pipes can be marked by deforming, or by a continuous raised welding, ground smooth, or by a smooth welded strip. Wooden rails can be shaved, notched, or marked with
domed-end wood dowels. Open or grating-type fire escapes are not recommended.
Cab control panel should be
It should not be necessary to go through the lobby to reach an ambulance. If there is no
Sometimes, because of limited wall space, the top rows are beyond the reach of wheelchair users; for them the locks to their boxes should not exceed 4 ft-3 in. above the floor. The local
Back-lighted buttons with raised figures should be used to assist those with poor vision and the blind. These people will need some sounding device which would identify the next
this feature.
floor stop.
otherwise receive their business mail, is located at some distance from the community
chairs, the lowest buttons 3
ft
Since stairways are of no use to some, con-
emergency power one elevator.
sideration should be given to to operate at least
Incinerator Chutes
chute hopper doors should be lower than normal. A 2-ft maximum height from floor to hinge is recommended. Large hopper doors are desirable for convenience and maintenance. For the convenience of persons in wheelchairs, hopper doors should be installed in open corridor or alcove, a location found satisfactory for the elderly. Where codes prohibit this, a waiver should be requested. Anterooms are most inconvenient for many impaired persons — self-closing doors add complications for users of orthopedic equipment and wheelchairs. (See Fig. 6.) Incinerator
Laundry Facilities facilities should be either in one cenarea or grouped in several areas. Concessionaires who furnish and maintain coinoperated washing and drying machines generally favor, for their convenience, central laundry facilities. Conveniently located group laundries are usually preferred by the impaired and elderly tenants and are recommended. tral
One automatic washing machine and batch dryer should be installed for each 20 one- and two-person families (one for 17 other families) or fraction thereof. In large central laundries, it is possible to use cabinet-type dryers which can handle more than one batch — useful in projects which include large families. In multifamily buildings, group laundries may be located on each floor or on some floors and not others, whichever is required to meet the demand. In cottage-type developments, laundry facilities
142
pick
to
persons in wheelabove the floor. The panel location should be on the side cab wall 1 ft back from the front, otherwise a wheelchair will block most of the cab entry. set at a height convenient to
Laundry
Elevators
Impaired persons should not be expected up mail from the floor. A mailbox mounted outside is not desirable. Mail slots should not be located in entrance doors where locked screen doors may make them inaccessible to the mailman or the inside box would interfere with door opening at least 90°. Mailboxes in a multistory structure are usually installed in rows stacked above each other. floor.
post office should be consulted
when planning
Separate mailboxes for community staff
the
space
workers are desirable, especially when management office, where they would
space.
DWELLING UNITS General in designing most ‘‘rental housing" for the physically impaired are how to provide maximum livability and safety for persons with impairments that vary in nature and degree. These problems are somewhat mitigated when the housing is to be designed to aid a specific type of impaired individual, such
The major problems
as the blind or the cardiac. The recommendations that follow, however, are based on the fact that the units will be occupied by people who have varying types of impairment, such as those with little or no vision who may or may
not use a guide dog; those using wheelchairs or crutches; and those whose physical condition requires the conservation of energy though they use no orthopedic devices. For room divisions of the dwelling plan, either fixed or movable partitions are suitable. Divisions may be achieved by movable wood closets that do not reach the ceiling or by fixed or movable baffle walls, which are particularly suitable in warm climates. A desirable feeling of larger space is created when the ceilings of adjoining rooms visibly flow from one to another. All
bathrooms should be enclosed by
floor-
to-ceiling partitions.
baffled or shielded. When used, the kitchen should be fan-ventilated. View of kitchen equipment from the living room and entrance to the dwelling through the kitchen should be avoided.
Kitchens
may be
the open plan
Each
is
unit should
have sufficient space to
Residential
HOUSING FOR THE HANDICAPPED
7 Average clearances. Source: State Building Code/' Raleigh, 1977. Fig.
“An
Illustrated
Handbook
of the
Handicapped Section
of the North Carolina
TURNING SPACE
Fig.
9
Wheelchair dimensions.*
TYPICAL
c-
5'— 8"
VERTICAL
5'-3"
OBLIQUE
4'— 8"
FORWARD VERTICAL REACH/switches. HEAD HEIGHT/shower fixtures
4
-5"
REACH/shelves,
lifting aids
REACH/shelves. cabinets, windows
shelves
4'-0" EYE LEVEL/wmdows, mirrors
3'— 5"
SHOULDER LEVEL
3-0" PUSH HANDLE HEIGHT
2'— 3"
ELBOW
LEVEL/counters, tables
1-3" KNUCKLE
9" .
LEVEL/shelves.
FOOT HEIGHT/toe
electric outlets
recesses
*
“Handbook for Design: Specially Adapted HousVA Pamphlet 26-13, Veterans Administration, Washington, D.C., 1978. ing,”
Fig. 10
Typical dimensions.*
143
Residential
HOUSING FOR THE HANDICAPPED living, sleeping, cooking, and dining accommodations plus adequate storage and sanitary facilities. The space should be planned to permit placement of furniture and essential equipment for circulation by wheelchair users and those on crutches. (See Figs. 7-10.)
assure suitable
Living
Room
general,
In
way
dwelling entrance should be
by
room. Entrance through the not desirable. For families without
of the living
kitchen
is
children,
a
rangement
combined
living-dining
room
ar-
kitchen-dining room combination. A wheelchair requires at least 2 ft-6 in. seating space at the dining table. Dining by a window, the stool of which is no higher than the dining table, is pleasant, and particularly desirable for the elderly or impaired persons. Food service from the kitchen to the livingdining area should be direct, without turning corners, and the distance should be as short as possible. A partition between the living room and kitchen should be provided. A baffle wall, with posts attached to floor and ceiling, the material between the posts not reaching either the floor or ceiling, makes a quite suitable partition and creates a sense of space. Prefabricated wood closets resting on the floor and not quite reaching the ceiling also make suitable living room-bedroom partitions in dwellings for one and perhaps two persons. In these small dwellings, the resulting open plan makes the space look larger than it is. is
preferable to
a
Fig.
1 1
Kitchen sink and base cabinet elevation and section.
operate for those with hand infirmities. The swing spout should have a built-in aerator to prevent splash, especially in a shallow sink. The sink waste line should have a close-fitting
elbow leading
to the trap
parallel to, the
back wall
installed near,
and
Kitchen
The
kitchen for the physically impaired requires more considered attention than any other room. Unlike the living room, such a kitchen may require more space than one for the nonimpaired.
A
5-ft minimum width should be provided wheelchair turns between counters on opposite walls or between counter and opposite
for
wall.
Counter tops should be set 2 ft— 1 0 in. above the floor, a workable height from both wheelchair and standing positions.
Base cabinets should have a recessed toe space 6 in. deep and 8% in. high to allow the wheelchair homemaker to get close to the counter and to permit maneuverability. A minimum open space 2 ft-4 in. wide should be provided under the sink. Base cabinet storage space involving hinged doors and fixed or adjustable shelves should not be used, because many impaired persons cannot bend down enough to use them. Base cabinet storage is most usable when drawers of various depth are provided and revolving units are installed at the reentrant corners. Pull-out vertical units one or both sides of the work center also are desirable. (See Fig. 11.) The kitchen sink should be 4 in. deep, single compartment for one- or two-person dwelling and single or double compartment for larger dwellings. The drain should be at the rear of the sink to provide maximum clearance for at
knees and clearance under the sink for standard wheelchair arms, 29 in. above floor. At this height, the wheelchair homemaker can reach the inside bottom of the sink without undue stress. This height is also suitable for the stand-up user without unnecessary bending. (See Fig. 12.) When a stainless steel sink is used, undercoating should be applied to prevent condensation, which also acts as insulation. A singlelever-handle water-control mixing faucet should be provided. This type is the easiest to
144
Fig.
12
Sink with knee space. Source: "Handbook Adapted Housing," VA Pamphlet Veterans Administration, Washington, D.C.,
for Design: Specially
26—13, 1978.
Sustained contact with the underside of a sink or trap filled with hot water could burn persons in a sitting position who lack leg or knee sensation. An insulating board under the sink is not a solution, because the hot water at the faucet and in the sink may be between 130
which is a hazard to a person lackhand sensation. A much safer way is to control all delivered hot water at a maximum of 120°F. Recent tests showed that with 120°F water at the faucet, the water in the undercoated stainless steel sink was 112°F and a safe 95 to 100°F on the sink's undercoating. The maximum hot-water temperature control should be under management supervision only, which may be the control recommended in the bathroom. One arrangement for the work center would have a kneehole opening, 2 ft wide minimum to 140°F,
ing
(2 ft-4 in. is desirable), flanked with vertical
pull-out units about 12
in.
wide. The vertical
units should extend from under the counter to
toe space, with content accessible from the kneehole side when the units are pulled out. One flanker unit could be used for hanging utensils from a peg board. (See Figs. 13-21.) The other, if installed, could be used for supplies and should have adjustable shelves. Space for the storage of additional supplies should be provided on the counter or in wall cabinets directly in front of the work center. Another work center arrangement would be the right-hand pedestal 16 to 18 in. wide with drawers, no left pedestal; it is desirable to increase the open space to 28 or 30 in. The storage cabinet above the counter may consist of open adjustable shelves. A lapboard pull-out shelf beneath the counter at the work center should be installed to provide a working surface for mixing and cutting operations. This shelf should be adjustable in height at 2-in. intervals from about 2 ft2 in. above the floor to the under-counter posi-
Residential
HOUSING FOR THE HANDICAPPED
eve/
A
GCbp
An3»!T
tv-
Fig.
3
-fVCT^ci
381
Cultural
LIBRARIES Branch Libraries
Floor plan of a library. Source: U.S. Naval Fig. 4 Washington, D.C.
BRANCH
LIBRARIES
A
branch library can play an important role as a cultural center. In addition to providing books, it can provide record and tape lending, musiclistening facilities, visual-aid facilities,
lecture
general information
series as well as act as a
center.
and
With such an expanded role, the library be an important element
or cultural center will in
the neighborhood. Figs.
1
and. 2 are possible
floor plans.
Regardless of the size of the community,
its
enough books whole population.
library should provide access to to cover the interests of the
Manual of Housing/Planning and Design Criteria, De Chiaro and Koppelman, Prentice-Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, N.J., 1975.
382
Facilities
Engineering
Command, Department
of the Navy,
1. Libraries serving populations from 5,000 to 50,000 require a minimum of 2 books per capita. 2. Communities up to 5,000 persons need access to a minimum of 10,000 volumes, or 3 books
per capita, whichever
The the
should
No
greater.
library building should provide
full
young
is
space for
range of library services. All libraries have designated areas for children’s,
and adult materials. Multipurpose rooms should be provided for meeting, viewing, and listening by cultural, educational, and civic groups unless such facilities are adulf,
readily
available elsewhere
in
the
community.
^They should be located for easy supervision so that they may be used for quiet reading and study when not needed by groups. ail
single type of building
is
public libraries. Each building
different,
and
its
satisfactory for is
likely to
be
differences should be directly
its service program. The library building should be located near the community shopping center and at
related to
level
if
possible.
available nearby.
in
or
street
Adequate parking should be
A Cultural
LIBRARIES Space Requirements
SPACE REQUIREMENTS The program statement, which includes objectives, activities, and requirements, will spell out total needs in terms of square feet of floor space. Generally speaking, the total need may be divided into five categories: space for (1) books, (2) readers, (3) staff, (4) group meetings, and (5) mechanical operations and all other (stairways, elevators, toilets, etc.). Actual space allocations will tend to vary in accordance with the library service program in relationship to community needs.' Table provides general guidelines for programming 1 the total building, and Table 2 provides guidelines for interior space in relation to population
and
Space
To
for
size of the
book
books per cubic foot. Approximately 50 longplay phonograph records may be shelved in one lineal foot of wall shelving. It is important to note that these
capacity.
formulas are given for
each shelf should be
of
full
Under normal conditions, one-third
sion. (See Figs.
1
left
for future expan-
to 3.)
Space
for
Readers
Reader seating requirements should be determined for at least 20 years ahead. Two principal sources of information which library building planners will find equally useful for this purpose are first, a careful analysis of
collection.
Books
amount of book shelving required will depend on the size of the library service area and whether the library is a member of a library system. Most library planners, when estimating the size of the book collection, apply a standard which ranges from three books per capita (smallest communities) to one and one-half books per capita (largest cities). In any event enough book shelving should be provided to plan for 20 years' anticipated a large extent the
growth.
The program statement should also include amount of shelving
a detailed analysis of the
needed.
It should be presented in terms of category, location, and linear feet. Categories found in nearly all public libraries include adult fiction and nonfiction; children’s books; books for young adults; reference books;
bound, unbound, and microfilmed newspapers; bound, unbound, and microfilmed periodicals; local history books; less used books for the bookstacks; and special subject collections. Allowances should be made also for nonbook materials (i.e., phonograph records) which are often accommodated on library shelving. Despite the fact that there is considerable variation in the size of books, there are several reliable formulas which may be used to estimate the amount of space required for books. These are: open reading rooms, 7 volumes per lineal foot, or 50 books per foot of standard height wall shelving, or 100 books per foot of double-faced shelving; bookstack areas, 15 books per square foot (includes aisles), or 2 Local Public Library Administration, International City Managers Association, Chicago, III 1964 With illustrations from Harold L Roth, Ed., Planning Library Buildings for Service, American Library Association, Chicaqo,
•HIGHEST SHELF
44*'
•BROWSING SHELVES HORIZONTAL SCANNING AT
91*
•OPTIMUM
•
MINIMUM
HEIGHT
FOR
'
/ ”
'M*
1
24*
1
I
»
1
NO SOUATTING •
&OUATTINO SHELVES
.
R.\
DOR
k orchestra, choral) which are more school situations described here.
like
the
Instrument Repair. Some sort of should be provided for emergency instrument repairs. A special room is recommended, although many schools will use a Workrooms
facility
section of the music library
room
or director’s
office for this purpose. Larger school
Fig.
2
Provisions for instruction
versity of Cincinnati.
Edward
in
dance may be included
J. Schulte
in
some
and Associates, Architects.
buildings
College Conservatory of Music, Uni-
employ specially trained men all instrument and equipment
systems
will
to take care
of
repairs.
The
minimum
provision should be a workbench, stool, and a supply of tools for repairs. Cabinet
445
Cultural
MUSIC FACILITIES
space with small drawers should be provided to hold pads, pad cement, springs, cork, and other miscellaneous equipment. If a great deal of repair work is done in the school, the workbench should have a gas connection, electrical outlets, wood and steel vises, and other specialized equipment. Running water and a large sink for cleaning brass instruments should be included. Duplicating Room. School music departments will have the facilities of the general office at their disposal in most cases and may not need duplicating equipment in the music suite itself. Most collegiate departments or schools of music and some school departments housed separately in a campus-type school will find a duplicating room invaluable. There are many times when the music department needs items copied — rehearsal schedules, instrumental parts of a student composition, football show routines, trip itineraries, vocalizes for the choir, songs in the public domain — that equipment should be readily available. The room should include enough counter space for several types of machines, space for collating,
and
a
sink.
A music program that functions smoothly should provide a well-located director's office. The size of the office and the types of equipment included in it will depend on the size and organization of the school. The room need not be especially large unless it is also to serve as a studio in which small-group Offices.
may
be carried on.
ever, be able to
accommodate
instruction
It
should, howtwo or
a desk,
three chairs, filing cabinets for correspondence, cabinets for miscellaneous storage, and any special equipment such as electronic tuners, piano, phonograph, radio, and tape
recorder.
Music teachers who teach
in
several loca-
tions in a school (e.g., harmony in a classroom, choir in the recital hall, general music in a specially equipped center) need an office to organize the many materials and instruments and pieces of equipment with which they work.
Offices are also essential for the department head or the director of performing groups because of the frequent contact they have with members of the community.
The recent improveBooth recording equipment and television education have resulted in many schools being constructed with facilities to make possible the use of these new techniques. Educational programs of all types are made available to the school and community; therefore, school space should be allowed for both receiving and broadcasting of music. The control booth should be well insulated for sound and should have slanted double glass windows for viewing the performing groups. Such a control booth is sometimes located adjacent to the stage of the auditorium or recital hall and sometimes between the rehearsal halls. (See Fig. 4.) Broadcast
ments
Control
in
Washroom and Toilet FaciliBecause the music suite is frequently used at night when the remainder of the building is locked, washroom, toilet facilities, and custodial work areas must be provided within the music unit. In many instances they may be necessary for the changing of uniforms and must be convenient to the rest of the department. These facilities require about 15 percent of the total floor space if adequate Tootn is to be provided. If recitals to which the public is invited are given within the music unit, Additional Facilities ties.
additional rest room space may be needed. Lounge. Collegiate music departments may
need to consider the desirability of a lounge in which students can relax. If other study areas on the campus are some distance from the music facilities, one portion of the lounge might provide desk or table space. An area might also be provided for vending machines. Elevator. Because of the heavy instruments and equipment which it is frequently necessary to move in a music department, an elevator is a most desirable feature in a building of two or more floors. Also recommended is a loading dock adjacent to the parking area.
THE AUDITORIUM
An auditorium should be designed so
that the
can be maintained and operated with a minimum of time and labor consumed in the activities
f?AP»0
ConT«P^
CTfcAlN INS)
RAP VO
r OAHTftOVT
4 The recent improvements in recording equipment and television education have resulted in facilities to make use of these new techniques. College Conservatory of Music, University of Cincinnati, Edward J. Schulte and AssoFig.
ciates, Architects.
446
Cultural
MUSIC FACILITIES
cr
o h-
Q
c o £ 0
O 2
>. Q.
ADOLESCENTS
* *
S O
c
0-0 [V
® -o
c
l
*
5 '
|i ®£
o c ®
1 Ea ^ 0 3
1
-O -5
I| &
5.“
*-
if M
c ®
» • 0
“
o ? ® 2 •£
0
o O • - * O'
§ 0 S 0.
?in S=ff ® ©
c
-o
? ^ w © 2: Z
©
•.
X ii
o
|1|o 1 si o2 P © x - ©£ t «.
*.
481
Health
HOSPITALS Pediatric Nursing Units Equipment Legend for Figures
1
.
and 2*
1
Crib.
3.
Adjustable youth bed with overbed table. Adjustable hospital bed with overbed table.
4. 5.
Rocking chair with arm
6.
Infant scale.
7.
Sink with spout at least 5
rests,
washable
finish.
9.
10
.
in
above
rim of
and foot- or knee-action valves, in counter 36 in high, open below, wall cabinet above, soap dispenser and enclosed-type pa-
23.
per towel dispenser.
26.
Detention screen.
27.
Portable
28.
Easy
29.
Sofa.
30.
Circular type chart.
31.
Medication
cart.
32.
Soiled linen
hamper on
Depressed
Mop
mop-handle
floor sink with
buckets on
roller
rack.
carriage.
Wet-dry vacuum machine.
Small enclosed cart, 4 to 6 trays capacity. 12. Ice-making machine, self dispensing. 11
.
13.
Lavatory, with spout at least 5
in
above
the
TV on stand
in
Clinical sink with wrist-action valves
and a
removable waxed
54. Adjustable metal shelving on casters.
35.
Grab
36.
Desk with drawers.
60.
37.
Window
61. Automatic ascending trayveyor.
under for toys. Storage cabinet.
62. Automatic descending trayveyor.
38.
63.
Dumbwaiter.
39.
Sliding doors.
64.
Built-in
40.
Bookcase.
65.
Lavatory, with spout at least 5
bar.
hinged at back, storage space
table.
Examining 59. Examining
light.
table.
Instrument table, 24 x 36
in.
bookcases. in above the and knee- or wristover, soap dispenser and
flood rim of the fixture
41.
action valves, shelf
enclosed type paper towel dispenser.
chair.
wrist-action
45.
Filing cabinet.
open below.
46.
Electric clock.
68.
47.
Refrigerator.
or
directly
under
the
Welfare, Division of Hospital and Medical and Engineering Branch, 1968.
Facilities, Ar-
Waste
receptacle, foot-controlled cover, re-
movable waxed
the flood
1 and 2 from “Manual for the Care of ChilHospitals," U.S. Dept, of Health, Education, and
chitectural
in counter 36 in high, open below, soap dispenser and enclosed-type paper towel dispenser.
Mayo
seat,
the flood
knee-, or wrist-
View panel with safety glass, approx. 6 x 12 inches and 4 feet 6 inches from floor. 67. Vending machines.
above
* Figures
dren
above
58.
Sink with spout at least 5
one drawer
in
foot-,
57.
20.
only
and
Projection screen, roll-up type.
44.
with
Sink with spout at least 5
34.
Lockers.
high,
identification
33. Chalkboard.
19.
in
slots for
Shelf above.
Bedside cabinet.
and knee-
52.
and
cards.
Vision panel clear wire glass.
Bathtub, pedestal type, with controls on wall.
sink
.
56.
18.
counter 36
shelving with cubicles for individ-
ual medications
55.
17.
the
Recessed double x-ray illuminator.
Graduated
valves. 3-in ball-bearing cast-
Conference table. 42. Multipurpose type table. 43. Executive type desk and
in
50.
51.
bedpan-flushing attachment with foot-action
Bathtub, normal height with controls on wall.
of
and form rack on
top at the back.
53.
16.
valves,
directly under the counter
chair.
Utility
rim
station.
action valves,
15.
in
Counter, open below, with only one drawer
or on wall shelf.
liner.
enclosed-type
supply cart.
Pneumatic tube
49.
rim of the sink
ers, foot-controlled cover,
and
48.
25. Cubicle curtain.
paper towel dispenser, mirror, shelf, and waste receptacle with foot-controlled cover and removable waxed liner. Sink with spout at least 5 in above the flood rim of the sink and wrist-action valves, in counter 36 in high, cabinets below and above, soap dispenser and enclosed-type pa dispenser
per towel dispenser.
482
24.
flood rim of the fixture, wrist-action valves.
soap
14.
21. 22.
sink
8.
and enclosed-type paper towel dispenser. Wall cabinet above with double-locked narcotics compartment and inside light. Clear glass, bottom 40 in above floor. Clear wire glass in metal frame (1,296 sq in max.), bottom 40 in above floor. Door, upper panel clear wire glass. Bulletin board, 26 x 24 in. counter, soap dispenser
Sick infant's crib.
2.
liner.
66.
Undercounter refrigerator.
Health
HOSPITALS Pediatric Nursing Units
c -o E 0 • W
Hi t
Q.
O
*0
0 o ® «•*
J:
c
•O
®
?
C n M ® 0 ® CD
© *U
E I Ql O
Q.
®ot ” « ®
a
*-
o
•
£
i
*o
483
Health
HOSPITALS Diagnostic X-Ray Suite
By WILBUR R TAYLOR, CLIFFORD E. NELSON, M.D., and WILLIAM W. McMASTER
location, the activity within the
DIAGNOSTIC X-RAY SUITE it was found that many hosinadequate space to the x-ray department, and expansion was often impractical. Adequate space for waiting, toilets, and dressing rooms helps insure continuous routines in handling patients. The lack of adequate space results in needless waste of effort and time in efficiently scheduling examinations. An unsatisfactory layout is a handicap to both
In a
recent study
pitals allotted
the hospital and the radiologist since the hospital loses potential revenue, and the radiol-
needlessly wasted. This is particularly important to a small hospital which has a visiting radiologist's time, as well as that of the staff,
is
ogist for it is to the advantage of the hospital and radiologist to schedule as many examinations are possible during his
visit.
department
will
not be disturbed by through traffic to other parts of the hospital, and less shielding will be required because of the exterior walls. (See Fig.
1.)
assigning of patients to dressing rooms are handled by the secretary-receptionist. If time permits, the secretary-receptionist assists in typing the radiologist's reports. The desk is
Plan A
Plan A illustrates an x-ray suite that will provide an efficiently operating service for about 8400 patient examinations yearly, or an average of
about 35 examinations
workload
is
typical
in
a
daily.
This average
hospital of approxi-
cause the average of 35 examinations per day to be exceeded. (See Fig. 2.) The staff needed for this volume of work usu1 radiologist, 2 or 3 technicians, secretary-receptionist, 1 secretary-file clerk, 1 orderly (as needed). This plan will permit the workload to be augmented at least 50 percent by increasing 1
The diagnostic
department should be
x-ray
located on the first floor, conveniently accessible both to outpatients and inpatients. It is also desirable to locate the department close to the elevators and adjoining the outpatient department and near other diagnostic and treatment facilities.
The functional requirements of the department are usually best satisfied by locating the x-ray rooms at the end of a wing. In this
the staff, ray
work
if
no more than 20 percent of the
x-
fluoroscopic. Among the desirable characteristics that this plan attempts to provide for is the need for correlating the functions of the working group to obtain maximum efficiency. The arrangement of patient areas and examination rooms around the perimeter, with the administrative staff in the center, makes it possible for these
more
The technidepartment the x-ray rooms,
efficiently.
cians’ corridor in the rear of the
provides for easy access to
-
trance between the waiting room and administrative area, so that the secretary-receptionist may supervise waiting patients and have access to correspondence and report files.
film processing
without
Secretary-File Clerk The secretary-file clerk assembles, sorts, and files all films and reports,
rooms, and distribution areas from patients cross
interference
traffic.
when
secretary-receptionist
the
assists
needed, and transcribes and types the radiologist’s reports. These functions are not rigidly fixed and can be interchanged, if desired. For example, a technician may be assigned to assist the file clerk with film assembling and sorting, or the file clerk may be given other functions as needed. The desk is located near a counter-partition in the film collection
is
units to operate
-
centrally located, directly in front of the en-
mately 100 beds (or somewhat more) with an out-patient x-ray service. Unforeseen scheduling problems, of course, will occasionally
ally includes:
Location
Secretary-Receptionist The administrative functions and business records of the department, scheduling of appointments, receiving of patients, typing of the necessary identification forms and requisitions for examinations, and
distribution area.
and
The low counter and the gate
(No. 79) are designed so the entrance to the can be observed and patients
department
when
directed
required.
Room The doctors’ viewing located near the office of the radiologist so that he may be immediately available for consultation. The room is near the film files, convenient to the secretary and file clerk, and situated so as not to intrude upon the functional flow of the work. Its location within the administrative unit provides privacy so that Viewing
Doctors'
room
is
diagnostic comments and discussions not be overheard by patients.
will
Administration Spaces
Every radiologist has FILE
most suitable ways
READING
1
COLLECTION 1
-\
tions, film distribution,
DOC VIEW
.
J
.
_J
Q
The authors are
484
facil-
tive unit.
all
Service, architects
engaged
Mr in
Radiologist's
the
in
work
for
Room
G eneral
waiting space for about ten patients is located at the entrance to the department. From here the patient is directed to an assigned dressing room. A separate area, to the left of the entrance and in sight of the secretary-receptionist, is provided for wheelchair and stretcher patients. This section is partitioned off by a curtain which may be partially drawn to provide privacy, yet afford the necessary surveillance of unattended patients from the secretary-receptionist’s desk. Additional chairs in this area can be used to accommodate the attendants of these patients or for an overflow of waiting patients when needed.
Office
This office
is
conveniently
situated near the x-ray rooms, the secretaryreceptionist’s desk and the filing distribution area, and is not too easily accessible to the public;
opens
is
it
also provided with a door which
directly to the technicians’ corridor.
fire exit
which
Film Filos
The
The
located off the technicians' corridor provides a second exit from the department for the radiologist.
lection
Taylor and Mr Architectural and Engineering Branch, Division of Hospital and Medical Facilities, Bureau of Medical Services, Dr Nelson ai, a radiologist, Division of Radiological Health, Bureau of State Services Health
viewing
This plan provides for flexibility of space by allowing for variation of several of the operations within the administra-
1
McMaster as
staff
arrangements
FILMS
Public
and
ities.
I
Waiting
Fig.
on the and operating ideas
the administrative functions of the x-ray department. Some of the variables involved are assignment of personnel and functions, reception of patients, sequence of patient examina-
1
>•
specific
for arranging
is
film files are located in the col-
and distribution area and convenient
to
the radiologist's office. Since it is desirable to keep active films for at least five years,
approximately 125 linear feet
of filing
space
provided. After that time, additional storage space elsewhere will be needed for the less active files. Closed front metal x-ray files are recommended (see Fire Safety). Teaching files may not be needed in a hospital of this size, but if desired, a section of the active files may be allotted for this use. is
General Facilities
Rooms Three dressing rooms machine should be provided so
Dressing
x-ray
for
each
that the
Health
HOSPITALS Diagnostic
X-Ray
Suite
if-
LEGEND 1.
Paper towel dispenser
2.
Waste paper receptacle
3.
Lavatory Wall-hung water closet Continuous grab bar
4. 5.
7.
Emergency Hook strip
8.
Mirror and shelf below
6.
calling station
(push button)
Straight chair Cassette pass box 11. Film loading counter 12. Film storage bin 13. Film hanger racks under counter 14. Safelight 15. Ceiling light, white and red 9.
10.
16. 17.
Timer Counter with storage cabinets below
28.
Cassette storage bins Trash deposit cabinet Cassette cover retainer and wall guard Door with light-proof louver in upper panel Access panel Door with light-proof louver in lower panel Utility sink with drainboard Refrigerating unit under drainboard Developing tank with thermostatic mixing valve Through-the-wall fixing tank Light-proof panel
57.
29.
Washing tank
58.
30.
38.
X-ray film illuminator (wet viewing) Film dryer Film dryer exhaust to outside Film corner cutter Film pass slot Flush-mounted counter illuminator Film sorting bins above counter Film sorting counter Counter with cabinets below
39.
On-wall or mobile film illuminators
68.
Transformer
40.
Temporary
69. 70.
Radiographic fluoroscopic unit with spot Foot stool
71.
Control unit
72.
Leaded glass view window Lead lining (or other shielding material) as required Lead-lined door, light proofed
18.
19.
20. 21. 22. 23.
24. 25. 26. 27.
31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37.
film
file
cart
Stereoscope 42. Executive type desk 43. Executive type chair
41.
44. 45. 46.
47. 48.
Telephone outlet Intercommunication system outlet Bookshelves, 42 in. by 14 in. Typist chair Typist desk
49. Filing cabinet, letter size
Gown Gown
storage, open shelves, storage cabinet above 51. storage, open shelving with laundry hamper below 52. Technicians’ lockers 53. Fire door 54. Dome light, buzzer and annunciator at receptionist’ s desk 55. Closed metal film files, 5 shelves high 56. Hook on toilet side of door 50.
Fire extinguisher Mop truck 59. Shelf 60. Curb and receptor on janitor’s sink 61.
Mop hanging
62. 63.
Storage cabinet and writing counter Fluoroscopic apron and glove holder
64.
Fluoroscopic chair
65.
Laundry hamper
66.
Clean linen cart changer
67. Cassette
73.
74. 75. 76.
77. 78. 79. 80.
81. 82. 83. 84. 85. 86.
Fig.
2
Diagnostic radiographic suite, Plan A.
strip
87.
film device
Barium sink Barium storage (below counter) Red light for dark adaptation Fluoroscopic ceiling light Counter with gate Film identifier, cabinet below Anti-splash panel Wall cabinet over sink Curtain, floor to ceiling
Warning
light
Microphone Loudspeaker Annunciator (for emergency calling station)
485
Health
HOSPITALS X-Ray
Diagnostic
Suite
equipment and staff can function without delay. Each dressing room should be equipped with a straight-back chair, clothes hook, mirror, and a shelf below the mirror. For the protection of patients' valuables, the doors may be equipped with locks, or centrally located lockers may be provided. Where doors are installed, they should swing outward to avoid the possibility of being blocked by a patient and should be at least 12 inches from the floor For the convenience of patients in wheelchairs, an outsized dressing
room
is
provided
Instead of a door, it is equipped with a curtain so that the patient can maneuver easily Toilets should be immedi-
Rooms
Patients' Toilet
available
ately
patients
for
oroscopy, and similar veniently
available
minimum
of
two
undergoing flushould be con-
facilities
for
waiting
patients.
A
should be provided for each x-ray room. All toilets should be located near the x-ray rooms. At least one toilet room should be directly accessible to each x-ray room and have an opening into the corridor. To prevent the patients from accidentally opening the door between the toilet and x-ray room, this door should be equipped with hardware which is operable only from the x-ray room. The doors toilets
rooms which open
of the toilet
into the patients
corridor should be equipped with bathroom locks, which are operated by knob latch bolts and dead bolts from both sides. One of the patients' toilet rooms is designed to accommodate a patient in a wheelchair. The room is larger than the others, for easy maneuvering, and has a 3 ft door. The lavatory is set on wall brackets 6 in. out from the wall and 2 ft 10 in. from the floor.
One
should be provided with
toilet
a
bedpan
flushing attachment. Water closets should be suspended from the wall to simplify cleaning.
toilets. The closet should contain a floor receptor with a curb or a janitor's service sink, a mop-hanging strip and a shelf, and provide space for parking the mop truck.
Diagnostic X-Ray
Rooms
Both rooms are equipped with X-Ray Equipment combination x-ray and fluoroscopic machines with spot film devices. An overhead type tube support is indicated in the plan, as this facilitates x-raying a patient in bed or on a stretcher.
For reasons of economy, however, it may be desirable to equip one room with a floor-ceiling track. If an overhead mounted track is used, it may be supported from the floor by columns or may be bracketed from the wall, although a ceiling suspension makes a neater installation.
The optimum
size of the x-ray room is about Ceiling height requirements vary for different x-ray machines, but a minimum of 9 ft 6 in. is recommended. The machine and
14 by 18
ft.
transformer should be placed so as to allow adequate space for admittance of a bed or stretcher in the room. Mounting the transformer on the wall is recommended to save floor space. However, sufficient clearances (at least 2 ft above the transformer) for servicing the transformer should be provided. The sink and drainboard, for handwashing and rinsing utensils and barium equipment, is equipped with a gooseneck spout. It is located near the foot of the x-ray table. The drainboard can also be used as a barium coun-
recommended
that the control panel be outside each x-ray room to indicate when the machine is on, to prevent other personnel from inadvertently entering the room. A red light bulb will be satisfactory as It
is
wired to
a signal
a signal for
most
Control
A dome
booth be located
gency
and buzzer system with an emerstation in each toilet room and an
call
annunciator
the
at
secretary-receptionist's
desk are recommended. and Lockers During busy essential that the staff be available times. Separate toilet and locker facilities
Technicians'
periods at all
it
Toilets
is
are provided for technicians. This reduces the time technicians must be absent from the area and contributes to the efficiency of the depart-
ment.
Storage
Facilities
For bulk supplies, a storage cabinet equipped with sliding doors and adjustable shelves is located inside each patients' corridor near the entrance. Materials such as films, opaque solutions, developing solutions, and office supplies are stored here. General Storage
Daily
installations.
toilet
light
Linen Supplies
(X-Ray Rooms)
Clean linen,
requisitioned from the hospital central supply, is stored on a cart (No. 66) in each x-ray room; soiled linen is placed in a hamper (No. 65).
Open adjustable shelves for Storage storage are placed next to each general bulk supply cabinet, just inside the corridor entrance. The shelving for clean gowns starts about 4 ft from the floor, leaving space beneath for a linen hamper (No. 65) for soiled gowns. Gown
Booth
It
is
so that the patient
essential that
the control
to the right of the
machine
may be observed when
the since machines with endpivoted tables tilt to the right. In the plan, no door is shown on the control booth as the radiation will have scattered at least twice before it reaches the control booth area. This is in accordance with Handbook 60, as amended, issued by the National Bureau of Standards. The arrangement of the control booth to the right and the cassette changer to the extreme left, as shown in the plan, fully meets this requirement. In addition, since the beam is directed toward the outside wall, radiation exposure to other personnel is lessened, and the amount of shielding required is decreased. If the cassette changers are placed to the right of the machine (on the wall opposite to that indicated on the plan), a door on the control booth or a baffle placed in the room is required to protect the technician in the booth. Furthermore, additional shielding is required to protect films and personnel in the department because the primary beam would not be directed toward the outside wall. In the present scheme, the shielding necessary in the interior walls is principally to safeguard against the scatter radiation. table
is
inclined,
gown
The
must be readily available for emergency cleaning and it should be convenient to the x-ray rooms and Janitor's
486
Closet
janitor's
closet
two
room is located between rooms to facilitate handling
This
x-ray
Storage Cabinet and Writing Counter A storage cabinet (No. 62), with a safety light above, serves also as a writing counter for the radiologist and technicians. Shelves in the cabinet provide space for storage of accessory items such as sandbags, measuring devices used with x-ray machine, and disposable items needed for patients' examinations.
the of
Cassettes are loaded and unloaded on the counter (No. 11). Space is provided for loading and stacking cassettes at both ends of the counter. A utility sink with a drainboard (No. 24), located opposite the processing tank, is provided for mixing chemical solutions and handwashing. A refrigerating unit (No. 25) for the tank is located in the space beneath the drainboard. X-ray films are processed in an area separated from the loading counter by a partition (No. 81) at the end of the developing tank which helps to avoid accidental splashing and damage to the screens and films on the loading counter. A through-wall processing unit tank permits the radiologist or staff doctors to read the wet films in the lightroom area without interrupting darkroom procedures. films.
A lightlock between the darkroom and the lightroom, equipped with interlocking doors, is necessary to allow entrance into the darkroom of other personnel during film processing.
Although
over
a
maze has some advantages
the additional space needed is not justifiable in a facility of this size. Access panels (No. 22), located in the lightlock and in the control space, are provided to simplify installation and servicing the
lightlock,
of the processing tanks.
ter.
room should be equipped with a grab bar for use by elderly or weak patients. Each
Film Processing and Distribution Area
Darkroom
Film
Processing
Area
To
reduce
unnecessary
the film processing rooms are located near the collection and distribution area. This layout allows the technician to work without interruption during the processing routine. Processing of films begins at the developing tank (No. 26) in the darkroom, and continues to the final rinsing tank (No. 29) in the lightroom where the films may be wet-viewed at an illuminator, if desired, and then dried. After the films are dried, they are brought to the counter (33) in the technicians' corridor for final trimming, and passed through to the film collection and distribution traffic,
area.
Film sorting bins 36) are provided above the counter in the collection and distribution area for temporary filing. After all films have been assembled, they are passed through the film pass slot (No. 34) to the radiologist for interpretation. He returns the films in a file cart or through a slot which leads into a box under the distribution counter. The films may then be temporarily filed for viewing by staff doctors or placed in the active files. Collection and Distribution Area
(No.
Barium Mixing
Facilities
A two-compartment
sink (No. 75) in a counlocated in the technicians’ corridor and accessible to both x-ray rooms, is provided for mixing barium. A duplex outlet for plugging in an electric mixer or a heating element ter,
located above the counter unit. Barium supplies for daily use are stored in cabinets under the counter; the bulk supplies can be stocked in one of the general storage cabiis
nets located
in
the patients’ corridors.
Dark Adaptation Patients
customed
must to the
allowed to become aclow lighting level in the x-ray
be
Health
HOSPITALS Diagnostic X-Ray Suite Electrical Installations
Voltage supplied to the x-ray unit should be constant so that fluoroscopic images and radiographs will be uniform. An independent feeder with sufficient capacity to prevent a voltage drop greater than 3 percent is recommended. To minimize voltage fluctuations, a separate transformer for the x-ray feeder is required for most installations.
Illumination
Illumination
intensities
in
the
various areas
comply with recommendathe Lighting Handbook, 3rd
of the suite should
given in Edition (1959), published by the Illuminating the general Briefly, Engineering Society. illumination should be not less than 10 foot-
tions
candles in corridors and in rooms where reading is not required. The waiting room should have 15 footcandles, with supplemental lighting for reading. Offices and areas where clerical work is performed should have at least 50 footcandles, preferably 70. Indirect or cove lighting fixtures are recommended for the x-ray rooms so that patients need not be inconvenienced by glare when lying face upward during examinations. Primary barriers should be provided on all
HOSPITAL CORRIDOR Fig.
3
Diagnostic radiographic suite, Plan
surfaces of the x-ray rooms which are exposed, or which may be exposed, to the useful beam between the x-ray tube and occupied areas. Secondary barriers should be provided on all other room surfaces where protection is needed. In determining secondary barriers, consideration should be given
B.
rooms and the staff must retain their dark adaptation despite the opening of the doors of the fluoroscopic rooms between patients' examinations. To facilitate dark adaptation, curtains are shown at the intersections of the technicians' and the patients' corridors. In addition to the illumination normally provided in the corridors, patients' toilet rooms, and dressing rooms, it is recommended that these areas be equipped with an independently controlled dim lighting system of red bulbs for dark adaptation.
dioxide
assumed
sterile
ficient
Film
sink
(No.
used
for
The plan provides
Dryer
space for an anhydrator,
lieu of the
dryer
an
shown
Air Conditioning
Air conditioning with positive ventilation and
Materials used similar
a
this
in
to
those
department are genprovided
usually
in
However, special attention should
some
of the areas
the
in
x-ray
suite.
The cassette loading counter surDarkroom face should be of a material which is staticfree; wood or linoleum is often preferred. Vinyl or vinyl-asbestos tile, % in. thick, appears to be a satisfactory material for size department. Experience however, that asphalt tile and linoleum floors do not stand up well under
Provision of a systhe department increases the efficiency of the staff and speeds up service. Outlets are shown at the desk of the secre-
in
this
Intercommunication System
the
of alternating
tary-receptionist, in the x-ray
the
rooms and
technicians’
the
corridor.
It is recommended that a one-way intercommunication system, with a microphone in the control booth and a loudspeaker at the cassette changer, be installed so that the technician need not leave the control booth to give instructions to the patient at the far end of the x-ray room.
Refrigerator Some items used in the x-ray department, such as barium suspensions for fluoroscopic examinations of the upper gastrointestinal tract, cream for a gall bladder series, and carbonated beverages for carbon
objects being irradiated by either the useful beam, leakage radiation, or other scattered
desired, in
if
(No. 31).
indicates,
within
leakage radiation which passes through the tube housing, and also to the secondary or scattered radiation emitted from to direct or
suf-
Finish Materials
tem
in
require of the 75) in the
radiation.
High-Speed
floors Optional Facilities
darkroom, and
the
at
corridor may be under-counter type refrigerator.
be given to
that the central
stomach,
technicians'
hospitals.
supply department of the hospital will provide all such services for the x-ray department. The mobile x-ray unit should be stored in the radiology department where it will be under the supervision and control of the department and available when needed. is
the
of
The space under one end
barium counter
erally
Miscellaneous Services It
distention
refrigeration.
effects
visibility
of
spilled
dark and
A
solutions. light
when working under
tiles
a
pattern
improves safe
light.
Rooms No special finishes are required for the x-ray rooms. Asphalt tile floors are satisfactory and a pattern of alternating dark and light tiles is also desirable here. Plaster walls and ceilings are acceptable, but accoustical tile ceilings are preferred since they aid in reducing reverberation. X-Ray
ToilotS Tile floors and wainscot desirable for easy cleaning.
Doctors' Viewing
Room
recommended
to
are
highly
Acoustical treatment is lessen the possibility of doctors' conversations being overheard by nearby waiting patients.
well-defined pattern of
the department
air
movement
within
necessary to provide an acceptable environment. In order to prevent the spread of odors from the radiographic and fluoroscopic rooms, darkroom, toilets, and janitor's closets, the ventilation system should be designed so that a negative dir pressure relative to the adjoining corridors will be maintained in these rooms. This can be done by exhausting more air from these rooms than is supplied to them, and by reversing this procedure in the corridors. Doors to the toilets and the janitor’s closet should be undercut or louvered so that air from the corridors may flow into these areas and be exhausted without recirculation. Because of the odor problem, the air from the fluoroscopic and x-ray rooms should not be recirculated during the time these rooms are in use, unless adequate odor removal equipment is incorporated in the ventilation system. For economical operation, where odor control equipment is not used, the exhaust system should be provided with motoroperated dampers, switched from within the room, which will direct the air to the outdoors when the rooms are being used, or recirculate the air during idle periods. As the darkroom will be used for longer periods than the x-ray rooms, an independent system to exhaust the air to the outdoors should be provided. The exhaust from the darkroom should be controlled from a switch in the room and the system should be damis
Health
HOSPITALS Diagnostic X-Ray Suite
X-ray department, (a) Before expansion, (b) After expansion.
Fig. 4
pered to regulate the amount of air handled. The exhaust from the film dryer in the lightroom should be connected into the darkroom exhaust system The following conditions are recommended for the comfort of patients and personnel:
A temperature and Waiting Areas of 72° F with a relative humidity of 50 per cent and a ventilation rate of 1-1% air changes Administration
per hour.
A temperature
Patients' and Technicians' Corridors
75° F
of to 80 F with relative humidity of 50 per cent and a ventilation rate of 2 air changes per hour. 10
Rooms A temperature of 75° F to 80° F with relative humidity of 50 per cent and a ventilation rate of 6 air changes
Fluoroscopic and X-Ray
per hour. Darkroom
A temperature
1
Overhead tube conveyor (O.T.C.I
2.
O.T.C. ceiling tracks
3.
Image
4.
Negator with TV and 90-mm
5
Table
6.
Table
of
72° F with
intensifier carriage
7
Pedestal table
8
Stretcher
9
Control
Transformer 11. High-voltage adapter
12
kit
Planigraph mounted on ceiling track
13. Franklin headstand
14
Mobile TV monitor
15. Wall-mounted cassette holder 16. High-capacity autoprocessor 17. Cassette transfer cabinet
18
Multibank
19
Replenisher tanks
20
Wall-mounted cable catch
film
viewer
21. Intensifier power supply mounted on shelf above control 22.
TV
control
mounted on
shelf
above control
23. Planigraph control 24. High-speed starter mounted on wall 25. Single-plane film changer 26. Program selector 27. Single-plane parked
Fig. 5
488
Typical radiographic room.
rela-
tive
humidity of 50 per cent and a ventilation
rate of 10 air
changes per hour.
Fire Safety
To provide an adequate measure of fire safety for the patients and the staff in this department, consideration must be given to factors of design and construction relating to fire prevention and fire protection. The basic structure should be built with fire resistive materials and incombustible finishes and provided with approved equipment. Closed metal files are recommended for storage of x-ray films. If open shelves are used instead, an automatic sprinkler system should be installed over this storage area to neutralize the hazard of the large volume of combustible materials which would be exposed to possible fire. Fire extinguishers (carbon dioxide type preferred) should be provided, as located on the plans, to assist in controlling fire.
accordance with good fire safety practwo means of egress are provided in the plan: one at the entrance to the department and an emergency exit located off the patient's corridor (door No. 53). The emergency fire exit should lead directly to the ground In
tice,
level outside the building,
through an appro-
priate exit stairway.
Plan
B- Design
for
Expansion
department, designed to This handle a daily average of about 20 patient examinations, could satisfactorily serve a hospital of 50 to 100 beds, depending upon the extent of outpatient services provided. As in Plan A, its volume of examinations can be increased, depending on the staffing pattern and other factors, discussed previously.
one-machine
(See Fig.
The
3.)
staff
usually
required
for
this
work-
Health
HOSPITALS Diagnostic X-Ray Suite
Equipment
list
1. Control
10.
TV monitor mounted on
1 1
Program selector
19. Cine control cabinet
cart
2.
Power
3.
Spectrum special procedure table
12. Intensifier power supply
4.
Plane film changer
13.
TV
5.
Single-plane film changer
14
Additional power unit cabinet to house cine equipment
6.
Overhead tube conveyor 10 T
7. O.T.C.
units cabinets
.
control unit
17. Cine smoother tank 18. Cine powerstat
shown dotted
radiologist, 1 part-time load includes: 1 technician, 1 secretary-receptionist-technician, 1
orderly (as needed). This plan will result in
a
functional
unit.
has another important advantage in that it may be expanded to include all the features of Plan A. Such expansion is usually indicated when the hospital is served by a fulltime radiologist, when the average daily load approaches 30 examinations per day, and when the proportion of time-consuming examinations becomes high. Expansion frequently problems occur in a hospital of 100 beds or less, where there is only one x-ray machine and a part-time It
radiologist.
As
the volume of
work increases,
spends more time at the hossecond machine is installed. Unfortunately, in most of these cases, the lack of the radiologist pital,
and
a
kit
21. Cassette transfer cabinet
22
Wall-mounted cable catch
23. High-capacity processor 24. Replenisher tanks
26. Airflex biplane control
Intensifier carriage
Negator mounted with TV and 35-mm cine
Typical vascular layout. Equipment
above control
25. Multibank film viewer
9.
6
shelf
shelf
16. Cine bias tank
8.
Fig.
mounted on
mounted on
15. High-voltage adapter
C.)
ceiling track
20. Operator's control
is
for future installation.
planning for a future expansion program and in an inefficient layout. This limits the usefulness of the equipment
expansion area results
and the efficiency of the staff. Examples of such limitations are: poor location of the darkroom in relation to the new x-ray room, inadequate size of the darkroom, insufficient number of toilet facilities and dressing rooms, lack of office and waiting areas, and limited film filing space.
Remodeling an x-ray department is more expensive than remodeling other areas of a hospital because of the shielding, wiring, and plumbing. Expansion of the x-ray department should be incorporated in the original plan. Roughing in the plumbing and building in the shielding and electrical conduits in the expansion space will result in future savings and an efficient x-ray suite.
Minimum
alterations
to
Plan
to duplicate the facilities of Plan
B necessary
A would be
the remodeling of the film collection area to accommodate a new control booth, the elimination of the partition between the lightroom and reception space, the elimination of the
dressing rooms and of the partition behind them. Until the need for remodeling becomes apparent, part of the administration offices of the hospital may temporarily be situated in the expansion space. When enlarging the x-ray department, other space may then be added to the administration department. The dotted
on Fig. 4 illustrate how this expansion may be designed A typical radiographic room is shown in Fig. 5; a typical vascular layout is shown in
lines
Fig 6
489
Health
HOSPITALS Pharmacy Legend 1. Pneumatic tube 2. Desk
station
4.
Typewriter, electric, nonmovable carriage Chair
5.
Files,
6
Files,
3.
intermediate height swinging panel, strip insert type revolving on two levels
7.
File,
8.
Table, movable, 2 feet by 3 feet
9.
Waste receptacle
12.
Photocopier File, 2-drawer Utility pole
13.
Telephone
14
Shelving, adjustable, 12 inches
10.
11.
15. Safe 16. 17.
18 19.
20. 21.
Dumbwaiter, open both sides
22.
Cabinet, with sink, drain board Cabinet, wall-mounted
23.
26.
on top of hood Hood, laminar airflow, vertical or horizontal Counter, with open adjustable shelving beneath
27.
Cart, storage
28
Carts, utility
29.
Desk, small Bookcase, wall-mounted File cabinet, 5-drawer
24. 25.
30 31
34 35.
Shelving, adjustable, rail-mounted
33.
SCALE
10
FT
1 Pharmacy department in a 100-bed hospital. (From Planning for Hospital Pharmacies, No. (HRA)77-4003, U.S. Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, Washington, D.C., 1977.)
Fig.
490
Bins,
File, visible index type Counter, with adjustable shelves beneath Shelving, wall-mounted, 9 inches
32.
0
Refrigerator, with freezer Counter, with file drawer, bins Shelving, adjustable, 7 inches Counter, dispensing Two-shelf unit above counter
DHEW
Pub.
Health
HOSPITALS Pharmacy
Legend 1. Pneumatic tube 2. Desk
station
3.
Typewriter, electric, nonmovable carriage
4.
Chair
5.
Files,
6.
Files,
7.
File,
intermediate height swinging panel, strip
8.
Desk, special design
9.
Waste receptacle
12.
Photocopier Photocopier, cabinet Utility pole
13.
Telephone
14.
Shelving, adjustable, 12 inches
10.
11.
15.
Delivery truck
16.
Refrigerator, with freezer
17.
Refrigerator,
18.
Refrigerator, pass-through, counter height
19.
24.
Counter, dispensing Two-shelf unit above counter Dumbwaiter, open both sides Cabinet, with sink, drainboard Cabinet, wall-mounted Bins, on top of hood
25
Hood, laminar
26.
Counter, with open adjustable shelving beneath
27.
Cart, storage
20.
21. 22. 23.
open
front type
airflow, vertical or horizontal
28.
Carts, utility
29.
Desk, small Bookcase, wall-mounted File cabinet, 5-drawer
30. 31.
32. 33.
34. 35.
File, visible index type Counter, with adjustable shelves beneath Shelving, wall-mounted, 9 inches Shelving, adjustable, rail-mounted
36. Shelving, adjustable, 24 37.
s c
a
10
inches
Counter, with adjustable shelves beneath
38.
Panels, acoustical
39.
File, rotary
40.
Ledge
mechanical
f T
i e
2 Pharmacy department in a 300-bed hospital. (From Planning for Hospital Pharmacies, No. (HRA)77-4003, U.S. Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, Washington, D.C., 1977.) Fig.
insert type
revolving on two levels
DHEW
Pub.
491
Health
HOSPITALS Teletherapy Units requirements, assume responsibility for the design as to shielding provided and furnish the supporting information required in Application Form AEC-313 relative to exposure rates in areas surrounding the teletherapy room and occupancy factors assigned. Fundamental decisions as to: (1) the type of machine, (2) strength of the source* (3) desired location, and (4) the shielding required for floor, walls, and ceiling must be made before the building's structural system can be designed. During the early design, it may be determined that the structural system cannot support the weight of the shielding, or perhaps soil conditions will not permit sufficient excavation for a subgrade installation. It may then be necessary to change or alter one or more of the following: the machine or its operation, the source strength or the location of the final
By WILBUR R. TAYLOR, WILLIAM A. MILLS, and
JAMES
G.
TERRILL, JR.
TELETHERAPY UNITS Radiation and Architectural Considerations for
Cobalt-60 Unit
By the term teletherapy, we are restricting ourselves to the use of radiation at a distance; that is, the subject and source are separated by a distance of 50 centimeters or more. In particular, we are concerned with the use of the radioactive isotopes cobalt-60 and cesium137 as sources of radiation in teletherapy units.
We
have restricted our discussion to 60 Co Cs, primarily because they are the more familiar of the isotopes suggested for use in teletherapy units. We are not including the use of radium and high energy x-rays, since some of the problems associated with these are quite different in their solution and nature. The primary purposes of this article are to furnish architects who are anticipating a teletherapy unit with information on basic radiation protection ideas and techniques, and to serve as a guide in the solutions of certain architectural problems. We are by no means attempting to evaluate the advantages and disadvantages of 60 Co and ,37 Cs units against
and
137
other types of units. For a discussion of the fundamentals of radiation shielding and a glossary of radiation terminology, see Architectural Record, November, 1957,
pages 218-220.
planning a cobalt installation, it should be understood that each type of machine and its location within the building will present a different problem which will require an individual solution. Consequently, no one type plan can be designed which will take care of the various requirements presented by the shielding In
machines and installations. The archidependent upon other professionals for specific technical information he needs before he can intelligently design a building containing a cobalt teletherapy unit. The problems
different tect is
incurred
may
location,
and structural and functional design
materially affect the orientation,
of the building. Therefore, during preliminary
design
stages,
cooperation between and radiation physicist develop an efficient and ecoclose
architect, radiologist,
necessary to nomical layout. It should be noted that the Atomic Energy is
Commission places
upon the installation and use
room.
To those not familiar with such shielding problems, the included plans have been developed to illustrate the shielding necessary for three types of machines in specific locations. However, before considering the detailed plans, it may be desirable to discuss some of the general requirements of such facilities. Location
The cobalt
suite should adjoin the x-ra.y therapy department. This location permits the joint use of waiting, dressing, toilet, examination, work and consultation rooms. In addition, it offers the important advantage of having the staff concentrated in one area, thereby eliminating the considerable loss of time involved in traveling to a remote location. This is an important consideration and justifies the cost of any additional shielding that may be necessary to achieve it. A location below grade, unoccupied above and below, will require less shielding. However, if such a location separates the cobalt and the x-ray therapy departments, it may be more costly in both loss of staff time and efficiency than the cost of concrete shielding amortized over several years. If, for example, twenty-five minutes per day are lost in traveling to a remote location, one additional patient could be treated in this time each day — or 240
patients per year.
492
Assuming
a staff salary of
$20,000 per year, this loss of twenty-five minutes per day results in an indirect salary loss of $1032 per year, which would soon equal the cost of shielding in a new facility. A corner location for the cobalt room is usually desirable since through traffic is eliminated, only two interior walls require shielding, distance to the property line utilizes the inverse square law to reduce shielding and the structural requirements are more easily solved.
Entrance
The primary purpose
of specific en-
trance construction is to protect personnel. It should also provide sufficient space to admit a stretcher and the largest crated piece of equipment. In some cases, a considerable savings in cost of assembling equipment may be had by making the door and maze large enough to admit the crated assembled machine. For this purpose, some manufacturers specify a door opening of 4 by 7 ft and a minimum distance of 6 ft at the end of the maze. Rather than add large amounts of lead to doors, the shielding problem may be solved to some degree by having the door to the teletherapy room open into a maze. This maze should be built so that no primary radiation could fall directly on the door. In designing doors for such a room, a good practice is to have a door of wood with a layer of lead. This lead can either be on the inside surface, or
between layers of wood. Commercially available x-ray doors serve well for this purpose.
The space between the door and
floor can usube shielded by using a lead strip under the door or by making a slight rise in the floor containing lead, on the outer side of the door.
Lead shielding at the jamb and head between the frame and buck may be eliminated by the use of a combination frame and buck set
in
concrete. For safety precautions, the door lock should be such that the door can be readily opened from inside the cobalt room. Control View Window It is standard practice to locate this window at a height which will permit the operator to be seated during the treatment period, 4 ft-0 in. from the floor to the center of the window being an optimum distance. In plan, the window should be located in the area of minimum radiation and for convenient observation of the patient. This position, for a rotational machine, would be along the axis of rotation, and for a fixed beam unit, 90 to the plane of tilt. From the control view window the entire room should be in full view, using mirrors when necessary. The glass should contain lead or other materials in amounts which would provide shielding equivalent to the surrounding concrete. The frame is usually packed with lead wool and should be designed to offset
shielding loss of the reduced concrete thickness at beveled areas. The cost of such special glass and frame increases rapidly with size and an 8 by 8 in. window is considered an optimum size.
the
Heating and Ail Conditioning The only problem in relation to heating and air conditioning not en-
Teletherapy
Room
countered
Details
in other buildings is that of providshielding where walls are pierced with supply and return ducts. The usual solution is
ing Size
The room
size
may
vary to suit different
manufacturers' equipment. A room approximately 15 ft by 1 8 ft by 9 ft-6 in. plus the necessary entrance maze, will accommodate most of the machines commercially available with the exception of the largest rotating models. For reasons of cost, the room should be as compact as possible after allowing space to install the
Taylor is a Hospital Architect in the Division of Hospital and Medical Facilities, Bureau of Medical Service, Public Health Service, Department of Health, Education, and Welfare and William A Mills and James G Terrill, Jr are respectively Radiation Physicist and Chief of Radiological Health Program, Division of Sanitary Engineering Services, Bureau of State Services, Public Health Service
Wilbur R
tions are not taken.
ally
responsibility
applicant for conditions of of the facility. Since the use of a facility is largely dependent upon the conditions of installation, it is to the applicant's advantage to secure the services of a radiation physicist at the inception of a project. His function is to advise the applicant and architect on radiation
escape through such possibilities could result in overexposure to personnel, if proper precau-
ment
equipment and
to locate ducts
and openings in walls which are and offset the path of
least subject to radiation
ducts through the wall, lead or other high density material being added, where necessary, to maintain the shielding value of the wall displaced by ducts.
to position the treat-
table.
Shiolding The shielding necessary for a room must not only be considered in terms of floor, ceiling and wall shielding, but also such things as doors, windows, ventilation and heating
ducts, and safety locks. Radiation that might
service required for the vary with each manufacturer’s equipment. Voltage will vary from 110-single phase to 220-three phase for large machines. Electrical
Electrical
machine
will
Room
lighting should assure
preferably from or an indirect type of fixture. illumination,
good cove It
is
over-all
lighting
essential
Health
HOSPITALS Teletherapy Units
ROOM
FOR COBALT-60 FACILITIES
By U.S. Public Health Service
Fig.
1
Fixed
beam
uni*.*
CURB
Location Plan
LINE
(Above Grade)
SYMBOLS Full
Occupancy Controlled
Full
Occupancy Uncontrolled
Partial
Occupancy Uncontrolled
For Design Requirements see next page.
Occasional Occupancy Uncontrolled
The shielding indicated on the accompanying plans
was computed on a
curie source.
Because of
now commonly however,
not
*\Vith Primary
decrease
significantly.
the plan, use of a result in
high cost,
it
5,000 not
is
used. Reduction of the source,
does
requirements
its
basis of a
For
the
shielding
example,
in
2,000 curie source would
a reduction of the thickness of wall
Beam
Restricted to Floor and
A by of 5
3 in.
in.;
for a
500
curie source, a reduction
more. Since greatest cost
is
in
forming,
new
in
for
and
would
most cases, be a small part of
slabs could be reduced to the minimum struc-
illustrate the
floor
less shielding
be necessary and with no occupancy, these
the
cost
the total cost of the installation.
To
full-
above and below.
of concrete
construction,
shielding will,
time uncontrolled occupancy
With controlled occupancy
such savings are relatively small. In
have been computed for locations with
maximum required
ceiling,
the
tural
shielding
thicknesses
shown
is
requirements. An underground
the only
way, short of
limiting the
location
machine,
of reducing the thickness of exterior walls.
One Wall
493
t
Health
HOSPITALS Teletherapy Units Fig. 2
Rotational unit with primary
beam
absorber.
SYMBOLS Full
Occupancy Controlled
Full
Occupancy Uncontrolled
Partial
Occupancy Uncontrolled
Occasional Occupancy Uncontrolled
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
MPD =
Controlled Area
Uncontrolled Area
MPD =
5.0
0.5
Rem
5.0
Rem
Yr
60
Wk
Rem
== 0.5
Rem
52
WK
=
~Y 7 Full
Occupancy
T
=
=
1
00 MRem
Wk 9.6
MRem
Wk
1
Control space, residences, play areas, wards, office work rooms, darkrooms, corridors and waiting space large enough to hold
desks and rest rooms used by radiologic staff and others routinely exposed to radiation. Partial
Occupancy Corridors
in
T
= %
X-ray departments too narrow for future desk space, rest rooms not used by radiologic personnel, parking
rooms.
Occasional Occupancy
T=V\
Stairways, automatic elevators, streets, closets too small for future workrooms, toilets not used by radiologic personnel.
Source 5000 Curies
494
lots, utility
Health
HOSPITALS Teletherapy Units Fig.
3
Rotational unit without primary
beam
absorber.
For Design Requirements see previous page.
A
primary
beam absorber on a machine
reduces the shielding requirements considerably.
However, some radiologists prefer
to
use a machine without the absorber, because
of
its
greater
flexibility,
and
some machines are designed or without the absorber. the
room
shielding
for this reason to
be used with
Under these conditions
should
be designed for
use either way. The plan and section shown
here
illustrate the
necessary shielding.
495
Health
HOSPITALS Teletherapy Units; Electroencephalographic Suite that the operator be able to observe any movement of the patient during treatment and
shadows produced by
a rotating
machine
inter-
fere with observation.
providing a safety lock for the door, it has been found of great value to interlock the machine control with the door, so that opening the door automatically shuts off the machine. Conduits should be provided for power and control wiring. In
The general effect to be created department should be one of cheerfulness and restfulness. Color and even murals have been used effectively on the walls of the cobalt room. The usual hospital finishes such as acoustical ceiling tile and resilient flooring are desirEnvironment
in this
able
in
this area.
Unless previously designed for super voltage x-ray, remodeling an existing building can be expensive. It is often imposRomodoling
sible
build
to
makes
in
sufficient
shielding
which
necessary to control nearby occupancy and restrict direction of the beam, thereby handicapping the usefulness of the machine. Other problems such as relocating plumbing, heating, electrical services and disturbing the normal operation of the building during remodeling must be considered. In new construction, concrete shielding is relatively cheap, but in remodeling the cost is high. For this reason the use of masonry units may be preferable since no form work is necessary and the work can be performed intermittently.
it
Good
workmanship,
of
course,
is
necessary to prevent voids in mortar joints. In some cases it might be better to add to the building, rather than to remodel an existing portion. Normal hospital operation would not be interfered with, costs may be lower and a more efficient layout would probably result.
preparation and examination of and storage space for supplies and voluminous EEG recordings. The preparation and examining space should, as a minimum, comprise two rooms: one with a hospital-type bed and equipment for the preparation of the
space
for
patients,
patient; the other containing the
ELECTROENCEPHALOGRAPHIC SUITE Introduction
An electroencephalographic (EEG) examination consists of the measurement of electrical potentials of the brain as measurable at the scalp. It requires an extremely sensitive instrument located so as to be as free as possible from outside electrical disturbances. The examination requires careful preparation of the patient and involves securing several pairs of electrodes to the patient's scalp, connecting the conductors from the electrodes to the EEG unit, operating the EEG unit to obtain recordings under definite physical conditions of the patient, removing the electrodes and any adhesive, if used in attaching the electrodes. Suitable space must be provided for the neurologist and his staff to examine patients, read the recordings, prepare reports, and keep records. The suite should be arranged to provide office facilities for the neurologist and typist or secretary, a workroom for technician.
496
instru-
a
available for patients' use.
Although shielding of the patient's room against electrical disturbances is not always required, it is usually desirable. Where such disturbances are excessive for the quality of work required, a completely shielded room may be necessary. The most common electrical disturbances are caused by high-frequency equipment such as diathermy and radio, static electricity, high-voltage transmission lines, large transformer banks, large motors, nearby powerful FM broadcast stations, and conductors carrying heavy currents. To minimize disturbances from power systems, all power conductors in the vicinity of the EEG machine should be metal armored or installed in metal raceway. Large or main electrical conductors should be routed as far away from the EEG examining locations as practicable, both horizontally and vertically, and use of fluorescent lighting in the vicinity of the EEG unit should be avoided. A reasonable amount of soundproofing of the examining room is desirable. EEG recordings and case records are bulky and require considerable space for filing. Open shelving of the large pigeonhole type is reason-
ably satisfactory for filing the large folders of active case records. This filing space should be located in the office or preferably in an
adjacent
By NOYCE L. GRIFFIN, Electrical Engineer, Architectural and Engineering Branch, Division of Hospital and Medical Facilities, Public Health Service, U.S. Department of Health. Education and Welfare.
EEG
desk or table, and other facilities needed by the technician (Fig. 1 ). A more efficient layout may be had by dividing the preparation and examining space into separate rooms. This would increase the patienthandling capacity of the unit, as one patient could be prepared while another is examined (Fig. 2). Toilet facilities should be conveniently ments,
room convenient
to the neurologist.
Workroom The workroom
facilities
and equipment nor-
mally consist of the EEG unit, preferably the console type, photo-stimulator panel, a supply cabinet for recording paper, preparation materials, an electric clock with sweep second hand, a workbench with wood top and cabinet below for EEG maintenance and general use, and a general office-type desk or table. Switches for control of lights in workroom and examining room should be located in the workroom. Shelving for EEG recordings and case records may be located in this room unless other suitable space is provided, and should be approximately 12 in. deep.
Examining Room
Doors through which patients must pass enter the examining
room should be
to
10 in. wide to permit easy passage of stretcher or wheelchair. The size of the examining room 3
ft
should be sufficient to accommodate a hospital bed and allow enough additional space to permit the technician to work efficiently. For sleep inducement, exterior windows should be equipped with shades to partially darken the room. As it is desirable that the patient be in full view of the operator, the examining room should have sufficient width to permit the bed to be placed parallel to the wall nearest the workroom. This wall should have two 3-in.
above the floor, one for passelectrode cable with plug attached, the other for passing the photostimuopenings, 20 ing
lator
in.
EEG
the
conductors.
The
between the workroom and the room should be provided with a glass
partition
patient's
window
not less than 24 in. high and 36 in. wide, mounted with the lower edge 43 in. from the floor. This window should be located to provide good vision of the patient. In the preparation area, floor and sink are subjected to slaimng and eroding effects of chemicals such as acetone and collodion used for setting and removing electrodes to and from patient's scalp. The sink should be vitreous china set in a countertop resistant to acid and alkali, with cabinets below. A masonry-type floor such as tile or terrazzo is recommended in the preparation area. Solvents such as acetone used for removal of electrode adhesive, when spilled or dropped on the floor, are injurious to the resilient type of flooring materials such as vinyl, asphalt, rubber, or linoleum. When air-drying paste is used in setting electrodes, means should be provided for quick drying. Hand-held hair dryers are sometimes used, but a low-pressure compressed-air outlet is preferred. Some technicians use a self-supporting conducting paste for electrode attachment that requires no drying; others use pintype electrodes, which do not require paste or adhesive, for insertion into the scalp.
Shielding
may be
required, depending
upon the location with respect to sources of disturbances and the quality of recordings required. It is recommended that in Shielding
equipment used and
its
new construction
shielding be provided in all examining rooms, and that omission of shielding be considered only when converting existing rooms. Properly installed shielding of the examining rooms will eliminate or minimize outside disturbances caused by static electrical discharges and high-frequency equipment. It has little effect on magnetic disturbances such as those produced by power transformers, high-voltage equipment, and current-carrying conductors. For minimizing disturbances due to magnetic forces, the most effective means is
distance. shielding
Where
equipment
is
required,
may be obtained from
and
panels
for completely shielding the
room
several manufacturers,
or as an alternate, satisfactory shielding
may
be constructed with copper insect screening. The strips of shielding material should be bonded and soldered at intervals of about 2 ft or less and should entirely cover all walls, floors, ceiling, doors, and windows. The screening should pass on the room side of any lighting fixture or electrical device without making contact with it. Wall and ceiling finish materials and the floor covering may be applied over the shielding if desired. In this case, the shielding material should be copper sheeting to preclude the possibility of interferences developing in the shielding due to the installation of plaster or mastic materials. The shield should be grounded at one point only. The ground connection should be brought out to a terminal arrangement convenient for connection to the EEG unit and for disconnection for testing. Double screening produces a
more
effective shield than single screening.
Shielding efficiency
is
further
increased
by
insulating one layer of screen from the other
Health
HOSPITALS Physical Therapy Department
Equipment
list
Electroencephalograph, console type
1.
2.
Stool
3.
Steel
cabinet with shelving and door
4.
Work
bench, cabinet below
5.
Shelf
6.
Photostimulator panel
7.
Clock with sweep second hand above
(if
used)
glass panel 8.
Clock outlet
9.
Adjustable hospital bed counter, cabinets below
10.
Sink
11.
Sanitary waste receptacle
12.
Chair for patient preparation
in
13.
Hook
14.
Mirror above sink
15.
Glass
16.
Two
strip
window
holes through wall, 3
20
in.,
in.
from floor 17.
Armchair
18.
General office-type desk and chair
19.
Typist's
20.
21.
and chair Two-pole switch for light in patient's
22.
Filing
desk and chair
Executive-type desk
room compartments
for
EEG
record-
ings 23.
Fig.
Recommended
2
except
room
at the
suite with
one ground
File cabinets, legal size
24.
Cabinet above for electrodes,
25.
Work
etc.
table
26.
Duplex outlets
27.
Venetian blind
separate preparation and examining rooms.
point.
If
a
screened
provided, all electric conductors entering the screened area should be equipped with filters to prevent disturbances by these conductors. is
space, location and
work
areas. Ventilation,
and related considerations also contribute toward providing a suitable environment. The keynote is function. lighting, interior finish
located to minimize problems of transporting patients and to facilitate giving bedside treatment when necessary. At least half of the patients treated in a general hospital physical therapy department are likely to be outpatients. With this in mind, special attention trally
Of the many environmental factors which condition the effectiveness of physical therapy service to patients, the most important are
*This material is condensed from the chapter "Suitable Environment in the manual Physical Therapy Essentials of a Hospital Department prepared by the Joint Committee of the American Hospital Association and the American Physical Therapy Association Planning is by Thomas P Galbraith and ”
Peter N Jensen, Hospital Architects of the Architectural and Engineering Branch, Division of Hospital and Medical Facilities, Public Health Service
should be given to accessibility, and to having as few steps as possible to climb, as few long corridors and heavy doors to negotiate. A ground floor location, convenient for both inand out-patients and for access to an outdoor exercise area,
is
recommended.
Availability of daylight
also
be
new
considered
in
and fresh selecting
air
a
should
location.
hospitals,
quently placed
in
It
is
number
of
space needed depends on the
of patients treated, the kinds of dis-
and the be considered
abilities
to
particularly
occupational
Space
treatments is
required.
the fact that
consuming equipment — such as
minimum
Also
some a
spacewhirlpool
bath, treatment tables, parallel bars, etc.
— are
essentials for even a one— therapist
department. These pieces of equipment will not be multiplied in direct proportion to increases in staff and patient load. Efforts to correlate bed capacity and physical therapy space requirements are not satisfactory. Hospitals with 50-100 beds may serve large
numbers
of out-patients.
space given over
physical therapy is frean area which includes other out-patient services, social service, occupaIn
of
The amount
Location is closely related to function. The area selected for physical therapy should be cen-
recreation.
important that physical and therapy be in close proximity.
Amount Location
PHYSICAL THERAPY DEPARTMENT*
therapy,
tional
hospital
is,
The amount
of
therapy in a small justifiably, out of proportion to the to physical
bed capacity.
No absolute standard can be recommended as the amount of space needed for physical therapy in a general hospital. The most that
497
Health
HOSPITALS Physical Therapy Department
TYPE
"A”
cure
PLAN
AREA
1116
SQUARE
FEET
VAF tc NPROX*Mm» * O' TFWOUGHOF LNT« F*A1MiNT NXA PESO. TO CA«Y MW UK
*
1
GRAPHIC SCALE
NOTE MAJOR
PIECES
PHYSICAL THERAPIST
Equipment 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
list
Posture Mirror Parallel Bars Steps Stall Bars
Gym Mat
7.
Stationary Bicycle Sayer Head Sling Attached to
8.
Celling Pulley Weights
9.
Shoulder Wheel
6.
10.
11. 12.
Gym Mat
Hooks
Cart with Open Shelves
13.
Open Shelves Wheel Chair
14.
Shelf
15.
Wall Hooks Wall Cabinet
16. 17. 18. 19. 20.
21. 22.
23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34.
35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41
.
42. 43. 44.
Lavatory, Gooseneck Spout Water Closet
Hand
Rail
Waste Paper Receptacle Portable Equipment Adjustable Chair Whirlpool Chair Table Chair, preferable with Wheel Stretcher
Desk Swivel Chair File Cabinet Bookcase Bulletin Board Wall Desk (counter, shelf
below) Lavatory, Gooseneck Spout and Foot Control Wall Cabinet with Lock Treatment Table, Storage below Mirror and Glass Shelf over Lavatory Adjustable Stool
Laundry Hamper Sink with Dralnboard Paraffin Bath Glass Shelf over Sink Overbed Trapeze Three Single Outlets on separate branch circuits. 1 outlet 2-pole, 2 outlets 3-pole
45.
46. 47. 48. 49. 50.
arms
Folding Door Cubicle Curtain
Under Water Exercise Equipment Overhead Lift Coat Rack Telephone Outlet
Fig.
498
1
OF EOUlPMCNT RECOMMENCED FOR OP AID INDICATED ON TYPE PLANS
AND
Health
HOSPITALS Physical Therapy Department can be said
is that,
if
to plan for at least a
floor
About
space,
free
half of
(See Fig.
of
that
possible,
it
is
desirable
thousand square structural
feet of
obstructions.
should be exercise area.
1.)
This does not mean that a hospital cannot begin an effective physical therapy service in smaller quarters. Many have done so successfully, using to full advantage whatever space resources they had. But crowded quarters do subject the staff to strain and call for more than ordinary ingenuity and good humor in order to make it possible for patients to obtain maximum benefit from treatment.
Work Space Components Whatever the eventual
size of a physical ther-
apy department, from the very beginning plans must be made to provide certain kinds of work space. These essential components can be expanded, multiplied or refined as the physical therapy department grows but the fundamental requirements are the same for a small or large department. They include: (1) reception area, (2) staff space, (3) examining room, (4) treat-
ment areas,
(5) toilet facilities, (6) storage.
Experienced physical therapists have many suggestions for increasing the efficiency of physical therapy departments by giving attention to details of planning and arranging these component work areas. For example Reception area: Accommodations for inpatients and out-patients, if possible. Adequate space for stretcher and wheelchair patients. Staff space — private: Office space suitable for interviewing patients, attending to administrative
and
clerical duties,
housing
files,
etc.
Writing facilities for the staff adequate for dictation, record keeping. There should be space
Fig.
and dressing rooms separate from the patient area, either within the depart-
from motors call for special care and attention. Electrical and metal equipment in other treat-
ment
ment areas may
for staff lockers
or near to
it.
suffer
damage unless
the
Examining room: Floor to ceiling partitions for privacy. Arranged so that necessary examining equipment can remain in the room permanently. Possible to use this space for special tests and measurements or for treatment when privacy is desirable. Treatment area: There are three types of treatment areas: cubicle (dry), underwater exercise (wet) and exercise (open). Each is designed to meet the particular requirements of the special equipment used for different kinds
underwater exercise area is carefully planned Exercise area: Very flexible open space planned to accommodate patients engaged in diverse individual or group exercise activities. Used extensively by people in wheelchairs, on
of treatment.
patients and staff,
Cubicle: Each unit large enough for the physical therapist to work on either side of the
should be designed
table without having to
move equipment
be-
longing in the cubicle. Preferably cubicles divided by curtains for easier access for wheelchair and stretcher cases, for expansion of usable floor area for gait analysis, group activity or teaching purposes. Curtain tracks should be flush with the ceiling and curtains should have open panels at the top for ventilation when drawn. Both curtains and tracks should be sturdy. In or near the cubicles, out-patients need a place or locker for their outer clothing. Underwater exercise area: All equipment requiring special plumbing and water supply concentrated in one section of the department but accessible and adjacent to other treatment areas. Should include a treatment table, especially in the room with a tank or exercise pool. Fixed overhead lifts are absolutely essential for the efficient use of tanks and failure to provide lifts severely limits the usefulness of this valuable equipment. Plumbing and other installation requirements, humidity and noise
crutches or canes, or with other disabilities which limit their motion and agility. At least one wall should be reinforced for the installation of stall bars and similar equipment (see Fig. 2).
Toilet facilities: Separate toilet facilities for if
possible. Patient facilities to
accommodate wheel-
chair patients. If the department serves small children, seat adaptors with foot rests should
be provided. Storage: Designed to meet special needs in and near work areas. Should also be storage space on the wards for equipment and supplies usually needed for bedside treatments. For wheelchairs, stretchers, etc., it is best to plan “carport” space, not closets. All storage space should be accessible, simple, well lighted.
Special Considerations
Adequate, controlled ventilation is extreme importance in a physical therapy department. Many of the treatment procedures require the use of dry or moist heat, or active exercise, which raise body temperatures. A Ventilation
of
continuous, reliable flow of fresh
air
comfort of patients and includes protection from drafts.
staff.
sential to the
is
es-
This
Air conditioning, desirable for the entire department, will be a necessity for certain areas of the physical therapy department, in most
2
499
Health
HOSPITALS Physical Therapy Department; Occupational Therapy Department 4.
sections of the country. The reduction of humidity for comfort, protection of equipment and reduction of the hazard of slippery floors
they are used by patients, especially the flow of traffic from one unit to another. Try to avoid needless traffic. Try to conserve the energies of
a quarterly basis.
makes
staff.
Location of the department in a hospital. Daylighted space as close to patient areas as possible and readily accessible to toilet facilities is recommended. Proximity to the physical therapy department is advisable. Necessary facilities include running water, gas, and electric outlets; dust collectors for power woodworking tools are recommended.
conditioning vital in the underwater exercise area. It has been demonstrated as desirable in the exercise area and in treatment cubicles, especially where heat producing equipment is used. Air conditioning engineers should be consulted before ventilation equip-
ment
air
Visit other physical therapy
find out
would
departments and
what the physical therapists like or to change in the layouts of their
like
own departments.
installed.
is
Sinks Hospitals hand washing lavatories with hot and cold water mixing outlets, preferably foot operated, should be located at the proper height in convenient places. At least one sink
should be of sufficient width and depth to the care of wet packs and other special washing needs.
By
ALONZO W. CLARK, AIA
oration of the
with the collab-
American Occupational
Therapy Association
accommodate
OCCUPATIONAL THERAPY DEPARTMENT Interior
The
Finishes
activity
of
patients
in
wheelchairs, on stretchers and crutches subjects floors and walls to heavy wear. Materials will stand up under such rough usage, remain attractive and require a minimum of maintenance should be specified despite higher
which
costs.
surfaces of the department should have a durable and attractive wainscot to protect them against damage by wheelchairs, stretchers and carts. Ceramic wall tile or glazed structural units will serve the purpose but they emphasize the institutional character of the hospital. In patient areas this should be minimized as much as possible. In the last several years vinyl wall covering has gained in popularity as a wainscoting material, and to some extent for the entire wall. Two weights of the material are available; the heavier weight for areas subjected to severe abuse, the lighter weight for other parts of All interior wall
The use of decorative colors for interior finishes and equipment is, of course, highly desirable in this department as it is in other parts of the hospital. Research in “color therapy" for hospitals adds to decorators’ ideas the therapeutic value of combinations of pastel “Cool" pastels — green, blue, violet and their many derivatives are considered mildly restful. Some light colors in general are stimulating and may be of advantage in the exercise area.
colors.
—
accommodation
For
of
stretcher
and
wheelchair traffic, doors within the department should be at least 40 inches wide. Raised thresholds should be eliminated. Ceiling
increasing recognition of occupational therapy as an integral part of the medical rehabilitation program has resulted in its becoming an increasingly important element of hospital planning. These pages present a summary of the recommendations of the American Occupational Therapy Association on the planning of typical
occupational therapy departments. These basic plans and discussions were developed to serve only as guides for designing similar units, and will not be universally applicable
without some modification. This material was presented at length in the October. 1950, issue of HOSPITALS Journal of the American Hospital Association. For reprints of this article, which contains extensive equipment and supply lists for planning storage, write American Occupational Therapy Association, 6000 Exec,
utive Blvd., Suite 200. Rockville,
MD
solutions for occupational departments are largely dependent following factors:
Basic
the wall.
Doors
The
Moorings
These moorings, strategically
in the ceiling in treatment areas, have been found useful for attaching overhead equipment such as hoists, pulleys, bars, counter balancing equipment, etc. They should be constructed and attached to joists in such a manner that each supports at least 500 pounds.
located
20852. therapy
on
the
1 Number of patients to be treated On the basis of hospital surveys and committee recommendations, it was agreed that 30 per cent of hospital patients should normally be referred for occupational therapy. About 40 per cent of these would be treated in the clinic, and 60 per cent treated in their beds or on the wards. One occupational therapist in the clinic can generally accommodate about 15 patients in each of two daily sessions, one in the morning, one in the afternoon. This number will vary according to the type of patient — more psychiatric patients, fewer physically disabled
2. Floor space required by patients. Approximately 54 to 61 sq ft per patient is recommended for the entire department, including clinic, office and storage. For the clinic alone, 42 to 47 sq ft per patient is suggested to allow for easy circulation and use of equipment. These figures are based on a study of the needs
of a typical department.
Types of treatment media to be used. activities are used in occupational therapy departments throughout the country. Basic requirements for small units are as follows; these should be expanded for larger 3.
It is
impossible to anticipate
problems
all
of the practical
of layout in a particular building or
advance that one plan or another is A few guidelines, however, may be useful in making decisions about layout. Expect to expand and plan for it from the beto say in
units:
the right one.
a Bench work — carpentry, plastics, metal work including painting and finishing of com-
ginning. It is impossible to overestimate the value of the exercise area. Give it as many square feet of appropriate space as possible. Note the need to have the underwater exercise equipment grouped in one area, separate
pleted projects. b.
sewing and
fly-
but adjacent and accessible to the other treat-
ment areas.
disabilities.
tying,
When
500
Table work — leather, blockprinting,
work. c. Loom work — weaving, braiding. an active d. “Functional equipment” (not classification) — bicycle, jig saws and other adapted equipment for treatment of physical
deciding which units to place next to each other or group together, consider how
and
All
the above items must,
be adapted
to suit a particular type
size of hospital.
The Smaller Unit For hospitals up to a 250-bed capacity, a basic plan was evolved (see next page). At the rate of referral cited, up to 30 patients should be accommodated. -These could be cared for by one therapist, with a possible second therapist for ward service. On the basis of 15 patients per session at 54 sq ft per patient, the entire unit was allotted 813.75 sq ft (17% by 46% ft). The clinic area, planned at 42 sq ft per patient, totals 638.75 sq ft (17% by 36% ft). The minimum basic activities were provided for with 20
work stations ities
for flexibility in selection. Activrequiring bulky equipment such as print-
advanced ceramics were omitted. It that preparation and finishing could be done in the clinic or on a counter top in the storeroom. The following considerations were made for the three specific areas within ing and
was assumed
the department: 1 Clinic area. The first obvious requirement space for free circulation around the required equipment (see general list following). Space for parking at least 3 wheel chairs is also necessary. Double doors at shop entrance simplify moving equipment and supplies. Sliding doors for upper cabinets avoid interference with patients working at counter tops. No display case for finished articles was included as it was felt that this emphasized the product .
is
rather than therapeutic objectives. 2. Storage area. Space was provided for a mobile cart for servicing ward patients. A cabi-
net with
work top was included
for preparation
and finishing work. It was assumed that only 8-ft lengths of lumber and plywood would be stored in this basic unit, and that other closets, rooms, etc. in various parts of the hospital could be used for "dead storage." 3. Office area. Space was provided for the usual office furnishings. A large glass panel in front of the desk facilitates control and supervision of the unit.
patients.
Some 70-odd
Layout
of course,
Storage 3
art
facilities
should provide for
at least
months’ supply, as many institutions order on
Variations
for
Hospital
Types
The basic plan
is
directly applicable to psychiatric and general medical and surgical hospitals. In the latter
case, a bicycle jig of a
drill
saw
press stand
is
recommended
(a table
model
in
drill
place press
could be used). Tuberculosis hospitals require two minor changes: replacement of one floor loom and the braid-weaving frame with two industrial sewing machines. need the following hospitals Pediatric changes: a plan adaptable to division inlo two parts — one for small children, one for adolescents. For equipment changes, see plan. Tables should adjust in height. Physical disability hospitals can use the basic plan with a few variations in equipment. Although fewer patients can be treated per therapist, fewer will be able to come to the clinic for treatment; a second therapist will be needed for treatment in the wards.
The Larger Unit
A
basic plan for a typical occupational therapy
unit for large hospitals of approximately
500
Health
HOSPITALS Occupational Therapy Department 1.
Shadow board
2.
Electric tool grinder
3.
Tool storage and work
cabinet
bench 4.
2-man bench
5.
Electric |lg
6.
Drill
7.
Weave frame
8.
Step stool
9.
Stainless steel sink
taw
press
10. Chair 11.
Table—
11 A. Adjust-
able table 13.
loom Warping board
14.
Open
1
2.
Floor
shelving
15. Pull-out shelf 16. Storage cabinet 17.
Bench
for
loom
18. File cabinet
19.
Basic plan for psychiatric, tuberculosis and general hospitals
Book
shelf
and cabinet
20. Tool cabinet
21. Paint cabinet
and
22. Finishing bench
cabinets 23. Electric hot plate 24.
Lumber rack
25. Drinking fountain 26. Bulletin board 27. Storage bint
and
work bench 28. Table loom 29. Glass panel 30. Ironing board 31. Fluorescent light
32.
Ward
cart
33. Desk
34. Trash basket 35.
Plan adapted to physical disabilities hospitals
Sand box
36. Play house 37. Circular table 38. Cut-out table
—
adjustable 39.
Power
40. Bicycle
lathe jig
taw
41. Treadle tander 42. Accordion type
folding door 43. Large kiln
44. Small kiln 45.
Damp
closet
46. Potters wheel 47. Imposing table 48. Type cabinet 49. Printing press 50. Electric circular
saw
51. Typewriter table
52. Electric belt sander 53. Electric disc sander
54.
Sewing machine
Floor plant for typical occupational therapy department in hospitals up to 250-bed capacity. Fig.
1
501
Health
HOSPITALS Occupational Therapy Department
“1 H Floor plant for typical occupational therapy department in hospitals up to 500-bed capacity. Fig. 2
1.
Shadow board
cabinet
2. Electric tool grinder 3.
Tool storage and
4.
2-man bench Electric |ig taw
work bench 5.
press
6.
Drill
7.
Weave frame
8.
Step stool
9.
Stainless steel sink
10. Chair
G
J
11.
Table— 11 A. Adjustable table
13.
Floor loom Warping board
14.
Open
1
2.
shelving
15. Pull-out shelf 16. Storage cabinet
17. 1
8.
19.
Plan for psychiatric, physical disability and general hospitals
Bench File
for
loom
cabinet
Book
shelf
and cabinet
20. Tool cabinet
21. Paint cabinet 22. Finishing beach
and
cabinets 23. Electric hot plate 24.
Lumber rack
25. Drinking fountain
26. Bulletin board
and
27. Storage bint
work bench 28. Table loom 29. Glass panel 30. Ironing board 31. Fluorescent light
32.
Ward
cart
33. Desk 34. Trash basket 35.
Sand box
36. Play house 37. Circular table 38. Cut-out table
—
adjustable 39.
Power
lathe
40. Bicycle
jig
saw
41. Treadle tander
42. Accordion type folding door 43. Largo kiln
44. Small kiln 45.
Damp
closet
46. Potters wheel 47. Imposing table
48. Type cabinet 49. Printing press 50. Electric circular
taw
51. Typewriter table
52. Electric belt tander
SCALE.
53. Electric disc tander
54.
502
Sewing machine
Health
HOSPITALS Community Mental Health Center; Laboratory beds was shown previously. Again using the
3.
Library
same basis
for rate of patient referrals to the
4.
department (30 per cent of rated bed capacity), the large unit should accommodate 150 patients a day. The actual clinic load would be 60 patients (40 per cent of 50), or about 30 in each of two sessions. The unit as presented was planned on the basis of 31 patients. Using 61 sq ft per person, the gross area allotted the entire unit is approximately 1,880 sq ft. Net area of the clinic is about 1,450 sq ft, or 47 sq ft per person. This increased space per person over that
5.
Conference room Lobby and waiting Toilets: public, personnel
6.
Storage (for recreational and occupaequipment) 15. Supply and linen storage 14.
tional therapy
DIAGNOSTIC & TREATMENT
.
Office
2.
Clinical
3.
Pathology Bacteriology Washing and sterilizing
4. 5.
ceramics
printing
unit,
unit.
2.
Office.
3.
Storage.
4.
Ward preparation
(Sufficient to serve both outpatients
3.
Dental
patients.)
4.
Eye, ear, nose and throat Electroencephalography Radiology
% Activity
Wood,
plastics, metal
5.
6.
of
patients
.22
No
of
Ceramics Printing
9
3
5
2
100
31
Office
Storage room
psychiatric hospitals and, with minor in equipment, for hospitals treating physical disabilities Several units might be used for very large psychiatric hospitals. Pediatric hospitals are seldom as large as 500 beds; if so more personnel are needed. pitals,
changes
Compiled by the Architectural and Engineering Branch, Division of Hospital and Medical Facilities, U.S. Public Health Service; August Hoenack, Branch Chief
4.
Nurses
5.
Health educators Occupational therapists Rehabilitation counselors Recreation therapists Clerical operators Aides Research analyst Group therapy and conference
8.
1
1
.
may be
required in the overall programs of mental health centers. They can be in one or several buildings on one or several sites, even under one or several cooperating ownerships. The list is for review by architects and administrators whenever new facilities are planned.
ADMINISTRATION Office space for: 1. Director 2.
Assistant director
Nursing director Secretaries and typists 5. Business office Ancillary spaces: 1 Record room 2. Staff lounge
1.
workers
facilities:
Boiler
room and pump room
Engineer's office 3. Shower and locker room Maintenance shops: Carpentry, painting, mechanical, 2.
(Lobby, waiting space, and toilets may be combined with those in the administrative area.)
repair
rooms Employees'
facilities:
Locker, rest, toilet and shower rooms for various categories Storage: 1. Medical records 2. General storage (a minimum 20 sq ft per bed to be concentrated in one area)
INPATIENT FACILITIES
may be required for the following types of patients grouped in accordance with the local program. (Separate spaces for male and female. Treatment and diagnosis spaces for each category. Facilities
Patients 10. 1.
categories:
New
4. 5.
Criminalistic
Day care
7.
Night care Children a. Emotionally disturbed b.
Retarded
Each patient care
unit:
Waiting space for visitors 2. Doctors' offices and examination rooms 3. Offices for psychologists, social workers, therapist or others as required 4. Nurses' station and toilet 5. Conference room 6. Therapy space 7. Day room(s) 1
.
8.
Utility
4.
9.
Pantry Dining
1 1
.
room or
Locate the department as favorably as possible the laboratory staff and the ambulant inpatients and outpatients. A space on the first floor near an elevator is preferable. Also, another determinant in locating the laboratory is the consideration for future expansion. In determining the overall size of the laboratory, the first concern is the individual technical units. It is only after the size of these units has been established and an architectural layout has been developed to fit the program that the sum of the areas can accurately reflect the size of the laboratory department. The square-foot-per-bed ratio is no longer considered a desirable guide in determining the for
6.
8.
LABORATORY Preliminary Planning
admissions
Quiet ambulant Disturbed Alcoholic
3.
.
Laundry Separate sorting room Separate clean linen and sewing room Housekeeper's office and storage (near
Mechanical
Social
7.
facili-
linen storage)
3.
6.
.
2. 3.
Psychologists
3.
Facilities listed are those that
Garbage collecting and disposal
4.
2.
2.
CHECKLIST OF SPACES FOR A COMMUNITY MENTAL HEALTH CENTER
Refrigerators
5.
1
Office space for: 1. Psychiatrists
9.
Variations for Hospital Types The larger plan is suitable for general medical and surgical hos-
4.
7.
TREATMENT 12.
7
19
Dishwashing room
6.
10. EXAMINATION AND OUTPATIENT
patients
64
Dietitians' office
3.
Can washing room Day storage room 8. Staff dining room Housekeeping facilities:
General crafts (table activities)
.
2.
1. Space for small woodworking tools and benches for carpentry, metal work, leather work, printing, weaving, rug making, etc.
3.
in-
Dietary facilities: 1 Main kitchen and bakery
ties
2.
and
SERVICE DEPARTMENT
Occupational therapy:
area.
Three therapists plus three assistants could run clinic and wards. Space requirements for the various activities were determined from the following estimate:
FACILITIES
Morgue and autopsy
3. Small gymnasium Pharmacy department
activities,
AND SUPPLY
Basal metabolism and electrocardiology
following sections: 1. Clinic, including weaving and table activ-
bench
STERILIZING
1.
2.
Physical therapy: 1. Electrotherapy 2. Hydrotherapy with exercise
area,
room
Suites:
allowed in the smaller unit is the result of adding two activities requiring bulky equipment and separate rooms. These are ceramics and printing. It was also deemed essential to have a separate ward preparation room to serve the increased number of ward patients. To allow for a necessary dispersion factor, 10 extra work stations are provided in the clinic. The larger unit therefore contains the
ities
Stretcher alcove areas: 80 sq ft per bed
1 in alcoves and fourbed rooms 2. 100 sq ft in single rooms 3. 40 to 50 sq ft per patient in day rooms, preferably divided into one large and one small
Laboratory: .
Janitors' closet
17.
Minimum room
1
1
16.
nourishment
size of a hospital department because of the wide variation of such factors as type and size of hospital, pattern of usage, growth of the community, and medical practice. Plans for the
preparation
room
Washroom and
toilets
12.
Patients' lockers
13.
Showers and bathrooms
Planning the Laboratory for the General Hospital, Dept of Public Health Service Health, Education, and Welfare, 1963
503
Health
HOSPITALS Laboratory area should be based on work volumes within specific ranges, such as 40,000-75,000 tests, or 75,000-120,000 tests. The key to this method is to estimate the work volume and its breakdown into work units for laboratory
hospitals of different sizes. The following is an outline of the procedure which may be used in estimating needed laboratory space, based on the number of tests performed, personnel, and equipment. 1 Break down the total volume of work into units, such as hematology, urinalysis, chemistry, as previously noted. 2. Determine the number of technologists required in each department. The data shown in .
Table 1 may be used as a basis for this determination. 3. Determine the necessary equipment and space for the number of technologists required. For the purpose of developing guide material, the Architectural and Engineering Branch of the Division of Hospital and Medical Facilities collected data from 360 hospitals in addition to the data cc npiled by the Committee on Laboratory Plan ling of the College of American Pathologists. Tables 2, 3, 4, and 5 present these data. Many laboratories show annual workload increases of about 10 percent, thus doubling the work volume in approximately nine years.
TABLE
1
This annual increase should be considered during the planning stage of the laboratory. However, improved techniques and automation suggest that it may be possible for a greater volume of work to be done in the same work area size.
the technical area of Plan A, the open plan for the histology and serology-bacteriology units) has several adIn
arrangement (except Laboratory Guide Plan
A
suggested plan for a hospital laboratory service with an estimated workload of 70,000 to 120,000 laboratory tests annually. For planning purposes, this laboratory is designed to serve a general hospital of 50 to 200 beds. The nontechnical staff would include one or more laboratory helpers in the glasswashing and sterilizing unit and a clerk-typist and secrePlan
is
a
1
tary
in
the administrative unit. (See Fig.
la.)
The laboratory services of a general hospital having this work volume would require work areas for six main technical units: hematology, blood bank, urinalysis, biochemistry, histology, and serology-bacteriology. The block plan has been utilized here, as it provides a good functional relationship for all
The pathologist's office in the center provides for easy supervision of the work stations; the hematology unit is near the waiting room; the bacteriology unit is at the end of the units.
TABLE 4
Tests Performed Annually per Medical Technologist* Laboratory Unit
Hematology
13,400
Urinalysis
30,720 1
1
vantages over the "separate room for each unit” soheme for hospitals of this size. These advantages include: easier supervision; common use of such equipment as desks, refrigerators, and centrifuges; flexible use of personnel; and more available space since many doors and partitions are eliminated. If desired, partitions could be erected between each unit, as indicated on the plan for the histology and serology-bacteriology units. Laboratory
Module
Techical
for
is
Knee spaces are indicated where needed
in
Each Laboratory Unit
Gene ral Hospitals— 50 200 Beds 1
Technologists
Requi red
,520
Median
High
6,200
20,100
1
1,300
0 4
.7
29,800
81,200
35,800
2.5
5 6
Bacteriology
7,680
Histology
3,840
Hematology
Parasitology
9,600
Serology
3,600
13,500
6,800
0.6
1.1
Biochemistry
2,300
19,600
6,600
0.7
2.0
Productivity”
Parasitology*
—
-
-
-
-
Bacteriology
400
4.700
1,800
0 2
0.6
Histology
700
5,100
1,800
0.5
1.3
30
700
400 0
2.0
5 9
13 3
Basal Metabolism
Electrocardiograms
800
4,200
1,300
Blood Bank Tests
130
23,200
4,500
T ronsfusions
800
2,000
1,000
Other
500
9,600
•
Tests Performed Annually
in
Included with urinalysis
General Hospitals
Number
Hospital
of Tests
Low
High
Median
99
12,000
25,000
19,000
100-149
24,000
75,000
39,000
50-200
55,000
163,000
69,000
TABLE 5
Tests Performed Annually
Tests per Patient
504
100-149
1
150-200
1
05 08
29
2.02
1
2 67
1.32
High
-
9,000
4,800
0 2
37,000
20,200
1.4
220
5.600
3,500
0 3
0.4
1,300
5,300
2,800
0 3
0 6
0 09
0 5
Electrocardiograms
Median
Median
9,000
Parasitology
Day
Median
3,000
Blood Bank Tests
High
High
Hematology
Basal Metabolism
Low
Low
Urinalysis
Histology
Bed Size
49 Beds
Required
Bacteriology
Hospital
1
Technologists
Biochemistry
Hospitals
Each Laboratory Unit
1
Serology
Utilization Index of Laboratory Services in General
in
General Hospitals— 00
Unit
TABLE 3
1
1,700
TOTALS
1
High
Urinalysis
These figures were derived from data developed by Seward E. Owen and Edmund P. Finch, presented in two articles published in Modern Hospital. June and October, 1957. Titles of the articles are: "How to Calculate the Laboratory Work Load” and 'How to Measure Laboratory
50-
Median
Low
Unit
•
Bed Size
for
9,600
Biochemistry
TABLE 2
Maximum
Area
desirable in the technical work areas of the laboratory department. In the plans, this has been achieved by using a module of approximately 10 by 20 ft, with a similar arrangement for each module. Each one consists of two standard laboratory workbenches 12 ft long, 30 in. deep, with a working surface or counter of about 23 in., and a reagent shelf.
flexibility
Tests Performed Annually
Tests
Serology
laboratory, yet near the washing and sterilizing areas; and the histology unit is near the pathologist’s office. Other schemes similar to that shown in Plan D or a typical wing arrangement with a corridor down the center would also be satisfactory.
Transfusions
Other
85
3,800
700
700 200 20 500
3,100
1,500
250 300 3,300
200 60 650
20 400
9,200
2,800
1.300
80
7,300
700 400
TOTALS
0 3 2.5
0.4
0 8
0 02
0 02
—
—
0 5
1.0
3.21
6.12
Health
HOSPITALS Laboratory
who perform tests from a sitting Drawers, cabinets, and shelves are provided below the work counter for daily equipment and supplies. This arrangement provides a 5-ft aisle between workbenches, which is considered optimum for movement within the working area. Equipment such as centrifuges, refrigerators, and desks, which may be used jointly by the personnel, is located opposite the units along the interior of the personnel position.
technical
Technical
work
Areas
area.
Hematology-Blood Bank
A standard module
is
assigned
blood,
and does complete processing of all should provide a separate bleeding
room, processing laboratory, donors' recovery room, and an office available for preliminary physical examinations. Urinalysis Unit. The
assigned one half of
urinalysis
unit
is
a
for the technologists.
and flasks are sent
to the
central glass-washing area nearby. table
36
in.
high
located
takes dictation and handles all the pathologist's correspondence, surgical pathological reports, and autopsy protocols. Venipuncture Cubicle. A venipuncture cubicle is provided where blood specimens are taken from the ambulant patients sent to the laboratory.
Specimen
A specimen
urinalysis and the hematology units.
directly into the technical area near the urinal-
Histology Unit. The histology unit is assigned a standard module, separated from the other units by a partition to prevent odors from spreading to other areas. It is located near the pathologist's office since the medical technologist here works under his direction
ysis unit.
and supervision. Along one half utilized
of the module, an area is by the pathologist to examine surgical
and autopsy specimens and to select the tissues for slide sections to be prepared by the technologist. An exhaust hood is provided over this section, as
shown
in
the plan (No.
53),
to draw off disagreeable odors from specimens and solutions. The remainder of the module is used for the processing and staining of tissues. Knee spaces are provided, one at each of the specialized work areas. The workbench is 30 in. high with a 22- or 23-in. -deep working area, cabinets and drawers below the counter, and a reagent shelf. Wall-hung cabinets are
provided for additional storage. A utilky sink is provided at the end of the workbench. The serology Serology-Bacteriology Unit. and bacteriology work is combined in one standard laboratory module, where a half module is assigned to each unit. Culture media for use in bacteriology are prepared in the bacteriology
work area and sent
to the sterilizing unit for
The workbenches are 30 in. high with a 22or 23-in. -deep working area, and are provided
A knee space is provided each workbench since most of the procedures are done in a sitting position. A utility sink is provided for the personnel in both units, with reagent shelves. in
but the bacteriology unit also requires a sink A fume hood is provided to prevent the spread of possible infec-
for the staining of slides.
tion to personnel
when preparing specimens
from suspect cases
A
of tuberculosis, fungus, or
The administrative area Area separated from the technical work areas so that the nonlaboratory personnel need not enter the technical areas. This is the central Administrative
is
control and collection point for receiving specimens and is the reception area for the patients and the hospital staff who come to the laboratory.
Waiting Room.
in
A
Toilet.
toilet is pro-
this area for the collection of
and stool specimens;
a
urine
pass window opens
Basal Metabolism-Electrocardiography Room. is also located here for basal metabolism tests and electrocardiograms, and when necessary, to obtain blood from donors. A desk is provided in this room to permit handling of paper work A lavatory is also pro-
A room
vided.
Pathologist's Office. The pathologist's is located so that he may have easy access to the technical areas of the laboratory, office
particularly the histology unit. This office
is
separated by a glass partition which permits the pathologist to observe the technical work areas A draw curtain may be used when he desires privacy. Those who wish to consult the pathologist have access to his office through an entrance from the administrative area.
Auxiliary
Service
Areas
The
auxiliary
service
units are located adjacent to the administrative area and are easily accessible to the technical areas.
Glass Washing and Sterilizing
Unit.
The
glass washing and sterilizing unit is close to the serology-bacteriology and the biochemistry units which will utilize such services more often than the other units. A separate door leads directly into the serology-bacteriology unit so that contaminated glassware need not be transported through other work areas. Within this unit are located a water still, pressure sterilizer, sterilizing oven, and pipette washer. Storage cabinets are also provided for stock items of glassware, chemicals, and reagents. A hood over the sterilizers and water still is used to exhaust the heat generated by the equipment. Utility carts used to transport dirty glassware from the various laboratory units to this area are parked in this unit.
Locker
centrifuge, refrigerator, and incubator are
provided along the interior wall within the unit. A desk is also conveniently located for the use of the personnel. This module is partitioned and separated from the other units by a door to reduce contamination of air and the hazard of infection to personnel in the other lab areas.
and
Toilet
Facilities.
Separate
locker and toilet facilities are provided within the laboratory department for the medical technologists. This convenience reduces the time personnel must be away from the work areas. Since most medical technologists are
females, lockers have been provided for them in the department. However, where male technologists are employed, lockers should also be provided for them, either in the laboratory
or in another location.
Optional Services. Clinical photography, medical illustration, and research facilities are not included in the plan because of their specialized requirements. If these services are to be part of the laboratory department, revision and expansion of the plan will be necessary.
waiting area, with con-
ventional waiting room furnishings, is provided for the ambulant patients. In this area, a desk is
is
also to transfer phone calls for information concerning a laboratory report. The pathologist's secretary is also located in this area, near the pathologist's office. She
vided
virus diseases.
Biochemistry Unit. The biochemistry unit requires an area that occupies one and a half standard laboratory modules. The half module is shared with the urinalysis unit and is used for the necessary preliminary procedures that are done prior to the actual chemical analyses. A knee space is provided in this workbench for personnel who perform titrations and other procedures while seated. The adjoining module provides workbench area where a variety of chemical procedures may be performed and includes a fume hood for removal of vapors and gases. The workbenches for the chemical procedures are about 36 in. high, with drawers and cabinets below. The reagent shelves are used to hold the chemicals needed during the procedures. Two utility sinks are provided, one in each chemistry work area. Apparatus used in this unit is cleaned by the personnel in the unit;
An instrument
centrifuge, refrigerator, and desk are pro-
the laboratory and the clerk-typist is recommended. This enables her to quickly notify the technical personnel when a patient arrives and
vided along the interior wall opposite the unit for the use of the personnel in this unit. The desk and refrigerator are shared with the
sterilization.
standard module, consisting of a workbench, 12 linear ft long and 30 in. high, and serves as the work area for the microscopic and chemical examinations. Five linear ft of the workbench and a knee space are provided for personnel performing the microscopic examinations; the remainder of the workbench is used for the chemical examinations. A sink located at one end of the workbench provides a continuous working surface
test tubes, pipettes,
A
Unit.
hemathis module procedures
to the
tology-blood bank unit. One half of is provided with a workbench for such as hemoglobin tests, sedimentation rates, staining, and washing of pipettes (in Plan A, counter No. 7 on left side of unit). Knee space and storage cabinets are provided below the counter. In the other half of the module, a workbench 30 in. high, with three knee spaces, is provided for technologists who are seated during tests, such as those involving microscopic procedures. The micro-hematocrit centrifuge, because of its noise and vibration when in use, is placed in the general technical area along the interior wall directly opposite the hematology unit. The other equipment needed by this work unit, such as a refrigerator, centrifuge, and recording desk, is located conveniently opposite the unit, where it is shared with the urinalysis and the chemistry units. It is assumed that the laboratory will obtain blood for transfusions from other sources, and, therefore, needs only facilities for blood storage. A blood bank refrigerator is provided for this purpose in the examination and test room. Compatibility tests on the blood are done in the hematology unit. A hospital which operates a selfcontained blood bank, that is, collects
along the interior wall opposite this unit where chemical apparatus, such as colorimeter, flame photometer, spectrophotometer, and carbon dioxide gas apparatus are placed. Adjacent to the instrument table is an analytical balance on a vibration-free table or other type of support. By placing this apparatus away from the busy preparation and test procedure work areas, personnel can use the apparatus without interference from other procedures. It also lessens the possibility of damage to the equipment by the accidental spillage or splattering of chemical reagents.
provided for a clerk-typist.
An intercommuni-
cation system between the technical areas of
Guide Plans for Smaller Hospital Laboratories Plan B is a suggested guide for a general hoslaboratory service having an anticipated
pital
505
Health
HOSPITALS Laboratory
6.
54. 66.
(a)
LEGEND 1.
2.
3. 4.
Desk, 30 by 40 in., single pedestal Filing cabinet, letter size
Counter, 30-in. high Staining sink
7. 8. 9.
10.
11.
Table for Harvard trip balance Waste paper receptacle
sink Analytical balance Counter, 36-in. high Cabinets with adjustable shelves, below counter Electric strip outlets, continuoutt
29. Refrigerator, 8 cu. ft. 30. Refrigerator, blood bank 31. Worktable 32. Micro-hematocrit centrifuge 33. Examination table 34. Lavatory 35. Basal metabolism apparatus
Bookcase
36.
Electrocardiograph
Utility sink
37.
Hook
Cup
6.
27. 28.
strip
Gas outlet
38. Table, 24
13. 14.
Table for magazines Suction outlet
15.
Compressed
16.
Table for instruments Straight chair
39. Storage cabinets 40. Water still, 2-5 gals, per hr. 41. Adult scale 42. Fume hood 43. Double-pedestal office desk 44. Office chair, swivel, with arms 45. Noncorrosive metal work surface; pitch to sink
17.
air outlet
18. Stool 19.
20. 21. 22. 23.
24.
25. 26.
Two-compartment sink
8-in. deep; drainboardsnoncorrosive metal; peg boards above drainboards Cabinet with trash receptacle on inside of door Utility cart Laboratory pressure sterilizer Hot air oven Incubator Shelf or table for analytical balance Centrifuge
A
46. 47.
in.
Typewriter desk Posture chair
48. Technicians’ lockers 49. Specimen receiving table 50. Request file with pigeon holes 51. Slide file cabinet 52. 53.
Microscope table Exhaust hood
(70,000 to 120,000 tests annually) for average size of 150 to 200 beds, (b) Plan B (40,000 to 75,000 tests annually) for average size of 100 to 150 beds, (c) Plan C (20,000 to 30,000 tests annually) for less than 100 beds. Fig.
506
1
(a) Plan
57. 68.
Easy chair Wall-hung water closet Paper towel dispenser Grab bar, continuous Emergency call station (push button) connected to
59.
60. 61.
buzzer at secretary’s desk
Telephone outlet Intercommunication system outlet Buzzer at receptionist’s desk from
emergency
calling stations 62.
12.
by 36
56.
Hook on
toilet-side of door
63. Fire extinguisher 64. Pass-through between
65.
Exhaust
66.
Wall cabinet
toilet
and laboratory
air grills near floor
67. Refrigerator, 11 cu. ft. 68.
Pipette washer
69. Shelf, for pipette 70. Folding door
washer, 10
in.
71. 72.
Table for electrocardiograph
73. 74.
Curtain Sink with electric waste disposal
75. 76.
Carbon dioxide cylinder Gas cylinders under table
above
floor
Window
77. Shelf for urine bottles 78. Drawers with adjustable
shelves, below counter
Health
HOSPITALS Laboratory
Q"
C0n
After A-24, the flow of patients divides. Men, go to locker room A-
after providing specimens,
13 to don street clothing. A specimen toilet is provided for each sex. Each toilet is provided with a pass-through window to room A-9 which is
TEMPERATURE E0UILI&KATI0A]
the Papanicolaou smear examination room, A-27,
women's SfEEIMEN T0ILET
through temperature equilization rooms, A-29 or A-30, for the thermography examination in A31. After completion of these procedures, they
people Automated multiphasic health-testing sequence.
give their specimens at A-7,
room, A-5,
and go
to the locker
to dress. All patients are required to
out the psychological questionnaire in A-28. Round-table discussions on health education are conducted by staff in A 33. The screening process ends in A-l where the receptionist/registrar checks out the patient. The facility has a storeroom. A- 12, for general and medical supplies. A lounge room, A 19, and
fill
V%iCW0L0G[Lt\L £2l/£STIC7MMAIKE
SPECIMENS Fig. 7.
senger to the main hospital laboratory for processing. Women, after leaving A 24, proceed to
TWEI7M(?6RAPUy
iupmem's LtfAKEeS
HEALTH
a laboratory pick-up station. Specimens are and transferred by mes-
collected from patients
record storage room, A-32, are provided for the
automated multiphasic health testing unit staff; staff toilets for both sexes, A-20 and A-21, are also provided. There
is
a director's
A
office,
A
4,
and a janitor's closet, A-26. All designated spaces or rooms are provided with the necessary furniture and equipment to carry out medical and administrative and
chief
nurse’s
office,
6,
tasks.
517
Health
HOSPITALS Outpatient Activity
t Z D
o z
h* C/3 111
I-
X 2 X
o o 0
>o «o
co
(n
°
4)
_o
_£
3
45'
x
45
_o
o o
t ^ c
E o
o U Q X
E
g
p -t
J:
p
s O
3
cc
«
-u
5
M 00000
£ £ .= x EJ E E *; “O J> 5 s “o o o o -5 .s 1 ^ s < Q-» co co co co U U U O Q nCN-OCN'OO'^COOOO ’tCOO’tCOO’t’t Tfconr^rvOOOCNCNn^rn (N in n n
45'
CO
10 00
Efc
*
^ O t-
n o cs (>
u-u_u_u_u_u_u_XXXXX
Fixed
—
45
Equipment
.
_
— ~
O 45
imedical
45
45
45
C
S
mcoUUUUUUO
r——
6RITI6AL,
6PITIUL
)
AST
C ARE
6AKE
ZDO/A
E OOtA 4
-
UTILITY ZOOtA ill AN
T REATMENT
SUPPLIES
6U6IU.ES
E.MEK
PATE NTS'
coronary intensive
6LN6Y
EQUIPMENT
P^BSEEVATIW
the primary radiological facilities.
zoom j
J NUKSIN lr UATI on
MED
f)
Areas
•
Entrance for patients arriving by ambulance, other modes of transportation, or conveyances Entrance for walk-in patients
•
Control station
lr p L0CK-
EKS ,
•
6UIEF K.N. .
j
FEMALE STAFF
L0UN6E |
Public waiting space with appropriate public
T0ILET 4
L06taes_
menT STAFF
amenities
Treatment
must be emphasized
of professional competency.
The relationships within any Emergency Activity may be arranged according to individual preference and needs. The following should be considered for any complete emergency activity:
•
It
may
Since they share some supportive facilities, the emergency and outpatient facilities are adjacent to each other. Good planning practice requires that the Emergency Activity be easily accessible
1.)
arise there.
that the response the patient receives at admis-
J
(See Fig.
center has an external
barrier against cold drafts.
admission at the center. Afterwards he be asked to wait until called in public waiting
Intradepartmental Relationships
and
may
trol
ters for
ROOM
care unit,
that
counter at the control center also serves as a
ing the patient. The walk-in patient enters through
action.
to the hospital’s surgical suite,
all
bules to eliminate drafts at the entrances provide a certain amount of comfort for control center personnel. The center could be enclosed with a glazed partition but, although transparent, it is perceived by patients as a physical barrier. The
suite.
and
is
Near the entrance, the conwindow so an approaching ambulance may be observed. Vesti-
vehi-
the
the vestibule left of the control center
make
some cases, the patient may be
provide visual control of
the situation requires use of an operating
room, the patient
In
referred to the adjacent Outpatient Activity.
of patients requiring im-
for patients arriving
necessary, request a physician to
if
a disposition.
mediate medical attention. The patient brought by ambulance is conveyed on the ambulance stretcher directly to either a treatment cubicle or to a critical care room. An alcove holds stretch-
boundary between the Emergency and Outpatient Activities, assuring easy access to both. The Emergency Activity should be located on the ground floor to ensure easy access for patients arriving by ambulance or auto. A separate entry for walk-in patients is required. These entrances, which are separate from the Outpatient Activity, must be easily identifiable, protected from inclement weather, and accessible to handicapped patients. The emergency facility also must be easily accessible from the hospital to patients and to the house staff performing their routine duties or being
is
and,
MMh
FAMILY ZOOtA
I
STEE.Tf.UEJ?
L0UAJ6E
I
Facilities
•
Patients' observation
•
Treatment cubicles Examination rooms Cast room
•
Critical
—
room
J
L
u)
PATIENTS' WAITIN6-
care rooms
An Emergency
Activity
may
P0LI6E
also include a pa-
room and areas providing supporand staff accommodations.
tient's security
tive services
Guidelines to Functional Programing, Equipping, and Designing Hospital Outpatient & Emergency Activities, DHEW Publication No. (HRA) 77-4002, U S. Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, Washington D C 1977.
ACTIVITY IAJTKA 17 E.PAKT7AENTAL
KELATIMSWIF $£UE7AE
Fig. 2.
529
Health
HOSPITALS Emergency
Activity;
EDP
police
room may
also
Unit
be used by reporters and members of the family may family room pending the outcome
attorneys. Immediate to the
retire
of medical intervention involving a life-threatening situation of a patient; here, doctors
gymen may converse Waiting
and
cler-
an Emergency Activity
ously,
is
should not only cater to physical needs
and comfort but should also instill a feeling confidence and relieve anxiety or fear.
of
critical
provided with a scrub sink. Special attention should be given to the scrub sink area because of the hazards of infection and a slippery is
floor.
The cast room, used for closed reduction of similarly to a treatment is equipped
with the family.
a particularly difficult time for every patient since each perceives his medical urgency as unique. A state of anxiety predominates. The environment, obviin
safety regulations must be observed. Each
care room
fractures,
cubicle with the addition of a plaster sink
in
and
of a patient on a stretcher who, after treatment,
may be
immobilized by means of orthopedic ac-
facilities
should be screened visually from incoming ambu-
ties,
cessories
adequately screened
sexes
from the public view, telephones ensuring privacy, vending machines with beverages or snacks, comfortable seating arrangements (not benches)
all
contribute to physical comfort. The general design of the waiting space (including color, texture, de-
lances discharging patients. to the outside
be taken
to
is
A
daylight
which, located between the two activi-
are shared with the Outpatient Activity.
avoid location that
ambulance
will
engineering unit personnel to improve operating methods and systems which provide for more efficient interdepartmental operation.
and
'structures it in a logical manner so that a system to solve the problem and obtain the desired results can be developed. He [she] obtains all
is
Facilities
[she]
may recommend
the type of
ment.
working with systems already in use, is also concerned with improving and adapting the system to handle additional
focus attention
are
He
equipment to be used, prepare instructions for programmers, and interpret final results and translate them into terms understandable to manage-
the systems analyst
or different types of data.
arrivals.
Patients
to
operate.
In
Treatment
needed and defines exactly the way
the data
be processed. He [she] prepares charts, tables, and diagrams and describes the processing system and^the steps necessary to make if it
When
window
often desirable but care should
of the patients on
manage-
ment, material management, admitting, medical records, clinical pathology, outpatient service, and others. He [she] works with the management
After determining the exact nature of the data
fare of waiting patients. The public waiting area
both
the various areas
in
processing problem, he [she] defines, analyzes,
cor, acoustical control) all contribute to the wel-
for
computer usage
the room. The door must allow passage
and attachments to the stretcher. The patient's observation room must be in full view of the nursing station. Privacy between patients may be achieved by a cubicle curtain. Toilets for both sexes are provided. Nurses’ work counters are at each end of the room. The entire Emergency Activity is easily accessible from the hospital and the x-ray and laboratory
Toilets
for
fracture frames are
trap. All supplies, splints,
kept
and
methods
of hospital operation, such as financial
treated
500-bed
analysts
in
hospitals,
one of the senior systems
designated "Chief.”
is
spaces surrounding the nursing station, the hub
Occupancy
all activities. This station is backed up by the medical preparation room and the office of the
of
chief nurse fore,
who
supervises
a glazed partition
acoustical privacy
is
all
three visitors
amenities include toilets, lounge, and room for female staff. Lounge and sleeping accommodations are provided for three full-time physicians and resident medical staff who often work long hours and, although not continuously,
and data entry and transmission room.
office
is
located
in
close
proximity to that of the chief nurse since they
communicate face to face. Emergency equipment, to be readily accessible in case of urgent need, is deliberately placed in an alcove often
front of the nursing station.
The patient's security room, with an unbreakable view window for observation, is placed close to the nursing station. Curtains may be installed outside the room, if necessary, to eliminate a view from the room itself. The door to the room and to its toilet must open outward to prevent the patient from locking himself [herself] in. To prevent self-injury, the room should be devoid of any sharp-edged appurtenances, and the light fixture, preferably tamperproof, should be flush with mounting surface. Surfaces should be smooth without any crevices with coved wall bases to facilitate easy cleaning in case of gross soiling by a disturbed patient. It is important to emphasize that this is not a prison cell or a dry-up tank for an alcoholic. The patient confined in this security room is there for medical treatment although he may be under police control or may be mentally unstable. Physical design that provides a pleasant atmosphere of
paramount
significance.
Treatment cubicles have curtains for privacy, if necessary, and are equipped to handle examinations and minor treatments. More severe inju-
Shared terminal service electronic data
1
processing
Data Entry and Transmission Room (Shared Terminal Service System) Function This area accommodates equipment and personnel necessary for encoding source data onto computer compatible magnetic tape, transmitting the encoded data to outside computer
office,
and receiving the proconventional printed copy form.
required to
accommo-
explosive anesthetic gases are used and
all
tell
the
or cubicle within this area, are
in
Every problem processed in be carefully analyzed so that steps for its solution can be preliminary work is generally
Two tape
Occupancy
transmission operator,
entry operators, one tape
and occasionally
the pro-
gramer-analyst.
assumed
for the
E.D.P. unit.
a computer must exact and logical
worked
out.
This
the responsibility
When it has been comprogram or detailed instructions for processing the data can be prepared by the programer. Exactly how he [she] does this depends not only on the type of computer hardware availof the systems analyst. pleted, the
E.D.P. Secretarial Office
Function
This area provides facilities for recep-
and
secretarial service to the E.D.P. director
tion
and systems
analyst(s).
Occupancy
Secretary and waiting for three
able but on the nature of the problem. These determine what programing techniques will be used. visi-
tors.
Adjacent Areas analyst’s
E.D.P. director’s office, systems
office(s),
and administrative
corridor.
Systems Analyst's Otflce(s) Each subject office area or work station (one is assumed for the shared terminal service E.D.P. unit and two for the medium system E.D.P. unit) provides for a systems analyst who is responFunction
sible for planning, scheduling,
and coordinating
develop systems for processwith
is
step-by-step instructions
computer exactly what to do. Three programers, each with a separate work office that
cessed data
to
date both. Conductive flooring must be provided
This area provides for the E.D.P. pro-
medium system
lems.
therefore, larger space
Function
gramed who prepare
processing,
ing data
in critical
E.D.P. Programer't Offlce(t)
facilities for
gency team may consist of a number of specialists using numerous kinds of portable equipment:
if
system: E.D.P. secretarial office, E.D.P.
and E.D.P. programing area. Convenient communication with the E.D.P. supervisor's office and E.D.P. machine room essential.
activities required to
are treated
Medium director’s
unit.
care rooms which are of two sizes. For a coronary patient, the emerries
530
Fig.
EDP UNIT
call.
The chief physician's
is
for
E.D.P. secretarial office, E.D.P. director’s office,
Staff
in
seating
Shared terminal service system:
Adjacent Areas
visual control.
locker
are on
and
analyst office.
operations. There-
provided which ensures
and affords
Systems in each
and obtaining solutions He [she] is concerned
Administrative Services
and
complex probdeveloping
Facilities for Hospitals:
Planning Guide HEW Pub. No. (HSM) 72-4035. U.S. Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, Wash-
A
ington, D.C., 1972.
Still
other techniques are required
in
writing aids
which reduce the amount of detail associated with programing. The programer usually starts an assignment by determining exactly what information must be used to prepare assigned documents and their exact final format. He [she] then makes a flow chart or diagram that shows the order in which the computer must perform each operation and for each operation prepares detailed instructions. These when relayed to the computer's control unit, instruct the machine exactly what to do with each piece of information to produce the documents anticipated. The programer also prepares an instruction sheet for the console operator to follow when the program is run on the computer. The final step in programing is debugging or checking on whether the instructions have been correctly written and will produce the desired re-
Health
HOSPITALS EDP
ELECTRONIC DATA PROCESSING UNIT (Medium
1.
2. 3.
4. 5. 6
.
7.
8. 9. 10. 11.
12. 13. 14. 15. 16.
17. 18. 19.
20. 21. 22
Work Work Work Work Work Bin
,
surface, surface, surface, surface, surface, file
roll top roll top, wall hanging
typewriter wall hanging sloped top
Shelf Clerical swivel chair Ann chair, shell type Table, end Management chair Stool Table Shelves File bin under 72" work surface Table, conference Kitchen, efficiency Projector screen Data entry units Key punch desks Utility shelf truck Table
System.)
23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31.
32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38.
39.
40. 41. 42. 43. 44.
Unit
Locker with drawers and shelves on truck Processing unit Console work-shelf and printer 3 drive disc storage 2 drive disc storage Power unit Tape control unit Magnetic tape facility Card read punch Printer Control unit Tape storage units Disc pack storage Built in desk and book case with 3 lockable drawers Work counter coaplete with base units Desk unit Wall cab storage unit Tool and test equipment cart Shelf units Burster complete with table (mobile) 6-ply 1 decollator Counter top
Fig. 2.
suits.
A program
is
debugged
the programer takes a
in two steps. First sample of the data to
many months. To improve efficiency, existprograms must be updated to keep pace with
of three offices or work stations
ing
the
be processed and reviews step-by-step exactly
administrative changes. Introduction of larger or
what
debugging pro-
newer model computers often requires that many programs be rewritten. Information to be processed by a computer is encoded first onto some type of medium which is compatible with the computer such as magnetic tape, paper tape, or punchcards. Most computers are designed to accept data in punchcard form.
simple program can be made for a computer within a few days; a complex problem may re-
Occupancy One E.D.P. programer and seating for one visitor per office or work station. A total
will
happen as
series of instructions
computer follows the which make up the program. the
Then, after revising the instructions to take care
any difficulties that have appeared, the programer completes the test by making a trial run in the computer. The console operator sometimes
of
helps with the latter part of the cess.
A
is assumed programing area.
quire
medium system
Adjacent Areas
E.D.P.
for
E.D.P. secretarial office, systems
analysts' offices, E.D.P.
machine room, and E.D.P.
Convenient communication with the E.D.P. director's office, conference room, E.D.P. supply storage room, and data entry room supervisor's
is
office.
essential.
Conference Room Function This area provides for private discussions, inservice education,
and meetings.
531
Health
HOSPITALS EDP
Unit Occupancy
Adjacent Areas offices,
Medium system:
Eight persons.
E.D.P. director’s office, analysts’
programers' offices, and resource center.
Resource Center This area provides for a library of pro-
Function
grams, computer
ware required
A
literature, related files,
to facilitate
an
and
soft-
efficient operation.
resource center should provide work surfaces
and programers
for analysts
the
amount
in
of material stored
order to minimize in
individual
work
E.D.P. secretarial office
and
sys-
laying out a computer room, the manufactur-
maximum
er’s specifications
office essential.
machines and the minimum service clearances for the machines should not be exceeded. Another important layout consideration is adequate working area for operating personnel and space for auxiliary equipment such as worktables, cabinets,
Data Entry Room (Medium System) This area accommodates equipment Function and personnel necessary for encoding information onto computer compatible media for electronic data processing application. It also accommodates limited facilities for occasional card punching relative to programing.
regarding
lengths for
the control cables which interconnect the various
and
utility trucks.
E.D.P. Supervisor's Office
Function
This area
accommodates
the supervisor
responsible for the physical production aspects
stations.
Three data entry operators and oc-
Occupancy
Occupancy
None.
Adjacent Areas E.D.P. director's office, analysts' offices, programers’ offices, and conference room.
E.D.P. Director's Office
This area provides for the E.D.P. direc-
who
with the concurrence of the hospital ad-
ministrator
responsible for the total activity of
is
of the E.D.P. operation, for quality controls,
casionally one programer for a short period of
some cooperative
time.
ing.
Occupancy
Computer Room This
electronic
equipment or hardware required
for
Limited expansion and access space are essential.
Occupancy
and
functions relative to program-
E.D.P.
supervisor
and two
visitors.
area accommodates most basic
Function
the electronic data processing activities program.
Function tor
In
tems analysts' offices. Convenient communication with the programing area and E.D.P. supervisor's
One
operator for each
shift.
E.D.P. machine room, data entry room, and data delivery and pickup area. Convenient communication with the E.D.P. director's office, E.D.P. programing area, and E.D.P. supply
Adjacent Areas
storage room
is
essential.
the E.D.P. service system, including formulation,
development, and implementation of overall poliprograms, plans, and procedures for control
cies,
of the system
general and the E.D.P. unit
in
in
particular.
The director reviews and analyzes the various and infra workflow activities and methods of all hospital operating programs in relation to inter
the total E.D.P. function.
On
analyses, he [she] formulates
agement
the basis of these
and
institutes
man-
controls designed to improve the
effi-
ciency of the programs through the application
due consideration for quality requirements, optimum use of personnel and/or other resources, and time and cost limitaof E.D.P. techniques with
tions.
He
[she] establishes training
hospital personnel services
and
niques which
in
will
them the methods and techenable them to fully utilize these
He
He
also institutes research
improve E.D.P. uses
and maintains a tive to all
to orient
to teach
services in their areas. activities to
programs
the potentials of the E.D.P.
in
the hospital
technical library of materials rela-
elements of data processing.
[she] maintains statistical records as a basis
for evaluating the effectiveness of the service
the
improvement
of
the
hospital’s
and
operation
through the use of E.D.P. He [she] provides advice and exchange of information, resolves problems, and participates in
meetings and conferences with key staff members and department heads to discuss present and expected work and to develop broad plans.
Occupancy
532
E.D.P.
director
and
three
visitors.
Adjacent Areas
E.D.P. supervisor's office. E.D.P.
workroom, programing area, data entry room, and data delivery and pickup area. Convenient communication with the E.D.P. director’s office, the systems analysts' offices, and
Data Delivery and Pickup Area This area serves as a receiving station Function for unprocessed data and also as a pickup point for processed data. Decollating, bursting, collating, and binding of data forms and documents
the E.D.P. supply storage room.
prior to pickup are
service engineers’
Comment
The raised
floor of this
future layout changes with
area allows
minimum
One
in this
area.
person.
alteration
and power and per-
Data entry room, E.D.P. maAdjacent Areas chine room, and administrative corridor. This area
between the two floors to be used plenum where neces-
should be visible and easily accessible from the
cost, protects interconnecting cables
receptacles, provides personnel safety, mits the space
Occupancy
done
for air supply ducts or as a
E.D.P. supervisor's office.
sary.
The environment for this room area should be maintained at 75°F. and 50 percent relative humidity. The air should be supplied through a filter
E.D.P. Service Engineer's
90 percent efficiency based on the National Bureau of Standards discoloration test
continuing operation of the
using atmospheric dust. Use of the space beneath
Adjacent Areas
of at least
the raised floor as a plenum will
Function
and
Room
This area facilitates the
maintenance
service engineering activities essential to the
E.D.P.
E.D.P.
equipment.
machine room.
depend upon
the recommendations of the electronic equipment
manufacturer and the design engineer. Pressurization to minimize dust infiltration from adjacent areas is an important consideration. To function properly, magnetic tapes require the same temperature and relative humidity levels as the electronic hardware. Because of this, and also for their easy retrieval, those tapes in frequent use are generally stored in cabinets and shelf tables within the computer room. Sometimes a separate storage room remotely located is provided for extra protection of vital records. These include master tapes which would be irreplaceable or those which would be needed immediately
Occupancy
One
person.
E.D.P. Supply Storage
Function
This
Room
area provides readily available
holding space for short-term inventories of standard and special machine-mated paper forms. It also provides holding for a small reserve of
new
magnetic tapes, and in the case of the medium system E.D.P. unit, a small reserve also of blank cards. A one-week supply of forms is generally preferred holding.
Occupancy
No permanent
Adjacent Areas
after a fire or could not be quickly reproduced.
Adjacent Areas
Shared terminal service system: E.D.P. secretarial office, systems analyst’s office, and data entry and transmission room.
If
an approved data safe is provided for storage of vital records, it can be located within the com-
to
puter room.
administrative corridor.
personnel.
Data delivery and pickup area be easily accessible to the data entry room, the E.D.P. machine or transmission room, and the
Health
REHABILITATION CENTERS
By F
CUTHBERT SALMON,
Planning
means thinking
in
Al A, and
CHRISTINE
terms of spatial
and human interrelationships.
The interrelationships between the several areas of activities are varied and complex; add to these the problems of site selection, considerations of finance, and provision for future expansion, and it becomes apparent that sound planning requires rigor and thoroughness. (See Fig. 1.)
One of the most basic planning principles is organization: the best organization for the purpose intended. When that purpose is rehabilitation, one must take into account the limited mobility and acute sensitivity to physical environment of those for whom the building is
intended.
With limited
comes
mobility,
a basic unit or
the
module
wheelchair
be-
of design.
The
range of the dimensions of a standard wheelchair must be borne in mind. Design is governed not only by these basic dimensions, but also by the dimensions of the paths of action of the chair. Variations in disability permit variable limits of maneuverability, and the relationship of the wheelchair to basic equip-
F.
SALMON, AIA
ment must also be recognized ment of the planning data.
in
the develop-
Some
ment. floor
the electrical service to these important. Patients will be wearing lightweight examination or treatment gowns here, and the heatloads;
trated
MEDICAL The medical area
of a rehabilitation center provides the following services: medical evaluation, performed by the physician and his staff; physical therapy, including hydrotherapy; occupational therapy; speech and hearing therapy. It also furnishes the services of a prosthetic and/or orthetic appliance shop. The detailed character of the medical area will vary with the program of the center itself. The emphases in the medical program will be determined by the needs of the patients and by already existent community medical facili-
of this will be heavy, requiring a
designed to accommodate such concen-
machines
is
ing system will have to compensate for this. The records for all sections of this area are extensive; therefore, adequate storage for them is mandatory. Conferences with patients and staff
make Many
further
demands on
the available space.
kinds of activities will be housed here and the space needs to be adjustable accordingly. Accessibility to all other areas is also essential for the medical area of different
activity.
ties.
The medical area provides the basis for the program at the center. It must be accessible to all other areas and be well integrated with the administration and admissions patients' total
services. (See Fig. 2.)
This section will contain much specialized examination, treatment, and therapy equip-
Physician
Medical diagnosis
the basis for development
is
of the patient's successful rehabilitation pro-
gram.
On admission,
a medical examination is eswhether the patient is prescribed a program in one or several of the center's areas
sential,
physical medicine, social adjustment, or vocational rehabilitation. A nurse is usually present during the examination.
of activity:
Complete evaluation of the patient may require the services of consulting medical specialists, staff specialists in the several medical therapies, psychologists, social workers, and vocational counselors. A total integrated program is developed for the patient, with medical considerations as the initial frame of reference. Location Within Building
As
all
patients receive
medical evaluation, the physician's unit should be near the center’s main entrance. For purposes of admission, and for the keeping of records, location of the unit near the administrative department is desirable. If an in-patient nursing unit is included, the physician should have, if possible, convenient access to the nursing unit. In smaller centers, the main waiting room for the building may serve as the waiting area for the physician's unit. Place the unit in a quiet zone. Staff-Patient
will
depend
Ratios
The physician-patient
entirely
ratio
on the nature of the pro-
gram. Centers accommodating in-patients will necessarily need a greater amount of physician service per patient than the out-patient type of center. Physician-patient ratios can be established only on an individual basis.
MODERATE ZONE
1
Interrelations of main elements of
a self-contained area, with
Spaca
unit
possible.
LOUD ZONE
relative noise levels.
physician's
of
access to the consultation room and the medical examination room by means of a subcorridor, if
QUIET ZONE
Fig.
The
Organization
should form
space of a rehabilitation center. Activities may be grouped according to
To make full use of the physician's time, there should be two examination rooms for each consultation room. Recommended for the area is a toilet designed for wheelchair occupancy, accessible from the examination room.
533
Health
REHABILITATION CENTERS
Although
ment
a clinical scale is essential equip-
examination room, a wheelchair patient's scale constructed from a modified platform scale is very desirable. These scales should be conveniently accessible from the other parts of the building and may be placed in the physician's unit, or near the physical therapy exercise room or gymnasium. for the
Room Arrange the furniture to allow space for wheelchair patients. Also, include coat hanging facilities. Waiting
cubicles;
whereas the wet area includes
hydrotherapy
treatment,
tanks,
pools,
all
and
related facilities. in
Hydrotherapy equipment should be grouped one area, separate from, but adjacent and
accessible to other treatment areas. Space considerations for a physical therapy department must take into account circulation areas for patients and staff. Situate the equipment for efficient and safe use, and provide storage space for equipment and supplies.
and expansion of facilities should considered in basic planning to meet changes in requirements. It is advisable to consult with the chief physiFlexibility
be Include
Secretary
in
the furnishings a secre-
tary’s desk, writing table,
and
letter
size file
cabinets.
As
cal
certain records
must be available
to de-
partment heads in other areas of the center, placement of such files in the central records
room
of the administrative area
practice.
is
therapist,
center’s
the center's
physician
to
needs and the program of
and the equipment
director,
determine
activity for this de-
to
keep
training in
all
three areas.
Arrange the areas so that scheduled patients may proceed directly to physical therapy without interfering with circulation to other departments. As physical therapy may take advantage of certain outdoor activity, place the exercise room or gym near the outdoors. As physical therapy involves some noisy activity, this area should be removed from quiet zones, such as the place where speech and hearing therapy is administered, or the nursing unit. (See Fig. 5.) The area should be convenient to the center’s physician and the nursing unit (if provided).
partment.
the usual
However, some centers prefer
and occupational therapy, as well as for activities of daily living, should be in close proximity, as many patients will receive treatment and
Staff-Patient Ratios
Location Within
Building
The place
for physical
treat an
One
average of
1
physical therapist can 0 to 15 patients per day.
records in the physician's unit. A physician's records are traditionally privileged communications, and, if kept in the central records room, should be made available only to the responsible professional personnel.
medical
Room Include in the furnishings physician's office and consultation room an executive desk and chair, bookshelves, and film illuminator. Allow space for two visitors' chairs and a wheelchair. Provide a convenient coat closet. (See Fig. 3.) Consultation
the
for
Examination for this
Room
Include
in
room an examination
furnishings
the
table with clear-
ance on all sides, an examination light, a lavatory and mirror, clinical scales, a film illuminator, an instrument and supply closet, a small electric pressure sterilizer (if no lab-utility room is provided), and a chair. Standing bars are optional equipment. Room If a lab-utility room is provided, with a pressure sterilizer, sink, plaster cart, work counter, and storage cabinets. Lab-Utility
equip
it
ADM INISTR ATION Radiology is usually provided for rehabilitation centers by x-ray departments
SOCIAL ADJUSTMENT
Radiology
of If
hospitals,
radiology
and other
clinics, is
to
form
a
part of the center's
services, standard practice in the design
construction
of
the
VOCATIONAL
institutions.
department
should
and be Fig.
2
Fig.
3
followed. (See Fig. 4.)
Physical Therapy
Physical therapy is administered under medical supervision and performed by graduates of a school or course approved by the Council on Medical Education and Hospitals of the American Medical Association. The objectives of physical therapy are to correct or alleviate
bone and
joint or
neuromuscu-
This entails a concern with all types of physical disabilities, such as neurological diseases, arthritis, amputation, paralysis, spasticity, structural and postural malalignments, crippling accidents, postsurgical conditions, etc. Measures are used to retain or reestablish circulation, muscle tone, coordination, joint motion leading to mobility, amlar disabilities.
bulation,
and
activities of daily living.
carrying out his aim, the therapist will make use of heat, cold, water, light, and electricity as well as the training effects of active, passive, resistive, and reeducation exercises. In
There should be two major Organization of Space treatment areas, dry and wet. The dry area includes the exercise room or gym and treatment
534
Health
REHABILITATION CENTERS
Group services may increase the physical therapist
this to
20
a day.
assisted by nonprofessionals and if the work space and scheduling are well planned, a maximum staff-patient ratio may be achieved. Nonprofessional assistants, paid or volunteer, can be trained to prepare patients for treatments, attend to equipment, and transport patients, if necessary. There are many variables involved in staffIf
is
patient ratios. Treatment Cubicles Divide the cubicles with curtain tracks for easy access by wheelchair and stretcher patients and for flexibility in use of space, as for instructional activity or gait
training.
Curtains should
ceiling or floor, so that
not
extend to
when drawn,
they
the
may
not interfere with ventilation. (See Fig. 6.) Equip cubicles with a treatment table with
adequate work space on each side and at the head. Treatment tables with drawers or shelving provide convenient storage space for sheets and other requirements. Provide
the cubicles a place for the pasuch as hooks or lockers. Provide a lavatory convenient for the therapist's use. in
tient's outer clothing, Fig.
5
535
Health
REHABILITATION CENTERS
Fig. 6
Treatment cubicles and examination room.
Equipment for this department may include and ultraviolet lamps, diathermy, hot pack and electrical stimulation apparatus, ultrasonic equipment, suspension apparatus
files,
infrared
(Guthrie-Smith), electrical diagnostic apparatus, moist heat equipment, sand bags, powder boards, powder, oil or lotion, alcohol, and linen. In many cases patients will be lying on their backs during treatments. Ceiling lighting should be indirect or semi-direct to avoid glare. Therapists making tests or examinations require shaded or nonglare spotlights.
Provide space for wheelchair Waiting Area and ambulant patients; and if there is a nursing unit, space also for a stretcher. Place the therapist's office near the waiting area for control. From the waiting area, the patient should be able to go to the exercise room, hydrotherapy, or treatment cubicles with a minimum interference of activities.
536
desk with
a
a
machine.
may
Situate
it
near the patients' entrance to the
physical therapy department and design it to provide maximum supervision of activities. A patient scheduling board and writing surface are recommended. Locate them conveniently for all physical therapists. Staff lockers and dressing rooms (separate from patients) should be near this department.
Room The room should be convenient to the entrance of the physical therapy department. Equip it with an examination table, lavatory, and space for examination equipment. Examining
Provide floor-to-ceiling partitions for privacy.
The room may be used for special tests and measurements, or for treatment when privacy is
desirable.
Scales for weighing patients (including patients in wheelchairs) are sometimes provided
room. This area should be a flexible, and group exercise
Therapists Office
Exercise Area
space
clear space for individual
for interviewing patients
dictating
have acoustical privacy.
in this
There should be staff office and attending to administrative duties, as well as space for
and
Partition the office so that interviews
activities.
(See Fig.
7.)
The most frequently used items of equipment mats (sometimes raised 24 in. off the floor for the convenience of therapists and wheelchair or crutch patients — if area is of sufficient size, mats may remain in place), shoulder wheel, shoulder overhead and wall are: exercise
weights, shoulder ladder, steps, curbs, ramps, stall bars, parallel bars, posture mirror, stationary bicycle, counterbalanced and individual weights, sand bags, and paraffin bath.
Some
of this
equipment may be made by
a
skilled carpenter rather than purchased. Pur-
chased equipment should be accompanied by satisfactory repair and maintenance service. Certain equipment relationships should be maintained. Place the posture mirror 4 ft from the end of the parallel bars. When mats and other movable equipment are removed, there should be sufficient space for gait training, also related to a posture mirror.
Doors to the exercise area should be wide enough to accommodate not only patients but also equipment. Double doors, each 3 are recommended.
ft
wide,
The layout shown suggests a minimum exercise area for a physical therapy department with one therapist and an aid. For an expansion
Health
REHABILITATION CENTERS
M ENT CL E3
TRE AT
CUB
I
EX A M N AT ON I
I
OFFICE
TOILETS WAITING
Fig. 7
of the exercise area see
‘Gymnasium’’
in
this
section.
The exercise area may be divided by open which allow for the attachment of equipment and subdividing of activities, yet which permit circulation of air and easy superpartitions
vision of the total area.
An observation
cubicle with one-way vision
serves a variety of uses, such as individual and group exercises, recreational programs, and meetings. The gymnasium will augment the program of the physical therapy exercise room, permitting the therapist to conduct group wheelchair and mat classes. The room should be furnished
with parallel bars, wall
bars,
stairs,
etc.,
for
curbs,
glass may sometimes be used to advantage in order that visitors will not interfere with pa-
gradients,
tients' activities.
The room will also be used for recreational activity such as group volleyball, basketball, moving pictures, and wheelchair square
Reinforce the walls for installation of exercise equipment, such as stall bars.
Provide storage for equipment not
in
use.
Toilets should be accessible to the patients
and designed for those wheelchairs. A wall clock is
5
in
the
who
room
are confined to
for timing exercises
recommended. Vinyl wall covering to a minimum height of will protect walls and ease maintenance.
ft
There should be adequate ventilation. Fresh air without drafts in the exercise and treatment cubicles is very important. Air conditioning of this area is highly desirable. Windows or room exposure should be designed to provide privacy within the exercise
room. Gymnasium
In
inpatients, a
larger centers or centers
gymnasium
is
with
recommended.
It
wall
mirrors,
individual
To make maximum use of room, it is important that
this
multipurpose be con-
activities
trolled to avoid conflicting schedules. Hydrotherapy
frequently
The space for hydrotherapy is most expensive area of the
the
it should be planned with considerable selectivity. Whirlpool tanks for arm, foot, hip, and leg immersion are considered inadequate by many centers serving multiple disabilities unless augmented with facilities for complete body immersion. (See Fig. 8.) Almost all exercises and treatments can be conducted with a Hubbard tank and a wading pool and tank. Combinations of Hubbard tanks with wading facilities are available where space
center; consequently,
instruction.
dancing. A minimum clear ceiling height of 14 ft is recommended. If the gymnasium meets standard space requirements, rental of its use to community athletic organizations will be facilitated. Providing a recreational program inpatients is particularly important where are involved.
The gymnasium will also be used by the group worker in the social adjustment program of some patients. As the gymnasium is a multipurpose room, equipment and furniture within the area should social
be movable. Provision for
to arouse interest in the center s program. For this purpose, the gymnasium should be easily accessible to the public.
and
its
storage
is
essen-
tial.
As a meeting room to be used by selected groups within the community, this facility provides an excellent opportunity to acquaint the public with the problems of rehabilitation
is
limited.
Therapeutic pools are expensive to construct; consequently, they are usually considered only for larger centers. All hydrotherapy activities require linen and towel storage. Also provide a wringer and dryer for bathing suits and a storage space for wet and dry bathing suits of both staff
and patients. Tank and pool areas require storage space for wheelchairs and stretchers, adequate
537
Health
REHABILITATION CENTERS
Fig.
Whirlpools and tank room.
8
dressing cubicles, or dressing rooms to permit maximum use of pool, showers, and toilet facilities.
As
hydrotherapy is a moderately noisy it should be removed from areas re-
activity,
quiring sound control. Floors should be of unglazed ceramic tile with drains for spilled water and tank overflow.
As equipment is heavy when filled with water, a structure must be designed for these additional loads. Overhead monorails with
lift
essential for efficient use of
mechanism are Hubbard tanks
and waders. Ceilings should be a minimum of 9 ft 6 in. The location of the monorail with proper relationship to equipment is essential. hydrotherapy should be accesbut concealed. Waste lines should be adequate for rapid changes of water. All pipes for
sink or lavatory is required in the cubicle for drainage of the unit. Provide space for chair, table, and a stool of adjustable height. In small centers where hydrotherapy equipment consists only of whirlpool tanks, place them near treatment cubicles and near the exercise room for easy supervision by the therapist. Tank Room A treatment table with storage space is an essential requirement. Allow space for wheel stretchers and provide 44-in. -wide doors. (A 56-in. -wide opening is necessary to install combination treatment and wading tank.) Allow space for stretcher and wheelchair
storage.
sible
equipment
should have controlled mixing valves. thermostatically Adequate pressure and an ample source of 160 F. water are essential. Humidity reduction is a major concern in planning the hydrotherapy department. Adequate air conditioning is essential for the comAll
hydrotherapy
fort of patients
and
provision of adequate dressing room facilities. Dressing facilities do not necessarily have a size relationship to the pool indicated. For example, some programs will require several dressing tables in order to accommodate the
of attaching plinths. portion of the floor surrounding the pool may be depressed to form an observation area for the therapist.
A
Occupational Therapy
Occupational therapy is administered under medical supervision and performed by graduates of schools of occupational therapy approved by the Council on Medical Education and Hospitals of the American Medical Asso-
The objectives of occupational therapists are to assist in the mental and physical restoration of the disabled person, enabling him to adjust to his disability, increase his work capacity, and to want to become a productive
member In
of his
addition,
community. the
occupational
therapist
concerned with the training of patients
patients.
in
is
the
activities of daily living.
Many
size are
To achieve these goals, occupational therapy
of the pool should be graduated.
on an individual basis, remedial activities which are found in creative skills and manual arts. (See Fig. 9.)
Hydrotherapy Pool
538
purpose
ciation.
Showers and Dressing Rooms Directly related to the efficient use of a hydrotherapy pool is the
staff.
This includes equipment for the treatment of arms, hips, and legs. Some models are available as movable units, in which case a Whirlpools
recommended. For children the shallow end should be 2 ft deep, for adults, 3 ft. The deep end of the pool should be 5 ft. There should be a continuous gutter around the pool for the use of the patients and for the
variations in
possible.
The depth
utilizes,
Variations of depth in 5-in.
increments are
Health
REHABILITATION CENTERS
Occupational therapy Location Within Building should be adjacent to the physical therapy department, since many patients will use both
Certain occupational therapy activities, such as those characteristic of daily living, may be conducted out of doors in favorable weather.
Staff-Patient Ratios One occupational therapist can treat eight to fifteen patients per day. The number of patients depends upon types of
areas.
recommended that, if possible, access an outdoor area be provided. The area should be accessible to the center’s physician, the social adjustment area, and the vocational counseling area. As occupational therapy involves coordination with the nursing unit (for dressing and toileting particularly), the occupational therapy department should be conveniently related to it.
disabilities
moved from vision
is
It
Locate the area so that scheduled patients may proceed directly to occupational therapy without interfering with the circulation of other departments. As some phases of occupational therapy involve noisy activity, this area should be requiet zones in the building, or proshould be made for acoustic control.
to
and the severity
of the cases.
Where
highly individual treatments are required, the daily load will decrease. Also, if the therapist is relieved of administrative responsibilities and assisted by nonprofessional
persons, the daily load will increase. For orthopedic patients, special equipment must frequently be devised under close supervision of the occupational therapist. There are many variables applicable to staffpatient ratios.
The activity area may be Organization of Space so planned that each activity has a separate unit, or it may be planned to separate quiet from noisy and dusty from clean activity. The system facilitates assignment of special instructors to special activities and is also a more orderly arrangement of the space. However, this method increases the number of staff, unit
makes supervision more difficult, and can be considered only in larger departments. The which
of daily living (ADL) area, used to teach the patient how to live self-sufficiently in his home environment, should be closely related to the main occupational therapy treatment room. activities
is
As the occupational therapist works closely with the social adjustment staff and the vocational counselors, his office should be near their areas.
The activities which are most situations found in the
Activities of Daily Living
indicated include
home (see Fig. 10) Some training, particularly bathroom and
OUTDOOR THERAPY onessen
Fig.
10
Activities of daily living.
539
Health
REHABILITATION CENTERS
bedroom
activities, will require cooperation physical therapists. Consequently, the ADL area should be easily accessible from the physical therapy department.
with
A
gadget board containing numerous items hardware, light switches, faucets, and other items frequently used should be included. The board should be adjustable in height. The bathroom should be arranged to accommodate wheelchair patients (see “Inpa-
of
tients”).
The kitchen plan may include,
in addition type illustrated for wheelchair use, standard counter and cabinet arrangements
to
the
cope with normal” situations. Counters of adjustable height may be used to advantage in training patients. A front loading washer and dryer, as illustrated, is desirable for wheelchair patients. Controls at the front of the range are recomto test the patient's ability to
mended. However, the purpose
show
“
of this training
to
the patient
A broom closet, vacuum cleaner, and adjustable ironing board should also be included. Table space should be provided for training in eating and for use as a writing surface. A rug can also be used to test the patient's ability to
cope with that type
of floor covering.
Speech and Hearing
The speech and hearing unit serves those with disabilities of deafness, stuttering, or delayed speech and voice disorders which may result from various basic abnormalities, diseases, or injuries.
A wide variety Some provide for
of
programs
is
possible.
treatment of postoperative disorders resulting from tonsillectomies and ear operations, cerebral palsy, meningitis, cleft palate, hemiplegia, vocal cord anomalies. Services may range from testing and treating of all conditions to emphasis on disorders associated with certain specific disabilities. The center may include speech therapy only or audiological testing as well. The program may serve adults or children,
The center may include a teaching and search program in speech and hearing.
re-
Although ratios vary widely with different patients, an approximation of Staff-Patient Ratios
is as follows: For audiometric screening: one audiometric technician may screen one patient every five to eight minutes. 2. For audiometric testing: the audiologist may test four to eight patients per day during the initial screening process. For a complete test for hearing aid evaluation, three hours is needed per patient, and the test is usually
staff-patient ratios 1.
in
two
visits.
For individual therapy: one therapist for six to ten patients per day (one half-hour to one-hour periods). The audiologist may also act as therapist. 4. For group therapy: five to eight persons per therapist; one therapist for twenty-four patients per day. 3.
Organization
of
Space
Patients
toilet
facilities
and coat racks should be accessible from the waiting room. It is recommended that the sound control room, test room, and audiometric testing rooms be located on a subcorridor off the waiting room in order to reduce noise. In a children’s program, a play and ex-
540
amination room near the test room
is
recom-
mended. Audiometric
room
Testing
The
audiometric
testing
some
cases, booths) is a facility for pure-tone threshold testing and short form hearing screening tests (see Fig. 11). Space should be provided for the audiologist's desk with an audiometer and one patient’s chair or wheel chair. Furniture should be arranged so that the audiologist may face the patient and operate the audiometer. Provide storage and shelving. The room should be treated acoustically for an overall residual noise level of not more than 40 decibels as measured on the '“C” scale. This involves the treatment of walls, ceilings,
and
(or, in
floors. (See Fig. 12.)
Room and Test Room This facility is essenaudiology program. It is preferable to place these rooms off the subcorridor or hall, and to control the activity in surrounding rooms in order that extraneous noises be eliminated. Control
tial
for an
For a children’s program it is highly desirable outside the test room, a play and examination room be provided to accustom the child that,
environment and to make the transition room as easy as possible. This room should be equipped with children's furniture and toys. Equipment for the control room will include a work surface for the audiometer, earphones and microphone, tape recorder, and tape and record storage, and may include other equipment such as a Bekesy audiometer. to his
or both.
conducted
Fig. 11
how
he may use, if possible, appliances that are standard in his community. A standard clothes closet is recommended as a part of the training in dressing. is
to the test
hearing aid evaluation is part of the program, provide storage space for hearing aids either in the test room or the control room. The control room should be treated acoustically to achieve an overall residual noise level of not more than 40 decibels on the “C” scale. An observation window approximately 1 8 by 20 in. is required. For adequate control of sound transmission, three pieces of glass of different thicknesses and nonparallel in construction are recommended. One-way vision glass in the control room is optional. If
Equipment for the test room includes a speaker, microphone, and headphone. Microphone and headphone jacks should be located near the patient’s chair. Additional auxiliary wall- or ceiling-mounted speakers are sometimes provided, particularly for the testing of children. These speakers should be separately switched. All this equipment is wired to the audiometer. Additional spare jacks in both the control and the test
room
are
recommended
other items of equipment.
for
Conduits be-
tween the jacks should be installed in a manner that avoids sound transmission. For complete diagnostic service, a galvanic skin response audiometer may be used in the test room. For diagnostic testing, delayed auditory feedback equipment may be used. For a children's program, children's furniture and toys should be part of the test room. The test rooms should be acoustically treated to achieve an overall residual noise level of not more than 30 decibels on the “C” scale. This requires carefully supervised con-
new construcmay be depressed to eliminate
struction of a ‘‘floating room.” In tion the subfloor
the high step or
room.
ramp
at the
entrance to the
on grade, the floating slab for the room may be placed on a sand bed. To achieve this degree of acoustic control, it is essential that the floating room have adequate “mass” and that all necessary precautions are taken to avoid the conduction of sound. Proper air circulation is a frequent problem. test
If
built
Orthetic and/or Prosthetic Appliance
Shop
Orthetic appliances are medically prescribed for the support of weakened parts of the body and to increase or control their function. Prosthetic appliances are medically prescribed
substitutes for a missing body part. orthetists and prosthetists in cooperation with the physician, the physical therapist, and the occupaartificial
Such devices are constructed by
tional therapist. (See Fig.
The type
of facility
for
13.)
orthetic and
pros-
thetic services will vary widely with rehabilita-
and is dictated at times by the commercial services. Frequently, arrangements are made for a representative of a commercial firm to visit the center. For this purpose a fitting room tion centers
availability of
is
recommended as
a
minimum
facility,
al-
though an office or treatment cubicle is sometimes used and minor adjustments and repairs appliances are made in the occupational therapy department. However, a small shop (as illustrated) within the center provides close liaison between the patient, the medical team, and the orthetist or prosthetist. In such a shop, small devices such as feeders and page turners may be fabricated and adjustments and repairs made to wheelchairs, braces, limbs, and crutches. If a minimum facility is established, consideration should be given to its future expansion, not only in terms of space, but with respect to electrical services, ventilation, gas supply, etc. to
Health
REHABILITATION CENTERS
4.
The fabrication of major appliances requires noisy equipment. Isolation of such a shop is essential to the control of noise and reduction of the fire hazard.
much heavy and
Psychiatric Service: Frequently the psychiais employed on a part-time basis and is primarily called upon to provide the following services: 1 Psychiatric screening to diagnose emo-
trist
.
As the orthetic and/or appliance shop will serve outpa-
Location Within Building
prosthetic
tients requiring
minor adjustments or repairs should be easily
devices, the unit accessible to entrances. to
their
The
sufficiently large for this purpose.
SOCIAL
ADJUSTMENT
Social
adjustment
requires
psychiatric
social services for the treatment of social
emotional problems.
2.
and and
problems
Staff consultations
on how these prob-
lems should be managed patient's total rehabilitation 3.
unit should be located in a noisy zone,
and, if possible, near the gymnasium, so that the patient may try out his prostheses or braces. The fitting room, however, may be
made
tional
in
relation
to
the
program
In-service staff training for the purpose
developing greater understanding of the psychological factors in disability Psychological Services include: 1 Psychological evaluation, accomplished by means of various psychological testing procedures and interviews which evaluate
of
.
the patient's intelligence and personality 2. Interpretation of clinical findings to members of the staff 3. Counseling (therapy) on either an individual or a group basis, usually carried out with the psychiatrist and social service staff
In-service training of psychologists and
participation in psychological research.
The minimum recommended psychological would include a psychologist's counseling room and test room. facilities
Social Services include the following: 1. Social study and evaluation, including the collection of relevant information from the patient, his family, and other agencies, and the appraisal of such information with respect to the patient's rehabilitation potential 2. Social casework, where the social worker (medical social worker or psychiatric social worker) works with the patient to improve attitudes toward self-support and motivation
toward treatment and work 3. Social group work, including the correction of abnormal living patterns by using planned group activities, recreational in nature but therapeutic in value. It may include hobby activities, group discussions, and activities of an adult education nature.
541
Health
REHABILITATION CENTERS
The services should be
Location Within Building
administered
As most
quiet area of the building. incoming patients will receive some in
a
services in this area, it should be readily accessible from the main entrance of the building. If the program involves large numbers of children, the psychological therapy room for children should be in the children's treatmenttraining unit.
(See Fig. 14.) of The flow pattern for Space patients within this area will vary considerably. A typical pattern for the evaluation of a new patient would have the sequence of reception-
Organization
ist,
waiting room, social worker (for case his-
tory of patient), medical evaluation (for
coming
all
in-
psychological testing, and psychiatric screening. The two latter services are not needed by all patients. Vocational counseling, and appraisal of the patient’s employment potential in the vocational evaluation unit may also be included in the initial evaluation. Also for this purpose, audiometric screening and speech evaluation patients),
are often helpful. Staff-Patient
Ratios
As
screening
psychiatric
and psychological therapy will vary widely with individual patients, no approximation of staffpatient ratios
is
Fig.
13
Orthetic and/or prosthetic appliance shop
possible.
For psychological testing a recommended average is two patients a day per psychologist for brief psychological evaluations. This includes the time required for interpretation and Extensive psychological writing reports. evaluation requires one work day per patient, including time for preparation of the report. Other activities such as training, research, and therapy will detract from these averages. This does not provide for evaluation of vocational skills, aptitudes, and interests, which is a function of vocational services.
For social caseworkers, the number of cases per worker will vary with the number of intake studies and the number receiving continuing service. Where there is a balance between these two types of service, an individual case-
worker may handle
a
caseload of from 25 to
35 patients. Waiting
Room
If
the
program
of
is
sufficient
scope, provide a separate waiting area with a receptionist for the psychological-social unit. In smaller centers, this facility may be incorporated in the main waiting room for the center.
The receptionist schedules patient interviews with the psychological-social staff. Access to interview and test rooms by means of a subcorridor will provide privacy and reduce extraneous noise from the rest of the building. Psychological
T raining
and
Research
Programs
For
program, provide observation facilities in the children's play therapy and activity group rooms, such as observation cubicles with one-way vision glass or, preferably, television cameras with screens in a central viewing room. (See Fig. 15.) Provide a separate office for each psychologa training
ical trainee.
Research programs are of a wide variety. involve much equipment; others, no equipment. Provide a separate area for this
Some
facility.
VOCATIONAL The vocational area
SOCIAL of a rehabilitation center
provides the following
542
services:
counseling,
Fig.
14
ADJUSTMENT
(minimum
facility).
Health
REHABILITATION CENTERS
evaluation, training, and placement; the sheltered workshop (or rehabilitation workshop)
and
some
cases, certain be included. The vocational program is determined by the needs of the patients and the needs and opportunities of business and industry in the community served by the center. This program is is
part of this area,
in
aspects of special education
a
most important
part
will
of the
patient's
total
rehabilitation process. (See Fig. 16.)
This area has the responsibility of acquainting the patient with situations in industry or in business and of preparing him for job com-
designed workshops Realistically petition. and offices will be required to create a job situation atmosphere for the patient. This area should present to the patient a very wide range of job possibilities. Few centers will contain an extensive number of job
some may have none
this need cooperation of a trade school or some other agency. Patients should not be trained for jobs which they cannot obtain later. Changing types and techniques in industry make it essential that this area have maximum
'situations;
through
has been
satisfied
flexibility,
especially
in
if
the
heating,
ventilating,
plumbing, lighting, electrical installations, and equipment placement. The vocational area Fig.
must offer training in small segments of a job operation and present advanced types of vocational opportunities. Vocational counseling provides an opportunity for the patient to obtain an understanding of his vocational abilities and potential, and to learn the scope of their possible application. The center may choose to work with cooperating counselors already established in the community, if it does not provide this service within the center. Sometimes counselors are loaned to centers by the State Voca-
15
tional Rehabilitation
work
Agency and conduct
their
at the center.
Vocational evaluation is the process of coland appraising data on the patient's
lecting
SUPERVISION
interests, aptitudes,
and
ability in
work
situa-
This section needs to be quite broad in scope in order to find the vocation best suited and most satisfying to the disabled person. This section of the center's program is frequently referred to as a prevocational
tions.
unit.
Vocational training provides the discipline necessary for the patient to attain his job potential established in vocational evaluation. Vocational training requires carefully supervised instruction in vocations best serving the patient's needs with full regard to employment possibilities.
Sheltered workshop provides employment persons within the center. This is productive work for which wages are paid; the work is usually obtained on contract or subcontract basis. In this area, further vocational evaluation and training are possible. Special education will be found in this area when enough patients have difficulties with certain areas of academic or vocational achievement. If children need this service, it may be located in their area. Frequently, this is provided through cooperation with the public schools. Placement service is to be offered when the number of job placements and contacts warrants it; otherwise this service is performed by other agencies. In smaller centers placements may be handled by the vocational counfor disabled
Placement may mean the patient's return former job, full employment by selective placement or partial or special employment selor.
to his
Fig.
16
either at
home
or in the sheltered
workshop.
543
Health
REHABILITATION CENTERS
Supervisors will be in charge of the separate units of this area and will be responsible for integrating their unit with the total vocational effort.
There follows a sampling of some of the vocational training fields that the architect may be called upon to plan for:
Commercial
the standards of quality and guarantee delivery of the required quantities on time schedules. It must provide payment for services rendered and rewards in terms of
2.
Tailoring
individual growth and development.
3.
Drafting
4.
Watch repair Shoe repair
1
The director
be in charge of the total vocational area and responsible for integrating this area with the rest of the rehabilitation center program. will
.
5.
6. 7.
Vocational Training
8.
Vocational training
prescribed after evaluation of the patient's abilities, interests, and job training has begun. The vocational training unit provides opportunity for
growth
is
in
ability
and assurance
in
Location Within Building
Furniture repair and upholstering Machine shop operation Radio, television, and appliance repair
(See Fig. 18.) Sheltered Workshop
The sheltered workshop provides additional
actual job situations or experiences as close
opportunities for further evaluation, training,
During this period of training, the patient may continue to receive services from the medical unit, the social adjustment unit, or any other part of the rehabili-
and eventual employment of the handicapped individual. The sheltered workshop was once thought of as a place for terminal employment of those who could not benefit from further training. Today this concept has changed, and it is established as one of the steps in the reperhaps, habilitation process. There will, always be some patients who, because of extensive or complicated disabilities, require the environment of the sheltered workshop as the only means of permanent employment. The sheltered workshop is never an isolated unit in terms of program, but is part of the total vocational area which in turn is an integral part
to reality as
possible.
tation center. (See Fig.
Differences
17.)
and
nature of the community will dictate differences in the kind of training program to be employed. In addition to working with local industry, the local training resources will supplement the center’s training programs whenever pracin
disabilities
the
and suitable. Trade schools may accept more capable candidates who do not have emotional or medical problems, and in
ticable
only the
cases, they may not be able to give the personal attention needed. The rehabilitation center deals with complex problems and disabilities; therefore, its vocational training unit will need to give greater emphasis to limited training objectives which are often more suitable to the restricted educational and
some
cultural
backgrounds
of
many
of its patients.
Training in a range of vocations should be offered to accommodate several levels of abilities, skills, and interests. In addition, the changing personnel needs of industry make a representative range important.
must meet
of the center. For selected
patients,
it
is
the
developing work tolerance, work habits, confidence, and skill. It also provides a means for the development of industrial quantity standards. The added incentive of pay for work done is often the motivation needed to help the disabled person carry through his rehabilitation program. This work is most frequently secured from industry or other sources on subcontract basis. This work must be done within the most businesslike atmosphere and framework, yet without undue pressures of time; however, it best
means
of
The sheltered workshop
should be conveniently related to the other areas of vocational services. It may be a detached or semidetached unit with a separate •patient entrance, as patients engaged in the shop usually work an eight-hour-day program and no longer require the intensive services of the medical department. Depending upon its closeness to the medical department of the center, the shop may require a first-aid room. In the larger workshop a fulltime nurse maY be required. As work within the shop may be noisy, separation from quiet areas in the center is
recommended. For delivery and shipment of goods, it is essential that the unit be adjacent to a loading area. Organization of Space
This area will closely
re-
semble industrial space and will house industrial operations. The heating, ventilating, and dust collection systems will need to be planned accordingly, with floors designed for adequate loads and an electrical system to meet many different kinds of demands. The type of work carried out in the shop will be subject to frequent change. Flexibility in organizing the space is, therefore, essential: the area should have a high ceiling and be free of columns. Floors should be designed to take heavy loads of equipment and stacked materials. Much of the work under contract in the shop will be of an assembly line nature. However, the products may merely require work surfaces for their assembly or they may require special equipment (frequently supplied to the center by the contracting firm if it is for a particular job). In laying out equipment in the shop, it is advisable to obtain expert industrial advice in order to assure efficient flow patterns and simplified handling and storage of materials and products. Some work surfaces should be adjustable in height and all should be designed for the use of wheelchair patients. Electrical power outlets should be frequently spotted along bench walls and/or the ceiling grid. Floor outlets for power tool use in the central area of the shop are recommended. Wiring should be sized to take a varying power de-
mand. Adequate general
illumination should be provided with increased intensity at work stations as dictated by the task. A time clock for the patients' use is sometimes provided in the workshop to encourage punctuality and to determine the patients' production rate. All necessary safety precautions should be taken to protect the patient from power tool hazards, fire hazards, falls, and other mishaps. A potential hazard exists when there is insufficient space for the storage of materials and products. Ample storage space should be provided for the orderly, safe arrangement of bulky items. A sprinkler system installed in the shop will reduce fire risk. Storage is a major problem and is related to the volume of items handled. The space for storage will vary from 15 percent to 50 percent of the Fig.
544
17
work
area.
Receiving, shipping, and handling of bulk items require additional space. This space
Health
REHABILITATION CENTERS
UJ
-U
o
cover makers.
SHARPENER
OOCMMLLI. SWITCHII. METERS
_
chair
leather;
EEJ SHOE REPAIR a POLISHING
xi) xii)
and Semiskilled
ii)
iii)
x)
Arts and Crafts: i)
ii)
hand sewers; sewing machine operators, weave-bac specialists;
ix)
pattern makers;
Skilled C.
electrical
iv)
v)
pressers;
viii)
cutter;
vi)
tailors;
vii)
markers;
iii)
sales clerks.
xiii)
spreaders;
i)
ii)
and Semiskilled
Skilled
PRESSING
and Semiskilled Sewing and Tailoring
A.
copy readers;
vii)
B.
tellers;
receptionists;
x)
business machine operator;
vi)
ticket
ix)
cashiers;
v)
OP AG E
Skilled
bank
viii)
typists;
i)
O n
appliance RE PAIR BENC •
o Skilled i
Semiskilled
Repairmen: i)
ii)
watch repairing;
iii)
assemblers;
iv)
tool
v) vi)
Fig.
business machines;
sharpening;
camera repairing; shoe repairing.
G. F.
Electric Light, i)
Power, and Electronics:
meter readers;
and Semiskilled
Building Trades: i)
ii)
iii)
plumbers;
iii)
assemblers;
iv)
masons;
iv)
inspectors
v)
radio,
and
v)
testers;
television,
electronic
chine repairmen.
ma-
electricians.
Woodwork i)
painters;
meter men;
ii)
H.
carpenters;
ii)
iii) 1.
cabinet furniture
Plastics i)
ii)
Trades:
patternmakers;
makers; repairmen.
Production:
bench grinders; hand filers; press operators;
iii)
drill
iv)
assemblers.
18
545
C
T
1
Health
REHABILITATION CENTERS
III.
EXHAUST
Machine Shop Operations: tool and die makers; i) machine tool operators. ii)
SOLDERINO
DRI L L
PRESS
Unskilled
IV.
A.
Restaurant Occupations: i)
w ooo
waiters
and waitresses.
a
P LASTI S T ORAOE
EXHAUS Unskilled B.
Building Maintenance: i)
1
janitors;
ii)
housekeepers.
i; o***:3 *.
'
PLANTS
a
POTTINO
i
!
•T$“*
I
COOL STO UNDER
C. Fig.
546
Building Material Handling
18 (continued)
a u
Unskilled D.
Unskilled
o
lx. L, 1
u Jir_ i _ j
BENCH
Greenhouse and Floriculture: greenhouse worker; i) ii)
flower preparation (corsages,
etc.).
—
— Health
REHABILITATION CENTERS
program,
facilities
for
snacks — refrigerator,
hot plate, and sink — are indicated. Or locate this facility within the children's treatment and training area to serve the nursery as well as the occupational therapy room. Exterior circulation involves both vehicular
a
and pedestrian traffic. Buses, taxis, automobiles, and service trucks must be considered. Parking spaces should be located so that neither patients nor visitors need cross driveto enter the building. Separate areas of the parking space should be designated for patient, staff, and visitor use. Appropriate directional signs should be considered for the
ways
nr
control of traffic.
efficient
V
some centers own cars,
In
where many outpatients drive
their
designed for wheelchair patients is considerable convenience. (See Fig. 20.) All centers will require a service area for the delivery of equipment, supplies, and fuel. However, centers with kitchen facilities, vocational training programs, and a sheltered workshop will have a greatly increased service problem; and the service area and its relation to other traffic must be studied accordingly. a carport
o
a
~r~r
(a)
Adequate maintenance shop facilities are The shop not only will serve general maintenance purposes, but frequently will be used for the repair, modification, or fabrication of furniture and equipment used in the center.
essential.
/
nT 1
\
i
i
1
\
LU + i
6 - 6"
u'-o"
19
Fig.
(a) Children's physical therapy, (b) Children's
should be related to a loading dock and truck service area. The service area should be planned so that it does not interfere with other vehicular or pedestrian circulation.
As patients working in the shop will usually work an eight-hour day, facilities for their comshould not be overlooked. If the center has no dining facilities, a lunchroom convenient to the shop is recommended, as some patients will bring their lunches with them. Provision of a cafeteria is also considered a desirable facility where the number of patients warrants it. Most states have specific requirements for rest areas for men and women. These requirements should be checked carefully before planning lounges, toilet facilities, and lockers for fort
the workshop. A small office for the workshop supervisor should be provided, and so designed that there
the patients
maximum
office. Additional office
Physical Therapy Exercise
Room
The requirements
here are similar to those needed
room
for
Treatment cubicle requirements are the same them with treatment tables and ceiling-mounted mirrors
for children as adults; equip
above. Relate the area to outdoor therapy for out-
door exercises. Provide a sink for the therapist’s and
chil-
dren’s use. Toilet facilities for children should be immediately convenient to the exercise room and
outdoor therapy. Special equipment may have
to
be designed
cases. Figure 19 illustrates a movable stall bar and parallel bars adjustable in height and width for children of varying
for
individual
ages.
in
supervision of the shop activity space will be required for records, cost accounting, and estimating. The size of this area will be determined essentially by the volume of work and number of contracts handled by the workshop. is
from the
occupational therapy.
adults,
in the exercise except that the equipment
is selected for the child's size and interests. (See Fig. 19.) The space indicates a minimum exercise area staffed by one therapist.
Occupational Therapy
Equipment should be
se-
lected for the child’s physical and mental age level. The plan indicates an area staffed by one therapist.
Place toilet facilities convenient to the ther-
apy room. to the outdoors so that some be conducted outside. Although special equipment may be required for individual cases, equipment indicated includes standing tables, typing tables, work tables (all with adjustable heights), loom, easel,
Relate the
activities
room
may
and workbench. Provide a sink within the room for the children’s and therapist’s use. As training in eating may form a part of the
Fig.
20
Parking space for cars operated by disabled
persons.
547
Health
MENTAL HEALTH CENTERS
and surgical services might be provided by the general hospital. Arrangements need only be made to ensure availability and ready cal,
SIX TYPES OF PSYCHIATRIC FACILITIES
The Physical Plant
The physical plant shall provide a safe and sanitary environment with adequate diagnostic and therapeutic resources.
The design and construction
of the
physical
plant should be appropriate to the type of ser-
houses, to the staffing and organizaand to local geography and style. It will, therefore, be unique for each facility, but it must be safe and must make vices
it
tional pattern of the facility,
a positive contribution to the efficient attain-
of the facility's goals. It must satisfy the physiological as well as the psychological needs of patients and staff. Sleeping units for patients are designed to promote comfort and dignity and to ensure privacy consistent with the patients welfare. In the absence of other state or local requirements, there is a minimum of 80 sq ft of floor space in single rooms and 70 sq ft of floor space per person in multiple patient rooms. It is desirable that multiple patient rooms be designed to accommodate no more than six patients, but preferably four. There may be a need for appropriate security measures incorporated into the physical design of some
ment
wards. There
minimum
of one lavatory for each one toilet for each eight patients, one tub or shower for each fifteen patients, and one drinking fountain on each ward. A lavatory is installed in each toilet area. Approis a
six patients,
priate provisions are in toilet
Since
made
to ensure privacy
and bathing areas. psychiatric
patients
are
generally
ambulatory and need to associate with other patients and with staff, there is provision for day rooms and recreational areas. At least 40 sq ft of floor space per patient is required for dayrooms. There are also usually solaria, a dining room or cafeteria where many patients take their meals, a vistors' room, a gymnasium, an exercise area in the building or perhaps on the grounds, and rooms for special treatment, interviewing of patients, group and individual therapy, etc. Other facilities for patients might include a locker room or individual lockers in the sleeping units, a small laundry room, a snack kitchen on each ward, and a coffee shop, clothing shop, and cosmetic shop for patients as well as employees. Offices are provided for physicians, psychologists, social workers, nursing administrators, dietitian, and other staff members, and these are conveniently located to encourage effective communication with patients and other staff. Nurses' stations should be centrally located to permit full view of recreation areas and immediate access to patients and to treatment areas. Appropriate conference rooms are also provided, and there are suitable arrangements for clerical staff for
each department or
unit.
Standards for Psychiatric Facilities, The American Psychiatric Association, Washington, DC, 969 1
548
Community Mental Health Centers
The community mental health center
repre-
sents the formal reflection of the professional objectives of providing comprehensive services and continuity of care for the prevention, early detection, treatment, and follow-up care of mental disorder within a designated population. The comprehensive center is essentially a program rather than a building complex; it is a program that seeks to plan and coordinate the range of mental health services required to meet the mental health needs of a population. It is a combination of services either under a single administration in a discrete physical entity, under a single administration in multiple physical facilities, or under various administrations which, by contracts and/or agreements, are organized to provide the continuity of services noted above. A center may be under governmental, philanthropic, or private auspices, or it may be supported by a combination of resources. If it is to be an effective agency, however, the community served by the center should participate in establishing the major needs, goals, and priorities of the mental health center. The community and the staff of the mental health center must define the goals and establish a priority system for the attainment of these goals. The community is ultimately responsible for identifying resources and needs, obtaining sufficient financial support to assure
adequate competent personnel, adequately paid and given an adequate physical plant to implement the programs to achieve the stated
numbers
of
goals.
As
a
patient,
minimum, the center must provide inpatient,
partial
hospitalization
out(in-
cluding day care) services, community consultation and professional education for other than the staff of the center, and clinical diagnosis and treatment on an emergency basis. It is also desirable that it participate in public education to promote or conserve mental health research to increase the body of knowledge about mental illness and the effectiveness of services utilized, home care and follow-up, nursing home care, vocational rehabilitation, guidance for the families of emotionally disturbed persons, and otherwise contribute to maintaining the optimal functioning of individuals with residual sequelae or complications of mental disorders. Services of the center should be easily accessible and widely pub-
community served. To provide comprehensive services and continuity of care, the community mental health licized to the
center should have easy relationships with other ‘people-serving’’ agencies, and particularly with the public psychiatric hospital serving the area. Patient care mbst be coordinated between the center and other agencies, and patients must move from one element of service to another within the center with ease, as treatment needs indicate. For example, in mental health centers that are part of or closely related to general hospitals, the necessary inpatient, dietetic, laboratory, pharmacy, medi-
accessibility for patients in the mental health center.
To be truly comprehensive, the mental health center must be responsible for the adequacy of services provided to persons with special problem mental disorders or to populations facing unusually chronic and severe emotional stress and who are alienated from their community or the broader community's supportive social systems. It may not be feasible for the center to provide all of the clinical services necessary in managing the difficult biological and social problems presented by drug dependency, alcoholism, aging, delinquency, mental retardation, or the many other special problems included among the mental disorders or in which mental disorder is suspected of playing a significant part. The center should, however, identify the population at risk for each of the special problems and plan a program to provide preventive, diagnostic, therapeutic, rehabilitative, or supportive services for each of these populations. It should identify the community's most likely agents for early intervention to assist or support individuals in each of these populations or identify agents who are providing therapeutic and rehabilitative care. The program should indicate the ways in which the center would be most useful to these community agents. The responsibility for the mental health needs of a population implies that the mental health center should help various social systems of the community function in ways that develop and sustain effectiveness of individuals participating in these systems. The center should aid these systems in their support of persons with mental disorder. The implications for prevention, diagnosis, treatment, and rehabilitation are obvious; the recipient of mental health services includes the patient but the services extend to his family and to a variety of social systems. Consultation and education in the community are important functions of any center. In these ways the center responds interlocking, to the community’s need for strengthening, and expansion of all its resources that have a bearing on mental health. Community consultation and education offer mental health possibilities for influencing beyond the confines of hospitals and offices and thus contribute to the prevention of mental disorder. To deliver this broad range of services, a flexible organization with a multidisciplinary staff is required. In addition to the usual professional staff of psychiatrists, psychologists, social workers, nurses, and activity therapists, there may be a variety of nonprofessional persocial scientists volunteers, and add new perspectives to the center. Staff may be organized by services (prevention, diagnosis, intensive treatment, extended treatment, rehabilitation, etc.), by programs for specific population groups (children, adoles-
sonnel,
to
cents, the aged, alcoholics, mentally retarded, etc.), or by geographic areas of the community
served. Regardless of the organization, there
'
Health
MENTAL HEALTH CENTERS
must be adequate qualified leadership, administrative and clinical, to assure thoughtful supervision, planning, evaluation, and coordination required to blend the array of available talents and resources into an effective center of services.
Responsibility and
commensurate authority
should be delegated to ensure optimal utilizaeach person's skills, respecting principles of ultimate legal and clinical responsibility. As stated elsewhere by the APA, “The need for cooperatively defining the area of activity and responsibility for professionals tion of
who
participate in the care of patients requires
that physicians or their
designees be recog-
nized as having the ultimate responsibility for patient care. They, and they alone, are trained to assume this responsibility. In the public nonprofesinterest, other professionals or
when contributing to patient care, recognize and respect this ultimate
sionals,
must
responsibility.
Psychiatric Outpatient Clinics In a
psychiatric outpatient clinic, a psychiatrist responsibility for providing diagnosconsulting, and therapeutic services for
assumes tic,
help of a professional staff that includes at least the disciplines of psychiatry, psychology, and social work. This staff nucleus may be supplemented as needed by representatives of related disciplines, such as pediatrics, internal medicine, neurology, mental health nursing, speech therapy, remedial techniques, physical and occupational therapy, and rehabilitation. Members of the various disciplines not only work on the staff but also function on the team in daily practice, coordinating their skills to meet the needs of patients. The psychiatrist who serves as director sees that this coordination is effective. He assumes responsibility for all clinical functions and is on duty sufficient outpatients with the
time, on a regularly scheduled basis, to ade-
quately discharge
his
responsibility.
He
as-
sures adequate evaluation of all new patients, supervision of the staff, and sustained direction of the total program of services. The psychiatrist-in-charge retains overall authority, but may delegate administrative, as distinct clinical, responsibility to a nonmedical executive or administrator. In addition to diagnosing and treating patients, the clinic provides training for professional psychiatric personnel and those of other disciplines as well as education for the public; it participates in various community endeavors related to the mentally ill and carries out research. The methods of implementation and the proportionate emphasis given to the various functions differ according to local circumstances, community needs, and clinic policy. The clinic may serve patients for whom appropriate psychiatric assistance in a convenient outpatient clinic may prevent more prolonged illness, those recovering from a stage of illness that required hospitalization and who may need further outpatient care as they resume a regular way of life, those who are referred for prehospitalization evaluation,
from
and those therapeutic
who can
benefit
intervention
to
from temporary
overcome
a
life
crisis.
Admission policies
Many
vary.
outpatient
for
have an
clinics
walk-in," policy, indicating that they accept self-referrals and referrals from com-
both
munity agents. Others accept only those cases that have been referred by another professional source. Some clinics specialize in the diagnosis and treatment of children, adults, or special populations, such as people with alcohol problems. Each clinic has a written plan indicating the scope of its admission policy and referral plan, and the plan is well known to all referring sources. The services of a clinic may be offered on either a full- or part-time basis, according to local circumstances. Whatever its arrangement, the clinic should be accessible to the members of the community it serves. For example, a clinic serving an area where many working people are paid by the day or hour with little or no provision for sick leave should be open some evenings or weekends so as not to discourage or penalize those who would have to take a loss in pay to begin or continue treatment.
The
clinic’s participation in
school, hospital, welfare or public health department, or other appropriate professional organizations for the exchange of services, scientific advancement, and professional and administrative support. If not, it achieves these
aims through the use
of qualified consultants by establishing a professional advisory board of appropriately qualified persons.
or
The psychiatric outpatient asked
clinic
is
often
to furnish an evaluative report regarding
The content of a report is determined by the purposes of the agency for which it is
a patient.
prepared and
it
keeping with ethical prac-
is in
a separate psychiatric service
or cannot be provided,
it
is
can
frequently possible
use some general medical, minimal care,
to
or other beds for psychiatric patients and to secure the services of a consultant psychiatrist.
good general hospitals have a plan for handling psychiatric emergencies, such as acute toxic reactions, suicide attempts, and acute behavioral disturbances. Small hospitals may have two or more rooms for such patients, All
their transfer to a hospital where spepsychiatric facilities are available. It is advisable that no patient with suicidal tendencies be released without psychiatric consultation
pending cial
if
a psychiatrist is available.
When
the general hospital has a psychiatric
service, the service provides for the care and
treatment of patients admitted for psychiatric disorders and also for those patients who, in the course of hospitalization for another reason, experience a psychiatric illness. Most patients are admitted voluntarily, although occasionally the hospital seeks legal authority for detaining one who is very disturbed. Any limitations on admissions, such as those imposed by the physical construction of the unit or by the training and experience of its staff, are clearly stated in the plan of the hospital. Because of the small size of the psychiatric unit in most general hospitals, the unit usually focuses on intensive short-term therapy and diagnostic services. Some general hospitals have, however, found it possible to develop suitable facilities and staffing to admit and treat psychiatric patients who are expected to remain over 30 days. Some hospitals also have provision for partial hospitalization, in addition to round-the-clock services, and for outpatient services to former patients and others who do not need full-time hospitalization. Experience has indicated that, expressed as a percentage of the bed capacity of the hospital, the number of psychiatric beds required will vary from 3 to 1 5 percent, the most usual figure being about 10 percent of the total beds. A capacity of 20 to 26 beds in one nursing unit seems to be most efficient. When a hospital is capable of supporting more than this number of beds, they are usually provided in two or
more nursing that if
units.
Experience has shown be treated in one unit
men and women may
adequate facilities are available. Since the psychiatric service operates as an
integral part of the hospital,
tice.
many
of its func-
tional services are provided by the hospital ad-
Psychiatric Services
in
ministration.
General Hospitals
general
AH general hospitals should have a wellknown plan for receiving management, and disposition of psychiatric patients If the general hospital has a psychiatric service or department, there must he a qualified psychiatrist in charge, with appropriate allied personnel, particularly nursing personnel who have had training in the management of psychiatric patients. ,
These might include most
professional
of the
services: i.e medical, surgical, and dental; dietetic, laboratory, x-ray, ,
pharmacy, library, chaplaincy, and medical records; and administrative and maintenance services.
Private Psychiatric Hospitals
psychiatric hospitals are nongovspecialty hospitals. Like general hospitals, they may be operated on either a nonprofit or for-profit basis. They have the Private
ernmental Every general hospital must think through its responsibilities for the person presenting himself with psychiatric symptoms, in order either to admit the patient or to assist in quickly referring him to the nearest treatment resource capable of providing prompt diagnosis and treatment for the particular case. The feasibility of establishing a psychiatric service in a gen-
total
Principles Underlying Interdisciplinary Re-
ser-
is
eral hospital as a part of the
lations Between the Professions of Psychiatry and Psychology — A Position Statement by the Council of the American Psychiatric Association, February 1964
community
an important responsibility. Some individuals may have a problem that can best be removed or alleviated by another agency, and the clinic cooperates with other community resources wherever possible. Some patients need help from several sources, and the professionals involved must clarify the needs and outline areas in which each can be most effective. Working relationships with surrounding inpatient facilities are maintained to achieve easy flow of patients in and out of inpatient services and to avoid administrative delays and failure of communication about patients. The clinic may be affiliated with a medical vice plans
Whether
clinics
open door," or
upon many staff,
and the orientation
professional
will
of the
depend
factors, including local needs, the
availability of other facilities, of
network
community health program
in
the availability of
the hospital and
the
medical
community.
responsibility of providing treatment
programs
with definitive goals for the welfare of the patient, with the realization that the period of hospitalization may be only a segment of the total treatment plan. The medical staff should make use of the opportunity provided by a high ratio of medical staff to patients to regulate the therapeutic program and to observe the processes of illness and the response to therapy. The most advanced approaches to treatment, and individualization of
program
to
meet each
patient's
549
Health
MENTAL HEALTH CENTERS should be employed. The hospital should take advantage of around-the-clock observations by many trained observers, and multidisciplinary views in conference, in the evaluation of therapy and the integration of theory and practice. There should be a periodic needs,
evaluation of the effectiveness of the hospital therapeutic program. Although the primary function of the hospital is to maintain excellence in psychiatric treatment, the professional and administrative staff should be encouraged to utilize the unique opportunities for education and research. Most private psychiatric hospitals serve their
geographic communities — local, state, and regional — although a number of them, because of their special or unique treatment programs for
specific
categories
of
from wherever patients come. referrals
in
patients,
the world
receive
these
Private psychiatric hospitals, therefore, vary Each follows the program determined
greatly.
by
its
medical
staff, its
approach
to treatment
and its goals. Each private psychiatric hospital must have established written procedures by which it will either admit a patient or quickly refer him to the nearest, most appropriate, treatment facility. A qualified psychiatrist must be responsible for the treatment of the patient, and there must be other mental health professionals, including nursing personnel with training in psychiatric nursing.
The length
of stay in a private psychiatric
should be commensurate with the goals of therapy and the patient’s illness. In keeping with the current concepts that early and effective intervention may result in the rehospital
turn of the patient to his community after a very short period of hospitalization, the average length of stay is less than 60 days in three-
fourths of the private psychiatric hospitals. To meet the ultimate needs of the patient, many hospitals maintain medium- or long-term intensive treatment programs as well. The primary goal of hospital treatment is not the shortest possible stay but the most effective therapy. Within the limits of therapeutic goals, the hospital should provide the type and amount of treatment that will result in the patient's resumption of healthy functioning.
Public Psychiatric Hospitals
is
separated into discrete units de-
pends upon its size, its type of organization, and the medical administrative philosophy. However, patients have individual and differing needs, and the treatment program, however administratively organized, seeks to serve these various needs. The hospital should be large enough to meet the
community’s needs
for
vices, but not so large as to
meet the needs
psychiatric
ser-
compromise
its
each patient for individual treatment. Optimal size might be described as the most efficient and effective balance between the facility’s ability to meet the unique needs of the community and its ability to meet the unique needs of each patient. One method that has been devised to achieve this balance is the unit system. Larger hospitals may operate under this sysability to
of
tem, with several semiautonomous patient care units making up the complex. The treatment programs are organized into separate units of similar size, staffing, and types of patients. Regardless of how long he stays, each patient is admitted, treated, and discharged within the same unit. His treatment is the responsibility of the
same group
of staff
mem-
bers from admission to discharge and aftersome instances, the units represent specific geographical areas; this enables the professional staff to work closely and continuously with professional and lay community agencies from that region. Other facilities do not find this geographic admission plan praccare. In
and prefer to admit patients to each unit Regardless of how admissions are handled, the goal of each unit is appropriate treatment for each patient at the most appro-
tical in
rotation.
The treatment program may include separate wards for certain types of patients with special rehabilitation treatment, educational, and needs, such as children, adolescents, alcoholics, patients with tuberculosis, and others who require intensive medical treatment in addition to psychiatric care.
Increasingly, public hospitals are following the mental health center concepts of compre-
hensiveness of service and continuity of care. are, therefore, developing a range of
They
services, including programs of varying degrees of partial hospitalization, outpatient services, rehabilitation, vocational guidance, and
aftercare in addition to the intensive inpatient
institution
treatment programs. A proper balance of these other programs allows for the more efficient use of the inpatient services. The concept of the 'open door’’ has been applied to the majority of wards in most psychiatric hospitals. The open hospital encourages early treatment by emphasizing the voluntary nature of hospitalization and the expressed confidence of the staff that the patient can accept responsibility for his own management. Freedom of movement enables patients to do many things for themselves that might have to be done by staff members under other conditions, and thus allows more staff time available for the promotion of active treatment. It is necessary for some facilities to maintain a closed ward or wards, however, for those patients who may be likely to endanger the safety and welfare of themselves and/or others. Confidence in the facility can best be maintained if appropriate precautions are taken to protect the community from the exceptional patient who has in the past caused it concern.
and care of patients with psychiatric and neurological disorders. Most hospitals in this group are state or provincial hospitals. They provide both short-term and long-term treatment and admit patients both voluntarily and by legal
commitment.
it is recognized that variations in the usual type of state hospital organization are suitable in certain localities, the essential professional, diagnostic, treatment, and administrative and maintenance services described in the preceding section on general standards can be applied to all public hospitals by individual interpretation. Each public hospital has an important function to perform in providing necessary psychiatric services to its community and in promoting psychiatric education and research. Recognizing the advantages of affiliation with medical schools and other medical centers in their areas, many public hospitals have established formal programs of participation in cooperative educational and research
While
efforts.
Whether the
total
treatment program of the
past often been assigned to the public psychiatric hospital due to the lack of available alternatives. The most appropriate and efficient use of scarce psychiatric resources requires that all possibilities for securing the best treatment and care for each individual patient be explored by the patient’s family, the family physician, and community social agencies, and that a broad range of resources be available in
the
community
to
meet the
multiplicity of
nepds.
The hospital encourages community provision for diagnostic, treatment, rehabilitation, and educational and preventive mental hygiene services for former patients, and for those for
whom
hospitalization
ensure
a
may
be
averted,
to
comprehensive network of mental health care secvices. Within this network some services
mental
may health
be
provided by the hospital's which functions on a
clinic,
regular, scheduled basis, either in a fixed loca-
The clinic assists the rehabilitation of former hospital patients, advises those about to enter the hospital, offers treatment to those who do not need hospitaliza-
tion or on a traveling basis. in
and diagnoses and/or treats children with behavioral or educational problems. The staff of the clinic includes as a minimum a psychiatrist, a social worker, and a psychologist, and, if the hospital has adopted the unit system, the same team follows the patient from preadmission interview to discharge and follow-up care. The services of the clinic also include follow-up counseling, evaluation of adjustment after discharge, and medical supervision of tion,
drug dosage.
Services for the Mentally Retarded
priate site.
A
public psychiatric hospital is defined as an provided by the community — whether city, county, state, provincial, or federal government — for the diagnosis, treatment,
550
hospital
The hospital encourages and participates community planning for the development
in
of
appropriate alternative resources and facilities to deal with social problems that have in the
The past ten years or more have brought about a dramatic change of basic concepts regarding the care and treatment of persons with the mental retardation syndrome. Consequently,
requirements of care and treatment have shifted to an extent that the newly developed or developing facilities can no longer be considered as one compatible group of “hospitals and schools for mental defectives’’ as was the case in earlier years. First of all, the care, treatment, education and training of mentally retarded persons in the low borderline and educable range have shifted significantly from residential facilities to day schools. Trained or qualified educators along with other specialists (medicine, audiology, speech, and physical therapy) provide meaningful and adequate services within the public school system or in schools operated by affiliates of the National Association for Retarded Children. Secondly, the care, treatment, and training for more severely retarded children (trainables) are being provided in many communities in a manner similar to that in which these services are rendered for the youngsters who are educable. As a third observation, it must be acknowledged that, for some years now, there has been an observable trend for those persons who suffer from the rather severe to severest degrees of retardation (decerebration syndrome) to outnumber either the educable or the trainable retardates in state institutions. Their demand upon the availability of total lifelong care has become a dominant factor. Thus, it is no longer possible to establish
meaningful standards based upon traditional concepts. A new approach is indicated that takes into consideration factual changes and continued transition. The complexities of needed services can best
Health
MENTAL HEALTH CENTERS be dealt with by projecting various life-span requirements as known to us. However, we shall not attempt to make specific recommendations for those services that are non-
medical
in
The Infant
nature. and
Small
Child
Most mentally
re-
tarded children are retarded at birth (prenatal and paranatal retardation), although it may not be evident at the time. They require diagnostic, prognostic, and treatment services. The pre-school-age medical clinic may operate as an independent agency, a part of a general hospital, or a part of the state hospitaltraining school system. In any event, utilization
and efforts at integration in regional areas will be made and standards must be established and maintained to meet of existing services
existing needs. It
is
desirable that the director of the clinic
be a well-qualified pediatrician. He will have medical consultants on his staff (neurologist, child
psychiatrist,
ophthalmologist,
dentist,
physiatrist, nutritionists, public health nurses,
and others as needed). Essential are full-time or part-time qualified social workers, clinical or developmental psychologists, audiologists, speech, occupational, and physical therapists and medical secretaries. The number of staff employed must correspond to the needs of the patients referred to the clinic.
The
clinic
must have adequate space
to func-
It must have available all diagnostic tools and procedures that are necessary to establish an inclusive and comprehensive diagnosis, such as roentgenology, clinical and anatomic pathology, biochemistry, genetics, and electroencephalography. All personnel must meet licensing and/or certification requirements of their respective
tion.
professions. The clinic, if it is eligible, must meet the standards of the Joint Commission on Accreditation of Hospitals. The Younger School-Age Child children,
once
properly
Mentally retarded diagnosed, will re-
programs be available at the appropriate Whether such a program is part of a public school system or an integral part of a
quire a broad range of varying services: Children who are ambulatory and without significant adjustment problems are, generally, entered into nursery schools with subsequent promotion into subprimary and appropriate
tional
grades of the public school system. State licensing procedures establish necessary standards for personnel and facilities. Children who are not ambulatory or who have major adjustment problems that cannot be dealt with in the public school system or the
quirements of the state and/or federal govern-
home may
private
require in-residence faciliorthopedic or psychiatric services or services to the blind, deaf, or others. All children in this category will be ties
that provide
special
given the required additional diagnostic, treatment, rehabilitative, and educational services that are needed to assist them to develop their optimal potential. Such programs must be multidisciplinary, under qualified medical direction. Thus, they must meet the requirements of the Joint Commission on Accreditation of Hospitals. As the process of treatment and rehabilitation progresses, a differentiation of each child’s long-range needs will become evident. It may lead to discharge into the ral to a
and
child guidance clinic
school
special
community and
system.
It
may
refer-
to the public
require
pro-
longed hospitalization because of specific medical requirements. Or, it may result in providing lifelong protective care in an accredited institution for the chronically ill (extended care unit), a licensed nursing home, or a licensed boarding home. In any event, local, state, and/ or federal licensing requirements must be met and the facility should be accredited by the Joint Commission on Accreditation of Hospitals
The
if
it
is
eligible.
Progressing
Preadolescents
and
Adolescents
Most of the mentally retarded youngsters in the educational and training programs will reach the limit of their academic potential before the age of sixteen. Therefore, it is necessary that meaningful and adequate prevoca-
time.
private
public
or
residential
must meet the licensing and
care
facility,
it
certification re-
ment. Under the current legal definition, a mentally retarded youngster capable of rehabilitation, as interpreted by the Division of Vocational Rehabilitation, qualifies at age sixteen to participate in this program. Adequate day care programs and/or domiciliary facilities
must meet the program needs must meet licensing
of the clients. Also, they
or certification requirements of each licensing body (department of health, department of labor, department of education, the fire marshal, department of insurance, etc.).
By the time a retarded person is eighteen years of age, his future role in our society can be assessed fairly The Young Adult and the Adult
in most instances. The need may range from living more or less independently in the community or in a supervised group-
accurately,
program (hostel, sheltered workshop) residence in a licensed boarding home, a licensed nursing home, or in an institution for chronically disabled or ill persons. Correspondingly, he may be economically independent, living
to
partially
self-supporting,
or
receive
public
support through
Medicare, Medicaid, Social Security, or aid to the permanently and totally disabled. In any event, adequate legal and social provisions must be made to protect the person with the mental retardation syndrome against physical, emotional, social, or economic exregardless of ploitation and abuse. Also,
where the retarded adult lives, he must have adequate access to all community resources that he may need at any given time in his life span. This will require programmed supervisory services that can be included in an ade-
quate
protective
mechanism
(Guardianship
Act).
551
Health
MENTAL HEALTH CENTERS 2.
SPATIAL NEEDS OF ELEMENTS NOTE: Design of tional.
ation
PROGRAM
Recreation
spaces should be noninstituThe following are suggestions for consider-
in all
all
program element needs indicated be-
low:
—physical exercise
Space
in
the form
of an exercise room, gymnasium, or outdoor space (especially in warm climates) should be provided.
Example: small exercise room for group settingup exercise program with agreement to use high school gym and playing fields located within easy walking distance.
Openers
in
Emergencies
Emergency can occur in any element at any time. Most common:
Warm
surface finishes
in
needs Lounge area Storage for personal property
Staff
desk etc.)
hanging pictures
for
Area
The following does not assume that all services must be located under one roof (see Location of Services).
Inviting entrance
while patient
a short-term residential
facility for living
under a supervised therapeutic program, requiring a domestic or college-dormitory rather than a hospital atmosphere. Architectural Section, NIMH, recommends this area be classified residential occupancy (NFPA No. 101) where permitted by local
Linens
—
bedrooms
patients'
in
linen supply
As few regulations
Feeding
for use of facility as possi-
—
hospital
Complete domestic kitchen must be adequate
pictures on wall, etc.
should
be
not
out
and
cafeteria
Icemakers
belongings
kitchen
—exhaust system
Intensive care
snack kitchen for use by each patients).
is
nec-
essary:
groupings or quiet individual use (2-4 persons). Example: for small conversational
small living space
in
a suite of two or four
bedrooms.
smaller, comfortably furnished lounge adjacent.
vate visiting
Space should be provided for priwith family and friends. Example:
an out-of-the-way alcove for 6 persons, located near the entrance to the unit and the nurse's station, allowing visual and conversation level
—
is
considered
(i.e.,
sedated patient).
all
agencies
of service utilizing the facility.
and freedom
access
to
wardrobe,
toilet,
light
Outpatient
Security
Tamperproof equipment and fixtures within patient's room and toilet (but not obviously tamperproof to patient) Tempered plate glass or removable-type deten-
—
Treatment room first aid, emergency physical examination items for special programs such as drugs, alcohol, etc. station
and from
emergency rooms in general hospitals Audio communications between nurse's station and patient's room Patient rooms may be used for medical care
re-
ceptionist
Ancillary Services
Waiting areas Secretarial space
and
staff
refrigerator),
toilets,
lounge (coffee,
sink,
and library-workroom
Waiting Areas Limited to
Necessary equipment not removable from the room must be lockable and concealable. We recommend occupancy for this area be institu-
Should be convenient to
Admitting Offices
Public
Laboratory with storage Direct access from nurse’s
when needed. Area
—
Close supervision by staff
tion screens
games, dancing, music, group living (16-24 persons). Two living areas are desirable to allow noisy and quiet activities to occur simultaneously. Quiet activity space could also be used for group therapy. Example: a large living room as the focus of living group activities with a for
between patient and physician.
tion
Holding space waiting bed space for patient to wait while disposition for treatment
room
switches outside patient's room variety of settings
general
in
Interview space that promotes communica-
and elements
to leave confined
Controlled
A
may be needed
action and communication between
Acoustical privacy Social space for contact with staff
Laundry and group (lb-
emergency
in
NOTE: design and location should motivate inter-
in
living
and space
area for escorted emergencies.
lockable
Domestic Needs to Be Provided
staff
Entrance available directly to intensive care
of
storage space should be each patient's bedroom unless specifically prohibited by program.
all
Space:
kitchen
etc.
Patients should be able to rearrange furniture,
Visiting
initial
hospital emergency. in
service on units; storage for dishes, linens,
ble.
spaces
and
suite of general hospital.
Additional spaces
Snacks, patients' activities
and bathing. grooming needs.
Will utilize 3.
Central janitor’s closet
Provision for personal
Activity
for walk-in interview
[her]
his
Escorted emergency
Each bedroom unit to have own Bathroom and personal items
Privacy for sleeping, dressing,
Space
stating
or locate for
central distribution
Needs
Socialization Areas
in
be those used by outpatients.
Dietary services:
24
Privacy with receptionist
needs NOTE: all spaces
to outside
waiting-reception area
Housekeeping Needs Domestic housekeeping:
authorities.
—
in
is
treatment, admitting of walk-in emergency can
Inpatient Unit
reach
Must have -immediate relationship
sion, etc.
Minimal barriers to interaction with patients. Example: desks are preferable to glazed nursing stations.
provided
functioning.
Physical Space for Walk-in:
Multiuse patient interview space, family discus-
hang
ambulant
is
for charting/private discussion with thera-
pists
Security for drugs
Patient
[or she]
Escorted emergency: ambulant but not func-
Contact with outdoors
Patient
He
tioning.
Visual access to mainstream of activity.
is
may come
time to get help. This person
Staff toilet
natural materials
Views outside
This
first
alone or with others.
and
lamps, incandescents instead of neon,
Freedom
escorted emergency
the in
1.
walk-in
Walk-in: arriving at any element of service for
space-planning
Live plants
Design for groupings of 4 to 8 persons Comfortable light level (natural light,
1.
2.
of service
8-12
patients
Distributed throughout office areas
Receptionist by front door
—
open, friendly, encourage contact between receptionist and patient
tional.
acoustical privacy.
16-24 patients requires above spaces. Design should allow natural groupings of 4-8 persons. NOTE: each group of
Meetings (with consultation
the
Conference and interview
Office space
Physical Planning Guidelines tor Community Mental Health Centers, Clyde H. Dorsett, AIA, Architectural Consultant, National Institute of Mental Health, Bethesda,
Md„
552
1978.
and educational
service)
Group therapy*
Larger groups
Individual
Staff conferences
Community groups
Family
Interagency professional groups
General meetings
Play therapy
*
Group therapy rooms
to
be
utilized
through total programs
—
—
Health
MENTAL HEALTH CENTERS Adjacent to entrance and
Children'! Treatment
pool with
Provide for work sink (as part of "messy area”),
and locked storage Provide for separate
toilet
available to
chil-
dren; separate waiting area, with possibility
outdoor play children; cleanable surfaces
by
observation
space; scaled for
dressing rooms and
and
toilets;
parent;
quire a small gym, for
own
8-12 patients
one time,
showers, dressing rooms, and lockers.
with
its
One
should inventory the community
YMCA,
can be used: public
at
re-
parks,
facilities that
and other mental the community. An
pools,
health related programs
in
must be available with a playing field, large space for active games, etc. The R.T. office can be same as for O.T. Weekend and night-evening program can be held within the same space as the inpatient program. active outdoor area
Should
motivate
communication
between patient and
therapist,
should contain
Space
Office
doctor (staff) and at least four or more patients
and be
arrangement of
flexible in
furniture.
Conference Spaces Suitable
5.
audiovisual
for
presentations,
staff
meetings, staff work area
main entrance spaces and rest rooms Suitable for group therapy
Accessible 4.
to
and/or
office
Provides storage closet
Staff
Should be comfortable for 8 peo-
Lounge
ple adjacent to staff toilets, storage,
kitchenette
(coffee-making,
lunch,
and
small
refrigerator);
and workroom. Need for large meeting room depends on availability of space in the community. Such a room needs audiovisual facilities, storage space, and also adjacent to staff library
sufficient
toilet
tween central
Children's
areas;
facilities
should be located beand community. it
Day Care
Examin
alcove with chairs for waiting adjacent to circulation space.
Provide informal social areas as part of circulaspace leading to meeting rooms, partial hos-
tion
where numbers of people
pitalization, etc. places
congregate, and also at “nodes"
circulation
in
—
places where people are likely to pause. system Example: gathering space with area for coats, bathrooms outside community meeting room.
Waiting
2.
for outpatient
appointments should be
encourage
interstaff contact.
Orientation
Use of views outdoors and natural
light
—
clear
inside/outside circulation.
Clear relation of program spaces to front door:
program.) Classrooms need an area for messy (wet area) work (sink,' etc.), an outdoor area, a teacher's work area with a desk (no desk in classroom),
go here
for
go there
outpatient,
for
day
program, go around corner for inpatient. Privacy or separation provided by single turn in corridor or by screens minimum of closed
—
and
also, for problem kids, quiet study; this class separated from main classroom area by a curtain. Children’s outdoor play space must be separated from adult outdoor areas.
doors.
is
Staff person to greet arrival to
secretary
for
outpatient
program area area,
nurse
or
volunteer located by entrance to inpatient 6.
Administration
unit, etc.
Use
Reception-waiting area
primary social area
— meeting
staff
and design
of circulation
space rather
than barriers (locked doors) for control.
room nearby 3.
Volunteers and part-time office and lounge
(living-room-type space)
day program
Conference room Library-workroom
director
for staff
Business
Medications
—
—
door staff
lounge
all
for
night-time
use
—
off
lock
rest
of
facility.
Partial hospitalization/inpatient section could
secretarial pool
Central records for
Time use Locate community meeting areas near front
with lockers and toilets
Staff needs
Work area
visible to persons
Offices for program directors
This requires a
Office space for
be
secretary for outpatient offices located
a central
staff office,
reception room—gathering place, and classrooms. The program could utilize the adult gym. Toilets and a small snack kitchen should be available. (They could be used for other parts of the center’s
Partial Hospitalization
1.
to
circulation pattern of building.
in
offices to
General needs include a
Director's office
Day Care
ple:
be located
adjacent to outpatient staff offices. Director of Center should be located adjacent to other staff
accommodate 16 people
Sufficient to
moving
schools, shopping centers,
public
Staff persons (volunteers, sec-
Contact with Staff retaries) should
Structured recreational therapy programs
Provide for observation
of
own
its
table games.
child therapist's office
have
service elements
its
own
entrance for day/night use.
Nurses' lockers and toilet
located
(All
in
and
position for information
7.
Consultation and Education
4.
Variety
control for particular hospital program) 2.
Patient’s needs Storage for wraps and for personal Telephone, drinking fountain
Meeting rooms and articles
office
spaces are located ad-
jacent to or within central office groupings. Center
side, inside, narrow, wide, free, controlled, stimu-
can multiuse spaces
lating
for other
elements of program
for this purpose. (Basis of operations for
Toilets
Kitchen suitable for social groups and ther-
out
apy
to
This consists of quiet and and depends on the program. The most flexible design requires at least two rooms of classroom size with two kinds of storage: for patients' projects and materials and for equipment. The office for the program director is mostly program space for patient occupational therapy
in
the community
and
will
use
C&S
facility
fices
and
consist of large
rooms divided by mov-
Social
recreational
ther-
skylight.
CIRCULATION 5. 1.
Use
for Socialization
Circulation space can be used for
more than
pausing along the way to look at views, stopping for a cup of coffee at a coffee bar are activities that also encourage social contact. tacts,
to all
Entrance through the front program elements located in the facil-
Large social space
Outdoor terrace for gardening, outdoor games, and an inactive outdoor area for quiet
of front door. Waiting areas should be small
T.V.
— music
Quiet indoor space Movies Kitchen, canteen-type
ity
Example: volunteer behind a desk located
in
sight
—
groups of 4 to 6 in sight of receptionist. Waiting area allows view of mainstream of activity, but is located in well-defined area out of main traffic pattern.
Library (quiet)
Drinking fountain,
toilets,
and pay telephone
Quiet social area
are adjacent to entry-waiting area.
Not minimal but desirable are a swimming
is
preferable to vending machines.
A
to:
trans-
portation from one area to another. Informal con-
door
Zoning
Program elements should be related
should be possible. Arriving persons should be greeted by a staff person out in the open.
the following requirements:
(cool colors) to pro-
nearby program spaces and to maintain orientation. Example: corridor outside day program area widens to allow informal socialization and use of lockers located against one wall and is lit by
Entry-Waiting Area
apy has
subdued
only
conduct business and for meetings.)
able storage cabinets. Recreational Therapy
colors),
vide clues to kind of activities associated with
noisy activities
occupational therapist as part of the therapy team. It may be without staff of-
(warm
is
Occupational Therapy
activities with the
Circulation spaces should contrast light, dark, out-
coffee pot
Public accessibility
Acoustical separation
Heavy
circulation/noisy activities
Quiet/private activities
Scheduled Frequency Day/night Unique or
use/nonscheduled use of use
use
common
use
Sole staff use Sole patient use Joint use by staff
and patients
Relation to other program spaces Relation to front door
Need Need
for
outdoor space and natural
light
for privacy/controlled access
NOTE: The prevalent dichotomy between circula-
and program spaces should be minimized where possible. tion/service spaces
553
^ Health
NURSING HOMES
By
WILLIAM BREGER, AIA
Current thinking
thousand
per
INTRODUCTION in
health planning emphasizes
the concept of providing a spectrum of care which serves the health needs of the entire
community. This spectrum includes general medical and surgical facilities, mental, rehabilitation, and tuberculosis hospitals, and longterm care facilities, hereafter referred to as LTC, which provide care beyond acute, shortterm medical and nursing care and may be in either chronic hospitals or nursing homes.
population.
A
characteristic
distribution of these beds is shown in Fig. 1. Thus, the characteristic distribution of LTC in all categories is 4.8 beds per thousand, and,
equally important, is the understanding that the most significant single characteristic of this patient population is that they are elderly. Their age characteristics are indicated in Fig. 2
.
While the functions of a chronic hospital are what is understood by a nursing home can be somewhat ambiguous. For our purposes, an LTC may be defined as a facility which is operated either independently or in connection with a hospital and provides nursing care and medical services under the general direction of persons licensed to practice medicine or surgery. Furthermore, unlike the chronic hospital, the LTC generally does not have resident physicians and limits its medical services to minor treatment, diagnostic x-ray, and minor laboratory analysis. Although good medical practice should be available wherever and whenever a patient needs it, the fact is that major medical and surgical treatments are almost always performed in other facilities. relatively clear,
Eight categories of LTC facilities are readily identifiable: general hospitals with long-term-
Fig.
care beds, voluntary chronic hospitals, local government chronic hospitals, public home infirmaries, convalescent homes, voluntary nursing homes, proprietary nursing homes, and infirmaries or homes for the aged. Other nomenclature for the categories listed above are extended care facilities, intermediate care facilities, shelter homes for the aged, geriatric homes for the aged, and long-term-care facil-
homes for adults, foster homes, boarding homes, etc. Each type has its own criteria for admission based for the most part on the type of care required; but reimbursement, whether through private payment, private medical insurance, Medicare or Medicaid, etc., may as well be a determining factor in patient placement. Whatever problems are involved, the fact is that patients often require a wide range of services beyond initial acute medical care, and these
Ratio of beds to population served.
1
17
%
Under 65 years 19
%
65 - 74
^— %
years/ 38
services
may cross
several “institutional lines,"
SOCIAL PLANNING CRITERIA
The basic criterion used in determining the needs for all health care facilities is the ratio of beds to the population served. Generally, we find that there are approximately 3.2 beds 1
Hospital statistics from Health and Hospital Planning Council of Southern New York, 1970 and Long-Term Care, (LTC) Projection, 1973
from Michael B Miller and William N Breger, “How to Plan for Extended Care Service Modern Hospital, October 1966 Illustrations
554
Male 35 7=
Female 65
%
'/
Between
75-85
ities,
from intensive nursing and rehabilitative care through lesser degrees of nursing care to perhaps simply convalescent attention.
2
l
Fig.
2
Age
years
require specific management techniques. Fifteen to twenty percent of the patient population will present significant visual deficits, and there will be approximately the same number with auditory deficits. Other organ system involvement in the same patient is the rule rather than exception, such as gastrointestinal, pulmonary, neurological, and metabolic disorders. Multiorgan pathology in the chronically aged is a distinguishing characteristic of disability in contrast to other age groups. The utilization rate differs as well. Extended care facilities, both independent and attached to general hospitals, have an average turnover of 7 to 8 patients per year per bed, or approximately 40 to 50 day stays, and there are less rapid turnovers for other LTC facilities (proprietary nursing homes, 1.17; voluntary nursing homes, 1.69; voluntary chronic hospitals, 1.30; public home infirmaries, 0.91; average of all LTC facilities, 1.43 per year). One can conclude as well both from the demographic changes in a society that is proportionately growing elderly and the societal changes of placing the elderly members of society in medically oriented facilities that the LTC facility would have a greater percentage of beds allotted to it proportionately in the future and that this area of health concern would experience real as well as proportional growth. Another aspect of social planning is the translation of social data into the architectural program. We have found that the ideal method of determining the physical facilities of the building is in terms of the proposed patient population rated by their capacities to perform activities, including daily living, both in terms of their physical capabilities and their behavioral capacities. Tables 1 to 4 describe the clinical nature of the patient population under study and give some index of the percentage of patient population in each group. At the conclusion, we will indicate the physical configuration of the nursing units that each group generates.
characteristics of patient population.
Group
As Dr. Michael Miller says,' studies of this aging population in terms of their characteristics from a medical viewpoint have indicated that terminal cancer is seen in only 3 to 5 percent of the patient population. Varying degrees of organic brain syndrome, as manifested by memory,
I
— Physically
Disabled (15-25 percent) 2
having significant physical disabilities but with emotional and intellectual intactness and the ability to socialize in an open, unsupervised environment. (See Fig. 3.) Patients
Group II -Mentally and Physically Disabled (25-30 percent)
and judgmental deficits associated with confusion and disorientation, with or without locomotion disability, constitute at least 70 to 75 percent of the patient population. Recent studies indicate that 20 to 30 percent of a nursing home population may be expected to have experienced a significant psychiatric decompensation in the pre-aged period. Of the whole, 40 to 50 percent will demonstrate significant cardio-renal-vascular disease in varying degrees of decompensation.
brain disease, thus requiring total nursing care for physical disabilities and major supervision for social activities. (See Fig. 4.)
Arthropathies are virtually a universal occurrence, although only 20 to 30 percent may
or social disabilities, thus able to function in
intellectual,
Patients with severe physical disabilities with
superimposed substantial handicaps
Group
III
of organic
-Custodial (15-25 percent)
Patients presenting moderate or no physical handicaps with either no or minimal emotional
an uncontrolled social milieu. However they ’"Synthesis
Therapeutic Community for the Aged III,” published in Geriatrics, vol. 21, pp 151-163, August 1966 of
a
:
Based on
1
W
Breger ,050 patient survey by Health and Hos-
at Columbia School of Public pital Administration, 1970
Health
NURSING HOMES
function best in a
environment. (See
professionally
supervised
Fig. 5.)
Group IV- Mentally Disabled (30-50 percent) Patients having minimal to mild physical disabilities with major emotional and social dis-
who
therefore require minimal nursing care on a purely physical level but because of the advanced degree of organic brain disabilities,
ease
(senility)
totally
these patients are essentially
and permanently disabled. (See
Fig. 6.)
The design problems unique
in
this
facility
mainly involve the nursing units and supportive facilities that are required in terms of the propatient
population.
same
similarity to medical facilities of the
DESIGN CRITERIA
jected
herent in dietary, mechanical maintenance, general and building storage facilities are fairly uniform regardless of the type of projected patient population and have a basic
and
The problems
in-
size,
such as general hospitals, tuberculosis hospitals, etc. It should be noted that supply storage facilities, linens, equipment, etc., would depend to some extent on the projected patient population.
TABLE
Group
1
I
Facilities*
Design requirements
Area
Community room
-
-
.
.
Physical therapy
.
Unsupervised
Combined with community living
Exterior environment
Unsupervised
Bedrooms
Sufficient area for wheelchairs, walkers, crutches;
rooms with bed-
half of
side flush toilets Toilets
20-22
Bathing
Near nurses' station, must
from floor
in
be supervised Utility
Near nurses' station
room
near
Supervised,
Pantry
nurses'
station
Storage area, personal
Limited
storage;
vertical
increase
horizontal
in
storage
Nonpersonal storage
Limited
storage;
vertical
increase
horizontal
in
storage
Treatment room
3 Group 1, physically disabled. Symbols represent the following facilities: CR, community room; NS, nursing station; T, toilet; S, services (i.e., utility rooms, treatment, bathing, pantry, nonpatient storage); P, pantry, E, outdoor environment. (This list applies to Figs. 3-6.)
Near nurses' station
-
Family counseling
Near nurses’ station
Nurses' station
Located
for
convenience
of
nurses
Fig.
*
Group
I
patients suffer severe physical handicaps but are
emotionally and physically intact
TABLE
2
Group
II
Area
Facilities*
Design requirements
Community room
Supervised
Physical therapy
Combined with community
Exterior environment
Supervised
Bedrooms
Sufficient area for wheel-
living
chairs, walkers, crutches;
rooms with bed-
half of
side
flush
Toilets
20-22
in.
Bathing
Near nurses' station, must
toilets
from
floor
be supervised Utility
room
Near nurses' station Supervised,
Pantry
near
nurses'
station
Storage area, personal
Limited
vertical
increase
storage; horizontal
in
storage
Nonpersonal storage
Limited
vertical
increase
in
storage; horizontal
storage
Treatment room
Near nurses' station
Family counseling
Near nurses' station
Nurses' station
Located
for
convenience
of nurses
'Group disability.
Fig.
4
Group
II,
mentally and physically disabled.
II patients suffer severe physical and behavioral Therefore they require total nursing care as well
as major supervision of social activities
555
NURSING HOMES
TABLE 3
Group
Facilities*
III
Area
Design requirements
Community room ....
n
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Unsupervised
Physical therapy
-L
1
Not indicated
Exterior environment.
.
Bedrooms Toilets
.
Unsupervised Conventional
Conventional
May
Bathing
be
conve-
located
nonsupervision
niently;
-
permissible Utility
room
Not indicated
.
Pantry
Unsupervised,
com-
near
munity room
Storage area, personal
Increase age;
-
vertical
in
stor-
conventional
hori-
zontal storage space
Nonpersonal storage Fig.
5
Group
III,
Increase
vertical
in
stor-
custodial.
conventional
age;
hori-
zontal storage space
Treatment room
.
Family counseling
.
.
.
.
.
.
Not indicated
Near nurses' station
Nurses' station
Located
for
convenience
of
nurses
‘Group
III
and
require
patients
they present no,
little
because
supervision
very moderate, physical and emotional
or
social disability
TABLE 4
Group
IV Facilities*
Area
Design requirements
Community room
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Physical therapy
Exterior environment
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Supervised Not indicated
Bedrooms
Supervised Conventional
.
Toilets
Conventional
Bathing
Supervised,
Utility
room
located
but
conveniently
for
patient
near
nurses'
Not indicated Supervised,
Pantry
station
Storage area, personal
Increase
vertical
in
incease
age;
storhori-
in
zontal storage space
Nonpersonal storage
.
Increase
.
age;
vertical
in
increase
storhori-
in
zontal storage space
Treatment room
.
Family counseling
.
.
.
.
.
.
Not indicated
Near nurses' station Located
Nurses' station
*
little
of
Fig.
6
Group
IV,
a
wide mix
level, patients in
nursing care but require
maximum
control
areas Group IV need
supervision because
emotional disability
mentally disabled.
Because, generally speaking, nursing home administrators cannot determine patient population beforehand — or they choose because of administrative and economic patterns to have of patients, the
common
interpreta-
have the nursing and activity functions not flexible. This type of building is in a great degree determined by the relevant codes and the most economical means of construction. It has been our experience, however, that the criterion of initial low con-
tion of the
On the purely physical
permit
to
of patient
structure
is
to
operational care could be improved even in the uniform nursing unit if the design were determined to a greater extent by an awareness of the proposed patient population.
Regardless of what overview decisions are made, the design of the typical LTC is basically concerned with (1) the relationship of area size to the daily census in the facility, (2) the analysis of these areas in terms of the different functions, and (3) the criteria used in discerning the nursing unit layout and supportive
struction cost results in high administrative, maintenance, and operational costs, and as
facilities.
building costs are a very small percentage of what the patient pays, a debt service of $2.50
the size of the
to $5.00 a day, it appears a false economy. Another factor that should be explored is that
1.
In
most instances the program delineates
LTC
facilities.
It
is
determined
by such factors as available money for construction; the need within a community as determined by demographic factors or methods
of health care,
code requirements,
site limita-
tions; and, finally, the kind of operation as fore-
seen by the administrator or nursing home operator. The nursing unit is a prime factor in operational cost, and thus the size of the facility is usually a multiple of the number of nursing units. Because of the cost of operation of feeding, therapy, and administration, the larger the facility, usually the
more econom-
although too large a unit might not allow for adequate patient service functions. The average size in 1970 was 80 beds, and the present recommended criterion is that it should not be less than 1 20 beds. In highoperational-cost areas, economically viable nursing homes require a minimum of 200 beds. Once the number of beds has been determined, ically efficient
it
will be,
Health
NURSING HOMES
the areas of
bearing
in
the building can be calculated,
mind such factors as the care given,
stipulation
the
single-bedded
of
or
bedded rooms, and the community
multi-
facilities
provided. Again, in the typical facility at 2. where community functions are nonpresent, existent or minimal and where the number of single-
and multi-bedded rooms are determined
by code or
FHA
regulations, etc., the size varies between a total building area of 250 and 400 sq ft per bed. Although, as previously noted, it is desirable that the inter- and intraconfiguration be determined by the medical and social patterns of
patient
care,
there are
common
that are required for operation by
facilities
codes and
public agencies. Thus, in an overall sense, the design of all independent long-term care buildings will contain the following component parts: 1.
Administrative facilities
2.
Staff facilities
3.
Public facilities Medical, treatment, and
4.
morgue
10. Nursing units including ancillary facilities— i.e., nurses' station, nursing unit dayroom 11. Supportive and rehabilitative facilities for patients, such as recreation, dining, therapy areas The component parts listed above, except for items 10 and 1 1 — the nursing unit and supportive facilities — are similar to those of general hospitals, and thus criteria developed for general medical facilities, as indicated in the section on Hospitals,'' may be applied to the
Some
ways
in
from those
of
indication of the
of the
LTC
differ
the general hospital are listed below. 1.
Administrative
been
recent
years
facilities
still
Although there has
Facilities
a great increase
nursing require
in
staffing patterns
home
in
administration less area
significantly
and have fewer employees than do general medical facilities. The reasons for this are that nursing homes provide fewer medical, surgical, and laboratory services; administrative problems are reduced by the lower turnover of patients (less record keeping and billing); and, usually, there are fewer visitors per patient per day, although there may be more family counseling. The administrative employees in a nursing home would number between 5 and 10 per 200 patients, and the area required would be about 150 sq ft per employee. However, with the administrative and bookkeeping problems involved in government aid programs and other funding, there has been a remarkable increase in the required area for administrative purposes in recent years, and it is expected that this trend will continue. Generally speaking, there are the following areas: a business office; a lobby and information center; an administrator's office; an admitting and medical records area; an administrative staff toilet room, supervising nurses’ areas; social service office;
and
staff
conference room.
As stated above, the reduced medical services provided, as well as the usual absence of staff physicians, results in a concomitant reduction of staff in an LTC facility as compared with a general hospital. Often the staffing is determined by patient population and is indicated in administrative codes, such as at least two registered nurses per facility.
2. Staff Facilities
3. Public Facilities The type and size of the public facilities depend to some extent on the type of sponsorship of the LTC facility; but one factor is constant: the number of visitors in
LTC
facility
is
much
smaller per patient
in
Where the general hospital may require one visitor parking space per bed, the LTC facility requires one visitor parking space for between 3 and 20 beds. Architectural
in
facilities:
trays
a controlled
in
and
recreation
room on
the
(5) family style in a controlled
the nursing unit, or on a separate understandable that methods 4 and 5 will be favored and used more frequently in the LTC. Here the social dynamics of group situations can be developed, and it is also a
dayroom, It
in
is
way of providing patient dining. held that feeding intravenously or with trays in bed are undesirable in terms of an LTC facility, but they are occasionally used, depending on patient conditions. Feeding at tables in patient rooms is used more often because it is possible to control behavioral problems in this dining context. The size of the facility, however, is smaller, as the number of employees is much lower than in a general more
efficient
Many have
hospital.
ing areas.
facilities
patterns.
facilities.
as to the location of these they should be grouped in a separate area or distributed on each nursing floor with a smaller central grouping. There should be a central lounge, and it should be accessible to the employees’ dining room.
— whether
accomplished medical
Intravenous infusions, naso-gastric tube feeding, gastrostomy feeding; (2) with trays in bed; (3) at tables in patient rooms; (4) with
floor.
some question
is
in
(1)
The facilities needed are locker rooms, toilet and shower facilities, and dining room. There is
methods
different
patient floor;
facilities
Feeding
therapeutically. five
are female.
an acute general hospital. This is often reflected in parking criteria and internal visit-
Dietary service Storage areas 7. Work area and maintenance areas 8. Mechanical facilities such as boiler, conditioner, pump 9. Patient, staff and visitor circulation
LTC
'/£
than
6.
which the areas
3
the
5.
air
one licensed practical nurse per 20 patients, These are usually and one aide per patients. female, whereas other employees, such as porters and kitchen workers, are mixed. Generally speaking, LTC facilities have to 1 employee per patient, and 80 percent of them
features that are desirable are a visitors lavatory on each nursing floor and, when the building is large enough, a small lobby with perhaps a snack and gift shop. When an LTC facility is
community sponsored,
a
variety
functions may be provided for it, would be similar to what is provided munity supported general hospital. 4. Medical, Treatment,
and Morgue
public but these of
in a
Facilities
com-
As we
have mentioned, both legislative requirements and medical practice require that major treatment of the acutely ill patient in the LTC be available within general medical and surgical hospitals. This gives the community an economical use of both staffing and facilities. Sometimes chronic hospitals in nonurban areas provide as part of their facilities intensive medical and surgical units; but with the notion of regional health care, this is not considered by most health planning agencies to be desir-
6. Storage Facilities In the recent past considerable thought has been given to ways of resolving the storage problems of LTC facilities. Formerly large patient storage areas, as much as 25 sq ft per patient, were required, and there
were
requirements for household and furniture. However, the idea of the patient bringing possessions to the LTC to be stored is considered anachronistic, and the criterion used in designing storage areas today is about 5 sq ft per patient for personal storage and 5 sq ft for general hospital supplies and goods. The latter is less than what is allotted in a general hospital, because, as previously mentioned, the type of care required in a nursing home does not demand as many linens, pharmaceuticals, and supplies. However, the elements of hospital storage should be provided, and the importance of ensuring the flexibility of the compartments for this cannot be overemphasized.
minimal
supplies,
linen,
all
7. Work Area and Maintenance Areas In general these are quite similar to those of the community hospitals, except that there is a minimum of medical equipment to maintain and that, although the number of patients may be similar to the general hospital, the total amount of equipment in the LTC requiring maintenance or repair is considerably less. We have found a single large room to be more than adequate in these areas for most LTC
in
facilities.
able today. The facilities in the LTC which are provided, where the law permits, are a diagnostic x-ray unit, a laboratory for hematology, biochemistry, etc., and, usually as part
rooms. It is desirable that spaces for dentistry, podiatry, and,
of the nursing unit, treatment
on occasion, optometry, be provided if the patient population can support them. However, these operations can usually be carried out comparatively small areas. The requirements for a morgue facility have varied with different localities and different regulations. It is ultimately a problem of operation whether they should be provided or not, but if required because of geographic or administrative reasons, the morgue is at best a small area used for storage of bodies for a
few hours or a day or two at most. The autopsy procedure is a hospital function. 5. Dietary Facilities
In the
LTC
as
in
the general
requirements and the space and equipment required to support them are extensive and the basis for involved research and analysis. Feeding is required for nourishment and as a patient activity, and, quite understandably, the social functions of dining are important hospital,
the
dietary
3 Another way of interpreting staff requirements is by using the New York State Code which requires of staffing time one hour of nursing care for ambulatory patients, two hours of nursing care for the semiambulatory, and four hours per day for the bedridden or
wheelchair-confined patient
8.
Structural
and
Mechanical
Factors
During the
few years, the LTC facility has been designed to meet the structural and mechanical standards of the general hospital. As in most last
other medical facilities, problems, particularly of fire safety, have required fireproof buildings, often with sprinkler protection, smoke detectors, zoned floor areas, and rigid standards of fire resistance in terms of flooring, surfaces, and materials used It is, of course, a fact that fire safety in a building housing many patients with behavioral problems (often involving carelessness and disorientation) is one of the major, if not the major factor in construction. While this appears evident, there are also other aspects of mechanical
equipment
criteria that are
somewhat
different
than those for the short-term general hospital: a. Lighting It has been our experience that the level of illumination required for the LTC, bearing in mind the elderly patient population and their reduced sensory awareness and perception, is somewhat higher than that required in the patient
557
Health
NURSING HOMES
areas of the
b.
general
hospital.
Further-
more, the problems of safety require that all electric lamps and fixtures be firmly connected to a surface to avoid tipping. Heating and Cooling An imperative decision that has concerned the LTC administrator has been the method of heating and/or cooling. It is generally found that the elderly are far more likely to complain of being too cold than of being too warm. Therefore, in terms of the patient population, the provision of adequate heat without provisions for cooling has been considered satisfactory. patient
air-conditioning facilities is desirable, ideally with individual controls. However,
and that there should be a certain number of single rooms as well within the unit for medical and behavioral problems.
factor
confused
the
that
is
cannot be expected to reliably perceive or control his environment. Presently, the thinking is that the use of
even
here
patients in Ventilation
problems multi-bedded rooms. there
A
are
for
the
unit size or type of care required,
Codes require
at least
one single room per
patient unit as an isolation suite with
many
its
own
and the control of odors. It is a much more serious problem, at least for the staff and public, in this facility than in the general hospital and must be resolved by proper ventilation methods, the use of surface materials that do not retain odors, and the use of plumbing and furniture that allow for easy mopping and cleaning. The professional literature on this subject is extensive, and this aspect of mechanical equipment should be thoroughly researched before the LTC facility is de-
but often the requirements are that single rooms be available for 10-33 percent of the patients. However, the problem of the single or the multi-bedded room, as well as the other functions of the nursing unit, should (once the minimum code requirements are resolved) be determined by the criterion of what patient population would be served in the program given to the architect, and, as pointed out above, the criteria can range from minimum requirements to aesthetic and social values. Supporting the idea of the autonomy of the nursing unit are the types of ancillary facilities that are part of it. The functions that must be provided are the control of the unit from
signed.
the nurses' station, the preparation of medi-
LTC
facilities,
characteristic
because
difficult patient, is the
of
of the behaviorally
problem
of ventila-
tion
toilet,
a general hospital nursing unit, despite the
one is meant for an average 5-day stay and the other for an average 400-day stay. On fact that
a theoretical basis, Figs. 3 to 6 illustrate the
correlation
of
possible
unit
configurations
based on the patient population. While these designs would obviously be modified by code, medical practice, economy, and a difficult problem of determining the projected patient
•
population, we believe they are valuable as abstractions indicating the correlation of care and planning.
11.
Rehabilitative
Rehabilitation and the primary medical dis-
Facilities
physical medicine cipline involved in
is
LTC facilities. Present thinking is that, in terms of the aged patient population, rehabrlitation should properly be both and behavioral therapeutic process. For the most part, this therapy is not centered on making the patient operational in society but rather on providing adjustments for the patients to live with their disabilities. Just as difficult an aspect of this adjustment as the physically based problems are those problems a physical
generated by behavioral disabilities. While, broadly speaking, spaces for therapy have meant facilities for physiotherapy, hydrotherapy, and heat therapy, the fact is that facilities for social therapy or facilities for developing social groupings should be part of the overall
planning.
The areas
for
physically
based
rehabilita-
are
tions are usually
required by code, but the type of medical care given in these spaces is usually determined by the medical staff and administration. Often, physiotherapy, both in exercise and manipulation, has been considered sufficient for the patient population, and the location of this space has been both in separate rooms and as part of the dayroom, as this would induce a greater incentive for the individual patient to perform in terms of a peer group. Whether this area is separate or part of other areas, the fact remains that the use of such apparatus as parallel bars, exercise wheels, etc., under proper supervision, is a
need to provide free movement in terms of fire department regulations. The use of mechanical devices such as buzzers attached to fire doors,
tive
vital part
the shortening of corridors, the visual control of elevator doors, and controlled exits from the building are some of the factors that can help control the traffic problems involved
minimum size, the function, and the relationships that seem to be generic in terms of regulations. The fact, of course, is that, depending on the projected patient population, the types and sizes of these facilities would vary. Thus, in Group III, medical preparation and treatment might be eliminated and the pantry might be made much larger than for other patient populations. However, most codes do allow, if not flexibility in the type of function required, a fairly wide range in terms of the size required. The essential thrust in the design of the LTC is ultimately in the configuration of the nursing unit, and, as mentioned, the genesis of the choices available for this is in the operational program initially presented to the architect, or, even more salutary, when developed with the architect. In the overwhelming percentage of buildings, as has been stated, most of the plans are made for a variable patient population, ideally with a central nursing station adjacent to ancillary nursing functions that the nurse directly uses, with visual control of the patient corridors, recreation area, and means of entrance and egress. The size of the units, both for economy of structure and operation, is as large as the relevant code would allow. However, as has been pointed out, there is really little difference between this nursing unit
and providing of the entire range of supplies necessary for the patients, the supplying of supplementary food, and whatever bathing, recreation, dining, and training facilities are required. The question of whether patient treatment (e.g., surgical dressings, etc.) should be done in the room or in a separate treatment room depends on the choices that the nurses make. All of these funccines, the cleaning
The movement
9. Circulation Patterns
goods and equipment part similar in nature,
in if
the not
LTC in
is
of people,
for the
most
intensity, to that
in
general hospitals. The one special problem
is
the need of adequate control for the circula-
tion of the behaviorally difficult patient, for often the need to control the movement of this type of patient
comes
into conflict with the
with this patient population.
10.
Nursing
Units
and
Supportive
Facilities
An LTC
almost seminal practice in the design of facilities is the placement of patients in autonomous nursing units, as it is believed that the control and management of patients can best be achieved in this manner. This nursing unit can be defined as a self-contained grouping of rooms, supportive facilities with unified control, all on one level. A basic decision is the size of the nursing unit, and while ideally the size of the unit will have a direct relationship to the degree and type of patient care provided in the unit, nursing home codes and governmental regulations generally set the number of patients cared for in a nursing unit between 30 and 60. In principle, the range could be even greater, as the spectrum of patients in LTC facilities is so varied. Thus as Table 3 shows, patients in Group III (custodial patients) could be in units of up to 100 beds, while patients in Group II (mentally and physically disabled patients) might be in units of 20 beds. Concomitant with the decision as to the num-
558
and
sures.
Most thinking today is that the two-bedded room with adjoining or private bath should be the basic room pattern regardless of nursing
Another
c.
ber of beds per nursing unit is the determination of the number of beds per room. Here the guidelines are medical operational criteria, hospital and administrative codes, and financial mechanisms. But also a very important consideration is the aesthetic and social values that the patient may have, and, even more important, those of the people placing him in the home. Thus, often patients with minimal cognitive awareness, requiring as much group support as possible, may be erroneously housed in single rooms because of social pres-
translated into representaareas as determined by the relevant codes. Listed in Tables 1 through 4 is an analysis of the types of areas, the required equipment, the
tion
of the patients' care. The need for hydro and heat therapies in the LTC facility has often been questioned. Ultimately, the decision to use these latter therapies is either an administrative or governing regulation. Recreational spaces are needed for the behaviorally based therapies or what is sometimes called occupational therapy, which can be considered both physical and behavioral
Whereas a central area is desired, often the actual therapy takes place within the nursing unit dayroom. Often considered the best behaviorally based therapy.
therapy
is
participation in a social
community,
has been demonstrated, many of the anxieties and much of the loneliness that is a concomitant of the aging process can be reduced. These group situations may
whereby, as
it
take the forms of religious services, lectures, group games, group teas; even a bar has been used. However, the most important aspect that generates one of the most difficult planning decisions is the development of a community within the LTC, whereby patients will be providing support for others. In terms of architectural configurations, spaces for this activity have been arranged so that sleeping rooms open directly onto living rooms, or they have been provided by eliminating halls and having spaces open into large community areas. It is
through the exploration
that architectural planning
of
this
problem
may be considered
an aid of therapy as well. The size of these
Health
NURSING HOMES
TABLE 5
Typical Regulatory Requirements for
LTC
Facilities
Nursing unit
Type and size
of
Single (125 sq
ft)
room
Multi-bedded (100 sq
ft
Equipment and sizes
Activity
Beds (usually gatch type) with side
population.
86
in.;
36 by
Not more than
overbed tables (usually not required); bed-
nurses' station
18 by 20
side cabinet,
per bed), cubicle Will serve for both sleeping
curtains required
and general
may
activity,
and arms
Comments
Relationship
Depends on patient
rails,
1
20
ft
from
distribution
should be based on administra-
chairs, straight back
in.;
See plans; desirable
tive practices
one chair per bed)
(at least
and
also include dining,
recreation, and therapy
Storage Space: storage -robes,
Vertical
closets or wardrobes,
outdoor 8
ft
1
clothing
wide by
in.
ft
1
in
0
1
in-
deep, should contain shoe rack and shelf
Horizontal storage -cabinets or built-in drawers, 1
ft
6
in.
deep
(Note: Ideally, vertical storage areas should be
ambulatory
creased
for
storage
increased
for
in-
and
horizontal
nonambulatorv
patients.)
patients
Optional Equipment:
Small table, ideally round with a heavy pedestal
base; platform rocking chairs, where patient conditions permit; lavatory; cabinet for storing
patient
toiletries
(Note:
Where
placed Toilet (3 by 6
Grab
6 by 5
and/or
ft
used, lavatory
is
may be
Required:
ft)
Toilet and lavatory (3 by 8
private toilet
in toilet.)
bars,
toiletries,
toiletry
and/or
cabinet
space
for
mirror
(Note: lavatory should be accessible to wheelchair
ft)
patients.)
Optional:
bedpan washer
Divert-a-valve,
Nurses' station
-May
Control of nursing unit
Patient charts (9 by 12
charting communications,
set into the desk), chart rack for
of counter with
storage of supplies and
wide by 16
access space on
nurses' personal effects
cabinet
(minimum 6
lin ft
both sides)
by 4
ft
ft
6
in.
area,
outlets
for
legal
nurses'
ft
files,
call
Convenient
mirror
by 5
Although not desirable, often
to nurses'
station
ft)
Medicine room, 6
storage
Toilet, lavatory, toiletry cabinet,
(minimum 8 by 6
ft
charts (4
deep), writing desk,
in.)
Clean workroom
1
be movable or
40
system, telephones
Nurses' toilet room (5
in.
in.
ft
Storage and assembly of
12-ft-minimum work
clean supplies such as
instrument
instruments, etc.
cabinet storage
counter
sterilizer,
2
with sinks,
back
splash,
drawer
and
Storage and preparation of
Sink, refrigerator, locked storage
medicine
(Note: Facilities for preparation of medication can
cabinet (mediprep
in
mediprep
No more than 120 patients'
ft
used as
visitors' toilet as well
May be
a designated area
from
rooms
Adjacent to nurses' station
within clean
workroom
contained cabinet
unit.)
is
if
self-
provided
unit)
Soiled
workroom
(minimum 8 by 6
ft)
Enclosed storage space (4 by
4
lin
ft
Clinical
equipment
and soiled linen receptacles
Clean linen storage
of
No more than patients'
1
20
ft
from
rooms
May
be a designated area
within the clean
Supplemental food
counter
and work space
for
Storage area, stove, sink, refrigerator
patients during nondining
hours
in
workroom
May serve more than one nursing unit
Optional:
front
Icemaker. coffeemaker
Equipment storage room 14 by 6
sink-bedpan flusher, work counter, waste
ft)
Nourishment station 5
Cleaning of supplies and
Storage of intravenous stands,
ft)
air
mattresses,
walkers, similar bulky
equipment Patient baths (showers
not less than 4 sq
ft)
One shower
stall or
bathtub for each 15 beds not
individually served, grab bars at bathing fixtures,
At least one bathtub
in
each
nursing unit
recessed soapdishes
559
Health
NURSING HOMES
TABLE 5
Typical Regulatory Requirements for LTC Facilities (Continued) Nursing unit (cont'd)
Type and size
of
room
Open space
Stretcher and
Easily accessible from hall,
near exit and entrance of
wheelchair parking area (8 by 5
Comments
Relationship
Equipment and sizes
Activity
nursing unit
ft)
Janitor's closet
Storage and cleaning of
Housekeeping supplies and equipment,
house equipment
tor or service sink
floor recep-
Larger cleaning area desirable *
•
with garbage and linen chutes in
vertical-type buildings
Nursing unit and patient activity areas
Dayroom; total area for patient
30 sq
activities,
ft
per
Upholstered sofas and armchairs, preferably with
Required floor day room
straight backs and designed for ability of patients
ideally to be controlled by
is
nurses' station; different-
day and dining room
medical programs generate
per patient
lectures, group
games,
to sit
group teas, dining (most
patient
Minimum
300 sq
Controlled and multigroup activities, religious services,
frequently this
size,
is
combined
with the dayroom, but
ft
it
can be separate). Recre-
in
and get up; straight chairs similar
those
patient rooms; rocking chairs similar to those
in
patient rooms; tables with firm supports and round or
rounded edges, accessible
and
to
and
round
ports
combined with
tables or ceiling-mounted
sets
television
tops);
per patient; is
common 15 sq
ft
different relationships
on
low
lectern
Central to
LTC
circulation
from nursing units
ft,
approximately 3 sq
ft
of a height for
Physiotherapy
minimum 300 sq
15 sq
wheelchair patients (preferably with pedestal sup-
ational therapy often this area
to
Generally nursing unit dayroom
ft
per patient) a.
Exercise space
Exercising, treatment and
Parallel
training in ambulation,
shoulder ladder, convertible exercise steps
bars,
exercise
wheel,
ambulation
Structural reinforcement neces-
track
ambulation track and wall-
mounted exercise wheels
activities of daily living
b
Examination and
Manipulations and
massage space
massaging
Hydro and heat therapy
Use
area may be com-
of
water movement and
heat as massage
mounted
sary for ceiling
stair-climbing, and
Treatment tables with pads (3 by 6
Mobile stands, hydrocollater (2 by 3 red lamp,
whirlpools
(partial-
bined with physio-
tanks), paraffin bath, patient
therapy
Size
erator,
included
in
ft)
ft
Not usually required by code
high), infra-
and full-immersion lift,
ultrasonic gen-
microwave diathermy unit
area
above Social and physical support
Occupational or recreational therapy
in
terms of creative
actions
Hand looms,
potter's wheel,
easels, leatherworking tools,
painting equipment,
Size of room varies depending
woodworking
on where
tools,
sewing machines
area
is
storage
activity
areas for social rooms
is
often delineated by
common LTC dayroom
to be done program. Again, the only rule we can recommend would be to arrive at this through the analysis of the particular patient population of the proposed facility. Listed in Table 5, in terms of the usual codes and regulations, are the typical patient activity areas, their size, the equipment they usually contain, and their relationships.
lounges, or a in
terms
of the administrative
CONCLUSION Mentioned above have been only the rough planning data of the design of LTC facilities. Microscopic analyses based on the kind of hardware patients with reduced manipulative
560
can use, the types of furniture (such as seating that would allow easy access without strain, beds that would be sufficiently protective, and tables that would be sufficiently sturdy), the kind of plumbing fixtures that ability
the elderly patient needs, and the kinds of
in-
surfaces are part of the literature of professional magazines and should be examined in detail. The essential basis, though, for understanding these aspects of the LTC is the understanding of the patient. Nor is it our intention to discuss the major problem of aesthetic values in terms of this patient population. The range of what aesthetic an LTC facility should generate, whether the criterion should be what society wants, what the employees want, what the children of the patient want, or what the patients want is a question that individual decisions must resolve, and these can, it is hoped, be based terior
and
facility
equipment lie
relevant codes and average about 30 sq ft per patient, but usually the codes allow the distribution in either a nursing unit dayroom, floor
is
done. Often
used primarily as a
,
for fixed
kiln, etc.).
on some empirical data. It is believed as well that the extended care LTC program should generate a building that emphasizes the quality of space required for a longer patient stay and that this quality should be different from that of the community hospital in both plan and form, visually and functionally. Finally, we should arrive at an architectural expression for this space that would be a rejection of institutional forms, such as long hallways, sterile color schemes, mechanistic furniture, purely utilitarian finishes, and an acceptance of the fact that sunlight, casualness, and comfort not only are desirable patterns but also are part of the therapy and well-being of the LTC patient. The task of resolving this fundamental social problem of providing support for the ill aged is a social action that we have just begun to explore and to which architects can make a
most meaningful contribution.
Health
CHILD HEALTH STATION
CHILD HEALTH STATION
Waiting
Weighing, Undressing, and Dressing
Room
Room The diagram
(Fig.
1)
shows the desirable space
organization for a child health station. Preferred location for the carriage shelter within the building
must be outside,
it
space permits.
if
If
should be placed
is
the shelter in
the lee
of the building.
The various rooms
shall
have space
for
the
Desk and chair at control point between waiting room and entrance to weighing and undressing room, etc.; movable chairs, with ample space between and around them; demonstration table; play pen, within the waiting room, minimum area
60 36
sq in
small chairs
ft;
and
table;
bookshelves,
Table; Bench-type clothes hamper;
Anteroom
to Doctors' Offices
Chairs.
Doctors' Offices Public Toilet In
Located off waiting room. Provide one normalsized toilet,
Memo
to Architects.
cubicles;
high.
following equipment:
N.Y.C.H.A.
25
slop sink.
set
28
in
and one
from
child's toilet,
each
office:
desk;
two
chairs;
large
table;
smaller table; lavatory (standard apartment type).
one lavatory,
floor.
Utility
Room
Table; refrigerator; four-burner gas range; combi-
nation sink and laundry tray (standard apartment type).
Nurse's Office it can be need a desk
Located adjacent to the waiting room,
used also for isolation space.
and a Staff
It
will
chair.
Room
Table and chairs. Staff Toilet
Lavatory and Consultation
toilet.
Room
Desk, two chairs, table, and three
file
cabinets.
Slop Sink Closet
Must have space
CHILD
SPACE Fig.
I
From
New
York City Housing Authority, N.Y.C.H.A.
Memo
for cleaning
equipment.
HEALTH STATION ORGANIZATION
to Architects.
561
Health
MEDICAL SCHOOLS
SITE
AND PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS
Site
The modern medical center is so large and so complex that it should be located on the edge
campus rather than within it. This location will emphasize the fact that the medical center is a satellite in the university orbit, but has a degree of autonomy. It is important that students and staff in the medical center have easy access to the main university campus, and that the medical center be accessible to all areas of the university. The site should be large enough to accommodate growth of the school programs and concurrent parking for at least 20 years. The minimum size recommended for a medical center including a teaching hospital is 50 acres, and 50 to 150 acres is preferable. Buildings should be placed on the site so that additions can be made as programs develop and as enrollment increases. The service functions of the medical school involve patient care in hospitals and outpatient clinics. Growth of research and service responsibilities frequently leads to the development of specialized hospitals, such as children's, veterans’, psychiatric, chronic disease, rehabilitation, or others. The site should permit location of these facilities in relation to the major teaching hospital so that staff and students can be within a five- to ten-minute walk. The teaching hospital and clinical science facilities should be placed on the site so that the educational functions relate to and connect with the basic science facilities. Outdoor facilities for of the university
rehabilitation of patients related to the clinic
and recreation facilities for students related to housing should be provided. The extent of these facilities varies widely
Adequate space vided
nearby.
among
schools.
housing should be proApartment-type housing with for
play areas for children, within five minutes'
walking distance of the hospital, is preferable. Adequate parking facilities should be provided for students, staff, patients, and public convenient to each element of the medical center including housing. This may take the form of divided shopping-center-type parking, preferably with trees, various types of paved surface parking, or multilevel parking garages. If possible, the site should be sloping so that more than one level of entrance to the buildings can be obtained and horizontal movement of supplies can take place at one level without conflicting with horizontal movement of people at another level. The direction of prevailing wind should be studied so that buildings can be placed in relation to each other and to the campus and community to avoid windblown odors from cooking and incineration of animal waste and trash, bacteria from infected patients, chemical fumes, and low levels of radioactive isotopes. The site for the animal farm is not usually contiguous to the medical center. However, a minimum site of about 25 acres should be
provided; recent studies indicate that 120 acres may be required. It should be located for convenient transportation to and from the animal quarters.
Functional Relationships
students, faculty, patients, and supplies, the three should be interconnected, but for maxiflexibility in
expansion each should be an
independent element.
Fig.
1
illustrates
this
relationship.
The basic science and the clinical teaching and research facilities, in turn, should be attached to the hospital to permit easy access to patient units and other hospital facilities. The diagram also shows the possibility of expansion inherent in this relationship. the basic science facilities, the
departments can be stacked above each other with teaching laboratories, faculty, research and In
and lecture rooms for each department located on the same floor. The cadaver preparation and storage department is usually located on a floor accessible to grade for conoffice space,
venience in handling cadavers. Central animal quarters serve teaching and research areas for both basic science and clinical departments. A location with direct connection to the circulation center and at grade level for access to a delivery entrance for animals is important. Other common-use areas should be located where they are accessible to both the basic science and clinical departments. Thus, a basement location for such facilities as the radioisotope laboratory and technical shops is acceptable. Administrative facilities, school post office, snack bar, student lounge, and bookstore should be accessible from a circulation center and are generally placed on the first floor. Study cubicles for basic science students
r
if
possible.
access to the common-use facilities mentioned above. These clinical science facilities, similar to those provided in the basic science departments, consist of faculty research and office space, since third- and fourth-year students are taught in the hospital. Individual departments should be on the same floors as the patient-care units
which they serve
i
rooms should be placed near
Facilities for an individual department should be on the same floor insofar as possible. Teaching laboratories and their auxiliary spaces in basic science departments should be separate from but near faculty offices and research
laboratories.
Elements such as floor animal rooms and cold rooms, which are found in each department, should be stacked for economy. These facilities, together with lecture rooms, should be sized initially and located to take care of later expansion. Toilet facilities should be designed to accommodate expansion. If located on a circulation center they will be accessible to adjacent departments. Separate elevators for passengers and supplies are recommended. Program Assumptions
Because
of the variations
exist
HOSP LAB’S.
CLINICAL SCIENCE
RESEARCH CIRC.
teach'g ANIMAL QUARTERS UNDER
k...J Functional relationship of medical school elements.
among
apparent that space requirements for a new school cannot be stated dogmatically. There is great need, it
is
TEACHING HOSPITAL CLINICS
L-
Fig.
which
present schools and programs,
MED.
SCIENCE RESEARCH
i
the circulation
center for greater flexibility of use. The arrangements and relationships of the elements of the departments in both the basic and clinical sciences are generally similar.
LIBR’ y
BASIC
the ad-
fourth-year students and house officers can be provided in the teaching hospital. Lecture
”! I
in
joining hospital. Study cubicles for third- and
i i
vice,
562
light
s
i
I
Medical School Facilities, Public Health SerU S Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, Washington, D C 1964
be convenient to both the medical and teaching laboratories. The medical illustration area should be located for north library
Locating the clinical science facilities in connection with the circulation center provides
Of prime importance in planning medical schools is the relationship of its three major components: the basic science facilities, the clinical science facilities, and the teaching hospital. For the most efficient movement of
mum
should
i
expansion|
.
0
.
.
Health
MEDICAL SCHOOLS
however, a
for
some benchmark
for
planning
TABLE
Net Area for General Administration
1
new
it is assumed that the basic In science facilities, clinical science facilities, and teaching hospital are contiguous. The space considerations and requirements presented in this section are for two hypothetical schools including basic science facilities, clinical science facilities, and a teaching hospital. The first is School A, with an entering class of 64 students and a hospital of 500 beds; the second is School B, with an entering class of 96 students and a hospital of 700 beds.
School A
Isa four-year university-based school. house an entering 2. Provides space to class of 64 medical students, with a planned expansion to an entering class of 96 students. Enrollment in third- and fourth-year classes will be 60, with future expansion to 90. 3. Provides office and laboratory space for a full-time faculty of 35 in the basic science departments and 60 in the clinical departments. 4. Provides space for 40 graduate students and postdoctoral fellows in the basic science departments and 30 in the clinical departments. 5. Provides either conventional or multidiscipline teaching laboratories for the basic 1
School A (entering class of
Type
64
students
of facility
I
School B (entering class of
96
students)
Square feet Total
Dean's office
3,900
4,700
400
400
200
Assistant dean's office
....
(2)
400
450
600
Conference room
500
500
Business offices
400
500
250
300
Secretaries' offices
.
Registrar and alumni
.
.
.
.
.
.
250
300
Scholarship and grants
250
400
Records
200
300
Postgraduate office
.
Public information and
publications
200
200
Public toilets
200
200
Waiting room
500
500
Storage
100
100
Medical School Library
Has
own
its
library,
with
ultimate
capacity of 100,000 volumes. 7. Has its own teaching hospital of
500
beds. 9.
Has
its
shops, but source.
own
heat
technical and maintenance supplied from a central
is
Does not provide space
students
in
School B
Isa four-year university-based school. 2. Provides space to house an entering class of 96 medical students with third- and fourth-year enrollment of 90 per class. 3. Provides office and laboratory space for a full-time faculty of 50 in the basic science departments and 85 in the clinical departments. 4. Provides space for 55 graduate students and postdoctoral fellows in the basic science departments and 40 in the clinical departments. 5. Provides either conventional or multidiscipline teaching laboratories for the basic 1
.
sciences. 6.
Has
its
own
library
with ultimate ca-
pacity of 100,000 volumes. 7.
Has
its
own
teaching hospital of 700
beds. 9.
Has
The medical school library includes the offices, work areas, stacks, carrels, vaults, reading rooms, alcoves, conference rooms, audiovisual rooms, and other related spaces required by the maintenance and service responsibilities connected with the care and use of recorded
its
own
technical and maintenance
shops, but heat is supplied from a central source. 10. Does not provide space for teaching students in other health professions such as dentistry or nursing.
GENERAL ADMINISTRATION AND SUPPORTING FACILITIES General Administration
medical school is responsible and execution of policies the teaching programs and for the general of the
for the formulation of
soundproof room
relatively
photoduplication facilities is necessary. An area for general reading and open-shelf reference work may be supplemented by a number of smaller reading areas, rooms, or alcoves. The main reading area should be near the main catalog and circulation desk. If individual student study cubicles are not provided in the school, student reading areas in the library should accommodate from 25 to 50 percent of the total enrollment of the medical school and students from other programs who require access to the collection. Students seated at tables require a minimum of 25 sq ft of space each. Additional seating allowance should be made for faculty and research staff and other users. A separate alcove with shelves, or a section of shelving in the main reading area, should be for
Facilities of
Net area
(in
Square Feet) of
Required for a Medical School Library
100,000 Volumes and 1,600 Periodicals
programing and designing the medical school library, consideration should be given to the probable impact of future regional branches of the National Library of Medicine and the computer-based bibliographic retrieval and publication system called MEDLARS — Medical Literature Analysis and Retrieval System. The medical school library should be located so that its resources are quickly available to students, research workers, faculty members, hospital staff, and practicing physicians. Unless there are large medical research collections nearby, the library should be equipped to accommodate 100,000 volumes and 1,600 scientific periodicals.
Table 2 gives the net area for a medical school library of 100,000 volumes and 1,600 periodicals. Since medical library collections tend to increase rapidly, the library should be planned for future expansion. In designing the library, maximum flexibility should be a prime consideration with necessary divisions
administration of the basic sciences, the clinical sciences, and the teaching hospital. Be-
cause of the magnitude and complexities of these programs, the dean will require assistance from competent persons in these fields. Table 1 gives the net area for administration.
in
the form of partitions which
and B (entering
of facility
classes "f
64 and 96 students)
a shelf
One 3-ft-long singleaccommodate approximately
depth of
faced section
will
feet
Total net area.
29,
560
24,
950
6,
400 450 150 400 150 070
Public services:
Total Vestibule
100
.
. .
Reception area and display Charging and reserve areas
Card catalog area Information and reference areas.. Browsing collection Main reading area Microreading area Paging-reading area Periodicals area including indexes Seminar-study areas
room. Sound demonstration room Slides and movie room.. Bookstack areas
1
,
1,
Historical collection
1
Unenclosed carrels Closed carrels Audiovisual storage..
,
1
,
Food vending machine area
Shelving, whether in stacks or in reading areas, should be standard library equipment, with standard interchangeable parts. Standard sections, usually 3 ft long, should be used throughout, with only such exceptions as floor layout may demand. Those for medical books
have
Square
Microfilm storage
can be moved.
1
0
in.
00 volumes.
Service aisles between stacks should not be ft wide. Main aisles should be at least 3 ft 6 in. wide. If bookstacks are on more than one level, or are not on the level where books are received, vertical transportation must be provided. less than 3
Students and faculty members should have which should be provided with carrels for work and study.
free access to stack areas,
A
Schools
Type
In
1
The dean
A
films and slides.
medical information.
for teaching other health professions such as dentistry or nursing. 10.
may be required if individual study cubicles for students are provided elsewhere. Other rooms often associated with the stack area are a microfilm storage and viewing room and a room for the storage of motion-picture
ever, fewer
TABLE 2
sciences. 6.
These are usually alcoves, preferably adjacent windows, each equipped with a desk, reading light, and chair. They should be provided at the rate of one for each ten students. How-
to
school. this section,
Public toilets
Work
400 200 350 630 450 450 000 200 200 400 200 300 250
area:
Total
4,
Receiving and mailing room Acquisitions department
Cataloging department Preparation room Photoduplication Binding and mending Serials work area Chief librarian's office Reception-secretary’s office.. Assistant librarians’ offices. Historical librarian’s office. Office storage
Staff
room
Staff toilets and lockers Housekeeping
.
610 500 600 520 150 800 240 200 200 200 120 120
80 400 240 240
563
.
Health
MEDICAL SCHOOLS
provided for unbound journals. If sloping display shelves are used for current issues of journals, open shelving underneath for housing unbound earlier issues are more convenient than closed compartments. A room with paging facilities may be provided for the use of those on call. Small study rooms for group conferences of four to six persons each should also be included. An area should be provided in the lobby or near the reference desk containing nontechnical books for browsing. A film- and slide-projection room and a sound-tape room, each to accommodate 16 students and an instructor, may be required depending on the program. Both rooms should be soundproofed and designed so as not to distract readers in other areas. A microfilm reading room is necessary. A medical history room may be required and may be a combined medical history and rare medical book room, in which case protected windows, doors with locks, a fireproof vault, and special air conditioning will be required. Well-lighted exhibit cases should be provided adjacent to the entrance to the library and its main lanes of traffic. Public toilets, rest rooms, coat rooms, and janitor services should be convenient to the reading areas. The book charging desk, located near the entrance, should control the exits from reading areas, workrooms, and stacks to minimize book loss. The card catalog should be close to the main entrance and near the circulation desk and the acquisition and cataloging rooms. In the staff workroom a sink should be provided. Provisions should be made so that noise generated by activities at these areas does not distract readers.
One workroom subdivided into alcoves by double-faced bookshelves may be provided, instead of separate workrooms, for acquisition and cataloging. These rooms should be near public catalog and should have direct access to the stackroom; 100 sq ft should be allowed for each staff member. The reception-secretary's office should be adjacent to the head librarian's office A departmental conference room may be required. The head librarian's office should be accessible both to the staff workrooms and library clien-
needs of research better than an animal facility at grade level. The floors of the vivarium should communicate with those of the adjoining structure so that animal rooms are horizontally contiguous to the research and teaching laboratories using them and so that animals can be transferred to the laboratories without traversing corridors of other areas. If a vivarium is provided, animal-holding rooms are not usually required within research areas. Animal quarters are composed of a number of different kinds of areas. Each has its own requirements in terms of space and location.
animal areas, provision must be made for the reception, quarantine, and isolation of incoming animals near the animal entrance; for housing different species; for exercising animals; and for specific research projects. Isolation rooms for infected animals, each with a vestibule containing facilities for gowning and scrubbing, are required. Table 3 gives the net area for animal quarIn
and soap dispenser. A vestibule to a block of
at the entrance the attendant can
rooms where
change clothes and shoes
is
recommended
reduce infection. The construction of animal quarters should be fire resistant, vermin- and insect-proof, and above all easy to clean. Recesses, cracks, and pockets should be avoided. Bases should be coved. Special attention should be given to such openings between rooms as pipes, con•dui "^
r
”1
*
PREPARATION ROOM
Fig. 5
Layout for a conventional teaching laboratory with double-faced benches.
569
Health
MEDICAL SCHOOLS
Fig.
Layout
6
tor
multidiscipline
laboratories.
each sixteen students, a bank of four to eight, should be located for easy viewing by a group. Chalkboards located for easy viewing by each sixteen-student group should also be provided. Storage for fixed specimens and models used in demonstrations and for x-ray film should be provided. Cabinets in a connecting area, such as a utility room, may suffice. The utility room, which may serve as a diener’s work room, should have a flushingrim service sink accessible to the dissecting The sink should have flush valve and wrist-operated valves. area.
Graduate-student dissecting room. It should be adjacent to auxiliary rooms of the medical students' dissecting room. Fixed equipment and mechanical facilities should be similar to those furnished the medical student.
Microneuroanatomy
A conventional for
student
Floor plan for multidiscipline laboratories.
7
unassigned conference rooms accommodate 20 persons may be
Additional sized
to
provided in the basic science use by unscheduled groups.
facilities
for
Tables should be arranged to allow ample sides. Additional space to
work space on all accommodate one use
or
two portable tables
for
demonstrations or by special students may be required. If dissecting tables are movin
folding partition may be installed to provide a screen behind which the tables may be stacked during off-semesters, freeing the room for other uses. Handwashing facilities for students should be provided in the dissecting room. Surgical scrub-up sinks, three for each sixteen students, with wrist- or foot-action valves or industrialtype fixtures are recommended. Counter units should have reagent ledges, knee spaces, and under-counter drawers and cabinets for storage of student’s dissecting equipment and
able, a
Basic Science Departments
Figure 8 shows a space diagram for minimum department of anatomy. Table Anatomy
a
8
provides a list of net areas for an anatomy department. Dissecting Room. The teaching area for gross anatomy is usually one large room with stand-up height dissecting tables to accommodate all the students in the course. Convenience for faculty and students and proximity of elevator service to be used for transporting cadavers are important considerations in the location. Provisions should be made to prevent viewing of dissection procedures by unauthorized persons. One dissecting table for each four students is usually required.
570
demonstration microscopes. Electrical service outlets for microscope illuminators should be provided. Counter tops should have resilient surfaces.
Wall-mounted
x-ray
illuminators,
one
for
teaching
Laboratory laboratory
microanatomy and neuroanatomy
instruc-
demonstration area with a table, chalkboard, projection screen, and sitdown laboratory benches to accommodate all the students of either course. Benches should seat four students on the same side to face in the same direction for an unobstructed view of the demonstration area. Each bench position should have knee space, drawers, and a cabinet for storing slides and microscope case. Water, air, gas, electrical outlets, and vacuum should be provided at each position. Liquid waste receptors in bench tops may be either lead cup sinks or continuous drain troughs with stone end sinks. Bench top material should be resilient and alcohol- and stain-resistant. In addition to sit-down benches, some standup bench space should be provided^for each sixteen students. Bulletin boards and tack boards should be provided. It Graduate-student teaching laboratory. should be adjacent to auxiliary rooms of the medical students' microneuroanatomy teaching laboratory. Fixed equipment and mechanical facilities should be similar to those furnished the medical student. This room is a Gross Neuroanatomy Room supplementary teaching area. Usually the area serves also as a departmental storage center for specimens, in which case adjustable shelvtion usually requires a
Fig.
Teaching
:
Health
MEDICAL SCHOOLS
TABLE
attaching cover glasses and labels, a sit-down counter with knee space and drawers is satis-
Net Area for a Department of Anatomy
8
School
A
School
(entering class of 64 students)
Type
With
With
With
conventional
multidiscipline laboratories
departmental
size of faculty of
graduate students and postdoctoral fellows.
With
conventional
multidiscipline laboratories
laboratories
laboratories
Number
factory.
of facility
departmental
Assumed
B
(entering class of 96 students)
7
7
10
7
7
10
10 10
Faculty
offices,
laboratories,
research
19,
330
11,
640
«
22.
950
12,
660
and related
Total
210 280 350 560 200 280 280
Secretary’s office
Conference room Faculty offices Postdoctoral fellows’
(4) office
Data room Special-projects
room
11,
510 210 280 350 560 200 280 280
(4)
210 280 350 560 200 280 280
(4)
12,
530 210 280 350 560 200 280 280
(4)
Research laboratories:
Departmental General
(3)
Graduate students
(2)
Special
.
1,
(2)
Electron microscopy rooms
—
Storage room Tissuestainingandembeddingandtechnician’8office.
Microneuro preparation and technician's
1,
(1)
_
(2)
1,
610 830 400 400 610 280
(1)
(4)
2,
(3) (1)
140
570 200 200 410 280 720 560 160 200 210 140 430
(2)
160 200
210 140 430
__ l
1,
(2)
The slide storage-and-issue area requires standard microscope slide file cabinets, and cabinets for storage of boxed sets of slides. Microneuro Preparation. To prepare microscope slides used in the neuroanatomy course, a microneuro preparation unit is required similar in design and equipment to the tissue
embedding unit for microanatomy. head technician's office should have access to the unit and to the corridor. In the preparationElectron Microscopy. room, stand-up and sit-down counters and a fume hood are required. Air, gas, vacuum, and electrical outlets should be available. A refrigerator is necessary for chemical storage. The electron microscope should be located away from electric motors, elevators, fans, and other equipment that may generate vibration and stray magnetic fields. The room should be shielded to minimize dust, and the room should be windowless. Electron microscopy requires a darkroom next to the microscope room. Table 9 gives the area for an electron microscope suite.
1,
610 440 600 200 610 280
2,
(3) (1)
140
570 200 200 820 410
(2)
(4)
1,
610 440 600 200 610 280 140
570 200 200 820 280
(2)
TABLE 9
Net Area for Electron Microscope
Suite* School A (entering
720 560
(2)
Mortician’s office
Urn storage room Departmental central storage
(3)
140
570 200 200 410 410
office
Special instrument storage
Coldroom Animal room Gross neuroanatomy and neurological storage room. Cadaver storage rooms (60 bodies) and compressor room Embalming room Embalming room storage Crematory Morgue (pathology)
610 830 400 400 610 280
should be pro-
The
o
facilities:
Professor’s office
facilities
staining and
Square feet Total net area
Hand-washing
vided. Counter-top surfaces should be resilient and stain and alcohol resistant.
720 560 160 200 210 140 430
(2)
720 560 160 200 210 140 430
(2)
Type
class of
of supporting area
square feet
610
Total Electron microscope rooms
.
Conventional teaching: Total
(2)
690
o
10,
290
(')
Gross dissecting rooms (4 students/table) 2,
560 720 160 250
3,
840 720 160
250
280
Preparation area
30
Entry
*
See
230 70
Darkroom 7,
64
students),
departments
of
anatomy,
microbiology,
and
pathology
Microneuroanatomy teaching laboratories: 3,
'
2
4,
320 720 280
For total net area for multidiscipline laboratories, see Table 7
For central storage areas, see Table 6.
ing for supporting a is
000 720 2S0
number
of jars of formalin
required.
The center
demonstration of
the
room
table,
to
located
at
accommodate
the four
students on each side, is usually provided with a stainless-steel top with raised edge and an integral sink at one end. Lighting should be designed for close observation at tabletop level.
Hand-washing facilities, an x-ray film and a chalkboard should be pro-
illuminator,
vided. Storage for formalin should be considered.
Tissue Staining and Embedding.
This unit
may be subdivided into a head technician s office, an embedding area, a sectioning and tissue-staining area, and a slide storage-andissue area with access to the teaching labora-
preferably by way of a dutch door for issuing slides and materials.
tory,
embedding room small tissue speciare prepared, processed through a number of solutions by hand or in an automatic In
the
mens
tissue-processing machine, then embedded in small cubes of paraffin or celloidin. Preparing the specimens requires the use of a refriger-
and a sit-down counter with sink. For processing specimens and mixing solutions, a stand-up counter with sink, undercounter cabinets for equipment, and wall cabinets for chemicals and reagents are usually sufficient. For embedding procedures, an island bench of stand-up height with paraffin oven at or near one end should be provided. Cabinets with drawers for paraffin molds and mounting blocks and for filing embedments in frequent use should be provided. A storage room for embedments and for fixed gross tissue specimens not frequently used should be provided in the general storage area of the building. Glazed partitions may be installed to separate sectioning and mounting activities from the staining procedures. Sectioning and mounting activities require sit-down counters with knee space and drawers for storing slides and equipment. Counters for tissue staining and stain mixing should be of sit-down height. Each work position should have a sink, knee space, cabinets for equipment, and chemical storage. For ator for gross tissue storage
Cadaver Preparation and Storage. The unit should be so located and designed that no unauthorized persons may enter. Its location relative to the dissecting and autopsy rooms should not require transportation through any public areas. It should be located at grade with a receiving entrance accessible to a low loading platform. Where design permits, the platform may also serve the animal-receiving entrance. The mortician's work area or embalming room should permit working on all sides of the embalming table and handling by stretcher cart, portable lift, or other means. An embalming table with built-in sink at one end is generally preferred. A combination instrument and scrub sink with knee- or foot-operated valve, service sink, and a floor drain should be provided. Floor and wall materials should be washable. A connected storage room for supplies and equipment is necessary. Shower and dressing facilities for use of the mortician should be provided. A mortician's office should be adjacent to the area. Cadaver storage should be adjacent to the
embalming room. There are several methods of storing cadavers, some more demanding of space than others. An efficient method is storage on individual tray shelves on both sides of a service aisle. Thirty-five tray positions are usually adequate for a school with a 64-
571
Health
MEDICAL SCHOOLS
»ct anca
.
i»o»o so rr
STOAAOf
Fig.
Diagram
8
student
made
in
for a
entering
department
class;
of
anatomy.
provision
should be
the original planning for approximately
60 tray positions to accommodate enrollment increases up to 96 students. A crematory, if provided, should be located in the cadaver preparation and storage unit. The department will require storage space for tissue embedments and gross organs. The
same type storage as
that described for path-
ology should be provided. Figure 9 shows minimum department
Biochemistry
a
for
of
space diagram
biochemistry. Table 10 gives the area for the department for the 64- and 96-student class hypothetical schools. Teaching Laboratory. The conventional teaching laboratory is similar to those of other a
basic sciences. Island-type laboratory benches approximately 16 feet long will accommodate eight students, four on either side. The bench should have a stone sink at one or preferably both ends and a continuous drain trough or cup sinks (one for each two students), a continuous reagent shelf, and individual service outlets for each student. Services required are gas, air, vacuum, cold water, and electricity. Bench tops should be stone or acid-resistant composition surfaces. A large chalkboard, smaller chalkboards for each 16 students, a retractable projection screen, and a bulletin board should be provided. An instructor's table of desk height with knee space, cabinets, cup sink, electrical outlets, cold water, and gas should be provided for demonstration to the class. The teaching laboratory should be adjacent to auxiliary rooms of the medical student teach-
572
Fixed equipment and mechanishould be similar to those furnished the medical student. Preparation Room. A preparation room adjacent to the teaching laboratory is used for mixing reagents and for storing chemicals and glassware. It may be divided by partitions into alcoves for separating issue, storage, and preparation. These alcoves should have laboratory benches, sinks, and cabinets for use as a research area. The storage of glassware, chemicals, and other stocked items requires ading laboratory cal facilities
The issuing area requires cabinets with small drawers and an issue window or door opening into the teaching labora-
justable shelving.
tory.
Glassware Washing and Storage. Commerglass washing and drying machines are often employed. In addition, a large sink with drainboards is required, with space for glassware carts, a worktable for glassware sorting, and shelves for storage. cial
Figure 10 shows minimum department of
Physiology
1
a
space diagram
physiology. Table gives the net area for a physiology depart-
for a 1
ment. Teaching Laboratory. A conventional teaching laboratory may be used by more than one department. The laboratory described here is a conventional laboratory designed for specific use by the department of physiology. With only minimal additional equipment this laboratory suitable for
is
pharmacology teaching. are used in physiology teach-
Many animals
and stand-up tables 37
high with casters to accommodate four students, two on each side, are suggested. A shelf under the top ing
in.
should be provided as storage space for animal boards. A service island may be provided with gas, electrical, air, and vacuum outlets. Distilled water should be piped into one place in each laboratory or preparation area and carboys should be used at work stations. A floor drain should be installed between each pair of service islands.
A 4-ft fume hood should suffice for eight students. Space for incubators should be considered unless they can be placed on counters. Chalkboards, a bulletin board, and a retractable projection screen should be furnished similar in size and number to those in other teaching laboratories. Space for an instructor's table at the front of the laboratory is required. Graduate Student Teaching Laboratory. It should be located adjacent to auxiliary rooms of the teaching laboratory. Fixed equipment and mechanical facilities should be similar to those furnished the medical student. Laboratory. Furniture Student Research and mechanical facilities may be similar to those of a typical research laboratory. Equipment Storage. An equipment storage area, adjacent to the teaching labcfratory, is needed, as is desk space for a stock clerk and technician. A 31-in. -high counter with gas, air, vacuum, and electrical outlets and cabinets should be installed for testing and preparing
equipment. An issue window or door opening into the teaching laboratory is desirable. Space for assembly of equipment to be issued and for glassblowing and soldering should be provided. If required by the program, Shielded Room. a shielded room distant from obvious electrostatic interference must be provided.
.
:
Health
MEDICAL SCHOOLS
ROF LAB
POE'S PDF'S
200
200
GRA
0
STU
X NT
L
610
sd 5
200
ANIMAL RM 410
STORAGE
103
ULTRA CENTRIFUGE RM 410
*
OARK RM 4
GLASSWARE 100 WASHING 6 OARK storage RM • 410
COLO RM 200
GR A0 STUOENTS TEACHING LA0 720
100
80
2
530
16
SPECIAL
FACU LTY OFFi CES 140 140
CONFERENCE
SECY
PROJECTS
a
MOOULES
ASSUMED SIZE OF FACULTY
•
GRADUATE STUDENTS 0 POST ooctoral FELLOWS
PREP ROOM
RM 260
MOOULES
0
MOQULfS
0
MOOULES
6
NO
.10
A SPECIAL ROOMS WILL VARY WITH TYPE OF RESEARCH PROGRAM
NET AREA
-
H960 SO
Diagram
Fig. 9
FT
for a
department
of biochemistry.
Audio Room. If an audio room is provided, should consist of a test room and a control room with a triple-glazed clear-glass observation window between and with acoustical treatment, including reduction of floor vibration. The test room should have a microphone and a speaker cabinet. The control room should have a sit-down counter with cabinets located on the observation window side. If the student curPhysio-optics Room. riculum includes exercises in physio-optics, a special room will be needed with 20-ft separation between the subject and the vision chart. A sink for hand washing and a sit-down counter for recording are necessary. A room close Treadmill and Gas Analysis. it
TABLE 10
Net Area for a Department of Biochemistry School
A
School
(entering class of 64 students)
Type
of facility
With
With
W’ith
With
conventional
multidiscipline laboratories
conventional departmental
multidiscipline laboratories
departmental
laboratories
laboratories
Assumed
Number
B
(entering class of 96 students)
size of faculty
of graduate students
and postdoctoral
fellows.
6
6
9
9
10
10
14
14
Square feet
the
to Total net area
12,
240
()
14,
980
laboratory
is
preferable.
The
room
should also contain a cot and table for record-
0
1
FACULTY
4120 SO
ANIMAL RM
200
FAOJ LTY OFFI CES
•
5
•
3
140
SPECIAL PROJECTS RM
PROF
SECT* Y
280
280
210
280
140
8
of
pediatrics.
ASSUMEO SIZE Of FACULTY
•
3
•
I
Fig.
DEPT LAB
P0F
ANIMAL RM
200
410
COLO RM 200
17
-
4120 SO
Diagram
PROJECTS RM
280
280
8
MOOULES
FT.
for a
department
of
'^trics-gynecology.
200
T 2 '0
SPECIAL
Data RM
P 0 F
6'0
PROF
MOOULES
POST OOCTORAL FELLOWS
NET AREA
F AC U LTY OFFI CES 140 140
CONFERENCE 330
16
MOOULES
FT.
department
STORAGE 410
l
data rm
MODULES
POST DOCTORAL FELLOWS
NET AREA
PDF'S
4i0
I
I_
CONFERENCE 350
SECT’
STORAGE
COLD RM
.
1
ASSUMEO
ANESTHESIOLOGY NEURO SURGERY
FT
6'0
210
EENT
UROLOGY
department of surgery.
for a
OEPT LA8
PROF
ORTmOPEOiCS
SECY 280
r
full-size lockers.
as required.
of 4
— recessed
or as required.
stairs,
and
Total gross area.
Area per enrolled student.
[These should be added if the sciences are are taught in the home school. |
500 5
500
1
19, 12,
215 810
32,
025
216. 4
Assembly room
full-
school, add the following:
Faculty Offices
lavatorv, including 10
Net area. For walls, partitions, corridors, mechanical space.
1G7. 2
in
1
600
1
14,
the sciences are taught
watercloset,
-
-
Janitors’ closets
Coat alcoves Vending machines Telephone booths Drinking fountains
1
size lockers. 7 waterclosets, 7 lavatories.
2S0 300 240 40
1
Students’ lounge Lockers
If
watercloset, watercloset.
1
1
200
Total net area.
For walls, partitions, corridors, mechanical space.
and
stairs,
and
Total gross area.
Area per enrolled student.
3,
000
Flat floor.
22.
215 810
For
14.
stairs,
Total net area. walls, partitions, corridors,
mechanical space. 37,
025
250. 2
Total gross area.
Area per enrolled student.
601
1
Health
NURSING SCHOOLS
SUPPORTING SPACES
TEACHING SPACES LIBRARY
1
LIBRARIAN’S OFFICE LIBRARIAN’S WORKROOM
2.
3.
MULTIPURPOSE DEMONSTRATION ROOM 5. CORRIDOR LECTURE DEMO. ROOM 6. 7. CORRIDOR 8-10. STUD. CONF. RM. 11-12. CLASSROOMS 4.
1
T" 10
TEACHING SPACES
SUPPORTING SPACES
STORAGE ROOM UTILITY ROOM A. & V. STORAGE RM. STUDENTS’ LOUNGE
13. 14. 15. 16.
Q
5
W. TOILETS M. TOILETS 19. W. LOCKER ROOM 20. JANITOR'S CLOSET 21. MECH. EQUIP. RM. 17.
7
8
18.
ADMINISTRATION SPACES 22-23.
VISITORS’ TOILETS
24.
GENERAL OFFICE
25.
FILES
26.
DUPLICATING ASST. DIRECTOR’S OFF. ADMISSIONS OFFICE WAITING AREA
27. 28. 29.
25
30.
CORRIDOR
31.
STUD. COUNSELOR'S OFF.
32.
STAFF
33.
STAFF’S LOCKER ROOM DIR. SECRETARY’S OFF.
34.
&
26
FACULTY LOUNGE
TOILET CLOSETS DIRECTOR'S OFFICE
35. 36. 37.
ADMINISTRATION SPACES I
36
FACULTY SPACES 38-48.
Space relationships
Fig.
1.
Under the direction
in
FACULTY OFFICES
50.
COFFEE PREP. AREA JANITOR’S CLOSET
51.
FACULTY CONF. ROOM
49.
the diploma program.
of a registered nurse
or physician, they administer nursing care in
situations
free
relatively
of
scientific
com-
facility
plexity.
sist
close working relationship, they asregistered nurses in providing nursing
care
in
2.
In a
more complex
situations.
ARCHITECTURAL CONSIDERATIONS The physical essentials
of the various spaces required for any type of program of nursing education are briefly described in this section. All the spaces noted, however, are not necessarily required for all programs. Moreover, many of the spaces may be used in conjunction with other departments of a community college, a university, or institution to which the
nursing education program
is
related.
Where
possible, variations are noted. The diagrams of teaching spaces are only
suggestive of one method of arranging these spaces. The final scheme used by a nursing education program will depend on its particular
needs expressed
602
degree to which the architect can effectively design a facility depends largely on how thoroughly the functional program of the proposed
in
the written program. The
was prepared.
Although each nursing education facility will find it necessary to determine its own space requirements in light of its own needs, the spaces required by most schools might be grouped under seven categories. These categories include teaching spaces, research facilunit, administrative ities, faculty offices, students' facilities, supporting areas, and continuing education.
Teaching Spaces Lecture-Demonstration
stration
room
Rooms
(Fig. 6) is
The lecture-demonfor the purpose
used
implied in its name. Factors to be considered in determining physical dimensions are requirements for the following: (1) teaching station, (2) demonstration area, (3) seating area, (4) projection space or room, and (5) storage closets. A brief description of each follows: Teaching Station. The teaching station should be equipped with chalkboards, tack
boards, projection screens, and map rails above to support diagrams and charts. Demonstration Area. The demonstration area in front of the teaching station should be large enough to permit the use of equipment such as an adult-size bed or movable sectional counter units which have locking wheels. These units, which have storage space underneath, provide greater flexibility than fixed
counters, since they can be assembled into any arrangement or length and can be stored elsewhere when not in use. A lavatory will be needed in the lecturedemonstration area for use whenevera patient care demonstration is presented. The doors into this room should be a minimum of 3 ft 8 in. wide to provide an adequate passageway for a bed and other equipment used during a demonstration. Since good visibility of the Seating Area. instruction and demonstration area should be assured from all seats, a stepped floor should
be considered. Steps should be so designed that each sight line misses the row ahead by 4 in. Fixed seats equipped with hinged or removable tablet supports for writing are recom-
Health
NURSING SCHOOLS
Space Requirements for a 2-Year Associate Degree Program of 64 and a Total Enrollment of 104
TABLE 2
in
a
Community College with
an Entering Class
Nursing education area
Number
Spaces
Group
Total
of
size,
rooms
each
net area
room
(sq. ft.)
-
Teaching Lecture-demonstration room Classrooms Conference rooms Multipurpose room with storage and utility
rooms
—
-
Storage teaching aids Science laboratories Library.
1 1
3 1
-
1
.
-
Faculty
104 44
.
toilets
-
Administration
-
Washroom and
Lobby-reception General office
80
340
In the college.
-
In In In In In
1
-
-
-
-
Students’ toilets
_
_
Men’s
_ -
_ _ -
Visitors’ toilets
Men
-
—
1,
toilet
toilets
-
Students’ lounge Lockers
40
1
-
-
Coat alcoves Vending machines Telephone booths Drinking fountains General storage
-
-
-
-
-
-
600
1
6,
840 560
16,
400
9,
157 7
mended. Ten percent
of the seats
should be
the the the the the
closet college.
1
As required. As required. As required.
Minimum
of 3
be
required.
stairs,
and
Total gross area
Area per enrolled student
Classrooms
The classroom (see Fig. 7) should provide an optimum setting for communication between the instructor and the students. The room's shape and size should permit easy visibility of written material on the chalkboard as well as the projected image on the screen. The need to maintain as close a verbal distance as possible between students and the instructor should also be considered. Acoustical treatment to support verbal communication and sound insulation to prevent the penetration of outside noises must be considered in selecting structural and finish materials.
— recessed or as
Net area. For walls, partitions, corridors, mechanical space.
projection equipment is a good compromise. This console will contain all lighting and
counters with storage space underneath. One of the counters should have a sink. Open shelves or wall cabinets with glazed doors may be provided above the counters. The projection wall should have two small windows so that two projectors can show two images on the screens simultaneously. The width of the screen should be approximately
may
~ < w W H - w < od J wj I O * w ? o U h O Is 2 K 2 O CO w h 3 o. -O
8
5 s ^ > w
cc
3 “ p S
O O O
>1 as
U
>-J
.
1
1
!
79. (
e rsi
s§— H H < < uj
m
a^S u u
22£
a:
HOtf w 2
O
rn
o « a
O 6 w uj Q H AQ O
glfelllfe
r.
?
g
P~
cu
-J
P D
< ^ m u.
Religious
TEMPLES AND SYNAGOGUES
By KEITH I. HIBINJ ER, AIA Consultant: MYROIM E. SCHOEN, FTA, Director, Commission on Synagogue Administration, Union of American Hebrew Congregations, and Central Conference
American Rabbis
of
Organized Judaism and the synagogue are found in nearly all of the civilized areas of the world except eastern Asia. Jewish culture, through the ages, has not developed an indigenous architectural style or expression primarily because Jews have been frequently denied social, economic, and educational opportunities, i.e., the owning of property and the establishing of permanent roots. Temple and synagogue designers have, for the most part, emulated reCurrent congregations architecture. gional tend to
welcome
the
best
in
contemporary
architectural design and art work. The architect undertaking a temple or synagogue commis-
sion should become familiar with Jewish customs, traditions, art forms, and the magnificent literary expression of the religion. Religious Judaism in the United States today consists of the Orthodox, Conservative, and Reform movements. Each group has readily distinguished ceremonial practices and a divergent approach to programming. Furthermore, within each of the three main divisions there exist considerable variations of viewpoints and practices. Hence, the architect will find it mandatory to collaborate closely with individual synagogue building, religion, and education committees. In the United States, the terms temple and synagogue are used interchangeably. This text will use the generic terminology the synagogue.
the
Elements shown
Figs.
in
1
and 2 are those in temple and
most commonly programmed synagogue buildings. Worship Areas
The sanctuary will traditionally, use permits, orient with the bimah plat-
seated in separate sections (usually divided by an aisle), and a more Orthodox group will require visual separation also between the men's
Sanctuary if
site
form
The bimah platform height
to the east.
from 24
and women’s sections. The number of permanent seats (pews) provided in the sanctuary is commonly 40 to 50
36 in. Center steps (6-in. normally used. The focal point of the sanctuary is the ark, which is located on the rear wall area of the bimah. The ark cabinet houses the congregation's Torah — will vary
to
rise, 12-in. tread) are
or Scrolls
— the
per cent of the anticipated ultimate adult congregation size. A synagogue with 400 to 500
members
written doctrine of the divine
Jewish religious life. The ark platform is one or two steps above the bimah floor level. Suspended in front of and above the ark is the eternal light, which traditionally remains constantly lighted. Located on the bimah platform are reading lecterns for the rabbi and cantor, occasionally standing art work, and chairs for the synagogue officers and trustees. Note that and some Conall Orthodox congregations servative congregations separate the bimah area and the cantor’s station from the pulpit area and ark. The specific requirements and physical facilities of the religious areas must
Hashanah, the Jewish New Year; and Yom Kippur, the Day of Atonement) will require
maximum
seating (of several times more than regular attendance) with direct view to the bimah. Hence it is practically mandatory plan-
ning that the sanctuary seating area expand into multipurpose areas and social hall areas. Sliding or folding soundproof doors are commonly placed between the religious and social areas. Folding or stacking chairs (6 to 7 sq ft per person) are used for the temporary seating requirements. Choir
* ~\
Dress Rooms Storage
tures within any of their zoned areas. A site location on a secondary street at the approxi-
congregation neighborhood An optimum off-street parking is desirable. ratio of one car per congregation family is desirable but seldom achieved. It should be noted that Orthodox congregations prohibit the use of autos or public transportation on the Sabbath and hence must be placed in close prox-
mate center
imity to
Seating for the choir
SERVICE
possible, the architect should advise on the
selection of a site. Most community zoning and building jurisdiction will permit religious struc-
I
provide 200 to 225 permanent per person) for the average
ft
attendance at weekly services. However, the yearly observance of High Holy Days (Rosh
be thoroughly programmed in the early design stage. The architect should seek advice from the rabbi and the congregation's religious committee.
SOCIAL
will
seats (10 sq
rule for
Site If
Reform and Conservative synaSeating Data gogues commonly use the conventional fan or auditorium seating pattern with the bimah platform placed at the front end (preferably east). The Orthodox and Sephardic synagogues traditionally place the bimah platform in the center of the U-shaped rectangular seating pattern in the sanctuary. Men and women are
SPACE CRITERIA
GENERAL
Food Preparation
-
NORTH
Storage
usually in an area
is
WORSHIP
I
I
Robing choir
I
[
of the
5
5 Stage
Sanctuary
Multipurpose
Social Hall
Bimah
)
V
.*
membership.
Robbi s Robing
PUBLIC Lounge Lobby
Materials
Rabbi's Study Library
Since funds are usually limited, the majority of synagogues are designed for conservative initial cost. Construction materials and mechanical equipment should be specified for considerations of permanence, durability, and low cost of maintenance. The selection of better materials and equipment may increase initial cost but can result in considerable longterm maintenance economies.
CR
Coats
Toilets
Toilets
Administration
School Administration
CR Activity Zone
Men's Club
Storage
z 5
They where
for escape must be provided for prisoners. In multistory buildings with courtrooms on different floors, a private elevator to transport prisoners from a lower floor or basement entrance to the marshal's detention cells and to and from the court-
may
,
Part 9. United States Marshal
courtroom, the service of processes, the appearance of witnesses, the collection and disbursement of certain monies and fees, the custody of certain property in the possession of the court, and other special duties assigned by the court.
The marshal's
suite
should
be
so
located with relation to the courtroom that prisoners can pass directly to it from the detention cells without exposure to public contact or view. If the suite is located one floor above or below the courtroom, a private stair
T
The United States marshal has
Components
The United States marshal is charged with the custody of prisoners and their production in court, the maintenance of order in the
Location
is usually required. A freight elevator often serve in lieu of a private elevator for this purpose. On large installations, the detention cells may be put in the basement. In that case, no additional detention cells are provided on other floors.
rooms
installation.
Duties
Provide administrative Stenographers' Office assistant/stenographers' office between the offices of assistant United States attorneys, allowing a minimum area of 100 sq ft per desk. Generally there will be a ratio of two stenographers tor three attorneys.
which offers no opportunity
headquarters
at
some designated
judicial district, not necessarily the
a
in
the
same
city
city
where the judge's headquarters are located. The marshal’s suite varies in size according to the amountof work in the district. A typical suite for large installations includes:
Marshal's office
T oilet General office Vault
Bookkeepers' office Deputy marshals' office Interviewing room Fingerprinting room Detention cells for men and for
women
Holding cells Storage room Evidence storage room (may be
in
basement)
Marshal's Office This shall have a minimum area of 300 sq ft. Provide a private toilet of not less than 30 sq ft.
Provide area of 500 is separated from the fice by a counter and General Office
a general office with a
minimum
sq
should have a
The public space
gate.
The public space
minimum width
Opening
Vault
ft.
rest of the general ofof 8
ft.
into the general office, provide
minimum area of 100 sq ft. and accommodating a money safe. Locate the vault a vault with a
so that the interior lic space. Bookkeepers'
is
not visible from the pub-
Provide
Office
bookkeepers'
a
office adjoining the general office with a mini-
mum of 300 sq each occupant.
ft.
One desk
is
provided for
Adjacent to and connected with the Deputies bookkeepers' office (by passage if necessary), provide an office with a minimum area of 300 sq ft for the marshal’s deputies. One desk is provided for each occupant.
Room
Fingerprinting
room with
a
Provide a fingerprinting of 120 sq ft adjoining
minimum
and connecting with the deputies’ smaller
offices,
office. In the
fingerprinting
the
cabinet
and lavatory may be placed in the deputies’ office and the fingerprinting room omitted. Provide an interviewing area of 1 50 sq fta located so that prisoners can be brought from the detention cells as directly as possible. The room
Room
Interviewing
room with
shall
a
minimum
accommodate one
table
and four side
chairs. Detention Cells for
Cells for
Men.
Men and
for
Women
Usually, provide two deten-
The cells wide and be large enough to accommodate the maximum number of prisoners detained at one time. The size of a cell shall be determined by allowing for each prisoner a minimum of 25 sq ft. tion cells with observation passage. shall be not less than
Fig.
692
4
Judge's chambers,
district
court.
1
0
ft
Governmental and Public
COURTHOUSES 500 sq
and be connected with area of 30 sq
and actions, organizes its calendar, receives and disburses its money, and gives information to attorneys and interested parties regarding the disposition of cases as recorded in his
of
office.
area of 300 sq
toilet
ft
with a
Daputy Clerk's Office clerk’s office
desirable to locate the clerk near the courtroom and convenient to the judge. In multiple courts the clerk should be easily accessible to the public. Location
It
Clerk’s office and toilet Chief deputy clerk’s office
General office, with Examination room Supply room
public
space and
files
This shall have a minimum and be located between the
and the general
office.
The size of the General Office with Public Space general office ordinarily will be determined by the number of desks, tables, and file cases used. But if it requires so many cases for active files that they would cause the general office to be disproportionately large, provide additional file rooms. Preferably they should be connected to the general office: but if located on adjacent floors, provide direct stairways and dumbwaiters. The public space is separated from the rest of the general office by a counter with one or more gates. The public space shall have
Work room
a
minimum width
a very large general office, the
Vault
U-shaped or L-shaped
room rooms as required
Exhibit
Naturalization clerk's office, with public space
Clark's Office
ft
a private ft.
is
Components The offices of the clerk of the court vary in size and number in accordance with the volume of business. The rooms include:
File
minimum
This shall have a
minimum
area
to
of 8
ft.
In
counter will be
accommodate
the re-
quired length. Provide a cashier's grille with returns on the counter. Refer to Fig. 6.
This is provided for attorneys Examination Room and others who are permitted to inspect the
yi—i ]
Fig.
Grand
5
jury
rooms.
Women
Cells for
SUPPLY ROOM
Prisoners.
Similar to de-
tention cells for men.
Observation Passage. An observation passage at least 4 ft wide shall be located along the exterior wall of the building and be separated from the cells by a prison-type grille partition. The entire cell must be visible from the observation passage. Holding Cells
If
=3
required, provide holding cells
more courtrooms. They should be located in back of the courtrooms near the prisoners' entrance. for projects with three or
Room Provide a supply and storage room of required size convenient to the deputies' office. Supply and Storage
Evidence At times marshals Storage have custody of bulky evidence, requiring a large storage area. A storage room (preferably in the basement) of 300 sq ft minimum should be
provided.
r~
Smaller Installation This suite will require fewer and perhaps smaller rooms than the head-
quarters suite
in
arrangement and will
the same district, but the relationship of its rooms
TAININ£ THE
•STACE /^EQUlf^MENTS
one of the mechanized overhead doors. all apparatus doors so that tension springs may be replaced on a preventive maintenance schedule based on predictive breakdown of the equipment. This standardization of door-opening size will simplify It
is
of
••GNtSS AMA MQUiKXNiENTS FINE MOUSE &UHOIN6.
essential to include a totalizer on
•
t/Nir
mead. name* title
will simplify the storage of parts while minimizing
•sfA ci ik equipment ry re
overhead doors be opened with
that
electrical
•DATE FEET ffK UNIT
5(3
> ft—
all
opera-
s
purposes of decreasing the turnout time. Electrical operators shall have the capability of
•
UDDtN
-
TILLfA
case of breakdown of the
•
U-PPCK-
1C\AIIK
VS
200
essential that the over-
•
UPPfA- £E4A MOUNT
36'
151
X
head-door-operating equipment be put on emergency generator in case of electrical failure
•
TUM TEN.- STAmdaad
y;
SSI
X
X
tors for
manual operation
in
motorized equipment.
It is
the
in
rUMf'tFs- .sqiiiM
ir>‘
SCO
•
KlSCUl JKUO K
15‘
MO
X
Generally throughout the
the hose
.
AtF-PoN CKAiU 1KJCK
yS
05 to
X
being eliminated as a functional need
•
AMBULANCE
lo'
•
EAt/SH
4% 4%
X X X
is
the operation of a firehouse. With the use of
f
IN UN
10'
IT
TlWK
sophisticated hose drying equipment and the use
•
LIGHT
of polyester hose which does not require drying,
•
COMMUNICATION vchicu
the hose tower
and
is
being phased out
in
both
new
existing firehouses.
Turnout Gear Storage
•
SPECIALTY
•
cm ffs
•
ffD
• •
X
—
A>4f-*ll fUJAS
4 0D
•
PfillfA-
APOM ELUlUCkL
240
Ifv/ATIA.
patterns which in the past carried the responding chief through the company locker room and dormitory. There is a continuity of function tion
between
50
WllPlWfi COAf fMM AA-V ClKVLATIOhJ,
10
DISCUSSION OF THE ADVANTAGES OF THE ONE-STORY FIREHOUSE OVER THE TWO-STORY FIREHOUSE There is a national movement generally to eliminate the two-story firehouse as a planning concept in firehouse design.
W*US, S13HM flOW, ,
ve mts, snutt, nrt flufp, Miraiul pucts ahpotuea SOACE COUSUMIUX IT
nw-y
f.H
uim
®f
in
Ntf
(
uwtf- limit-
5Q. FT-
to \h°/o
AlVft
3.
It is
range with a proven successful performance. Included is a stainless steel range hood with removable and washable stainless steel filters. The
sq-FT-
SQ.FT.
mitory area faces onto a
it
is
best
4.
maximum sound
this quiet
A
isolation
and privacy
for
area of the firehouse.
As a secondary option
for high land cost,
the value of the land can always be recouped
by
will
fire-
shall
the original cost of the land.
future
Chief's Quarters
planning concepts have the dormitory and locker-room spaces straddling the toilet-shower
traffic street
determining factors
be the efficiency of response and the reduction of maintenance and operational burdens which are life/cycle determinants. This maintenance and operation burden will far exceed
not to provide any windows on the dormitory
simple cleaning.
New
cost than
the decision for a one-story or two-story
walls facing the street. This type of planning
give
Room
in
and becomes a trade-off when evaluating low land cost and the difference in construction cost between the one-story firehouse and the two-story firehouse. Although the one-time land costs have been made an obstacle to the one-story firehouse, the
and clothes-washing core areas. This provides sound isolation between the noisy locker room and quiet dormitory area. In cases where the dor-
washable acoustical tile and the floor and wall are finished in a ceramic or quarry tile, which has eliminated maintenance except for ceilings are of
solu-
the one-story firehouse.
approximately 10 percent lower
house
cial
is
the two-story firehouse
HEQUIKEMEHT
Included also are a large refrigerator
activity of a high-
apparent that the most economical
CSVfi-TOUL)
LiMir-'isrtn.-y ftt-
and a six-burner range (commercial type) with a grill unit and oven. This is a heavy-duty commer-
Dormitory-Locker
It is
tion to firehouse design
4 (Cont.).
less steel.
and down
sfrV(
in
Fig.
Elimination of the physical exertion required
the constant up
activity firefighting unit.
PVILPIN4 Cite
EiMSS AfMtA
The arguments in favor of the one-story firehouse are mainly based on positive facts and response action strategy: 1. Injuries to members of the responding fire companies resulting from the use of stairs and slide poles will be eliminated. 2.
l/dTTAloA
IA//HIS
the chief's car area, the chief's turnout
gear storage, the egress stair, and the responding chief's office and dormitory; the adjacency of these spaces indicates a minimum circulation pat-
-
5D
MfrtA AO0M
lUUOSOJA
and
steps by giving the responding chief direct access
SUP-TOTAL.
the chief's quarters are located
of the stair at the second floor
to his response vehicle. This will eliminate circula-
AM 4
.
3),
head
tern.
UNIT
BUNK
and
he goes directly into his suite of rooms from the egress stair. This eliminates many unnecessary
AWA
I'K'L' L
.
trated (Fig.
21
m u u
StttWIAAfsfA w/^EUCff
•
X
at the
U)UU *L
•
ffMW UNIT.
Suip Siuk- STvi^Hrl
circulation corridor
dormitory having direct access to his response vehicle. In the typical two-story firehouse illus-
fAClUJIfcS (ffA-UNif)
IS/4TC*. CU>Sl
stair or
at the apparatus floor level, with his office
ps.
to
selling
the air rights over the property for
development or
for additional floor area adjacent parcels as allowed by the zoning
regulations
in
the particular municipality.
refinement of the planning of the chief's quar-
ters
has produced a unique privacy aspect and
efficiency of response.
The
chief's car
and
his
turnout gear storage closet are located at the
707
— Governmental and Public
POLICE STATIONS
HOUSING Perhaps no item of police equipment or property has the potential for providing or denying optimal utilization of
personnel
in
command and supportive services any greater degree than the police
headquarters building
itself.
Earlier this century
the automobile reduced the need for large num-
bers of officers to provide on-street police service or for
emergency standby purposes, but no such
dramatic invention has reduced the nonline personnel requirements of a police agency. Indeed, the complexities of staff
and
and
auxiliary services
the utilization of sophisticated
data processing equipment and growth of planning and research increase
need
training requirements
—
the
activities,
the
all
emphasize
sound planning of police facilities both space and personnel are to be used effec-
the if
in
automated
systems,
is recognized as inadequate several alternative responses to the problem may be identified: (1| doing nothing about the building or its floor plan and employing additional personnel in numbers sufficient to overcome the operational handicaps of the existing facility,
reducing service to the public and to the
line
elements of the department whenever the physical and functional relationships of people
or field
their
work are such that they require more
time and/or personnel than
is
presently available,
researching the departmental and public needs and redesigning and modifying those portions of (3)
the structure which present operational or administrative
ing a
problems, or
new some
facility.
(4)
designing ond construct-
1
situations, the handicap of a poorly arranged building may be overcome by minimal reconstruction or relocation of offices and work areas, though this approach may not always be used to great advantage in cases where unusual problems exist. It is generally unwise, however, to attempt to redesign the police station in an existing structure. Experience throughout the naIn
may
tion
has shown that such moves
cost
more than new construction, and the
eventually results
are seldom satisfactory. The most economical approach, if viewed from a 20- to 40-year vantage point, probably will
be
in
the design
and construc-
tion of a new facility. This is true because the expenses of reconstruction are essentially a onetime cost, but the personnel costs of employees whose work performance is limited or wasted through poor building design continue year after year. Moreover, delaying new buildings when the need is apparent can be costly because of rising
construction costs. If
1
only one unnecessary 24-hour per
Whenever a new
day
posi-
building or a mojor restructuring
under consideration, the key decision to be made does not concern building design at all program it is analysis and appraisal of departmental and organization. All too often a building is designed to fit an antiquated, unrealistic agency structure. Thus a review of department organization should be made, accompanied by necessary changes, before o new building design or modification of an old one is attempted.
of on old one
is
Municipal Police Administration, 1971, International City Management Association, Washington, D.C.
708
beyond
most police departments in the United States. Given an already undermanned field force, the additional cost burden for personal services occasioned by poor building design is a major consideration. Fortunately, there is a developing awareness of the impact of poor design on police efficiency and costs for personal services. 2
DESIGN OF A POLICE BUILDING In
duplication of services or permits better adminis-
and convenience. Public telephones bondsmen, visitors, and the public should be located away from the main counter to avoid confusion and disruption of ontrative control
for the use of attorneys,
going police services.
the reach of
designing modifications of an existing structure,
when plans are drawn for a new police facility, many factors should be considered. These involve functional relationships, economy of space, public or
and economically. When an old building
and
expenditures are a major consideration in building design. The luxury of poor working quarters is
for
tively
(2)
tion is saved or eliminated by such a move, the annual salary savings amounts to approximately five times the cost of one person's salary and fringe benefits. Unnecessary recurring personnel
convenience, security,
etc.
General Design Considerations should
make
should be grouped so as to achieve
use of physical
facilities,
maximum
thereby avoiding dupli-
cation of equipment or furnishings. For example, the
work of records and communication
units are
so interrelated and mutually supportive that space
arrangements should assure direct access from one to the other. Further, temporary reassignments of personnel could easily be made between the integrated elements as work loads vary between the two. Administrative line officers should be grouped closely. Booking, identification, and detention operations must be so related that time
and
distance are shortened to conserve
travel
when
or a section of t>ne floor, during those hours
the administrative offices are closed. This concept applicability to both small and large agenSuch design tends to keep operating costs low and improve general security. Whenever possible, walls for offices, rooms, and assembly areas should be of modular construction which permits expansion and flexibility of operation. Metal and glass partitions, and even file cabinet dividers should be used for functional allocation of space whenever privacy is not a major consideration; open space should predominate. Lighting, decor, and acoustical treatment should be planned care-
has
full
cies.
comfort and efficiency of person-
fully to increase
and work areas of elements performing essentially the same tasks Offices
Functional Relationships
Building design
possible the use of only one floor,
nel.
Adequate parking
facilities
should be provided,
including space for vehicles belonging to
all
agen-
and and visitors, plus reasonable space for emergency needs. A distinction should be made between official and public needs. Location of the building, on-duty personnel,
cies using
clients
parking space should provide for close access to the building
by kinds
of use.
Communications, Records, and Evidence The communications operation, including radio consoles, monitoring units, teletype machines, alarm systems, and telephones, should be housed
in
an
air-conditioned, acoustically treated room. Tele-
may
and
personnel resources and to avoid security prob-
type machines
lems.
cally treated cubicles to minimize the effect of
The room should be designed
their noise.
Public Considerations conflict with prisoner will will
Public access should not
passageways
or areas; this
avoid exposure of prisoners to the public and
harm
eliminate the possiblity of
to
either.
The public, of course, must be restricted in its movement within designated areas of the building. Avoidance of prisoners' public contact eliminates the possibility of embarrassment, particu-
women and
larly to
agency and
its
possibility of passing
escape
and
children,
weapons
is
to prisoners
the
and
windows should be
reasonable distance of the building en-
trance to avoid public confusion and to
limit the
public's need to move about the police buildings. The public information and complaint desk should be adjacent to the communications or dispatch
area. This
is
particularly important in the smaller
departments. Equally important is provision of a single complaint counter or center; this avoids
acousti-
to assure
privacy and security; only police personnel on
duty
in
communications and records and certain
other authorized personnel should have access to
it.
In
addition,
communications center
the
should be on a raised, paneled floor to allow for adequate conduits and wiring and to provide
when rearrangement is necessary. Design of the records facility should provide for utilization of under-the-counter files in approflexibility
priate locations.
addition, vertical shelf
In
files
should be used whenever practicable to reduce
storage space; closed shelf
efforts.
Public counters or business
within
criticism of the
procedures. Also eliminated
require separate
features of standard
file
provide
all
the
cabinets but require
less
files
room. As suggested earlier, file cabinets of five or more drawers can be used effectively as space dividers which provide for a measure of privacy. Acoustical treatment, false floors, and aicjtonditioning are essential
in
the design of space for
electronic data processing equipment. Duplicating
and
printing machines which create noise prob-
lems should be housed
in
acoustically treated cab-
inets within the services area.
—
2 Under modern conditions of employment the 40hour week, generous vacation and holiday leave, and
—about
example
persons, give or take small percentage differences, are required to man one fulltime post 24 hours per day throughout in-service
the year.
training,
for
five
Automatic multitape typewriters should also be in a separate, acoustically treated room
located
rather than
in
the general office area. Provision
for the safekeeping of evidence
property should be
made
and recovered
within the services of-
Governmental and Public
POLICE STATIONS
flees
and should be separate from those
facilities
ment’s administrative and
kept at the lowest
used for prisoners' property.
elements be
service
level, consistent
with continued
high-quality service to other elements within the
Detention and Related Facilities cilities
All prisoner fa-
should be located near the services element
enable personnel to perform booking and turnkey duties whenever possible, thus minimizing the need for jailkeeping staff. Provisions should be established whereby prisoners may be held in separate security areas prior to being booked. This will prevent prisoners not yet booked from disposto
ing of possible evidence in
their
possession or
from passing dangerous weapons through cells to prisoners already in custody. The outside entrance to the jail and detention should open to a drive-in garage. Police
facilities
vehicles should be able to drive into the interior of the police building, with the outer
garage door
opened and closed remotely from within the area, and still remain outside the main detention and booking area. A second door which separates the unloading area from passage to the jail, also electrically controlled from within, should be provided.
Means
of providing security for the trans-
portation of prisoners or material witnesses to court from the detention areas should be planned
and
carefully,
conflicts with routes of nonpolice
Visitors’
and attorneys' rooms must maintain
but audible and visual separation between
all
prisoner
A
and
only
when
visitor.
separate, secure storage area for prisoners’
to
the public. This
possible
is
and physical layout
the design
of the
police facility are responsive to this need.
be numbered to correspond to the cells and bunks within each cell. For example, the first compartment logically would be 1-A, meaning Cell Number 1, Bunk A. It would contain property only if a prisoner were occupying that cell and bunk. This procedure would permit booking or detention personnel to immediately return property to a prisoner as he
is
released, avoiding unfortunate
loss or destruction of
property which has been
mislaid or forgotten at the time of his release. Closed-circuit
television
may be
installed
at
and
and detention personnel
if direct observacannot be accomplished because location or design without additional sta-
for observation of prisoners,
tion of prisoners
of
jail
tion personnel.
A
special portable extension tele-
in
function
formation during those hours
duty
when
clerks are
on
the records office. In those departments
in
to the officer in
may
turn
in
their
boards, a supervisor’s monitoring and
tions, status
position (perhaps only a desk initially,
be replaced by a complete radio console), transceiver units. The records staff should be trained so that its personnel can provide additional manpower in the communications cenlater to
and teletype
during periods of
maximum
dispatching need.
to allow
mutual assistance, additional personnel must be assigned to the communications section to allow
sonnel
and
citizens
conducting business there.
and peak work periods should be provided near the communicaProvisions for
space
rest
rooms,
cabinets,
filing
for additional personnel during
tions center.
It
is
axiomatic that the greater the
distance to these areas, the greater the
manpower
cost to the department.
Often classrooms, assembly, and other rooms may be designed to form a complex of interrelated multipurpose areas, giving sufficient flexibility to allow use for roll
call,
training classes, police
community
tions meetings, public hearings, scout troop ings,
and other purposes.
design of
this
A
little
foresight
rela-
important to the progressive police administrator that staffing requirements of the departIt
is
in
persuading citizens to cooperate in inin which they would normally main-
vestigations
for
some other reason
is
often irreparable.
The layout of investigators' work areas should
be kept simple and free of the honeycomb or cubbyhole design found in many stations. Private offices should be provided only for the com mander of the unit in small and medium-sized departments and only for the top-level subordinate commanders
in
the larger agencies. Investi-
gators should have individual lockers for clothing
and equipment required
for normal work, with nominal filing cabinet space for paperwork associated with current cases.
investigator can seldom justify a pri-
vate desk and will
be
and
in
cabinets, for most of his work
file
in the preparation of reports, attendance at court, inquests, and hearings. Many agencies utilize a series of tables or salesmen's desks for the investigators' use while reading records, taking notes, or dictating rein
the field,
ports, thus minimizing the
space.
cilities
In
need
for furniture
and
such situations, a number of semiprivate
and other persons.
responsibility for providing interview fa-
for prisoners remains
with the auxiliary
so that prisoners need not be
services element
and areas
precautions apply for line-up or show-up rooms,
for criminal investigators, vice officers,
officers,
and administrative and
staff sup-
port personnel, while not perhaps as critical as that of the records
and communications
center,
implications.
Depending upon
the size of the department,
command
officers
should have some freedom of movement and privacy. Some chiefs find it nearly impossible to function effectively while
offices
in their
of constant interruption by visitors
because
who
should
normally be assisted by desk officers or other personnel. Frequently a visitor
for privacy.
or
office
will
Too few persons see
layout
demand
to see
problem,
this
insisting
as a design that
“with
proper control the interruptions will be kept at a minimum." The chief of a small or mediumsized department will of him at his
soon find that the sight desk, with no one else in the room,
many
removed from
within the security area. The
and they should not be placed
in
same
the investigative
office areas.
The offices of division commanders need not be removed from the general area of their subordinates' work areas, but patrol and traffic personnel assembly and roll-call rooms may be multipurpose facilities some distance from the division offices.
Whenever
possible, the highest ranking
commanders' offices should be close to the chief's office and the conference room. Other administrative offices such as those used by training personnel, planning, and internal affairs personnel also should be located in the same area so that the command staff will be close to these support units. These working areas also should be predominantly open space with a minimum of private offices or rooms. Modular wall dividers and desk or filing cabinet separators are sufficient to divide space among several major elements performing similar or related work.
One
major consideration involves the location,
avail-
design, and use of the police garage. Generally
able to talk to anyone. Therefore, certain offices
speaking, no attempt should be made to combine the auto maintenance or storage garage with a
indicates to Service Facilities
their privacy
The location of offices for the chief of police, division command offices, and the working offices
ployee, simply because of inadequate provision
space can often be used for almost the entire day.
gators
Offices
the
a considerable amount of wasted space which is used only sporadically. Coupled with careful planning of class or meeting schedules, the same
The feeling that
concerned with
is
or their personal safety frequently assists investi-
However,
the chief, rather than the proper officer or em-
in
the building for fear of recog-
tioning witnesses, informants,
Administrative and Investigative
meet-
section of the building can save
in
interview areas are sometimes provided for ques-
the chief of police and top-level
Provisions for Multiple Use
the department
A good
to handle overloads as well.
it
The auxiliary services work area should be air conditioned to provide optimum comfort for per-
charge before entering
the detention areas.
selves to persons
tain silence. Further, the damage caused by the unexpected exposure of a witness, informant, criminal partner, or an otherwise unknown officer to a suspect who happened to be in the station
The property room should also be located in or near the records center and close to the public information counter or desk. The communications center should be a room of sufficient size to pro vide an adequate number of dispatchers' posi-
has far-reaching operational and public relations
trance where police officers
parents of youths apprehended for and cooperating officers from other agencies generally do not wish to expose themoffenses,
field forces.
area should also be provided near the
weapons
Informants, victims of potentially embarrass-
ing crimes,
nition, injury, or other reasons.
youth
en-
exit.
where records clerks normally are not on duty around the clock, direct access to current records must be provided for the communications personnel; otherwise the lack of immediate availability of previously gathered information will handicap
phone should be provided for prisoner use and located in a secure and private area within the detention facility. A gun reception and storage jail
be
Often the desired degree of isolation can be provided by rear entrances or alternate routes of
and purpose. If possible, the communications center and the records office should be located back-to-back, with facilities provided to allow for the direct exchange of inrelated
various vantage points within the security areas for protection of police
unit should
the normal public traffic flow
to the police officers' entrance to the records area.
is
identification files
Unless appropriate physical facilities are provided
It
away from
the communications center. These are intimately
and
booking area,
under a counter.
the youth unit,
areas. However, they should be relatively close
the design of
ter
preferably
same reasons, offices of and the intelligence
For the
the vice unit,
the
in
personal property should be provided within the should contain enough cubicles to allow each to
movement
the offices.
located
any building
provided which allows to and from
is
privacy and freedom of
and
Important
location of the records
backup
avoided.
traffic within the building
department and
or physical separation
citizens that he should
be
should not be located immediately adjacent to the main public entrance unless
some screening
prisoner unloading area except
in
smaller depart-
709
Governmental and Public
POLICE STATIONS
merits.
The garage and prisoner entrance may
use the same door, but there should be a secure “tunnel” or section set aside which would allow the vehicle carrying prisoners to be completely isolated inside the security area after the door
space must be allowed so may be taken from the prisoner van without endangering the officers involved. Preferably, this area should not be visible from within the remainder of the garage. Vehicle storage facilities located inside the garage should provide enough space to house most is
closed.
Sufficient
that several prisoners
710
vehicles not in use, especially in areas where the weather is severe. The garage entrance should not open directly onto a public street or a heavily used alley unless sufficient space is provided so that police vehicles need not be backed out into oncoming traffic. If also used for maintenance and repair of departmental vehicles, the garage should be provided with additional space for a small office, parts and storage, and the actual repair and maintenance area. If possible, the garage should not occupy prime first-floor space, especially in larger communities where the police
building
is
situated
in
the congested
downtown
area.
A
final
matter of building design involves the
departments' marksmanship program. A department often will need an indoor as well as an
outdoor target range, but careful planning minimizes the space required. If properly designed and constructed, the range may sometimes be
combined with other training facilities, especially in smaller agencies where the shooting program does not require fulltime use of the area.
Governmental and Public
POLICE STATIONS
By
JOSHUA
VOGEL, AIA
H.
Police stations represent one of the necessary governmental functions requiring careful plan-
One
ning.
of the
most serious administrative
problems confronting most police forces is lack of adequate or proper space and facilities for a police headquarters and jail. There are two main objectives to be considthe construction of the police departbuilding: first, the handling and pro-
ered
in
ment
cessing of the prisoners; second, the service to the public. The arrangement should be such that prisoners may be handled within the police department itself, without allowing those prisoners to be in contact with the public gen-
is
readily possible.
Such
a central
site,
how-
ever, should be so laid
out that it gives an opportunity for the public to enter the admin-
rooms from one street, the fire department from another side street, and the police department from a third side or from the rear. In all these cases, the location in relationship to the various land uses, the street pattern, and size of the site itself makes it possible that this central site can have all the governmental units in one location and still meet all the site requirements of the individual functions separately.
GENERAL DESIGN INFORMATION
The plans shown represent the results of the field survey and study by the police chiefs' advisory committee and subcommittees. Particular attention was given to room sizes and the arrangement in the plan of these various spaces in relation to one another, so as to ensure safe flow of traffic within the building by the public and security control of the prisoners by the police force without unnecessary duplication of staff. The ideas reflected are based on past experiences with similar police stations now in use, and the explanation which follows each plan directs attention to some of the important elements suggested for inclusion in new struc-
SITE
A building with the least number of floors is more economical to supervise because less personnel
Police stations should be planned as
they are to be in a separate location from other structures. If analysis of site locations for a police station permits other structures housing other city functions (such as city hall or fire station) to be erected on the same site without interfering with the proper discharge of functions, then one central site can be chosen. The jail section of a building should be above the ground and set back far enough from the property line to prevent contact between prisoners and persons outside of the building. Jail quarters should be accessible to a loading space at, or within, the building for the transportation of prisoners. It should be located where the vehicular traffic is not too heavy. Off-street parking, space for expansion, light and air on all sides, and separate entrances must be provided whenever possible-
Small Cities and
required to supervise it. While may cost less in construction and be a saving in site costs, the extra outlay for administrative personnel, year after year, will never cease, in time it may be far greater than the additional cost of the desirable horizontal plan. B. Construction Building
Code
has been found
in small, compactly built and towns that one location will serve all city departments under one roof. When the city or town area extends only a few blocks in any direction, access to arterial streets
cities
and Specifications, Bureau of Governmental Research and Services, University of Washington, Seattle, Wash 1954 Police Stations, Planning
,
personnel event of
The building should be lighted, heated, and
ventilated.
fire resistant,
properly
fire
be
amply provided. the building is of two stories or more, two more enclosed stairways should be provided
If
or
according
The telephone and radio Telephone, Radio service should include equipment for fire calls and auxiliary fire alarm as well as provision for right-of-way calls, conference calls, watch calls from stations of duty, and supervisory 5.
calls.
6.
The location of a detective depend upon the workload in-
Detective Division
division
will
volved and the number of detectives employed. There should be a main detective office large enough to permit all detectives to get together for briefing and instructions. In addition, there should be small rooms located adjacent to the main detective office, which can be used for interrogation purposes. These need not be elaborate and require only a desk and two or three chairs.
to
building
show-up room is in such a manner permit the shuttling back and forth of
In case a Show-up Room desired, it should be located 7.
as to prisoners from the confinement quarters to the show-up room without coming into contact with the public.
Visitors Room A visiting room should be provided so as to promote informal interviews under adequate supervision. This visitors' room can serve for visitors for the prisoners or as a conference room between an attorney and a prisoner. It should be so located that the prisoners' entrance is on the jail side and the visitors' and attorneys' entrance is from the public side. A separation between prisoners and visitors inside the room should be provided by at least a fine meshed double screening or heavy plate glass windows. Another type of separation is the use of a table at least 3 ft wide with a partition extending to the floor and the partition above the table running to the ceiling so that it is impossible to pass even the smallest item of contraband. 8.
if
Towns
in
is
a building of several floors
passing through the building at any time. Fire safety devices such as standpipes, hose, extinguishers, and alarms should
REQUIREMENTS
A. General
It
A. Horizontal Plan
The plans should be arranged to prevent smoke and hot gases, from cooking or heating units, from
tures.
jail
have for drilling, and for use fire or emergency. to
istration
erally.
Plans Developed for this Section
accessible for inspection, for
regulations
for
fire
hazards.
C. Facilities 1. Windows Windows adjacent to jail quarters should have steel bars or steel detention sash with screening devices and be inaccessible to
9.
Room
Interview
A
separate
room should be provided
for
interviewing the use of at-
All parts of detention quarters should be separated from exterior walls by a mesh partition, parallel to outside walls and 3 ft inside them, to prevent passing of con-
torneys, probation officers, and social welfare
passage
examination room for the medical officer. For medical facilities, a locked steel cabinet for the medical equipment can be placed on the wall in one of the examination rooms.
prisoners.
traband, exhibitionism, and for supervising personnel.
to
give
Storage A safe storage place should be provided for cash and valuable articles. 2.
Firearms, weapons, and medicines in strong, securely locked cabinets inaccessible to prisoners; i.e. they should be kept in locations removed from jail quarters and corridors. 3.
Firearms
should be stored
Firefighting Apparatus All fire hazards should be guarded against. Avoid exposed electrical installations, wood partitions, straw ticks, paper, rags, and other combustible materials. Fire hose in locked cabinets should be easily
4.
workers. 10.
Examining
Room
This
same room,
if
prop-
erly located, can also serve as an
11. 1
Kitchen
When
the
jail
averages more than
5 prisoners a day, a properly equipped kitchen
has been found advisable. There should be a room and locked storage closet. The kitchen should be equipped with a stove for top and oven cooking. If it is a two-story building, one kitchen only on the first floor is recommended and dumbwaiters may be used, with a pantry on the second floor. In cases where the food is brought from the outside and not cooked on the premises, the kitchen or refrigerator
711
Governmental and Public
POLICE STATIONS
pantry should at least have modern sterilizing
dishwashing equipment. laundry should be included modern-type equipment and for clothing and bedding.
with
jail,
sterilizer
13. Janitor's
Slop
A
Sink
janitor’s
slop
in
a
sink
should be placed in an open space large enough so that mops and cleaning gear can be hung on racks exposed to sun and air. This janitor’s room should be well ventilated and inaccessible to prisoners.
and
Male
female prisoners must be kept entirely separate. Other segregations are necessary, such as separations of juveniles, sentenced from unsentenced prisoners, those with crime records and disciplinary cases separated from drunkards, vagrants, traffic violators, and witnesses. Prisoners of unsound mind, contagious disease carriers, and known sex perverts must be isolated. Plans should provide close and readily maintained supervision of the jail sections housing drunks, the insane, or the mentally disturbed. Segregation
14.
The
should be arranged so that is provided for prisoners serving time, and these cells must be separated from those housing material witnesses. 15.
Cells
maximum
cells
security
maximum number
The
some
mended.
A
12. Laundry
the
tub baths for women are recomThermostatically controlled, concealed mixing valves should be provided for all showers and hot water supply to lavatories. For flushing devices, the control should be vandalproof, pushbutton-operated, and flushing type valve adjustable for flushing time. Toilets and urinals should have a similar type of pushbutton valve. Lavatories should be equipped with self-closing, pushbutton-operated valves and integral supply spout and nozzle and an integral slow-draining strainer. Hand-operated valves, which are easily damaged, should not be used. Waste and vent stacks, as well as supply and exhaust ducts, must be properly constructed so that the prisoners cannot use them for communication. Plumbing fixtures should be wall-mounted in the tanks and individual cells. For padded cells, a flushing-rim floor drain is the only toilet fixture which can be used, and its flushing valve should be located in the pipe space to be operated only by supervisory personnel outside stations,
of
individual
cells
makes possible segregation of prisoners. Individual cells are advised for small jails where
the
cell.
Showers
shall have vandalproof head with concealed pushbutton-operated flushing-type valve with adjustable flushing time, and, as mentioned above, all hot water should be thermostatically controlled to prevent scalding.
A receiving garage should be built immediately adjacent to the building or made a part of it, so that cars could drive 22. Receiving Garage
in off the street or alley directly into the garage. This garage should not be used for parking purposes but merely for the discharge of prisoners when they are brought to the police station. The jail elevator should be in such a position as to be easily available directly from this garage.
POLICE STATION -CITIES OF 3,500 ANC 7,000 POPULATION
Needs
A. General
Although a
city with 3,500 or 7,000 population requires less jail space, nevertheless, space for traffic reports and courtroom is needed,
and
it
is
most important
to
have
plan well arranged, as personnel
is
a one-story very limited.
The same requirements for circulation, isolaand public and private entrances, as
tion,
described for the larger
cities, are equally important. The prisoner booking room, jail, and general office should be arranged so that one officer can book and supervise prisoners, handle communications, and serve the public without leaving the main office. The entrance to the jail and routing of prisoner traffic must be separate from the public area traffic. There should be an enclosed, escapeproof hallway or area for conducting prisoners from the jail to the court-
room.
accommodations are limited. Cells for women prisoners, where women prisoners are rarely housed, can be used for juveniles. One cell should be capable of heavy padding for violent prisoners and should be unfurnished. 16.
Cell
with
Cells
Furniture
washbowl,
toilet,
should
be
locker
a
equipped or
cabinet
(preferably an under-bed type), a table, and a chair or stool. The cell beds should be metal,
equipped with a clean mattress, clean sheets, mattress cover, blankets, pillow, and pillowcase. The bed should have a rigid bedspring frame bracketed to the wall. The washbowl and toilet should be prison type. Dormitories should have at space per prisoner, have 1 0 ft ceiling height, and there should be at least one toilet and one washbowl for each eight inmates or fraction thereof. 17.
Dormitories
least
75 sq
ft
of floor
Tanks can be equipped with a fasbench and open toilet and urinal for prisoners. Tanks should be limited to accommodate not more than 15 men each. 18.
Tanks
tened
19. Floor Drains All the various portions of the building should contain floor drains to make it possible to flush out the floors to avoid odors.
20.
Lighting
It
is
desirable,
where possible,
that the prisoners’ living quarters be accessible
the entrance of sunlight, and the walls should be painted in light colors. Where light
to
dependent upon electrical fixtures, the fixtures should be the built-in, tamperproof type is
with tempered plate glass front for protection of the lamp. 21. Plumbing Adequate water and sewage systems should be provided. Provision for prison-
ers to obtain drinking water should be provided by the installation of recessed sanitary drinking fountains installed throughout the jail.
Bathing
available for
712
facilities
daily
use.
(showers) In
the
should
larger
MAIN
ENTRANCE
be
police
Fig.
1
Plan of police station for
city of
3,500 population. One
story, lot
48 by 74
ft,
building
2,784 sq
ft.
.
:
4
:
:
.
0
:
:
:
0
:
:
:
:
:
Governmental and Public
POLICE STATIONS
3,500 Population
B. Police Station -City of
II.
Prisoners and Jail Facilities Receiving, Processing, and Confine-
A.
3,500 or less population on on a corner street has all the needed central control but has few offices and a small
The
ment:
floor plan for
a small lot
(see Fig.
jail
2 by 25 Booking, searching room: 10 by 10 Medical examination room: 8 by
Drive-in garage:
1.
2.
1 ).
3.
The courtroom
located so as to 1. Courtroom be accessible to men prisoners, while women prisoners can be brought through the office
4.
to court.
6.
1
visitors' room in conjunction with prisoners’ waiting hall back of the courtroom. The matron's office must serve for visitors'
room
men
women; and
for
the
attorney-clerk’s
conjunction with the corridor for prisoners, must serve for visitors' room
office,
in
men.
for
8
is
Women's Jail The women’s cell for four inmates and adjacent cell for two inmates could be used for juvenile or isolation cells.
for spe-
7.
Isolation cell: One, 7 by 8 Violent cell: One, 7 by 7 Tank: 12 by 12 Dayroom: Combined with
meetings, it is planned to have a separate entrance lobby so the public need not pass through the police station foyer and disturb
8.
Toilet: In cells
3. Pantry
9.
Shower: 3 by 7
ing food brought in from outside and placed in
As the courtroom
sometimes used
is
5.
cial
Attorneys’ interview room: 9 by 9 11. Storage: Combined with janitor's
One padded
room
one two-bed cell, and a large tank are provided. The tank can serve as a dayroom in this plan. Beds could Men's Cells
be placed 3.
in
Multiuse
cell,
The multi-use
isolation
cell
with two beds can be for isolation, for two inmates, for juveniles, or, in rare cases, it can be used as a women's cell, in which latter case a matron must be called in and the examination room is for her use. The multipurpose cell could be arranged for two two-beds so that altogether six inmates could be accommodated. If beds are placed in the tank, up to ten inmates could be housed.
B.
prisoners’ property: Storage Vault 4 by 6 13. Prisoners’ waiting space to courtroom: 4 by 8 14. Pantry: 6 by 8 Separate Rooms, Facilities for Women cell:
Matron’s room: Combined examination room: 8 by 8 4. Matron’s toilet: 3 by 8 Separate Rooms for Juvenile 3.
12 by
with
Pris-
oners:
The pantry is for service and dishwashing in case meals are so arranged. It can 4.
Pantry
be used as a small laboratory
if
Use multi-use
1
III.
not used as a
pantry.
isolation cell
and Assisting Public: Receiving entrance foyer: 10 1. Separate 14
by
Men’s and woPublic toilets: men's, each 5 by 1 3. Public telephone: In foyer Combined 4. Complaint counter: with main office, traffic violations and reporting accidents IV. Police Personnel Requirements 1. Male locker room: 6 by 8 2. Toilet: Combined with janitor's 2.
the particular city has a greater maximum number of prisoners, it should be noted that the men s jail could be 5.
Possible Expansion
If
expanded into the carport space by placing the carport space farther back on the lot and building more cells on the cell side of the corridor. A dayroom in back of the tank side of the corridor could be provided.
and
Dayroom Summary
.
2.
public's vehicles, 4 (min.) for I.
General
Administration
Police
Opera-
3.
Male
(Room
or
1.
2.
3.
Conference room: Combined with courtroom 4. Cooperating officer's room: 8 by 10 Records and Clerical: 1. Central records maintenance: Combined with main office, trafpersonnel recfic records, and 3.
B
ords. 2.
Map
space:
In
C.
Communications: 1 Telephone and
D.
Training 1.
main
office
radio: In
main
Combined
with
chief’s
E
Police
of
I.
General A.
Private entrance: Yes
3.
Conference
Room and Classroom:
4.
Chief's office toilet: 3 by 8
5.
Chief’s office clothes closet: 2 by
1.
C.
Safety:
— City
The plan shown in Fig. is for a narrow site on Courtroom
E
office
Library: In chief's office
3.
Firearms range: At city sportsmen's range Supplies storage: Combined with
.
and courtroom
are provided A 4-ft wall space is needed for the intercommunication system in the office. The attorney-clerk's room must serve also as
Photographing and Fingerprinting
Darkroom:
6 by 10 Lineup or show-up: Combined with courtroom. Prisoners and Jail Facilities A Receiving, Processing and Confinement: 1 Drive-in garage: 1 2 by 24 2. Booking and searching room: 10 by 10 3.
a street corner.
officers
office
Identification
2.
office
main office
foyer
room
7,000 population
for
in
office
Classroom: Combined with court-
main
Offices
main
2.
4
of 7,000 Population 2 for
in
records
office
room with
1
C. Police Station
In
:
Combined with
Combined with main
space:
office, traffic
personnel
Public telephone Training
1.
Attorney's room: interview room VIII. Public Safety Education
Map
and
2.
D.
3.
maintenance:
records
main In 3. Mimeographing: Communications 1. Telephone and radio 2.
Police courtroom: 1 6 by 23 Clerk's office: Combined
Clerical:
Central
Combined with main
room
and the central record
Combined with shakedown
Chief's office: 11 by 14
2.
B Records and
Department
II.
Prints:
in feet):
Combined with courtroom
ventilating: Combined Heating, with boiler room Repairs: Combined with meter
main
room
Opera-
Requirements (Room or
Executive's
space sizes
Janitor s room: 6 by 10 Boiler and fans: 10 by 10
1.
office
Administrative
Police
tions:
records,
Supplies storage: Combined with
Identification :
Requirements
Facilities,
4
Storage
and
for
for
attorney's room, 9 by 9
Offices
and one
public
the
for
Estimate of Space and
of
office 3.
one
entrances, prisoners.
office
Classroom: Combined with courtLibrary:
1.
Department:
Police
in
1
the lights, heating, and ventilation for the police department are to be operated separately. The police station should have separate
Courts: 2.
2 for
(min). Location of Police Headquarters Facilities In the business district or manufacturing district. The building should be by itself if possible. If not, with the city hall. If it is combined,
recovered • stolen bicycles: Combined with meter repair, 1 2 by 24 Storage of recovered stolen prop-
repair VII.
1.
room 2.
4.
Fig.
Parking: Off-street parking area for police vehicles adjacent to the police building; 2 cars. Area required for parking cars of persons who visit police headquarters; 2 cars. Total, 4 cars
ments:
Executive's Requirements space sizes in feet): 1. Chief's office: 8 by 1 2. Private entrance
Persons
of
officers, 8 to
1.
Storage
Less than 7,000, See
plan.
supplies: 8 by 8, near vault Building Maintenance RequireVI. Police
tions:
A
of Requirements
erty
Estimate of Space and Facilities, Requirements
dishwashing.
for the privileged is provided.
Population
room 1
a pantry for serv-
Men's
V. Police Property Requirements
Summary of Requirements Population Less than 3,500. See Fig. 1 for plan Number of Persons in Police Department: Male officers, 4 1. Parking Space for police officials' cars and
for
is
For men there are two isolation Jail one padded cell, and four four-bed cells, thus housing 18 men besides those in the tank.
4.
Number
Prisoners: 1. One multi-use isolation 12 2. Shower, toilet: 3 by 8
C.
trays,
The kitchenette
cells,
12.
the tank.
Cells
tank
10.
the office at night.
2.
2.
713
2
02
4
5
Governmental and Public
POLICE STATIONS
5.
Medical examination room: Combined with booking room Isolation cells: Two, 7 by 8 each Violent cells: One, 7 by 7
6.
Group
7.
8.
each Tank: 10 by 12 Dayroom: 12 by 19
9.
Toilet
3.
4.
cells:
Four,
four
10. Attorneys’
interrogation
room:
Prisoners' waiting space adjacent courtroom: 3 by 10 17. Kitchenette-pantry: 7 by 1 18. Food storage: 4 by 7
16.
8 by 8 11.
to
Prisoners'
visiting:
Space
in
corner courtroom
bunks
12.
Matron
s
room:
by 10 by 1 prisoners' property: 7
B.
13. Storage, bedding: 7 14.
and shower room: One
in
1
5.
dayroom
Separate
Rooms
Women
for
Prison-
ers:
Storage, Vault 5 by 5 Enclosed vestibule to prisoners' waiting space: 3 by 1
One group
1.
cell:
12
by
12,
four
bunks 2.
One
3.
Shower, toilet Matron’s room: Combined examination room, 7 by 10
4.
isolation cell: 8 by 10
with
Receiving and Assisting the Public: 1. Separate entrance foyer: 8 by
Til.
ALLEY
1
Public toilets: Men's and women's: Each 6 by 6 3. Public telephone: In anteroom 4. Complaint counter: Combined with 2.
bureau and trafcounter Police Personnel Requirements: 1. Male locker rorom: 8 by 1 2. Coffee bar: Combined with traffic violations' fic
IV.
accident
reporting
kitchenette Police Property Requirements:
V.
1
.
Storage
of
recovered
stolen
bicycles: 14 by 14 2.
Storage of recovered stolen property
Building
Police
VI.
Maintenance
Require-
ments:
3.
room: 4 by 7 and fans: 8 by 14 Heating and ventilating system
4.
Electrical controls
5.
Water controls
1.
Janitor's
2.
Boiler
Courts:
VII.
Police courtroom: 7 by 30 Court clerk’s office and city attorney’s office: 8 by 8 Public Safety Education: 1. Safety education office: Combined with main office 1.
1
2.
VIII.
POLICE STATION -CITY OF 15,000 POPULATION A. Plan
The sketch plan
illustrates
how arrangements
provide for central control with public and private entrances and separated, isolated quarters for juveniles, men, and women without any necessity for different classes of prisoners to cross each others' quarters or intermingle. For 1 5,000 population or less, a plan of a one-story building is shown in Fig. 3.
6.
Room Spaces
All the necessary offices for administrative functions are provided. Offices for chief and assistant officers are accessible to the jail or to the public. The public, however, is separated from prisoner areas. The main office oversees the whole first floor with a minimum of personnel on duty at any one time. 1.
Central Offices
2.
Courtroom, Prisoners' Waiting
Room
The
court-
room has
the public entrance at one end, and at the other end the prisoners’ waiting room adjoins. In this case the prisoners' waiting
MAIN
ENTRANCE
room
is
also arranged to be used
tion with the visitors’
3.
Booking Room
down
714
2
Plan of police station for
city of
7,000 population. One
conjunc-
The booking room or shakethe jail and The interroga-
central to the men's juveniles' or women's quarters.
STREET Fig.
in
room.
tion story, lot
50
by
100
ft;
building
4,300 sq
ft.
is
room can
as needed.
also be used as a matron’s office
:
:
Governmental and Public
POLICE STATIONS
Women's
Juveniles
4.
Cells
There are
cells for
four juveniles. For the women's jail, there is a cell for four inmates and a small tank, which can also serve as an isolation cell.
who
Men's
jail
For the men's
jail
there
is
police headquarters; 1
one
General A.
two isolation cells, one padded cell, and one sixteen-bed and one eight-bed group cell with dayrooms. A maximum number of 34 men can be housed, besides those in the tank. It should be noted that Second Floor Alternate the men’s jail is on the second floor, the jail quarters are not over the juveniles' or women’s jail quarters. Intercommunication thus is im-
6. if
possible and there are no special construction problems. The second floor, however, requires one more officer on duty than would be required in the case of the one-story plan.
Communications
C.
3.
4.
Men
2.
adopted.
Summary of Requirements Population: Less than 15,000. See Figs. 3 and 4 for plans. Parking: Off-street parking area for police vehicles adjacent to the police building: 6 cars. Area required for parking cars of persons
and lockers:
toilets
1.
2. 3.
4.
5.
staff
toilets
Photographing and fingerprinting rooms: Combined with record room, 9 by 1 2 Photographic dark room: 6 by 8 Identification records: Combined with main office Storage: 6 by 6 or combined with hall lockers Lineup or show-up: Combined with
courtroom Use of Other Enforcement Agencies' Representatives (Military Office for
F.
Police, ficers): II.
Federal Agents, Parole 0 by 10, optional
Of-
1
Prisoners and Jail Facilities: Receiving, Processing, and Confine-
A
ment: 1.
8
Drive-in, 1
2.
Women
1 0 by 12 Firearms range: 1 5 by 70 Supplies storage: 6 by 6
Identification
and lockers:
8 by 10 6.
Library: Optional,
4.
E.
by 10 5.
2. 3.
Central
staff
Classroom: Combined with courtroom, 7 by 24 1
Clerical:
records maintenance, in main office, 1 2 by 18 Map room and library (accidents and crime data): Combined with officers' briefing room, 9 by 15 Old records storage: 4 by 6
with
1.
Opera-
Executive's Requirements (Room or space sizes in feet): 1. Chief’s office: 1 2 by 1 2 to 1 2 by 15 2. Private entrance: 3 by 6 3. Conference room: 10 by 10 4. Chief’s office toilet: 6 by 8 5. Chief’s office clothes closet: 2 by 4 6. Assistant chief’s office: 9 by 10 7. Chief’s secretary’s office: Combined with main record room, 10 by 17 8. Other: waiting room or public lobby: 1 5 by 20 1.
Combined
general office D. Training
Requirements
Facilities,
Administration
Police
B Records and The enclosed passage and/or stairs to the courtroom for men prisoners is provided for whether a one-story or a two-story Stairs
is
cars.
tions:
trusties,
plan
6
to
for
eight-bed group cell which can be used for
7.
3
2 cars (min.).
Estimate of Space and I.
5.
visit
Total, 9 to
3.
Meter repair room: 10 by 12
escapeproof
garage:
5 by 25
searching rooms: 10 by 12 Physician’s office and medical treatment examination and
Booking and
alley MECHANICAL VENTILATION AND SKYLIGHTS ABOVE CELLS AND MAIN OFFICE. PISTOL RANGE, OFFICERS LOUNGE AND BOILER
ROOM
IN
BASEMENT
BOOKING
L
r
JAIL CORRIDOR
2
^
2
O
v
I
O: CELL
a 2
..
DAY
2
CELL 2
^
4TTY I 4N0
JUDGE
I*- 1-
|viSiTQRS|
[q
|
Ot,
I
^
i
J-fDj
2
2
^
NERS I
POINTS j
ROOM
DAY ROOM
CELL
)
i
1
2 1
n n
SHOW UP COURT ROOM CONFERENCE ROOM
o;
1
18' * 33'
1
I
44 THIS UNIT CAN BE PLACED ON SECOND FLOOR
1
II
1
u U
1
60
(a)
Fig.
3
Plan of police station for city of 15,000 population. Building 6,000 sq
ft.
la) First floor plan, (b)
Second
floor plan.
715
23
:
:
:
Governmental and Public
POLICE STATIONS
rooms: Combined gation
with
interro-
Separate
Two, 7 by 8 each Violent cells: One, 6 by 7
6.
Group
7.
Cellblock:
8.
15 by 24 Tank: 12 by 17
9.
Dayroom: Two, 9 by 20 and 12
Isolation cells:
Two, 8 by One 10 by
cells:
1.
III.
1
24;
One
cell
4.
Public toilets: Men’s and women’s,
6.
8 by 8 each
5.
Public telephone:
6.
7.
8.
IV.
courtroom: 7 by 8 19. Kitchen: 8 by 10 20. Refrigerator: 4 by 6, optional 21. Food storage: 4 by 6 Separate Rooms for Women Pris-
Information center: Desk sergeant Complaint counter: Combined with general office, 1 2 by 18 Traffic violations bureau: Comwith complaint bined counter Traffic accident reporting counter: One 3 by 5 desk
Police
,
ments:
One isolation cell: 8 by One violent cell: 7 by 7, optional One tank: 9 by 10 One shower in tank, one in cell, 1
5.
6.
each cell Matron’s room: 10 by 14, plus 4 by 6 toilet optional toilet in
V.
Require-
room
lockers:
and
2. 3.
Closets on each floor Boiler and fuel: 14 by 16 Heating and ventilating
4.
Electrical
controls:
system
Emergency
kva electric generator unit for
Repair and construction: 12 by 15
Courts. Police courtroom: 1 8 by 33, Combined with courtroom 2. Judge's chambers: 9 by 9 3. Court clerk’s office: Combined with item 2 Police Divisional Operations A. Detective Division: 1. Office of officer-in-charge: 8 by 10, Combined with interrogation or 1.
VIII.
Gymnasium: 27 by 23, in basement Lunchroom and coffee bar: 9 by 10, in squad room in basement
assistant chief 2.
Interrogation rooms: 8 by
8,
Com-
bined with examining room B Women's (Morals) Bureau: 1. Office of officer-in-charge: 9 by 15, Combined with interrogation room C. Juvenile Division: 1. Office of officer-in-charge: 8 by 10, Combined with interrogation room D Public Safety Education 1. Bicycle licensing room: 8 by 10
Police Property Requirements
Lockers
Maintenance
Janitor's
5.
VII.
9 by 12 room Women’s locker room:
Storage of uniforms:
officers’
radio and lights
with lounge
oners:
in
1.
8
in
4.
Building
VI.
in
One locker women’s office toilet Male shower and toilet room: Two toilets, one shower combined
Two cupboards
room
Police Personnel Requirements: 1. Male employees' lounge: 10 by 12, 1. optional in basement 2. Male locker room: Ten lockers 3.
Storage of guns and ammunition: 5 by 6 Storage of police vehicles: Two cars, 20 by 24 Storage of recovered stolen bicycles: 10 by 12 Storage of recovered stolen property: Combined with storage Storage of police department supplies:
One pay phone,
3 by 3
to
5.
3. in
3.
room: Attorneys' interrogation 9 by 1 0 12. Prisoners visiting room: 8 by 8 13. Delousing room: 6 by 6 14. Laundry: 8 by 8 15. Storage, cleaning utensils: 9 by 13, combined with storage 16. Storage, bedding: 6 by 8 property: 17. Storage, prisoners' 4 by 6, or lockers 18. Prisoners' waiting room adjacent
3.
by 8
5.
Two, 4 by 6
4.
cells: 7
2.
4.
1.
2.
Separate entrance Public waiting room: 10 by 14 to 1 5 by 24
.
and shower room:
2.
Two
One shower, One toilet Receiving and Assisting Public: 1
11.
B.
for Juvenile Offend-
2.
by 20 10. Toilet in cells
Rooms
ers:
5.
4.
C.
room
in
basement
DESCRIPTION OF PLAN FOR A SMALL HALL WITH POLICE STATION
TOWN
A. Site Location
The
site location can be anyplace centrally located in town. Distances across a small town are too short to present special problems. Usually the fire department is a rural fire district with the fire station located on separate property, although it could be on the same lot. In some cases the library can be planned on the same site if the entrance is on the opposite side from the prisoners’ entrance.
B. Plans
A
plan of a small town hall
is
shown
in
Fig.
4.
C.
Room Spaces
1.
Court and Council
For a small town in a few utilities to operate, and police station is de-
Room
rural fire district, with a
combined
city hall
room can serve as a courtroom, and only one heating unit is needed. sirable, as the council
To provide for best use of City Hall Offices personnel, since the clerk-treasurer may serve only part time, the marshal's office is located to oversee the town hall's public lobby as well as the prisoners’ entrance and jail. The requirement of reporting traffic accidents warrants the office being kept open daily. 2.
(b)
Fig. 3 (corn.) Second floor
716
Plan of police station for city of 15,000 population. Building 6,000 sq plan.
ft. (a)
First floor plan, (b)
3. Offices
This small plan has an office for the
mayor or conference room, one clerk-treasurer
Governmental and Public
POLICE STATIONS
z
o MAIN
t
n
ENTRANCE
x UJ
ALLEY OR
PARKING
PARKING
Fig.
4
Small town hall with police station.
office, a
clerk,
used by the marshal and city court-council room. The recand the marshal’s office are in one
vault
and
ords room unit.
AREA
UJ cr Z>
a
and Women's Cells One two-bed isocan serve for juvenile or women prisoners, or as an isolation cell. Seldom is it needed for all such uses at the same time. 4. Juveniles'
lated
cell
5. Men S Cells The men’s jail includes the tank and two two-bed cells. Altogether six inmates,
besides those
in
the
tank,
can
be
housed.
Toilets and heating plant are included.
717
— Governmental and Public
POLICE FACILITY
SITE
SELECTION
Accessibility
From a
program standpoint, several possible
total
should be inspected for a proposed law en-
sites
forcement building. Several factors should be taken into consideration when selecting the site
garage for police vehicles may be desirable. A ramp leading from the basement level would provide adequate street access. Placing the garage and official parking facilities in the basement will reduce noise levels at shift change times and dur-
selection of a site that will provide
the
to
cessibility
maximum
ac-
community being served. The
should be as close to the centers of busi-
facility
and
ness, industries, schools, welfare agencies,
the courts as circumstances permit and in an area which can be served by public transportation.
Not only
sources, but problems
when
in
there are not tiring
and from
trips to
staffing are simplified
and complicated
daily
the facility. For prisoners
are selected to participate
who
programs of work
in
release, study release, clinical services, or other
Whenever
exterior of the building should not include win-
The parking
lot
or roof of the structure should
also be considered as a possible site for a helicop-
THE BUILDING
A
be regarded as a viable should be capable of growing with the community and the department it serves. The architect should be fully aware of the growth potential of the department and should design a facility that will meet not only the present needs of the agency, but also its police building should
and
flexible
structure.
It
future needs.
Police Function
Only
Ideally, the building should
component in
dows. The so-called ‘‘windowless" building tain considerable glass, but the glass
landing pad.
ter
possible, the
is
may
con-
positioned
in such a manner that none of the interior activities can be viewed from the exterior areas. Psychologically, glass used in this manner can completely eliminate the feeling by the staff that they are working in a windowless facility. The police building should be designed to pro-
vide services to the public as well as to
fulfill
the everyday working needs of the police. The
ample and private parking space. Properly designed landscaping, flagpoles, and identifying illuminated signs can and should be attractive and functional components of the building. structure should be readily accessible with
public
house only the police
of the criminal justice system. Except
very small communities, the building should
Horizontal Plan
A
building with the least
number
of floors
is
more
contribute heavily to the success of such pro-
be exclusively oriented to the police function. Consideration should be given to separating the police from the incarceration function and the
economical because less personnel are required to supervise it. While a multistory building may cost less in construction and be a saving in land
grams.
associated stringent design
necessary
costs, the extra outlay for administrative person-
community
The public site
activities, transportation
facility
problems can
should be easily accessible to the
and not hidden on a
with very limited street frontages. The build-
one or two of the main streets connecting both north and south and east and west portions of the city. The building should not face an extremely busy highway or through city
thoroughfare, which might
make access
into
the traffic lanes difficult.
The rather
site
than
the
jail is
Similarly,
Several
a part of the police building. judicial functions would best
the
serve the needs of the people
located
in
the
same
framers of our Constitution
and
the executive, legislative,
we
of government; therefore,
temporarily blocked. Residents can best be served by activities in
a centralized design concept.
justice
Parking should be adequate, not only for the
accommodate a
tor-court activity, staff parking area,
police
and
mo-
public
parking requirements. The parking space allocated for employee vehicles and for
off-street
police vehicles
is
branches urge physical sepa-
and
the
important when making
cost of the more desirable horizontal plan.
The horizontal design philosophy lessens the need for stairs and elevators which, when utilized, add hazard potential when moving prisoners, for bomb placement, for fire, and so on.
Human Needs law enforcement agency deals with many peohowever, they can be divided into
should reflect an atmosphere
three categories:
security,
•
imperative that a police
•
Department personnel General public
impart the sense of strength and permanence to a greater degree than other governmental structures. To the public, the police building should represent a friendly, businesslike, professional building complex. Security provisions must, of course, be incorporated into the design because of the volatility of our times; however, it is possible to artfully disguise them so that the fortress image is not the predominant feature of
•
Prisoners
of
restrained
dignity, It is
permanence,
the structure.
The police
shift
changes and removing prisoners to and from jail. In the case of a combined police/jail facility, a private jail booking entrance (sally port) and prisoner processing area, easily accessible to automobiles, should be included in the plans. In some instances, a basement-level parking
will never cease. In time, probably be far greater than the additional
year after year,
will
ple. Basically,
facility
components and
all
but to
power between
judicial
it
A
beauty, and strength. the central
location of
itself,
perfectly clear
entrances and exits
All public buildings
building
it
nel,
jail.
immediate access and egress to and from the site in the event one of the entrances might be
site
made
that there must be separation of
Exterior Design Philosophy
The
they were not
if
building as the police. The
should be provided for police vehicles to ensure
criminal
features
made
ration of the police facility, the courts,
should be accessible to two streets, one.
when
side street or on a
ing should be related to
facility
should be constructed of non-
combustible materials. The design of the building, including the exterior surfaces, landscaping, and other elements, should be planned to reduce the
number
of areas
where explosives may be hidden.
Reinforced masonry on the exterior walls and either concrete or a lightweight concrete layer on the roof, will improve the building’s resistance to
718
the feeling of being enclosed
a windowless fortress.
ing inconvenience to adjacent land owners.
the use of such re-
this facilitate
will
and eliminate
staff in
area. Additionally, the relationship of the pro-
posed building to existing governmental structures should be considered, with particular emphasis placed on the relative proximity to the existing courts, jails, and prisons. Primary consideration should be given to the
sphere that could psychologically benefit the entire
ing the conduct of daily activities, thereby avoid-
including location, available land area, configuration, and relationship of the site to major arteries and main highways that extend throughout the
•
should be of bullet-resistant material. An interior garden court could be one of the methods used to -create a quiet, beautiful, and serene atmo-
manmade
[sic]
or natural disasters.
Many
re-
Police Facility Design , Bureou of Operations and Research, International Association of Chiefs of Police,
finements to increase building safety and security can be provided at little additional cost. All or
Gaithersburg, Maryland, 1978.
most of the glass areas, both
interior
and
exterior,
Each group has specific needs in a police buildand the needs of each should be considered
ing
as they relate to the entire
Department Personnel personnel" includes
all
facility.
The term "department employees of an agency
executives, managers, supervisors, officers (both
uniformed and plainclothed), clerical, and special employees. Uniformed personnel who constitute fhe bulk of employees usually report to a central location which should include lockers, showers, and physical exercise area. A briefing room with the capacity to accommodate approximately two-thirds of the patrol force should be located near the locker rooms. A separate entrance into the building should be provided for use by police employees only.
Unnecessary mingling of police officers, the and prisoners should be avoided in the
public,
police facility.
Governmental and Public
POLICE FACILITY
The majority of persons visiting General public the police headquarters will have business only
Interior
One
at the central information center. Therefore, the
Design Features
of the basic requirements of a functional
floor plan in a
be a part of the information center operation and should be easily accessible from the main entrance. Employees in the information center can then handle inquiries and refer callers to the proper official or office. As a general rule, the building should be planned and equipped to avoid confusing the public. Offices should be plainly designated by functional titles on the doors. A conveniently placed building directory in the lobby is also an important feature that should not be overlooked. public information lobby should
modern
police facility
of internal circulation. Efficiency
is
the control
and safety
and should be allowed further access only after the need has been demonstrated. Figure 2 shows the functional relationships of the three entrances.
dic-
tate that the public enter the building through
a single entrance into a controlled lobby. The public should not penetrate beyond the lobby
The functional policy facility Space Allocation should be as flexible as possible for efficiency and economy. A flexible building is one in which
Vehicle Service Area the
the police building
done
is
police
at
facility
jail
is
located within
Fuel Island
___)
accommodate
„ Prisoner Entrance '
Prisoners should enter the building
automatic
doors
and
A
sally port
prisoner-processing
arrangement
is
Gate
provision
drive-in
should be part of the security entrance.
Fig.
Court
headquarters, special design
through a separate secure entrance. with
Motor
and/or when prisoner booking
features must be incorporated to this function.
Property Storage
Police
When
Prisoners
T
A model
shown
j
in
Employee
1.
The reader should refer to Fig. 2 to better understand the relationship of the three separate
Employee
Police
Headquarters
Entrance
Parking
employee parking, and Note in Fig. 2 the security
entrances, public parking, police vehicle parking.
feature of the gate separating the police vehicles
from public access. Whenever the police
facility
a residential area, high shrubbery and, more preferably, a masonry wall surrounding is
located
in
Public
Entrance
the police parking area should protect the adja-
cent residents from the glare of vehicle lights at Fig. 2
night.
TO
*
,
Exterior design relationship.
Public Parking
SALLY PORT
Vl*lTo*S Fig.
1
Model prisoner-processing arrangement.
719
Governmental and Public
POLICE FACILITY
is adaptable to a broad variety and the exterior walls are expandable to meet future growth needs. In some cases, interior flexibility may be attained by the installation of movable partitions which can provide necessary privacy and also may be shifted to meet future functional space needs. Partitions approximately 6 feet in height
the interior space
course, be provided sufficient office space imme-
of occupancies
diately adjacent to the chief's offices.
afford sufficient privacy without affecting light or
conditioning.
air
Private
rooms should be kept Private offices
to
make
more
supervision
occupants are tempted
and
offices
small
a minimum. difficult;
to turn their attention to
outside matters and to
engage
Figure
4
in
varying
cities of
size.
shows model layouts for conference
rooms.
sion.
Command
The chief’s executive staff should occupy offices which surround his own. Each staff office should be approximately 200 square feet in size. These staff offices could conceivably share secretarial services, e.g., one secretary for every two staff commanders. Executive
Staff
not
activity
in
Figure 3 shows model layouts for the office of the chief of police
The potential for this situalessened when the partitions forming the
strictly police-related.
tion
is
offices are glass and, in
tions
may be
less
some
instances, the parti-
than ceiling height.
and tend appearance on the part of personnel by providing an unobstructed view for supervisors. Eoch area that must be kept secure, such as places where prisoners are confined or moved, the communications center, and areas for property and evidence storage, require special design features. Permanent partitions should be used in these areas and wherever the need is justified. The building should contain large open floor areas in which a broad variety of furniture and equipment may be arranged. These areas may be subdivided with a minimum of structural or mechanical operation and expense through the use of standardized, movable, and interchangeGlass partitions
facilitate supervision
to assist in maintaining a businesslike
CENTRAL RECORDS AREA Records
The public entrance into a police facility should be primarily through a single main entranceway into a common lobby. This single public entrance should be controlled and supervised from the central
records center.
be placed entrance. The
This central records center should in
full
area for public seating, public telephones, showcases for display of exhibits, and public restrooms. The public restrooms should be constructed of materials that would limit damage to the building in the event of a concealed, incendiary explo-
view of the main
facility
location should be such that records personnel
can individually screen
all
building. Provision should
citizens entering the
be made
in
the lobby
The records area should be separated by glass from the public areas and staff access counter to ensure complete security of the entire records area.
The majority of persons visiting the police stawill have business at the records center. Therefore, a public counter should be part of the records center. The employees in the records center can then handle inquiries or refer callers to the proper official or office. As a general rule, the building should be planned to reduce the necessity of having the public wander about the tion
building
seeking
assistance.
Public
and limby separating the public lobby area from other corridors and doors that should be conited
trolled electrically.
The rated
a police facility should be decoa professional manner. Bright, warm, but
interior of in
combined with careful use of complementary accents should greet the public. Rotary records systems should enhance the appearance soft colors
of the records center as well as provide for a
able nonstructural elements.
Space can also be separated
by
effectively
counters. The counters can also serve as receptacles for file cabinets.
ADMINISTRATIVE AREA
One
portion of the police facility should be re-
served
mand
exclusively
for
staff. This staff
the
administrative
+
38
230 S/F
com-
includes the chief of police,
CITIES TO 15,000 POPULATION
planning and inspectional services commanders,
18 PERSONS 14 X 29 = 324 +66
390 S/F
and the commanders of the primary organizational entities with departmentwide jurisdiction, such as the uniformed division, criminal investigation division, administrative services division,
and
technical services division.
Chief of Police
Immediate public access to the chief of police not always necessary or desirable. Many citi-
is
zens with minor problems,
who
at
first
demand
can have their problems adequately resolved by talking to subordinate personnel. Constant interruptions of this sort would distract the chief from his primary obligations to the department. Thus, we recommend an office area that is away from the mainstream of public and staff, preferably near the rear of a one-story building or on the second floor of a two-story building. It is customary and worthwhile for the chief to have a private entrance, private toilet facility, closet, and a conference room immediately adjacent to his office. The normal space allowance for the chief’s private office should be approximately 300 square feet. The separate conto see the chief,
ference room should be large enough to seat officers
above
the rank of lieutenant,
i.e.,
a
210 +42 252 S/F
CITIES 15,000 TO 30,000
16 PERSONS 14 X 25 = 270 +54 324 S/F
QQQQQ
Du
rs.
the
staff.
common hallway
14X15=
all
Access to the conference room should be from both the chief's office and from
executive
14 X 20 = 280
12 PERSONS
+56
12X21
336 S/F
for staff use.
The chief should be provided with a private in larger agencies, an administrative officer. These two staff assistants should, of
=
252
+50 302 S/F
CITIES 30,000 TO 75,000
secretary and,
720
circulation
within the building should be controlled
Fig. 3
Office for police chief.
Fig. 4
Conference rooms.
Governmental and Public
POLICE FACILITY
functional records storage
and
retrieval
opera-
tion.
The records room, in addition to serving the be the center for collection
public, should also
and dissemination
of information to police offi-
a private counter should be provided for police officers so that they may more effectively utilize records without using the public
cers. Therefore,
area and without permitting them complete freedom of access to the records room itself. Only
personnel assigned to the records function should be permitted in the room. This recommendation is
made
to preserve the integrity of the records
and accountability
proper maintenance. area should, of course, reflect the needs and space requirements of personnel assigned to the records function. A useful guide, when in doubt as to size, is to allocate approximately 100 square feet of space for each 15 police officers in the department.
The
for their
size of a records
Because of the heavy floor weight that will be required in the records area of the building as a result of files and other equipment, structural design requires that the floor be reinforced. A model police information center is shown in
Fig. 5.
COMMUNICATIONS Dispatching Facilities
The police communications command center and its related equipment should be isolated from public contact in one of the more secure areas of the building. Other electrical and mechanical systems should also be protected to reduce the possibility of sabotage or vandalism. Most police practitioners would agree that locating the dispatching and records units in close proximity offers advantages of expediting the flow of information and makes more efficient use of personnel. This philosophy is most practical in small agencies where a minimum number of persons on a late tour of duty could conceivably handle both communications and records responsibilities. When this arrangement is necessitated by department size, we recommend that the entire records and communications area be bullet-resistant.
Radio Console
addition to radio, the dispatch
In
console should contain
all
electronic systems such
as television surveillance of the
x
3
-
warning devices, detention area audio surveillance, remote control for doors, and vehicle status
TV
monitors.
33
3 ® (V
Status Board
Status boards are devices used to
indicate the availability of field units. Such a device
Desk
detection and
CD
fire
boards, recorders, intercom, and CD
and outside
jail
of the building,
O o ST
smoke and
x
is
justified as
a dispatching aid
in
the smaller
as well as the larger departments. Switch control
Desk
pilot lights
may be
used, with indicators at each
dispatching position, on a large all
map
visible to
must be wired so that any position causes the same indica-
positions. The switches
actuation
in
tion at all other positions. Placing of pilot lights
on a large
map showing
beat boundaries
is
partic-
de ployment of large numbers of field units. Each unit’s status cannot be accurately recalled from memory, nor can time usually be taken to query a number of units to determine which is the closest to the assignment at hand. ularly valuable to dispatchers responsible for
a.
w
X
C/3
^
Cl 33
S £ 3 =
The elimination of the log keeping requirement by the FCC, which for many years required a transmission by transmission entry in a written form, has eased the dispatching burden considerably. However, the value of such a record for internal administrative purposes remains. The use of a multichannel tape recorder to fulfill this need is recommended. Space should Recording Device
Desk
Desk
be allocated for such a device when designing the communications center.
Information
Counter Complaint Operator/Dispatcher Displays
Two
types of complaint/dispatch operations are
generally acceptable, depending upon the size of a
particular agency. In the smaller departments, a single person usually can handle both
To Administrative Area Toilet
l
the complaint-reception function as well as the dispatch operation. Whereas, in the larger agen cies,
Public
Entrance
complaint processing
may
for geographical areas of responsibility.
nate approach to the latter Fig. 5
Model functional space design,
police information center.
require extensive
specialization, perhaps with operators subdivided
is
to
An
alter-
combine the
complaint operators’ and dispatchers' duties
in
721
Governmental and Public
POLICE FACILITY
9
1
6
5
10
II
9
12
II
14
10
14
2
13
I
LOG RECOROER
CONTRACT ALARM SYSTEMS CALL DIRECTOR TELEPHONE DATE-TIME STAMP 5 STATUS MAP 6 3M READER PRINTER 7 CARD SLOT STATUS SW. PANEL - W/ FUTURE 8 INTERCOM MASTER 9 FLIP CARD |0 RADIO MONITOR - RADIO CONTROL 11 INSTANT RECALL RECORDER 12 SECURITY CONTROLS - BLOG ALARMS 13 SPARE PANEL 14 CCT V MONITORS 2
3 4
COMMUNICATIONS CONSOLE DOVER TOWNSH
I
P
N. J.
Fig. 6.
one position and add personnel as message volume demands. Difficulties arise in this method, however, when the message volume would justify either a separate complaint operator and a dispatcher or two combined operators/dispatchers (or any multiple thereof). The architect and the agency consultant will have to make the decision as to individual agency needs regarding communications according to the volume of complaint traffic,
prior to the design of the
Command
command
center.
Center Supervision
The function of supervising a police communications center should not pose any unusual problems arising out of the nature of the task. The sensitive nature of the process
demands
at least constant
availability of supervision. In larger installations,
provision should be
made
for the supervisor to
monitor both landline and radio communications as they are carried on; performance of complaint operators and dispatchers may thus be evaluated to determine training
proper procedures.
A
needs and to correct immonitoring position
is
also
useful for instruction of newly assigned personnel,
and
for intercepting
and/or assisting
in
high prior-
ity calls.
conditioning,
lighting,
air
ability to
expand
room configuration, and total security from
tors.
Investigators
make
extensive and constant
potential sabotage. This area should be a com-
use of records; therefore, it is practical to place investigators as near as possible to the records
plete self-contained unit with toilet, lunch room,
center.
locker space,
facilities,
and
supervisor's area.
See
Fig. 6.
A
great number of people coming to the
police facility
do
so
in
order to confer with investi-
an important feature that must be considered when physically locating de-
gators; public access
Emergency Power Supplies
tectives.
Radio and landline communications are vulnerable to several influencing factors, the most important of which is electrical power. In the event of failure of normal power sources, the communications center should have some method of obtaining standby electrical service to the base station to insure its continued operations; therefore, the base station should be equipped with an
equipment should be capable of supporting not only all communica-
emergency power tions
source. This
equipment, but also lighting requirements command center and primary operational
for the
is
The area allocated to detectives should provide work space and a degree of privacy for each officer. Collectively, however, detectives should be in constant contact with one another. Therefore, a single spacious room is recommended to house all detectives. The room could then be divided into individual office areas by movoble
for individual
partitions.
Interrogation rooms are ahother important feature that should be located near the detectives.
Again,
intended to provide the reader with
in
the
same general
tect should provide for office unit
portions of the building. Figure 7
is
commander and
vicinity, the archi-
space for both the
_
supervisors.
Figure 8 shows a practical solution for
needed
the individual requirements
communications command center where telephone reception and dispatching are performed by the same person.
detectives to conduct their daily operation.
for a
in
all
of
order for
a visual display of a conceptual design model
Figure 9 shows model interview rooms.
UNIFORMED OPERATIONS AREA Environmental Considerations
The communications command center should be made adequate in terms of sound conditioning,
722
CRIMINAL INVESTIGATION AREA Several
when
design
features
should
be considered
allocating floor space for criminal investiga-
Although uniformed operations requires the largest number of officers, the physical space needs in a police facility for uniformed personnel are
1
Governmental and
Public
POLICE FACILITY
substantially less than those of other departmen-
*7 '
R
i
a
a
“
Entrance vestibule
.
.
.
1
1
.
Lobby, Lounge
2
1
1
1
1
Corridors
1
1
1
2
1
Offices
1
1
1
1
1
1
club rooms
Child care room
Multipurpose room
1
Storage
1
1
Service areas Toilets
=
*1,2 t Painted
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
11 11
1
1
2
1
1
2
-
1
1
1
1
1
111
12 12
2
.
rooms
Crafts
=3
1
1
Activity, class,
CO
1
1
1
2
2 1
1
1
2
1
1
Order of preference, surfaces to be kept to minimum.
Adequate public toilet facilities for women and men should be provided in a location convenient for participants in activity areas. These
is given to the particular requirements of each. For use as an auditorium, the size and type of stage and dressing rooms will depend upon whether the room will have frequent use for dramatic productions. For frequent use, a permanent stage with accessible dressing
tion
should not be located too close to the front entrance and/or out of sight of the reception desk or some other control point.
Multipurpose
rooms
is recommended. Dressing rooms can be designed for other uses provided there is adequate closet and storage space for each use. Adjacent storage space must be provided for stage properties and surplus chairs in order to
Room
A room
that can be used for dances, for informal mass activities, or as an auditorium and a banquet room can be designed to serve all those purposes satisfactorily if proper atten-
clear the
room
for
dances and similar
activi-
A
stage high enough to be seen from the a flat-floor auditorium will usually have room for some storage under it. Dollies which can easily be rolled in and out of such space save labor in setting up and clearing the room. If a portable stage is used, storage space must be provided. If games or other activities may take place in the room, there should be adequate storage for that equipment. This may sound like a lot of storage, but it must be provided somewhere and more storage can result in more use of the available floor space for program. Proximity of storage to location of use can save time and ties.
back of
effort for the
maintenance
staff
and speed up
the conversion of the space for different uses.
WOMEN
MEN
l
STORAGE
d
CLASS RM
1
CHILD
CARE
checking areas located near activities space than to have one large checkroom requiring an attendant even at times of minimum use. Portable racks within sight of the groups or supervisor may be practical and can be moved into temporary checking areas when there is unusual demand. A checkroom should not be located in a heavy traffic area dnd should have a marked one-way traffic lane when a large group is to be served. A kitchen should be located for ease of service to the large room, directly connected with it or adjacent to it. Food should not be carried a great distance or across a hall or other space where people may be congregated or passing. Such functions will not necessitate a continuous or even frequent use for the kitchen and do not require elaborate
JC .
T
1
VEST
W WORK
RECEPTION TION
(
T
I
LOUNGE
|
LOUNGE
LOBBY GENERAL OFFICE
u ~n
—
1
OFF |
MECH
Fig.
2
Oakland Branch,
ing. (O'Dell,
744
YWCA
!
refrigeration to carry over perishable foods.
OFF
of Metropolitan Detroit, Michigan. Entrance area, offices, child care.
Hewlett & Luckenbach, Architects
Checkrooms should be considered in relaroom and to other parts of the building. It is more economical to provide small
tion to the large
Branch
build-
There should be a service entrance so that deliveries can be made and waste removed independently of the main lobby or heavy traffic lanes. It should be controlled when deliveries are being made. A buzzer connection should be installed to the main office facilities
Government and Public
YWCA BUILDINGS
Fig.
3
YWCA
of Greater Pittsburgh.
Office floor, large metropolitan association. (Skidmore,
Owings and
Merrill,
Architects!
to call a janitor to take deliveries so that he will
not have to waste his time waiting for them.
Storage for dishes can be provided by cupboards that open in the dining area or are adjacent to an opening for transfer to the dining area. The size and arrangement of other kitchen equipment will depend somewhat on the kind of service planned. If it is to be catering service, the total preparation of a meal may not be done on the premises. Sufficient heavy-duty equipment should be provided for normal use, but again
not advisable to install all that would be needed for the unusual events. it
is
Smaller Activity
Rooms
Other rooms will be needed for small-group use and should be so arranged that they can be combined for different sized groups. A room that can be used for meetings of 1 50 to 200 people can be divided to form several small units. Good-quality acoustic folding partitions for dividing rooms can make the smaller units satisfactory for simultaneous use. Entrance into each section of the room must be from a hallway, so that no group will be disturbed by people passing through and so that one or more sections need not serve as a passageway. If several types of groups are to use the rooms, each group should have the equipment it requires, and the equipment adapted to several uses should be available as needed. A craft room has frequently been considered a single-purpose room, especially if, in addition to sinks, benches, and other usual equipment, the organization has a kiln or machinery for crafts. It is possible, however, to group these pieces of equipment at one or both ends of the room and shut off those areas with movable partitions that can be locked in place, thus converting the remaining area into a room for classes or other small meetings. Drying racks for craft products should be out of reach of the curious but accessible to the craftsmen. A well-organized display arrangement can offer
stimulation and new ideas to others. A similar plan can be used to convert activities space for use as a chapel or quiet room. An altar or other arrangement for worship that can be opened for use when the room becomes a chapel might be at one end. The rooms used by several groups and the special-purpose areas should be grouped to facilitate supervision of the activities and provide a variety of programs close together.
Meeting rooms, classrooms, craft and similar space should in general be located on one floor or on consecutive floors to permit ease of movement from one area to another and to limit the amount of elevator use (where there is one) and/or stair climbing. Food service is needed in relation to program activities, and building plans should provide facilities for it. A kitchen that can be used for meals for large groups should be related to the area that will be used for such affairs. Kitchenettes should be provided to serve small groups, and if a residence is to be included in the plan, cooking facilities must be furnished for permanent residents. A snack bar adjacent to a dropin lounge or recreation space may be provided. Vending machines are often included in the program, and electrical and plumbing connections should be provided in locations where machines may be installed.
CHILD CARE FACILITIES If a program is to be carried out for mothers of young children, a nursery with special lavatory facilities will be required. The proper standards are essential, both in the building arrangement and the supervision, and should meet local ordinances and health department requirements. If the space is to be used for other purposes, the special equipment will require storage space where it can be out of the way and properly protected. (See Figs. 1 and 2.)
Local ordinances dictate the space allotted per child, the maximum number of children per
room, and special facilities to be provided. An outdoor, enclosed play space adjacent to the indoor facilities
is
desirable.
HEALTH, PHYSICAL EDUCATION, AND
RECREATION FACILITIES
YWCA
planning to include HPER facila swimming pool in new building plans, or to add these facilities to an already existing building, meticulous research and care must go into choosing construction methods, mechanical, electrical, and filtration systems, finishing materials, and into designing the area for the best traffic flow and use of space. (See Figs. 4 to 6.) The operating costs of HPER facilities are rarely subsidized by the local community chest agency, and the YWCA must pay all operating and maintenance costs for these facilities out of the income from classes and rentals. Since construction costs are so high for these facilities, the design must provide for the maximum utilization of teaching-staff time and ease of maintenance and operation by the custodial If
a
ities,
is
particularly
staff.
There should be an easy flow of
traffic
from
the main lobby. Having the swimming pool visible from the lobby will attract participants. Spectator space in the natatorium is desirable if the budget allows for it. It is preferable to have the entire HPER unit on the ground floor. If this is not possible, the locker rooms and swimming pool must be on one level, and the gymnasium or multipurpose room, dance and exercise studios can be located on a different floor but with a means of access directly from the HPER lobby area. It is important to avoid cross traffic of participants in gym attire with other traffic in the main
lobby.
The HPER facilities should be so situated in the building that they can be open for rental by outside groups when other parts of the building are closed.
745
Government and Public
YWCA BUILDINGS 1
STORAGE MULTI PURPOSE
1
ROOM
12.
J
LOBBY [reception
and storage, choice of materials. Provision for handicapped people. No barriers in form of steps or narrow doorways. Provide adequate turning space for wheel-
tor's closet
y
chairs, handrails, etc.
Specific recommendations shower rooms: 1 Gang units vs. private .
I
1 Separation of wet (barefoot) dry (shod) traffic. .
traffic
and
Where coed activities and other occasions include both men and women, adequate toilets, shower, and locker rooms must be provided. The space should be designed so that it can be thrown together for use by large groups of women and girls, divided into entirely separate units, or so that a small unit can be closed off when the larger space is used as a single unit. Concentrate makeup space and hair drying equipment where it will always be available 2.
are
POOL
Coed
locker
facilities.
units have proved satisfactory, but a
-
I
for
facilities.
increasing
and
Gang
few show-
ers and dressing booths should be included in women’s locker rooms. Recommended is a U-shaped unit, with two or three dressing booths set between rows of lockers. (See Fig. 7.) Gang units can save a great deal of space. In the case of locker room remodeling, often two locker and shower units can be installed in the space formerly occupied by a single unit with private facilities. Supervision and maintenance are made easier, and costs are reduced.
facilities.
Lobby Lounge
Adequate dressing and circulation space are important. Ten to fifteen sq ft per
2. Shower rooms. These should be so located that they cannot be bypassed by persons entering swimming pool. Doors from the shower rooms must be located at the shallow end of the swimming pool. Adequate floor drains must be provided. Temperature of water should be thermostatically controlled to prevent scalding. 3. Drying room. This should be placed between showers and locker room to keep dressing area dry. Participants remove suits here and dry off before returning to lockers. 4. Lockers. Ideally, most lockers should be the long type. Some short lockers can be used if space is limited. These can be used by children. Lockers should have sloping tops to facilitate maintenance and should be set on raised, coved bases. Lockers finished in bright colors are an excellent means of providing a cheerful atmosphere. Benches can either be floorsupported between rows of lockers or cantilevered from the base below the lockers.
A
separate lounge adjacent to the locker rooms should be provided for HPER participants. A control office with a counter from which an attendant may dispense locker keys and towels, keep records, etc., should open into this room. Doors to locker rooms should be within sight of the attendant. Lounge furniture, bulletin boards, and vending machines should be provided. Access to gymnasium or other small exercise rooms should be through this space. Participants in gym attire can wait here for classes in order to relieve the occupant load in the locker rooms. Ideally, the locker room entrances can be closed off and the space used as a social lounge during recreational and social pro-
person should be allowed.
ties are
grams.
rials,
to the
women.
Determination of normal peak load of users. Estimate can be based on the number of people expected for swimming and other classes scheduled within a two-hour interval during popular program hours. This figure should determine the approximate number of lockers needed. The extent of private vs. gang facilities to be offered (depending on local community’s custom), the kind of lockers (long or short), methods of checking and control, 3.
IFig.
4
I
Bangor, Maine,
(Higgins,
YWCA, HPER
addition.
Webster and Partners, Architects.)
Elements
in
a Total
HPER
Unit
and the number of showers and toilets required by state health codes and good practice also figure in determining the size of the
Safety of program participants. Provision for storage of coats and bulky belongings. This is a factor in locker size. Lockers should be large enough to accommodate a dress hanger. If necessary, coats can be stored on racks under the supervision of the attendant. 6. Protection of participants belongings. 7. Supervision of locker rooms. This is especially important if there is a heavy empha4. 5.
'
on children's program. Method of control and dispensing keys, towels, etc., and checking valuables. Possible need for washing machine and dryer. 9. Attractiveness of area. Layout, matesis
8.
colors, lighting.
Comfort of participants. Temperature, acoustics, good traffic patterns, adequate space. 11. Ease of maintenance. Well-located jani10.
Locker
ations
lowing:
746
important considerlocker-room design include the fol-
and Shower Rooms in
locker
humidity,
5.
Toilet facilities.
Two
sets of toilet facili-
needed, one “wet" and one “dry." The wet unit can consist of a single toilet without
washbasin located off the shower room. The user reshowers before going back to the swimming pool. The dry unit is located near the locker room entrance and makeup area and contains washbasins in addition to toilets. Toilets should be wall-hung and partitions ceiling-hung to facilitate maintenance. 6. Makeup area. This is an essential area a~nd should be located out of the main traffic flow. Adequate space should be provided to accommodate large groups. Provide deep shelves at standing height and adequate mirror area. This should be located in the women's locker room but should also be available to the second locker room when both are used by women
and
girls.
Hair dryers. These should be located adjacent to the makeup area. Automatic, wall-hung dryers are recommended and should be set at 7.
I
Government and Public
YWCA BUILDINGS
Fig.
5
Orange,
New
Jersey,
YWCA, HPER
suitable heights for girls and
facilities. (Emil
women. Some
dryers should be placed in the men's locker room. Do not locate hair dryers near the shower rooms. Hair clogs the floor drains, and participants should dress before using hair
hair dryers.
Materials used in locker-room construction. The ideal floor material is nonslip ceramic mosaic tile. Unfinished concrete usually en8.
courages fungus growth and attracts dirt. If the budget is too restricted for ceramic tile throughout the locker area, it should be used in the shower and drying rooms, and a good concrete sealer should be used for the dry dressing areas. All floors must pitch to adequate drains, and hose bibbs should be provided. See sched-
Schmidlin,
Architect.
ule for recommended floor, wall, finishes. (See Table 2.) 9.
Lighting,
Heating,
and ceiling
Ventilating.
Lighting
the form of recessed, vaporproof fixtures. Illumination should be evenly distrib-
should be
in
uted over the entire area, with fixtures located over dressing spaces between rows of lockers. The recommended footcandle level is 30. Provide concentrated and flattering lighting at the
makeup
area.
designing the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning system, the locker room and shower areas humidity control is a prime factor. This area should be zoned separately. Too high a velocity of air is chilling to the wet skin. The shower and locker room temperature should be about 80 In
.
The number of offices required reflects the size and scope of the program. At minimum, the following are required: 1 Director's office This office should be located either off the HPER lounge-lobby or off an adjacent corridor. This office should be easily accessible to the public and closely related to the HPER unit. When a swimming pool is not included in the HPER unit, a staff dressing room and shower should be conOffices
.
nected to this office. 2. Pool office. A second office is needed when a pool is included. This office opens off the HPER lounge or locker-room complex and has a door opening directly onto the pool deck. This office, which should have a large sliding glass window for supervision of the
747
-
Government and Public
YWCA BUILDINGS
LOBBY
Fig. 6
Greenville, South Carolina,
YWCA, HPER
facilities.
and underwater lights and sound system, first-aid equipment, a telephone, teaching aids, and audio equipment. There should be a staff dressing and shower room opening off this room. The pool office should be large enough to pool, contains controls for the natatorium
accommodate
a first-aid cot.
Recommended
TABLE 2
Finish Schedule for
Rooms
HPER
(Charles Potter, Jr
-
Alison Lee, Architects
)
two large rooms, so that a multipurpose room usually serves for physical activities as well as large meeting, social, and food service events. The floor must be suitable for all uses and preferably should be wood. Court markings and floor sockets should be provided as required.
3. Control office for locker-room attendant, previously described.
Gymnasium
or Multipurpose
Room
afford the luxury of
Previously deter-
mined budget and program factors dictate whether there will be a regulation gymnasium or a multipurpose room. V^ry few YWCAs can
Facilities*! Walls
Floors
Ceilings
CD
CD
O)
CD
CD
O
CJ>
S £
O)
CD
O
CD
TD
CTl
CD
CD
$
CD
O
CD
TZ
-O •• ,>
co 1
i'
*'>
*
/
%
v
< E — O XQ O DGiSr-
or Open
W 3
£
12".
15'
10, 1-2
1-0 to
1-2
adjustable
—
Sliding Glass
USE and
fa-
1-0"
1-2 others
Customer
MENS and women's FURNISKtCS
1-2"
0
MIRROR
L to
0
Omit
MIRROR Pier
Sliding, glass, or
TRIPLICATE
0"
4-0"
Omit
wood
or
open shelves
ENTRANCE
to
8|l
CREDIT BOOTH Unit area con be multiplied
for
Dtp/
Stores etc Walls, partitions,
-O -O c?
WOMEN
Customer only
3-0 to 4-0'
fa to
Pier
Customer and Fitter
back to back
^
rail
O
5-0’
50
Pier
door or Curtain
May be vanops/y
Customer only
3-0’
30"
Wood to
3' fa"
Triple
door. hooks
D
MY
combined as Back
MEN
A r\d
O
Wood 4-fa fo
or open
r
fa
mirror dotted
rooms
BOOKS
4*
7-10"
10"
18
Triple
for adjoining
LIQUOR
Women's
1-2"
10" to
and
mirror
to
SHOES
CT
adjustable
f
P.er_
w ¥¥
Womens Rm
for
fa
average
PITTING and DRESSING RMS
“ j~
fo
average
Sliding Glass
Entrance, Vanity table
0"
Mens
Staples
1- fa"
3-0"
0
3
HEIGHT
4HATS
GROCERY
In units
back, of four
around
posts, etc
to
/*
BOILER IOC
a
DESK
‘
o
SCHEMATIC PLAN
ment work areas
TOILETS 65
(for is
pressing
and
may be
omitted
(Fig.
PRESSING UNIT Vacuum steam unit: Pressing
and cleaning and boiler-room
repairs)
sent out, cleaning
19).
2' 6'
5'-9"
machine:
9"
5'
'
NOTE - PLAN MAY BE SEMI-CIRCULAR OR RECTANGULAR.
BOARDS.
PLAN MAY BE
CUSTOMERS ARE NOT APT TO DISTURB A SYMMETRICAL DISPLAY, SO GOODS ARE PLACED AT RANDOM
OR RECTANGULAR
/
SHFIF SUPPORTS - SHOULD B£ CUT BACK. FAR ENOUGH TO ALLOW UNBROKEN DISPLAY OF GOODS.
UPPER. SHELF
LOWER. SHELF
BOTTOM SHELF - ENCLOSED BASE - PRICE TAG MOULDINGS
DETAILS
- DOTTED LINE INDICATES IMPORTANT AREA FOR SMALL ARTICLES OR FOR MERCHANDISE
NOTE
SUBJECT TO ’IMPULSE
6UYINO*>
r-6
ELEVATION
ELEVATION
tumble display
SECTION
CHECK-OUT COUNTER.
END DISPLAY
NOTE- UNIT
IS
SYMMETRICAL ABOUT 4 LENGTH OF UNIT AND SPACING OF SUPPORTS VARIES
CAKE NOTE VZ
824
m
-
SHELVES
SHELVES MAY BE
TH ICK.
PLYWOOD
BREAD SHELVES NOTE '/?’
-
SHELVES MAY BE
THICK.
PLYWOOD
HALF
-
SECTION
SUPER- ISLAND
SECTION
FRUIT £ VEGETABLE BINS
Commercial
BANKS
New bank merchandising systems have been followed by a new bank architecture which no longer needs to follow the old idiom that a bank must retain its aloof dignity. Stability and strength are still to be preserved in the image of the bank, but not to extremes. Bankers of today have recognized the increased mobility of the nation and the financial needs of the average homeowner, and in combining the two have arrived at a new expression and image for the bank. In projection of future trends, these bankers indicate that the bank of the next decade will blend excitement and attraction with dignity and a modern feeling of solidity. “The banks will be made more inviting through the further use of glass, color, and art; and by offering their and through services more conveniently; increased point of contact at the street and
second
1
bank is for money only, image is concerned with along with regular banking
the old idea that a
especially public
when
activities
its
activities.
The place in which the bank's transactions take place should be attractive, friendly, and (1) unimposing; a minimum obstruction between the customer and the bank's representatives is a must. However, before any design requirements can be made, the building requirements (both personnel and departmental) must be firmly established and the basic philosophy of banking operations and building design agreed
upon.
that the
allow
Banking, vol. 56, pp 57-58, February, 1964
f.
public
spaces surrounding them easy circulation of the
g.
Loan officers and others who have customer
(3)
direct contact with the
should be readily available. Check-writing desks should be placed so as not to block circula-
(4)
h.
especially of the lineup front of the tellers. Tellers are usually located at one side
space
b
of the is
in
bank
c.
/.
to allow for expansion. This
usually considered to be the most
flexible of
all
schemes.
platform. This should provide open space for contact officers, cubicles for collection officers, and Officers'
offices
for
the
commercial loan
installment
loan
and
A conference
officers.
room should be provided in this area unless the need warrants more than one. d.
Access
to
the
should
be
provided
Access
to the
safety
money
deposit for
vault
customers.
vault for tellers
should be provided. Operations. This is the department that makes sure the bank is run on a steady, professional basis. It takes care of all the clerical work required to run the bank and keep its records in order. a. Bookkeeping department. This should be in close proximity to tellers, since this is where the tellers receive and give all the information they need. b. Proof department. This is not accessible to the public. It can be separated from the other areas, but should be fairly close to the data processing
3.
Data processing area. Special air conditioning is required here. False floors are recommended to house
e.
mail,
services
windows
It is here that trusts, probates, accounts, etc., are put in effect and carried out. This area also needs a lawyers' department. Auditorium/meeting room able to seat j. 200 to 300. This room is mostly used by the public and is often loaned rent free. Rest room facilities, a stage, storage space, and coffee bar should be included. This room should be thought of as an all-purpose room. In addition to serving as a meeting room, it will facilitate the training of bank personnel. Executive suite. Usually includes offices for the senior vice-presidents, board members, and president plus all the personnel they need to continue their business. A conference room and board of directors' meeting room are re-
Buildings.
It
is
the duty of this depart-
spaces in the building owned by the bank. department. This department Legal keeps the bank's legal business in order. A library/conference room is usually included in this area. Data processing. This department helps to facilitate and process the bank's checking, payroll, operations, and other procedures. Mail room. The mail room usually contains the addressograph, microfilm equipment, duplicating machines, and other equipment necessary to run this operation. This area should be located near a service yard or elevator and in conjunction with the printing/purchasing department. all
5.
6.
and
other various required by the individual situation. The mail room is usually located in close proximity to the proof department. Fireproof records vault, to service proof, trust, and bookkeeping departments. This does not have to be adjacent to all three, but access must be provided for all three.
minor
walk-up tellers. These are an essential part of a bank. Their design should be carefully considered with regard to flow of traffic and security. Trust department. This is one of the bank's major services to the public. and
Drive-in
ment to maintain the physical building, keep records, and collect rental fees for
the electric cables. Clerical,
vault, fireproof. This provides boxes for the storage and safekeeping of customers’ valuables. Coupon booths of minimal size and a conference room large enough to hold 10 to 20 people should be provided. This includes General services. lounge, snack employees’ toilets, bar, mechanical equipment, maintenance, and PBX.
quired. 4.
area. c.
Safety deposit
teller
tion,
2.
d.
Public spaces a. Lobby. This must be easily accessible to the public. It contains reception/ information, loan officers, tellers, and check-writing desks. If located on the lower level or
for
public.
DESCRIPTION OF SPACES 1
recommended
conveyance to the lobby. Tellers should be located so that they are easily accessible and so
(2)
'
through drive-in facilities. The innovation of the drive-in and walk-up window recognizes today's informal, mobile living and extends the bank's services to make them more attractive and more convenient to the public. Elements that remain open after regular banking hours, such as a meeting room, savings department, and safety deposit vault, serve the needs not only of the customer of the bank but of the general public as well. Flexibility, then, becomes a key word in bank design. The bank of today cannot subsist under
floor of a building, escala-
tors are
as
7.
825
Commercial
BANKS
INSIDE
I
CLEAR WIDTH 4 7"
V
24
24*5
AISLE
emergency VAULT
r
U
}-T7 |
VENTILATOR VAULT PLAN 1.
-
A
(8'
112 sq
2.
20
3.
8
ft
W
x
14 D x 8 H INSIDE)
d
for s
ft
for lockers
.
VAULT PLAN
C
-
W
(8
14'
x
D
x 8
H INSIDE)
12 sq
ft
inside floor areo.
2
16
in.
ft
for
3
8
lin.
ft
for lockers.
1
boxes
ft
n
1
VAULT
ventilator
inside floor area
lin. 1
•EMERGENCY
bank vault DOOR
1
I
s.
d
boxes.
1 The above plans are recommended for single-aisle vaults up to 14 inside clear widths. Interior vault dimensions should be established in accordance with individual requirements and the emergency vault ventilator should be located through a convenient wall area that is exposed inside the building. Location of the vault alarm control cabinet is designed [s/c] by “A” and should be recessed in the vault wall when it interferes with the removal of the bond boxes. When the vault width is 14' or more, refer to double- or multiple-aisle vault plans. (Mosler Safe Co.)
Fig.
VAULT PLAN
-
D
(14
W
x 14
D
x 8
H INSIDE)
sq. ft
inside floor area
26
lin.
ft
for
12
lin.
ft.
for lockers.
1.
196
2. 3.
s.
d
boxes.
VAULT PLAN 1
2 3.
-
E
(14
224 36
sq. lin.
ft
12
lin
ft.
ft
The above plans are recommended for double-aisle vaults from 14' to 16 inside clear widths. dimensions should be established in accordance with individual requirements and the emergency vault ventilator and emergency door should be located through a convenient wall area that is exposed inside the building. Location of the vault alarm control cabinet is designed [s/c] by “A." When planning vaults with three or more aisles, refer to the multiple-aisle bank vault plans. (Mosler Safe Co.) Fig.
2
Interior vault
826
W
x
16 D
x
8
H INSIDE)
inside floor area for for
s.
d
boxes.
lockers
Commercial
RESTAURANTS, EATING PLACES, AND FOODSERVICE FACILITIES
By LEIMDAL H.
KOTSCHEVAR
and
MARGARET
E.
TERRELL
SPACE REQUIREMENTS
Dining Area
Adequacy of space will influence building and operating costs and efficiency. When space is too small, labor time and effort are likely to increase and the volume and quality of output decrease. When it is too large, building and maintenance costs are excessive. Decisions pertaining to space allowance may be strongly affected by the limitations of investment funds and available space. Ample space is sometimes provided by means of low-
Space
cost materials and equipment of such inferior quality that they have short and unsatisfactory service life. In other instances, space is restricted to a point where it prohibits profit-
volume or the best utilization of labor. Space allowances in relation to investment should be balanced in terms of (1) proposed permanence of the facility, (2) acuteness of need for the specific operation, (3) essentials for operating efficiency, (4) desirable standards in terms of appearance, sanitation, and good quality of production and service, and (5) immediate and future costs, depreciation, upkeep, and maintenance. Facts peculiar to the particular establishment should be used as the basis for determining space needs. Requirements will vary for facilities of a given type and volume. Location; type of operation; clientele; frequency of deliveries of supplies; kind of food used, such as fresh, frozen, or canned; and the completeness of processing to be done will cause variation in production and storage requirements. The policies of those in charge will have an influence. Certain general information, such as numbers to be served, turnover, arrival rate, and type of service, will be helpful able
deciding dining area needs. Study is required to clarify immediate and future needs in food production. Choices should be made between meat cutting or portion-ready meats, a baking section or use of commercially baked products, and the use of If unprocessed versus processed foods. enlargement is probable, studies made before the building is planned as to how space may be added and how the initial plan should be designed to minimize ultimate cost, will be in
helpful. It is well to block out space allowances according to functions that the facility is to area requirements in perform. Calculate terms of: (1) volume and type of service, (2) amount and size of equipment to be used, (3) number of workers required, (4) space for
needed supplies, and (5) suitable traffic area. The dining area location and space allowance are usually determined first, the production areas next in terms of specific relationship to the dining area, and the other sections as required to these. Planners should be careful in accepting general space recommendations. There are many variations.
Food Service Planning, John Wiley & Sons. 967
New York
1
ages,
for dining areas is usually
based on the
number of square feet per person seated times number of persons seated at one time.
the
The patron's size and the Space Requirements type and quality of service should be considered. Small children may require only 8 sq ft for a type of service in which an adult would need 1 2 sq ft for comfort. A banquet seating allowance might be as little as 10 sq ft per seat and that for a deluxe restaurant as much as 20 sq ft. The amount of serving equipment in the dining area and lineup space will influence needs. Lost space must be considered. The diner's comfort should govern allowance. Crowding is distasteful to many people. is likely to be tolerated more readily by It youngsters than by adults. It is more accept-
able in low-cost, quick-service units than in those featuring leisurely dining. Both young and old enjoy having sufficient elbow room
and enough space so that dishes of food and beverage are not crowded. Place settings for adults usually allow 24 in. and for children 18 to 20 in. (Table 1).
and condiments may measure square and 36 to 38 in. high. The
ice, butter,
20 to 24
in.
1
Square Feet per Seat Used
for
Various Types of Food Operations
Type of operation
Square
feet per seat
16-18
Cafeteria, commercial
36 or 42 in. square. Small tables, such as 24 or 30 in. square, are economical for seating but are uncomfortable for large people. They are only suitable in crowded areas for fast turnover and light meals. Tables having common width and height allowing them to be fitted together will give flexibility in seating arrangements. These are particularly good for banquette or cocktail-type bench seating along a wall. Tables for booths are difficult for waitresses to serve if they are longer than 4 ft. The width of booths including seats and table is commonly 5% ft. A lunch counter will have a minimum width of 16 in. and a
a table
12-15
industrial
9-12
Cafeteria, school lunchroom
College residence, table service
12-15
Counter service
18-20 15-18
club restaurant
Table service,
minimum eating
11-14
Banquet, minimum
10-11
All of the areas in a dining room used for purposes other than seating are a part of the square footage allowed for seating. This does
waiting
24
to
30
in.
The
linear feet
make maximum use of space and reduce travel. ft will be required Space in depth of 8% to 1
1
vide 3 to 4
ft
of public aisle,
2%
ft
for aisle
space for employees. A width of 4% ft is- desirable where employees must pass. Calculate aisle space between tables and chairs to include passage area and that occupied by the person seated at the table. A minimum passage area is 8 in. between chairs and, including chair area, tables should be spaced 4 to 5 ft apart. Aisles on which bus carts or other mobile equipment is to be moved should be sized according to the width of such equipment. The best utilization of space can often be arrived at through the use of templates arrangement or scaled models. Diagonal of square tables utilizes space better than square arrangement and yields a more troublefree traffic lane. Lanes that pass between backs of chairs are likely to be blocked when guests arise or are being seated. Table heights in schools should be chosen for the comfort of children. In units patronized by many grades a compromise height will be needed between the 30 in. normally used for adults and the 24 in. suitable for children, or two sizes may be used in different sections of the room. A table length to seat four, six, or 1
Table service, hotel,
include
of
are calculated on the basis of 20 to 24 in. per seat. The maximum area best served by one waitress is generally 16 ft of counter. This will give eight to ten seats. U-shaped counters
for every linear foot of counter. This will pro-
Cafeteria, college and
not
for a
small enclosed room to that of a screened section measuring approximately 8 to 1 0 ft long by 27 to 30 in. wide by 6 to 7 ft high. Table size will influence patron comfort and efficient utilization of space. In a cafeteria, for example, where patrons may dine on their trays, it is important that the table be of adequate size to accommodate the number of trays likely to be there. Four trays 14 by 18 in. fit better on a table 48 in. square than on
maximum width TABLE
from that
size of central stations varies
areas,
guest
facilities,
cloakrooms, and other similar areas. Excessive loss or use of space for other than seating in the dining area will, however, increase needs. Structural features of the room should be considered. Width and length of the room, table and chair sizes, and seating arrangements affect capacity.
Service stations may be estimated in the proportion of one small one for every 20 seats or a large central one for every 50 to 60 places. The advisability of having a central serving station will be influenced by the distance of the dining area from the serving area. It is of special value when production and dining are on different floors. Plumbing and wiring and whether supplies are delivered mechanically will influence location of the stations. Small substations for silver, dishes, napery, bever-
eight
is
Number
preferable to longer ones. of
Persons
Allowance
The
number
of
be seated at one time is the second point of information needed for calculation of the dining room size. The total number of seats required at one time, multiplied by the space required for each seat, will give the total number of square feet needed in the
persons
to
827
Commercial
RESTAURANTS, EATING PLACES, AND FOODSERVICE FACILITIES dining area. The number of times a seat is occupied during a given period is commonly referred to as “turnover.” The turnover per hour, times the number of seats available, gives the total number of patrons who can be served in an hour. If peak loads, or number to be served at one time, are known, the number of seats required can be estimated. Turnover rates tend to vary, for they are influenced by such factors as the amount of food eaten, the elaborateness of the service, and the diner's time allowance. A breakfast meal of few foods may be eaten more quickly than dinner, and a simple fare faster than a many-course meal. Turnover is quickest in dining rooms where food has been prepared in advance for fast service and where patrons serve themselves and bus their soiled dishes. The turnover time is speeded up 10 percent by patrons removing their soiled dishes so that tables are quickly available for other guests. Deluxe service for leisure dining, involving
removal and
placement of several courses, takes the longest time. Although specific turnover may vary from 10 minutes to 2 hours, actual eating time is normally 1 0 to 15 minutes for breakfast,
30
to
1
5 to 20 minutes for lunch,
40 minutes
for dinner.
The calculation of occupancy of seats in a room must take into consideration a certain percentage of vacancy, except where a given number are seated at one time accordassignment. In table-service dining been estimated as 20 percent of total capacity, in cafeterias from 12 to 18 percent, and for counter operations 10 to to
rooms
this has
12 percent. Many factors influence this percentage, such as patrons arriving at different times, irregular rate of turnover, and reluctance to share a table with strangers. The table sizes used in the dining room will affect occupancy. It is often desirable to provide for groups varying from two to eight, with a predominance in most dining rooms of those for two people. The “deuces” may be of a size and shape that can be put together to form tables for larger groups. In metropolitan areas where many tend to dine alone, wall bench-type seating and tables for two with a center ridge or line denoting space for one have been used successfully. Chairs with a “tabletarm” that will hold a tray have been used for fast turnover in crowded areas. The utilization of seating capacity tends to be greater for cafeterias than for table service. The patron may spend 25 to 50 percent of the time while seated at the table waiting for service. The cafeteria diner may begin eating as soon as he is seated. One cafeteria line can serve four to eight patrons per minute
depending on
(1) the speed of the servers, the elaborateness of food selection, (3) convenience of the layout, and (4) the type of patrons. At these rates, 240 to 480 patrons (2)
need to be seated within an hour. If the turnover rate is two per hour, then from 120 to 240 seats will be used. However, if 15 percent of the total capacity at the peak period remains unfilled, then between 140 and 280 seats will be required. An additional 14 to 28 seats or 10 percent would be needed if the patrons do not bus their soiled dishes. Patronage estimates for facilities of different types may be guided by the number of persons in residence, enrollments in a school, an will
industry's payroll, the membership of a club, or the amount of traffic in an office or shop-
each case a certain percentage may normally be expected to dine in the facility provided. The percentage will be influenced by such factors as its location in relation to other facilities, the patron's buying power, ping area.
828
In
The patronage estimate
for a college cafete-
should take into consideration the number of students who live at home, are members of a live-in group, such as an organized house, ria
600 men has an overflow room seating 100, which it uses only at dinner. The night meal is not only larger but the men dine in a more leisurely fashion. The room is available for serving other groups at breakfast and lunch. Commercial restaurants located in shopping or office areas often have a heavier demand noon than at the dinner hour. Rooms used
the number of other dining facilities available on or near the campus. A college residence providing table service may have to allow a seating capacity that is 1 10 percent
at
occupancy if a policy exists for having “special guest” occasions and seating all at one time.
require
and
of
An
lunchroom may serve as few as 25 percent and as many as 90 percent of the
noon may be closed provide space for private dinner parties. Entrances to these rooms should not
for general patronage at at night or
room.
passage through the main dining Convenience for special service is
important.
industrial
payroll. Clues to probable
patronage may be
drawn from such factors as nearness
to other
eating facilities, wage rates, type of work, prices to be charged, convenience, quality,
and attractiveness. The attitude of management toward the lunchroom may affect patronage also. Pride in providing a good service for the industrial family as opposed to a take-itor-leave-it attitude tends to win favorable response.
The
and
dining
ing
the price plan (on the basis of subsidy or profit), patron’s mealtime allowance, and convenience of the location.
of
size
a
dining
room
in
a
hospital
should be determined as to whether it is to be used for employees, patients, or guests, or any combination of these. The type of hospital and the number of ambulatory patients should also be considered. The type of hospital will also influence the number of personnel employed. The ratio of personnel to patients will vary from 1 to 3, depending on how much special care is required or how much teaching and research are done. Good food and reasonable prices will attract a high percentage of those eligible to eat in the facility. School lunch participation varies 25 to 75 percent and a good percentage for planning is 60 to 75 percent of enrollment. Where prices are low, the food good, meal selections appealing, and the food service carefully integrated with the educational program, the percentage will be high. Banquet seating requires planning because
maximum
seating potential
means maximum
wide are popular. These are obtained in varying lengths, but 72 and 96 in. are commonly used. The spacing for the legs should be such as to allow for comfortable seating when the tables are joined end to end and place settings are laid on profits. Folding tables
30
in.
24-in. centers.
Restaurant operators should consider space relation to patronage volume essential for a profitable business. Labor, food, and operating costs must be met and a profit realized that covers risk-bearing effort expended and return on investment. Essential income is weighed in the light of probable patronage and probable average check. The number of seats provided in planning must cover this need. in
Flexibility in seating capacity is often desir-
do not like to be crowded nor do they enjoy the lonely experience of being seated in a huge area occupied by only a few. Sparse patronage creates an impression of poor popularity. Separate rooms, folding doors, screens, or other attractive devices can be used to reduce size of an area during slack periods. Sections left open should be those easiest to serve. Balconies, back rooms, or other less desirable space can often be used for overflow numbers that occasionally require
able. People
Production Areas
A frequently used rule for allotting space for the kitchen is that it should be one-third to onehalf the area of the dining room. It has been found unsatisfactory, however, to go by a set space allowance for this area. Detailed study of space allocations leads to the conclusion that percentages in relation to the dining area are “completely unrealistic and unreliable.” An analysis of specific needs is required. Many factors influence space requirements, such as: 1. Type of preparation and service 2. Amount of the total production done in the unit
Volume
3.
in
terms of the number of meals
served 4.
of foods offered in the menu Elaborateness of preparation and service Amount of individual service given, as in
Variety
5.
6.
a hospital tray service 7.
Seating and service plan, whether on one
floor or
many
The cost labor
is
of providing space,
equipment, and
sufficient to merit careful calculation
of the best type of operation before planning.
New products on the market, new cooking methods, and new equipment available should be evaluated. The use of preprocessed products
in
many metropolitan areas has made
a
pronounced change in the amount of space allotted for bake shop, meat cutting, and vegetable
preparation
areas.
Where
portion-cut
meats are readily available, it is questionable whether even a large establishment can afford to equip and provide skilled labor for a butcher shop. The use of large quantities of frozen foods affects storage needs. The cost and quality of market products, their availability, and the frequency of deliveries are all to be considered. Variety in menu selection and elaboration of foods tend to increase space needs in work areas and storage. Small amounts of numerous items do not permit stacking and bulk packaging. Elaboration of food often involves individual portion treatment, with individual casseroles, for example, as compared to bulk steam table pans. A hospital food service requiring many special diets serves as a com-
mon example
of
menu
variety
and individual
treatment imposing special space requirements. The equipment provided will affect the space needs. Garbage and refuse, for example, may require a sizable area for storage awaiting pickup. Disposal units for food garbage, incinerator for burnable refuse, and a crusher for tin cans will greatly reduce the amount to be portion
Frequency of garbage collection mize the space needs.
held.
will mini-
many dining room need for more seating at others. This may be due
Structural features of the building may influence the utilization of space. The shape of the kitchen, location of ventilation and elevator shafts, support columns and partitions
increased numbers or different turnover rates. A residence cafeteria serving
should be considered in relation to an efficient layout for work. The location of entrances and
service.
A common experience operations
is
one meal than either
to
the at
in
5
Commercial
RESTAURANTS, EATING PLACES, AND FOODSERVICE FACILITIES side by side. A height of 34 in., commonly used as a working height, should be evaluated in
good flow of traffic, window placement, suitable space, and relationship of sections need consideration. Eliminate partitions whenever possible; this will reduce space needs and also permit easier supervision of production areas. Kitchens serving a smaller number require a larger square footage per meal than those serving a larger number. The following data used for industrial cafeterias show the rate at which space needs per meal tend to decrease as the number served increases (Table 2). exits for a
TABLE to
2
Variation
in
Space Needs
terms of specific work done and equipment used. Aisle space should permit free, easy movement of essential traffic. The minimum width for a lane between equipment where one person works alone is 36 and 42 in. where more than one is employed and where workers must pass each other in the progress of work. Where mobile equipment is used, 48 to 54 in. are recommended. At least 60 in. are needed for main traffic lanes where workers regularly pass each other with mobile equipment. If workers or equipment must stand in the lane while working, appropriate space should be allowed for this. Thought should be given to space for doors opening into an aisle and for handling large pieces of equipment, such as roasting pans, baking sheets, and stock pots. Main thoroughfares should not pass through work centers. Compactness is essential for step-saving. It is well for the work centers to be in close proximity to main traffic lanes, with
Relation
in
Numbers Served Square feet
Variaticn
per meal
Meal load
in
square feet
500-1,000
100-200
5.00
200-400
4 00
800-1,600
400-800
3.50
1,400-2,800
2,400-3,900
800-1,300
3.00
1,300-2,000
2.50
3,250-5,000
2,000-3,000
2.00
4,000-6,000
3,000-5,000
1.85
5,500-9,250
easy access to them. It is important both to avoid distraction from outsiders passing through work centers and to conserve space. Work centers at right angles to traffic lanes are efficient (Fig. 1). The percentage of floor area covered by equipment varies according to production needs and the type of equipment used A satisfactory layout may claim less than 30 percent of total space for equipment while work areas,
Planners are often asked to make estimates needs before having an opportunity to make policies or detailed plans for operations. Figures that will be found useful in making such estimates are given in Table 3. These figures pertain to average kitchen areas found in different types of food facilities. Their use is to be regarded as tentative and to be measured carefully in terms of specific needs. The square footage given is to be multiplied by the maximum number of meals estimated per hour of service, in order to find the total space requirement. After production policies have been established, work areas may be blocked out in terms of space
and space around equipment for easy operation and cleaning may require 70 percent or more. For hospital production and service areas, 20 to 30 sq ft per bed is suggested. The need is reduced as the number of beds increases — approximately 30 sq ft per bed for a 50-bed, and 20 sq ft per bed for a 200-bed hospital. This allowance does not include major storage traffic lanes,
areas, dining rooms, floor serving pantries.
equipment needs and the number of workers required to do the work in a section. Linear space, depths, and heights for work centers should be controlled in terms of average human measurements. This will include the reach to and grasp of material or equipment used in working. The length and width of the work table is adjusted in terms of the amount and size of equipment that will rest on it during the progress of work. The linear measurement will vary in terms of the number of workers using it at one time. The width of the table may be 24 to 30 in. of the
facilities,
Space allowance of serving areas should be adapted to the needs of the specific facility. The menu, organization of work, and number served will influence size. The type of service will also be influential in dictating space needed. In cafeterias the counter length should be regulated by the variety and volume. Excess space partially filled is unattractive, but crowding is also undesirable. An estimate that may be used for allotting width is 14 ft. This allows for 4 ft as patron lane space, 1 ft tray slide, 2 ft counter width, 4 ^ ft for workers, and 2% ft for back bar. The size of the tray should dictate the width of the tray slide. The average length of counters in college residence halls and hospitals is found to be 30 to 32 ft, while those
Square Feet of Kitchen Space per Meal
for
Estimated
Food
Facilities of Different
maximum meals
200-400
400-800
5-5.0
5. 0-4.0
4 0-3.5
Hospitals
18 0-4.5
12.0-4 5
Hotels
18.0-4.0
Type
of facility
Industrial
200 7.
lunchrooms
Lunch counters
or less
7.
5-3.0
7.
5-5.0
4. 0-3. 2
7.
5-2.0
2. 0-1.
Railroad dining car
Type
1
per hour
800-1,300 3.
5-3.0
1,300-7,500 3.0-1 8
1.0-4.5
10.0-4 0
8 0-4 0
6.0-3 0
4 0-3.0
4 0-3 0
5-2.0
3. 0-2.0
2 5-1.7
6
5. 0-3.0
5.0-3 0
3 0-2 0
2 5-1.6
2.0-1 6
3.
1.6
0-4.0
Restaurants (service)
7.
School lunchrooms
4.0-3 3
ft.
establishing the number of lines required. Hospital service space will depend upon whether central or floor service is used, trays are set up in serving pantries, and modified diets are set up in line or in a diet kitchen. Space must be allowed for bulk food trucks, tray trucks, small tray carts, or special dispensing units used. Short-order units where food moves directly from production to the consumer require the least service space. The need for an intermediate station is eliminated. Step-saving compactness saves space. The units requiring the most space are those furnishing elaborate or highly individualized service. in
Receiving and Storage Areas
and Size
Cafeterias
or
Serving Areas
unless dishes or food containers are to rest at the back of the table. Tables 36 in. wide are preferable when the back of the area is used for such storage. Where two workers work opposite each other, a table 42 in. wide may be used. A work area of 4 to 6 lin ft will be within convenient reach of the average person. Tables 8 to 1 0 f t long are used if two people are working
TABLE 3
employee
school lunchrooms average around 1 5 to 20 Some commercial cafeteria counters may be 70 to 80 ft long, but counters over 50 ft long are frequently considered inefficient. Twenty feet is usually thought of as a minimum but, under special conditions and where a limited menu is served, 6 to 8 ft may be sufficient. The trend is toward shorter counters with mobile serving units or dish holders set at right angles to the counter. Smoother service and greater speed are achieved. Counter height may be set at comfortable levels for workers and patrons. Schools may have lower counters so that children may see the food and push their trays along a slide as they are served. For little folk, 28 to 30 in. is desirable, with counters narrow so that servers may reach over to assist a child. A solid tray slide tends to result in fewer accidents than those made of bars or tubing. Plastic trays measuring 9 by 1 2 in., compartmented, and of pastel colors are popular. Slides for these may be on the servers' side of the counter for ease of service and to eliminate spillage or accidents. The child picks up the completed service at the end of the line. Some planners use, as a rough guide, one counter or line for every 250 to 300 patrons served, but arrival rate, speed of service, and turnover are more reliable factors to consider in
5. 0-3.
6
3.3-2 2
5. 0-3.
Space allocation for receiving and storage must be based on specific needs. The volume and type of items received and stored should be considered. Although the average operation may find a dock 8 ft deep and 1 2 ft long sufficient for receiving items, this would not be sufficient for a large one. The space requirement in square feet for food storage for 30 days has been calculated by some as approximately one half the total served or, if ,000 are served, 500 sq ft may be used as a tentative figure for total food storage needs. Cases of 6/10's stacked 6 cases high on flat trucks will have a bearing weight of approximately 250 to 300 lb per sq ft. Skid sizes should be 3 by 2% ft by 8 to 2 in. high. Where heavy items, such as 10-gal cans of milk, are stored, bearing weights may be increased. One case of 6/10's, 24/2' £'s, or 24/2's weighs approximately 50 lb and occupies cu ft. 1
1
/
1
Common Storage needed to serve for one month is cases of 6/10's
The volume of canned food 100 persons three meals daily estimated at approximately 45
or equivalent. The maximum stack height will be 8 or 9 cases or approximately 72 in. Accessibility of items that differ, as well as volume, will govern the number of stacks needed. A total of 3 cu ft per stack is estimated to include floor space covered by a case of canned food, plus a share of aisle space One thousand cases piled eight high in 125 stacks will require 375 sq ft or a storage area approximately 20 by 20 ft. Storeroom aisles may be as narrow as 36 in., but 42 or 48
829
Commercial
RESTAURANTS, EATING PLACES, AND FOODSERVICE FACILITIES mated Employee
Manager's
facilities
office
Guest facilities
Employee
Linen and
Time dining
paper
1
‘
recorder
storage
L
Common
Fountain
r*"
storage
Bake shop service 1
1
1
'
>
1
i
1
1
i ! i I 1
Delivery
T>
Refrigerator
Meat
yard and
">1
receiving
preparation
Dining
Cook’s
and frozen
i
Serving
i
area
unit
storage
1
area
i
i
rooms and catering
i*
i
Short order
Salad and Vegetable
sandwich preparation
side and done and
unit
Ut-
washing and
storage
storage
Cleaning supplies
>
washing
Sanitation Areas closet
1
Flow diagram showing functional relationships.
are preferred. Wider aisles may be required trucks are used. A 3 -ft skid on a hydraulic jack needs maneuvering room. If rolling bins or garbage cans on dollies are used for storage, plan location for these. If cans or bins are under shelves, adjust height of bottom shelf to clear and allow for work space for removing food from these containers. Fixed shelving will be best when planned to suit the sizes of items stored. Consider both interspace and depth suitable. Condiment bottles, cereal packages, and canned goods differ in package sizes and in stacking quality. The depth of a shelf should accommodate either the width or length of the case, and the interspace should be adequate for the number to be stacked one on top of another. Allow 1 % to 2 in. as free space for ease of positioning. Add thickness of shelving to interspace when stating measurements in. if
between centers. Position heavy items to reduce lifting and dispensing. Drums of oil and vinegar should have spigots and be equipped with pumps or located on cradles. Table surface and scales should be located for convenient issuing of dry stores. Plan to have all products at least 6 in. above the floor or movable to facilitate cleaning of storage area. Limit height
facilitate
of top shelf for easy reach without aid of stool
or stepladder.
830
The space required for the dishwashing operation depends on the methods and equipment used. In all instances there must be adequate room to receive the volume of soiled dishes likely to arrive at any one time, plus space for scraping, stacking, and placing in baskets on a conveyor of a machine or into a prerinsing operation. The dimensions may be only 30 to 36 in. for a single tank machine, 60 to 72 in. for sinks, or 7 to over 30 ft for a conveyor-type machine. The requirements in Dishwashing Area
A
1
this is
Janitor
truck
pick up
Fig.
If
lift
Dishwashing
Can and Garbage
into the kitchen opposite.
trucks are used, space must be provided in storage aisles for their working and turning around. Doors should be a minimum of 42 in. wide to admit large crates and containers or be sized to suit mobile equipment. Doors to low-temperature areas are most often planned to open into a refrigerated area. If this is not done a heating device may have to be installed on a door opening into a warm area to prevent its freezing tight from condensation. About 1 2 to 1 5 sq ft must be kept free for every door opening. About 45 lb of frozen food, if stacked in cases, can be stored per cubic foot. About 30 to 35 lb of refrigerated food can be stored per cubic foot.
Pot and pan Ventilated
to 0.3 cu ft per meal served. Addilow-temperature or refrigerated space in terms of reach-ins was not calculated. In some climates, refrigerated space must be provided for dried fruits, nuts, cereals, and other foods to prevent weevil and insect infestation. A walk-in becomes feasible for an operation serving 300 to 400 meals per day, and refrigerated pass-throughs can be added when from 400 to 500 meals are served per day. A walk-in 5 to 6 ft wide does not permit storage on both sidq,^ wjth adequate aisle space. Storage space of 1 % to 2 ft should be allowed on either side of the aisle. If crates or cases are stored, this may have to be increased. Aisles of 30 in. are usually too narrow; 42 in. are desirable. If mobile equipment is moved in and out, aisles may have to be wider. Walk-ins that are 8 to 9 ft wide and about 10 ft long are minimum size. This allows for two storage areas 30 in. wide with a 3 to 4 ft aisle. If added width is desired for storage space in the center, allowance for storage areas of about 3 ft wide and 42 in. minimum aisles should be provided. Large walk-ins may be designed for lift truck operation, with doors opening from the receiving dock on one
0.1
tional
The average
vertical
reach of
is 84 % in. and of women 81 in. Use of the top shelf for light, bulky packages, such as
men
cereal, is
recommended.
Refrigerated and Low-Temperature Storage There are many factors affecting space needs for refrigerated and low-temperature foods. Across-the-board figures generally should be used only in preliminary estimates. The quantity stored at one time will dictate the storage needs. Variation in the type of storage also will be indicated by the types of items to be stored. Allocation in preliminary planning may be as follows: 20 to 35 percent for meat (portionready meats require ’/2 to % less space than
carcass or wholesale cuts); 30 to 35 percent for fruits and vegetables; 20 to 25 percent for dairy products, including those in serving areas; 10 to 25 percent for frozen foods; and 5 to 1 0 percent for carry-over foods, salads, sandwich material, and bakery products. A requirement of 1 5 to 20 cu ft of refrigeration per 100 complete meals has also been used by some planners. Others state 1 to 1'^ cu ft of usable refrigerator space should be provided for every three meals served. Analysis of a
number
award-winning installations indicated that approximately 0.25 to 0.50 cu ft of refrigerated walk-in space was provided per meal served, and frozen walk-in space approxiof
the clean dish area will vary.
there be
enough space
It is
important that
for dishes to be
exposed
to air for sufficient time to air-dry before stacking. For a basket-type machine, it is well to allow space equal to that required for three baskets, a stack of trays, and three or four stacks of dishes. For basket machines, it is usually recommended that the clean dish area occupy 66 percent of the total table space and the soiled dish area, 40 percent. Methods used for transporting and storing dishes will influence space needs. Where mobile storage equipment is used, more space is needed for the several units than where one cart is used for transporting and is repeatedly loaded and unloaded. A table surface is desirable for sorting, treating, or inspecting silver and other tableware. The installation of a domestic washer and drier in the dishroom may require space.
Provide a soiled utensil and Pan Section collection area adequate for the largest volume that normally arrives in the section at one time. Pot
The busiest periods are likely to occur when preparation containers are emptied for service
Commercial
RESTAURANTS, EATING PLACES, AND FOODSERVICE FACILITIES TABLE 4 Estimated
Introduction
Accurate determination of the space require-
ments for a foodservice facility is a very difficult problem, involving considerable research and computation. The space required for each functional area of the facility is dependent upon many factors which are not constant for all types of operations. The factors involved include the number of meals to be prepared; the functions and tasks to be performed; the equipment requirements; the number of employees and corresponding workplaces required; storage for materials; and suitable space for traffic and movement. The importance of accurately evaluating these factors cannot be overemphasized. Overestimating or underestimating any of them can lead to an excess or a shortage of space for the facility.
Space Estimates
The general guides and "rules of thumb" that will be given are to be used for preliminary space estimates only. They are to be regarded as strictly tentative and subject to easy change. The "rules of thumb" are used to get a general idea of the overall size of a facility in order to
make
prelimi-
nary cost estimates for feasibility studies, or to determine approximate land requirements for the building. One problem with using guides and "rules of thumb" is that the figures given are usually based on existing operations and do not reflect newer methods of foodservice operation. Another difficulty is that these figures are not given for all types of foodservice operations and consequently they would be of little use for certain types of projects. Most of the figures available are for general facilities that have no unusual space requirements.
Total Facility Size
Depending upon the type of foodservice to be planned, a general estimate of the total building size can be obtained by relating it to the number of seats to be provided. The estimated square footage of total space per seat is given in Table 4. These figures can be related to the number of meals to be prepared by considering the turnover rate for a particular meal period. A range of space estimates is given to allow for variations in the methods of operation. The smaller figures are used for limited menu and limited-space operations; the larger figures are suitable for operations with extensive menus and allow more spacious areas. Figures for estimating the total facility size of other types of foodservice, such as tray service, car service, or take-out service, are not available because of the great variations that exist in these types of operations. The only guides available would be to evaluate similar existing operations
and make adjustments as needed.
Total Facility
Space
for
Foodservice Facilities Area per seat
Type
of operation
ft
m
2
2
24-32
2.23-2 97
Counter service
18-24
1.67-2.23
Booth service
20-28
1.86-2.60
Cafeteria service
22-30
2.04-2.79
Table service
Note that a number of factors identified above are characteristic of the management policy after the facility has been built. This again emphasizes the close working relationship that has to exist between the owner or manager and the planner during the planning process. A foodservice facility designed for high turnover must also be managed for high turnover if the anticipated volume of sales is to be generated. The square feet of space allowed in the dining
areas
Crowding
except
in
tions.
determined by estimating the average time a seat is occupied for the time period desired. For example, if the turnover is to be expressed on a per-hour basis and the average estimated time the seat is occupied is 20 minutes, the turnover is 3. If the average seat occupancy time is 30 min, then the turnover rate is 2 per hour. Determining the turnover rate per meal period is useful for determining the total seating capacity based on estimated sales volume. Turnover rates are affected by the method of serving and serving time as well as by the type of customer, menu offerings and the dining atmosphere. Typical turnover rates for some types of foodservice operations are shown in Table 5. Turnover rates can be increased to some extent by many design and operational factors. This is not to suggest that all facilities should be designed for high turnover rates. However, if high turnover is one of the basic objectives, then the planner and subsequent manager can use the following to accomplish
The turnover
is
this:
Use menu items
that require short processing times, or use predominately preprocessed items. Provide ample production space and
equipment to handle the peak periods. Use well-lighted and light-colored painted areas for serving and dining. Arrange dining tables in close proximity to each other. Develop a somewhat uncomfortable dining seat design. Provide sufficient service personnel so guests are served promptly after they are seated. Provide for prompt clearing of the tables when a customer is finished with a course or the entire meal. Make sure guest checks are presented to customers as soon as they are finished eating.
TABLE
5
Turnover Rates for Foodservice
governed by the amount of comfort
is
desired.
some
Most
in dining areas is not desirable quick-service fast-food opera-
would like to have suffitable space to enjoy their
individuals
cient elbow
room and
meal.
TABLE 6 Estimated Dining Area Space
for
Foodservice Facilities Dining space per seat ft
m
Table service
12-18
1.11-1.67
Counter service
16-20
1.49-1.86
Booth service
12-16
11 1-1.49
Cafeteria service
12-16
1.1
Banquet
10-12
0.93-1.11
Type
of facility
2
2
1-1.49
Suggested space requirements for dining areas in Table 6. The figures on the high end of the range are used where ample space or leisurely dining are to be provided. The figures on the low end of the range will result in minimum space requireare given
ments. The estimates for dining areas include space for tables, chairs, aisles, and service stations. They do not allow for waiting areas, rest rooms, or other similar areas. Space requirements for these areas have to be determined separately. The size and arrange-
ment of
and counters selected important to the efficient use
tables, chairs, booths,
for the dining area are
space allowed.
of the
Production Areas
The space estimates for production areas include room for all the functional areas, such as receiving, storage, preparation, cooking, and warewashing, that are required to produce the menu items. Estimates for production areas for typical foodservice facilities are given in Table 7.
Facilities that will be processing primarily fresh items should use the higher space estimates. This allows for the additional equipment and worker space needed. The smaller figures are used for operations using preprocessed foods and require minimal production space.
Facilities
Dining Areas
Estimating the space required for dining areas is based on the number of persons to be seated at one time and the square feet of space allowed per seat. The number of persons to be seated at one time is determined by considering the total number of customers to be served for a given time period, and the turnover. Turnover refers to seat usage and is expressed by the number of times a seat will be occupied over a given time period. Turnover is usually expressed on a per-hour basis, although it can be determined on a per-meal basis.
Turnover rate
Type
of operation
Commercial cafeteria
(per hr)
1
2-3
Counter service
2-3%
Combination counter and table
2-3
service
Regular table service
Food
7
Estimated Production Space for
Facilities
Space per seat
%-2 %
Industrial or school cafeterias
Leisurely table service
TABLE
%-1
1-2%
ft
m
Table service
8-12
0.74-1.11
Counter service
4-6
0.37-0.56
Booth service
6-10
0.56-093
Cafeteria service
8-12
0.74-1.11
Type of
facility
2
2
831
Commercial
RESTAURANTS, EATING PLACES, AND FOODSERVICE FACILITIES TABLE 8 Estimated Percentage
The length
of shelving is computed by dividing the square feet by the width of shelving to be
one worker has to pass another worker pushing a 20-in. (508 mm) wide cart, an aisle width of 44 in. (1118 mm) (24 plus 20) would be needed. The traffic aisle widths required for special types of movement such as carrying large trays have to be
of
Production Space Allowed for Functional Areas Space allowed
used.
This
(%)
those instances where a combined work and traffic aisle is needed, a minimum of 42 in. (1067 mm) is required to allow one person to pass another person at the workplace. Aisles where there are persons working in a back-to-back arrangement have to be a minimum of 48 in. (1219 mm) wide to allow passage of people between them. An important point to remember is that the less movement required to operate the facility, the less aisle space is needed. In
5
Receiving
Food storage
20
Preparation
14 8
Cooking
10
Baking
Warewashing
5
16
Traffic aisles
5
Trash storage
Employee
Ib/ft 3 (481 kg/m 3 ). Items that will be stored in freezers can be assumed to have a density of 40 Ib/ft 3 (641
duction space for general table service operations is shown in Table 8.
These percentage figures assume
a typical op-
eration using fresh products. Baking of rolls, pastries and cakes are also assumed to be done in the facility.
Space Calculations Another approach to the problem of determining space requirements is to calculate the space needed for each of the functional areas separately. This is done by identifying and determining the pertinent variables involved for the different functional areas. It is assumed at this point
that the individual workplaces and pieces of equipment for the facility have been determined and will now be grouped together. The space re-
quired for the flow of materials and workers between the workplaces and pieces of equipment is added as needed to develop the space to allow for
A brief discussion of some of the functional areas and the variables affecting their space requirements will be given to illustrate this procedure. Computational operations are presented as applicable. Consideration of the traffic aisles is one of the common variables for all areas and is therefore included. Traffic aisles are used for the
move-
ment of materials and workers, and should not be confused with work aisles that provide floor space for the worker to perform the task. The primary purpose of traffic aisles is to allow easy movement between workplaces, equipment, and functional areas. Since traffic aisles are not productive space, they should be kept at a minimum both in numbers and size. Traffic aisles should be just wide enough to provide easy movement of the materials and workers required for efficient operation of the
facility.
In general, work aisles and traffic aisles should be separated as much as possible. This can usually be accomplished by locating traffic aisles perpendicular to the work aisles. In some instances, combined work and traffic aisles may be used if the traffic is light and if they offer a better solution to the design problem. Traffic aisles that serve two or more functional areas will minimize
the
amount
of space required.
Placement of
traf-
along walls and other perimeter locanot desirable for the same reason.
fic aisles
tions
is
The width of
dependent upon to be accommodated. If it con-
traffic aisles is
the type of traffic sists of only people
who
are not carrying any-
minimum aisle width of 30 in. (762 mm) allow persons to pass without difficulty. For workers who will be carrying containers and materials or pushing mobile carts and trucks an aisle width of 24 in. (610 mm) plus the width of the container or material carried or the mobile cart width will allow enough space. For example, if
thing, a will
832
may
be
made
to
An economic
determine the
lot
opti-
Receiving Area
mum size of storage to provide. The analysis com-
The main variables affecting the amount of space needed for the receiving function are the number, type and size of deliveries that are to be handled at one time. Many operations can have deliveries scheduled so they will have to handle only one delivery at a time. The types of materials to be
pares ordering, purchasing and receiving costs to the cost of the storage.
received are considered because of the variety of containers and packaging methods available. Ease of opening, checking, moving, and stackability all have a bearing on the space required.
Serving areas for most table service facilities are planned as a part of the main cooking area and separate space determinations are not usually needed. The pick-up area is included in the space requirements for the main cooking area. Additional serving stations for table service can be considered in computations for the dining area. Cafeteria operations require separate space for the serving function to allow room for the serving counter, room for guests and room for servers. Variables affecting the size of the serving area are the number of people to be served and the serving time allowed. Serving line rates vary from 2 to 10 persons per minute for straight-line cafe-
The size of deliveries to be handled may depend on the storage space available in the facility, and is determined in conjunction with storage space requirements. Storage space in turn can be modified by the frequency of deliveries. A greater frequency of deliveries can reduce the size requirements of the receiving area as well. Therefore, storage space and receiving space requirements should be determined together after these factors have been evaluated. Needless to say, all equipment and work areas for the receiving function must be provided for.
each function.
Traffic Aisles
of deliveries available.
size analysis
of the pro-
).
of
may
quency
A suggested percentage breakdown
3
days of storage for refrigerator vary from one day to a week or more, depending on the method of operation used for the facility. Freezer items can be stored for longer periods of time and are determined by the freitems
2
Miscellaneous
kg/m
The number
15
facilities
of computation can be used and freezer storage areas. The
weight per meal of items that will be stored in the refrigerators and freezers will vary between 0.75 and 1 lb (0.340 and 0.454 kg). The average density of refrigerator items can be assumed to be 30
sized accordingly. Functional areas
same method
for the refrigerator
Storage Areas
The amount
of dry, refrigerator
and freezer space
required for the facility is determined by the number of days of storage to be provided for. A general recommendation for dry storage of foods is to provide space for 2-4 weeks supply, depending on
the availability of the food items. The total volume of goods to be stored can be estimated as follows. First determine the number of meals for which storage is to be provided. An operation planning on serving 600 meals per day and desiring a two weeks supply will need storage for 8400 (600 meals per day x 14 days) meals. Next, estimate the weight per meal of items that will be stored in the dry storage area. This calls for an evaluation of all menu items. A general estimate Vi and V2 lb (0.113 and 0.227 kg) per meal may be used; it is based on a total weight estimate per average meal of 1-1 V2 lb (0.454— 0.680 kg). These figures are for full meals and adjustments for partial meals have to be made. If an estimate of V2 lb (0.227 kg) per meal is used, then the total weight to provide storage for is 4200 lb (1905 kg) (8400 meals x 0.5 lb per meal). Then the total weight computed is divided by an average density of 45 lb per ft 3 (721 kg per m 3 which will give the total volume of goods to be stored. In this example, the total volume in cubic
between
Serving Areas
The serving line rate is dependent on the number of choices and the number of servers. Shopping-center counter arrangements can handle up to 20 or more persons per minute. The length of cafeteria counters is determined by the variety and volume of food items to be displayed. Adequate space for merchandising food items should be allowed. The space required for straight-line counters may be roughly estimated at 10-15 ft 2 (0.9292 1 .39 m of floor space for each linear foot (0.305 m) of counter. This provides room for the counteria counters.
)
customer aisles, room for servers, and backbar equipment. Shopping-center arrangements generally require 1 8-20 ft 2 (1 .67-1 .86 m 2 of floor area for each linear foot (0.305 m) of counter. The sizing of serving facilities for cafeterias is ters,
)
directly related to the capacity of the dining area. Ideal design results when the flow of people from the serving facility is balanced with the seating available in the dining room. At equilibrium conditions, the flow rate of people leaving the serving areas and entering the dining area should equal the flow rate of people leaving the dining area. In other words, the number of seats provided in the dining area has a direct relationship to the rate of people leaving the serving line for a given average eating time. This relationship can be expressed by
the equation:
),
3 is 4200 lb - 45 Ib/ft = 93.3. This indicates 3 that space for 93.3 cubic ft (2.64 m of goods, exclusive of aisle space, will be needed. If the goods are to be stored on shelves, the total square footage of shelving can be computed by considering the height to which the materials
feet
R = N/T
)
shelf. If the materials can be 3 stored to a height of 1 ft, then 93.3 (93.3 ft 2 2 of shelving will be needed. If 1 foot) ft (8.67 m a height of 1 V2 ft (0.457 m) can be used, then 62.2 2 2 of shelving is required. (93.3 1.5) ft (5.78 m
can be stored on the )
)
where R = rate of people leaving serving area, N = number of seats in dining area, and T = average eating time. For example, a 200-seat dining room where the average eating time is 20 minutes should have serving facilities capable of handling 10 (/? = 200/20) persons per minute. If the eating time is 30 minutes, a serving facility must be able to handle 6.7 (/? = 200/30) persons per minute.
Commercial
RESTAURANTS, EATING PLACES, AND FOODSERVICE FACILITIES Dining Areas
TABLE 9 Typical
Sizes
and Shapes of Dining Tables
Calculating the space requirements for dining
areas can be difficult because of the many choices available. For example, the final space required for a dining room is dependent upon the following variables:
Minimum Type
Shape
Tables for
1's or 2's
Square Rectangle
1.
Types
of seating to be provided:
Tables and chairs
a.
Booths Counters Banquettes d. Combinations e. Table sizes desired Table shapes desired Pattern of table arrangements Aisle space desired Number of service stations needed
Tables for 3's or 4's
3. 4. 5. 6.
(in.)
24 X 24 24 x 30
30 x 30 30 x 36
30
36
Square
30 x 30 30 x 42
42 x 42
b.
2.
Rectangle
Rectangle
48
30 X 60
42 x 72
48
60
Round leaf tables
30 x 30 36 x 36
36 x 48
36
Round
Drop
Spacious
Round
c.
Tables for 5's or 6's
size
(in.)
in.
opening to 42
in.
round
in.
opening to 52
in.
round
A suggested approach that allows a planner to evaluate these variables and their effect on the dining space per seat is the modular concept. For this situation the module contains space for the table, the seats, and the appropriate share of the service and access aisles. The modular concept enables designers first to evaluate the space requirements for different choices that may be made before reaching their final decisions. The following example will illustrate this concept for a dining room that will use tables and chairs only. The first step in the modular concept is to select the size and shape of table to be considered. This is done in relation to the customer, the menu, the type of service, and the type of atmosphere desired in the dining room. Some typical sizes and shapes of dining tables are given in
Table
9.
The second step
is to select the aisle spaces to be used. Aisle space in dining areas may be divided into service aisles and access aisles. Service aisles usually range from 2.5 ft (0.762 m) minimum for a limited menu operation to as wide as 4.5 ft (1.37 m) for a dining room featuring cart service or table side food preparation. Access aisles are provided to allow people to get into and out of the chairs easily. Thus the type of customer, size of chairs and the desired atmosphere (crowded versus spacious) are the critical factors in selecting the access aisles. Access aisles are generally 1.5 ft (0.457 m) to 2 ft (0.610 m) wide as a minimum. Combined service and access aisles or aisles for cafeterias where people carry their own trays are usually sized from 3 ft (0.914
m) to 4.5
ft.
(1.37 m).
Having selected the table size and shape and the desired aisle space, the next step is to consider possible table arrangement patterns. Square or round tables may be arranged into a rectangular or diagonal pattern, as is
more
shown
in Fig. 2.
efficient in the use of
The diagonal pattern
space than the rectan-
gular pattern.
833
Commercial
RESTAURANTS, EATING PLACES, AND FOODSERVICE FACILITIES
The module used for evaluating the factors mentioned is drawn as illustrated in Fig. 3. The module contains one-half of the aisle space selected. The following choices were used for the
four persons, the space per seat for this module is 20.25 ft 2 (1 .88 2 )/seat. If this module were to be
2.
Square table. 36 x 36 in. (914 x 914 mm), for four diners 18 in. (457 mm) seating space (occupied position)
3.
4.
Combined service and access aisle of 3 ft (0.914 m) Rectangular pattern of table arrangement
The module by 9 ft 2
ft
size for this
(2.74 m),
(7.52
m
2 ).
which
example
is
9
ft
(2.74 m)
Considering that the module
is
ways
using different size tables so that the
in
the dining area.
The possible seating configurations for dining areas are endless, and careful planning is required to make the most efficient use of space. These procedures illustrate the preferred method of arriving at space requirements for a foodservice facility. Each type of food facility to be planned will have differences that will result in
)
for
when
modules developed for each size table are compatible at least on one side. For example, when tables for twos and tables for fours are to be used, the modules can be adjusted by selecting table shapes or sizes that give the same module dimension along one axis. This would allow a mixing of the tables without affecting the pattern of aisle
)
results in a total area of 81
arrangements can be developed. Care must be
taken
used for a dining room with 100 seats, the total area required would be 2025 ft 2 (188 m 2 ). The module for a diagonal pattern of table arrangement using the same choices for the table size, seat space and aisle space is shown in Fig. 4. The size of the module for the diagonal pattern is 8 ft 4 in. (2.54 m) by 8 ft 4 in. (2.54 m), which gives a total area of 69.44 ft 2 (6.45 m 2 ). The space per seat is 17.36 ft 2 (1.61 m 2 )/seat, which is 2.89 ft 2 (0.27 m 2 less than for the rectangular pattern. For the 100 seat dining room, the diagonal pattern would require 1736 ft 2 (1 61 m 2 ), which is 289 ft 2 (26.8 m 2 less than the rectangular pattern. Similar modules for other sizes or types of seat-
module: 1.
ing
m
different space requirements.
hi s
Fig. 3
pattern.
834
Module
for a square table to
be arranged
in a
rectangular
Fig. 4.
Module
for the square table to be arranged in a
diagonal pattern.
Commercial
RESTAURANTS, EATING PLACES, AND FOODSERVICE FACILITIES
iiiaain-i
wooiiii
lM0aa(M")
Salt
DSIaali
Trellayi
l*|
tarvica
I
IMaal)
I
>
nnn uuu
nnn uuu
nnn uuu
I
Ijilaaun
llll
aaH
I
Utonnj
)
(Ol'idOi
IIOMtyl
nnn unu
nnn nnn llUaaliri
nnn UUU
Ml aa
|
i
Fig. 5
j
-
r
i
Seat groupings around rectangular and circular tables.
Mod
4-
U
1
600
\j
mm
1
6
e 3
4 -
i
—
1?0lmm|i~Cl j
— 1
j
—\— i
Mod u le
T
2100mm 17
m 1
1
1
J
uu 4
L
900»m >-
i
6 S 0
IS
^
Service
9
00
mm
S')
-
mm
H-0")
Banquette seating arrangements and limiting 6 dimensions including space for access and service. Fig.
Fred Lawson, Restaurant Planning
and
Design, The
Architectural Press, Ltd., London, 1973.
835
Commercial
RESTAURANTS, EATING PLACES, AND FOODSERVICE FACILITIES
Q UJ
X
DC UJ
UJ _l CO
h-
5
staples.
European restaurants, the bar lady is responsible for all beverages and often is the •
a6
^4
In
representative
for
the
management,
and,
in
smaller restaurants, oversees the waiters. •
Argentier
•
Office boy
•
Dish washer
is
responsible for the care of
silver.
Fig. 3 Large restaurant kitchen for restaurants with many private party and conference facilities or with commissary and catering capacity for other businesses. Suitable also for large hotel with large restaurant for the general public. Capacity: 800-1,000 persons (e.g., 200 seats and fourfold reoccupancy). Waiters' passageway: tangential, with food buffet situated in front. The waiter has access to beverages and other items from the waiters' passageway in the kitchen ond from the dining room side as well. The buffet looks over the dining rooms. Kitchen: Linear arrangement with fitted berths for large apparatus. See Legend for explanation
of numbers. Restaurant Architecture York, 1971.
and Design Universe Books,
5
4
5
—
1
10
12
6
7
9
=
,
New
849
—
—
Commercial
KITCHENS
Legend for Restaurant and Hotel Kitchen Layouts (Figs. 1 to 6) (Layouts: Scale 1:300) passageway 1. Waiters' counter dish return
—
2. 3.
—
18.
Empty goods and garbage
6.
7.
8.
as in Fig. 1. Waiters’ passageway: tangential. Kitchen: The cooking, roasting, grill, and frying apparatus are planned as wall structures. See Legend for explanation of numbers.
beverage
17.
5.
Restaurant kitchen especially suited 4 for city or excursion restaurants. Capacity:
and
Pastry (cookies, cakes, ice cream, dessert) preparation and serving Cold kitchen (cold appetizers, salad, fish) preparation and serving Warm kitchen saucier/rotisseur area (sauces, preparation including large roasts, grill, fish) apparatus area and serving Warm kitchen entremetier area (soups, vegepreparation including large tables, entrees) apparatus area and serving Pot and pan washing casserolier area Vegetable preparation Meat preparation Vegetable cold storage Meat cold storage Economat (dry storage) Beverage cold storage Linen, dish, cleaning supplies storage Staple goods storage Goods acceptance and control
4.
Fig.
— meal
Dishwashing area (dishes, glasses, silver) Beverages preparation and serving
9.
10. 11. 12.
13. 14. 15. 16.
—
—
—
—
—
collecting
rooms
Fig. 5 Restaurant kitchen. Capacity: This arrangement is conceived for a very busy city restaurant of good quality (approximately 600 persons e.g., 150 seats with fourfold reoccupancy). Waiters’ passageway: in the center. Kitchen: The cooking, roasting, grill, and frying apparatus are planned as wall structures. See Legend for explanation of numbers.
—
19. Fig. 7 Snack bar (Pub, tavern, bistro, cafe, or restaurant). Capacity: (five- or six-fold reoccupancy over lunchtime, twofold in the evening; at other times, a well-run cafe, cake, and snack business). The kitchen deals primarily with ready-to-serve articles. In a city business with daily delivery, the storage space does not have to be espe-
55—60 seats
cially large.
Legend: 1.
2.
Meal and beverage serving counter Dishwasher
2a. Dish return 3.
Beverage
4.
Oven and
5.
Garde-manger
buffet with mixer, toaster, ice-cream container, etc. small pastry station
Saucier/rotisseur 6/7. Range 6.
Large restaurant kitchen for restaurants with many auxiliary rooms, bowling alleys, garden, and a snack bar projecting into the main dining room. Suitable for a highly frequented city restaurant or for an excursion spot with various conference rooms,
Fig. 6
Capacity: 1,000-1,200 persons. Waiters’ passageway: tangenBuffet and washing-up zone (dish return) placed in front. The waiter can pick up drinks and other items at two places in the kitchen, the drinks coming partly from the bar. Kitchen: Warm kitchen as wall structure with central serving area; cold kitchen and pastry area divided with two serving areas each, symmetrically arranged. See Legend for explanation of numbers. etc.
tial.
850
7.
Entremetier
7a. Cooking vat
and high-performance steam cooker
6/7b. Warming cupboard and
warm
serving counter with warming
lamps 8.
Pot and pan washing
11. Storage, empty goods, office; instead of cold storage rooms cold storage and freezer cupboards
Employees’ toilets Gl. Bar counter also for meals G2. Dining room with table seating G3. Guests’ toilets / make-up room / telephone booths
—
Commercial
KITCHENS
VE1
Legend: l
l f.
3/4
If
-t>
Self-service buffet with grill and fry unit Salad dressings, spices, cutlery reserves Cashier
d.
le. 1
2.
Dishwasher
2a. Dish return 3/4. Sandwich unit, cakes, ice cream, coffee, beverages; service
available at an outdoor cafe 5a. Cold preparation table 6/7. Defrosting, warming-up apparatus front, serviceable on two sides (convection ovens, heating appliances for the Nacka system or Id
If
Regethermic ovens) 11. Cold storage and storage (varies in size according to system of servicing and rhythm of delivery) lla. Refrigerator front, serviceable on two sides llb. Delivery, empty goods, intermediary storage, personnel cloak-
room
—
12. Kiosk sales on the inside and to customers on the street El. Entrance from street E2. Entrance from building (department store, office building, etc.)
A
c 11b
Self-service restaurant suitable for department stores or office buildings. Kitchen: no independent production; outside delivery and preparation via deep-freeze, boiling-in-the-bag (Nacka), or RegeFig. 8
thermic methods.
Legend: 1.
Id.
Service passage for U-shaped or finger-shaped counter Automats for self-service
Connection of two fingers with dishwasher having two covers serviceable on both sides; adjoining are two sinks each 3. Coffee machine, refrigerators, soup vat storage 4/5. Salad and ice cream preparation 4/5a. Cold counter salad, ice cream, dessert 6/7. Frying pan, soup cooker, and other cooking equipment 6/7a. Warm counter bain-marie, fryer, grill plates 11. Economat, cold storage, and freezer space, staples room (delivery, empty goods room, office, personnel cloakrooms and washrooms 2.
—
—
not included)
G Guest rooms with standing room and seats (automat service with disposable dishes)
9 Restaurant with finger-shaped bar and automats for quick lunch service in restaurants for passersby, cafeterias, department stores, highway restaurants. Capacity: 500 persons per hour. Kitchen: preparation of precooked meals, salads, and ice cream. Fig.
851
Commercial
KITCHENS
10 Restaurant for travelers (Highway restaurant, or cafe-restaurant at a busy intersection in the city). Capacity: Snack 45-50 seats (200 persons every hour) Restaurant 80 seats (two- or threefold reoccupancy during meals; at other times, coffee, ice cream, pastry, and sandwich service) Grill 40 seats (one- or twofold reoccupancy, high standard service) Kitchen: Linear-wall arrangement, approximately equal balance between freshly prepared meals and ready-to-serve meals. Storage, empty goods, and personnel cloakrooms in the cellar. Fig.
—
—
—
—
Legend: 1. Waiters' passageway 1 a. Service corridor for snacks, and cold meal and pastry-serving counter for restaurant 1/3. Waiters Beverage self-service
—
2.
Dishwasher
Pastry 5. Cold kitchen 6/7. Warm kitchen (roast, grill, fry), bain-marie in the serving counter 6/7a. Cooking and frying apparatus (2 vats, 1 pan) 8. Pot and pan washing 9/10. Meat and vegetable preparation 11. Storage for the day 11a. Cupboard group, cooled and not cooled 12. Kiosk facing the street 12a. Cigarette machine 17. Goods delivery 4.
17a. Office 17b. Elevator to cellar 19. Employee toilets G1. Snack area with about 40 seats and seats at the bar G2. Restaurant G3. Grill restaurant, possibly with small bar for espresso coffee, aperitifs, whisky, and other spirits G4. Guests' toilets
1 1 Large hotel-restaurant kitchen also for large restaurants with auxiliary rooms and with outside deliveries or production for other organizations (variant of Figs. 3 and 6). Capacity: 800-1000 persons. Waiters' passageway: in the center, with a special serving link to the garden (or, for instance, to a bowling alley) and directly connecting to the auxiliary rooms. Kitchen: Linear arrangement with rear side of large apparatus.
Fig.
some
Legend: 1.
passageway Meal and beverage serving Access to auxiliary rooms
Waiters'
la.
lb.
Dishwashing area 3. Beverage serving area 3a. Beverage cold storage (day
to
garden
2.
4.
Pastry
5.
Cold kitchen
cellar)
—
Warm kitchen saucier / rotisseur area Warm kitchen entremetier area Pot and pan washing 9. Vegetable preparation 10. Meat preparation 11. Cold storage and storage rooms 11a. Accesses to delivery, empty goods room, and intermediary storage, office, personnel cloakrooms and toilets S Service accessories (cash register) 6.
—
7. 8.
Fig. 12
Cafe-restaurant with tearoom, or a city restaurant
in
a busy
district.
Cafe: alcohol-free beverages, except for bottled beer; pastry and small meals—cold and warm Tearoom: alcohol-free beverages, pastry, sandwiches. Capacity: About 150 seats (continuous service from early morning to midnight or later). Kitchen: extensive use of precooked meals; little storage.
Legend:
G2
1.
la.
Waiters’ passageway Serving stations and cash register
3.
Dishwasher Beverage buffet with mixer, toaster,
4.
Pastry
2.
ice
cream container,
etc.
oven 5. Sandwich unit 6. Defrosting and heating equipment, soup vats 7. Oven, grill, frying apparatus 8. Pot and pan washing 11. Day stores, empty goods (staple goods in cellar) 4a. Pastry
15. 17.
Linen storage Delivery
17a. Office 19.
Employees’ washrooms, cloakroom for waiters (cloakroom
and washrooms G 1. Tearoom
G1
G2. G3. G4. G5.
for kitchen
Cafe-restaurant Terrace or garden
Washrooms Telephone booths
employees
in cellar)
Commercial
KITCHENS
13 Student dining hall or cafeteria with two-sided self-service buffet and conveyor Capacity: 12 persons per minute X 2 — 24 persons. Without cash payment: hourly capacity, 1,400 persons. With cash circulation: hourly capacity, 1,100 persons. Seating: at least 340 seats. Kitchen: fully equipped linear arrangement, planned for automatic equipment. Fig.
belt.
Legend: la. lb. lc. l
d.
Platter and cutlery trolley Distribution help, regulation of conveyor-belt speed, dietary food storage belt for standard menu
Conveyor
—
Self-service buffet Menu: 1 soup of the day 1
various salads various desserts dairy products
1
5 cold
stew standard menu dietary food 2 cold meals 1
le. l f.
2.
2a. Soiled-dish
conveyor
4.
Pastry
5.
Garde-manger
belt
5a. Portioning table for cold meals, salads, and desserts Roast kitchen, possibly with roasting automats 6a. Warm-storage trolleys portioning of meat, sauces, dietary foods 7. Cooking kitchen, possibly with automatic steam cookers 7a. Warm-storage trolleys for portioning of vegetables, entrees 6.
—
beverages (beer, wine, carbonated beverages, juice)
9.
Salad dressings, condiments, cutlery
Cash register Dishwasher
Vegetable preparation
10.
Meat preparation
11.
Access to the storage rooms, delivery, and auxiliary rooms
V
VA
2a
2a
/
j ir
AV
14 Student dining hall or cafeteria with four self-service buffets. Capacity: at least 1,500 persons per hour. Seating: at least 400 seats. Kitchen: outside delivery of meals with standard or conveyor-type elevator. Fig.
Legend:
—
Self-service buffet menu as in Fig. 13 Circular device for salad dressings, condiments, extra cutlery, etc. register lg. Preparation table with trolley stand l
d.
le. l f.
2.
Cash
Dishwasher
2a. Soiled-dish return 11. Standard or conveyor-type elevator connection to meal-preparation kitchen
853
Commercial
KITCHENS
V
7
> 2a
6/7 j
[
^
^
>11
6/7
]
[
11a
pTTTT-
1
11a
2
A
8a
:
Student dining hall or cafeteria with self-service carrousel. Capacity: after the initial phase, 1,400 persons per hour. Seating: at least Fig. 15
400 seats. Meal delivery from a central kitchen the-bag (Nacka), and Regethermic system.
—deep-freeze,
boil-in-
Legend: 17. Linear-arrangement kitchen with automats. For large output, there are appropriate appliances for steaming and baking. 18. Linear-arrangement kitchen with transport-equipment system. In the foreground: dish washing; soup, vegetable, and entree vats; stove for general purposes and dietary foods; sauces and meats. 19. Three-tier carrousel (Maison Tricault, Paris) of 2-meter diameter, with a tray slide. l d. Self-service three-tiered carrousel Below: 2 cold dishes, various salads, desserts (partly on ice) Center: warm meals, 3 warm dishes, 2 grilled or fried dishes (with
warming lamps above) Above: sandwiches, pastry, l f.
etc.
Salad dressings, condiments, extra cutlery,
le.
etc.
Cash register
Dishwaster (stacking area, 3 tanks, drying zone) 2a. Soiled-dish conveyor belt 3. Beverage self-service area 2.
5a. Portioning table for cold dishes and salads 5b. Portioning table for desserts, sandwiches, etc.
Warming and defrosting appliances 6/7a. Portioning table for warm meats 8a. Trolley storage 11. Meal delivery from the central kitchen, access to the supply and auxiliary rooms 11a. Storage cupboards for cold goods and other goods delivered from the central kitchen 6/7.
854
:
Commercial
GENERAL
OFFICES,
By
FRANK MEMOLI
CORE LOCATION Central (Interior)
Work
Unlike the three interior core locations discussed, the primary advantage of an exterior core arrangement is that it leaves the entire floor area of the building available for tenant use. In addition, the core does not complicate
All
the floor plan either functionally or structurally.
This location has a number of advantages. space to be utilized as It allows all window rentable office space and depending upon the configuration of the building plan will permit offices of varying depths to receive natural light. The central location is also extremely convenient in terms of access and in some cases may be equidistant for all sides. This simplifies area division and provides good flexibility of tenant distribution in the same way. Horizontal utility runs may also be relatively equidistant from the core. Combined with a square building plan, bearing exterior, and core walls this location permits a floor plan free of columns and thus totally flexible for office layout.
While this core location has definite adit also has some drawbacks. One disadvantage is that the central interior location limits the depth of offices in the midzone of each floor, thus affecting the element of flexibility in office layout. Another floor-area-consuming characteristic of this core is that it requires an access corridor around its perimvantages,
eter.
arrangement, maximum flexiachieved with respect to tenant distribution, office depth, and layout. Since the core creates a "dead wall" or portion thereof, it may be used as a buffer between the building and an adjoining property which may have objectionable characteristics. Location on the outside of the building also permits the core to act as a point of transition between one building and another of possibly different scale. Some problems are also created by placing the core on the outside of a building. The primary drawback is that, in the case of multitenant occupancy, the core requires a long access corridor lessening flexibility of tenant distribution. In addition, the core occupies desirable window space so that the offices immediately adjacent to the core may not receive any natural light.
With
bility
this type of is
GENERAL PRINCIPLES
it
presents
somewhat more
flexibility in
maximum depth and arrangement
of spaces. This can be particularly desirable where large open spaces such as secretarial or clerical pools are required. It also affords the opportunity of developing small secluded spaces in the relatively narrow portion of the floor plan where the core is closest to the exterior walls. This core location may present some problems of access. Because it is off-center, it is somewhat remote and thus less convenient to the far sides and corners of the building. If there is multiple-tenant occupancy on any given floor, a long access corridor will be required as will be a perimeter corridor around the core itself. The off-center location may also lessen flexibility of tenant distribution.
The principal advantage
of individuals, as determined by operating procedures, must be the governing factor in any layout. The development of
which conforms to and complements the predominant work flow requirements of an office is perhaps the most important phase of space planning. By the systematic study of the operations, processes, and procedures in-
a layout
volved in individual (or group) tasks, the planner can assist management by providing work station patterns which ensure a smooth, straight-line flow of work. It should be understood that space planning does not conflict with or overlap the field of methods and systems analysis. The role of the space planner is to gain a knowledge of the functions, as developed, and to translate them into the best space layout possible within the limitations imposed by building characteristics, fiscal allotments, etc.
Straight-Line Principle In a well-planned office, paper goes from one desk to another with the
amount of handling, Work should progress in of a split core is that
it virtually eliminates the need for a peripheral corridor on the core. Access to this core is from the area between its split elements and not from the area around its edges. This permits more flexibility of floor-area division, leaving
even the area immediately adjacent to the core Depending on the width of the access space in the center of the core, this space may be put to different uses on different floors. At the ground, or entry, level this area can become a lobby, while on floors where elevators do not stop this space can be used for additional office space.
available for office space.
1
general
rules
are
applicable
positioning
in
desks 1 Desks should face the same direction unless there is a compelling functional reason to
do otherwise. The use of vides for straight tates
this
work flow
technique propatterns,
communications, and creates
traveling,
and delay
a series of straight
forward movement, avoiding criss-cross motion and backward flow. When the layout is being developed, the flow pattern can be traced from desk to desk. Caution must be exercised, however, since the straight-line work principle cannot be adapted to all activities, particularly those headquarter or departmental offices whose staff activities do not lend themselves to assembly-line proclines with a general
essing.
for
and
attractive appearance. 2. In open area, consideration should be given to placing desks in rows of two. This method will permit the use of bank-type partitions as a divider for those activities which require visual privacy while still obtaining
maximum
utilization.
Desks should be spaced
3.
from the front
at a
distance of
desk to the desk behind it. This distance should be increased to 7 ft when desks are in rows of two, ingress and egress is confined to one side of the aisle, or in instances where more than two desks side by side cannot be avoided. 4. In private offices the desk should be positioned to afford the occupant a view of the 6
ft
of a
In open work areas the supervisor should located adjacent to the receptionist or secretary. Access to supervisory work stations should not be through the work area. 6.
Desks
of
employees having considerable
should be located near the ofConversely, desks of employees doing classified work should be away from entrances. visitor contact fice entrance.
"Executive Core" Concept
Most new building designs produce a blocktype structure which is well lighted and air conditioned, and which is divided by a few access corridors radiating from a central service core. This type of construction permits development of space plans based on the "Executive Core" concept. This concept, or technique, places all or a majority of the private offices in the core area and allocates space along the building perimeter for others. It has proved very satisfactory in many cases where it
has been used and has potential
in
most new
buildings in which large, or relatively large, groups of “lower echelon employees will be
housed. This concept arises from the premise that employees performing routine tasks which keep them at their desks almost the entire work day require the psychological advantages of window space. On the other hand, supervisors and executives are frequently called upon to leave their offices for meetings, supervisory tours, etc., and interior offices, if properly designed and decorated, are completely acceptable for them. Also, the occupants of private offices generally receive the greatest
Guide
facili-
a neat
5.
least Split (Interior)
stations, whether in a private office or open space, are reduced to units of furniture and equipment. See Fig. for the work stations most frequently used. The basic unit of work stations are desks and therefore require the most consideration. The following in
be
The relationship
Like the central-interior core, the off-center interior core permits all window or building perimeter space to be used for offices. How-
Stations
work
door.
Work Flow
Off-Center (Interior)
ever,
Exterior
Space Planning & Layout, General
Services Administration Service Washington, D C
Public
Buildings
of visitors; in fact, the
need
number
to receive
many
perhaps the justification most frequently given for private offices. The location visitors
is
855
Commercial OFFICES, GENERAL
of private offices in the core facilitates the handling of visitors and keeps them from the general
work
ernment
may
official
Security Requirements
The application will assist
be
of the following considerations
the space planner to attain func-
Employees performing close work should the best-lighted areas- Glaring surfaces
in
affect vision
should be identified and
corrected. 2. Clothes lockers in an office layout are out of date and wasteful. Large rooms or open areas should be provided with hanging space
and shelves for hats, packages, and other material. Space not suitable for work stations should be used whenever possible. generally should be 3. Heavy equipment placed against walls or columns in order to for coats
avoid floor overloading. 4. Be safety conscious. Do not obstruct exits, corridors, or stairways. Comply with fire safety codes governing aisles, exits, etc. 5. Where frequent interviews with the general public are required, as in personnel offices, the use of interview cubicles should be considered. Such cubicles need only be large enough for the interviewer, the applicant, and a small
desk or
table.
operations which require employees their office, with only infrequent visits there to file reports, etc., consideration should be given to assigning two or more employees to each desk. Other considerations include the provision of 45-in. desks and the use of common work tables, with the assignment of file cabinet drawers to each employee in which to keep papers, etc. 6.
to
taxpayers
an
The space planner hears in Government need
many reasons why people
tional effectiveness in the final layout:
which
the
areas-
Other Planning Considerations
1
give
adverse impression.
In
work away from
Private Offices
The private office is the most controversial problem facing the space planner. The assignment of private offices and the type of partitioning to be used are issues to be settled by top management acting on the advice and recommendations of the space planner. Private offices should be assigned primarily for functional reasons, i.e., nature of work, visitor traf-
places where confidential discussions can be held and a variety of suggestions as to how this should be accomplished. The private office is the most popular, if not always the most practical, solution. The Federal establishment undoubtedly has a greater problem in this respect than many branches of business. In addition to the security requirements, the Government is faced with privacy situations involving investigative agencies and other
which have occasion to inquire into most confidential aspects of individuals' personal lives and the operations of business
activities
Circulation
This is the area required to conveniently permit ingress and egress to work stations. The size of an aisle should be governed by the amount of traffic it bears. The following standards with regard to internal circulation will be applied in space planning surveys: 1 Aisles leading to main exits from areas which carry substantial traffic (main aisles) should be 60 in. wide. 2. Aisles which carry a moderate amount of traffic (intermediate aisles) should be 48 in. wide. 3. Aisles between rows of desks (secondary aisles) should be approximately 36 in. wide. .
the
concerns. There is no question as to these persons’ entitlement to reasonable privacy regardless of whether they are summoned to the office, appear voluntarily to render assistance, or avail themselves of services offered by the agency. There are alternatives, however, in determining the methods to be used to satisfy the various requirements. Sizes Of Private Offices
offices be a
mum
of
minimum
300 sq
ft
desirable that private of 100 sq ft and a maxiis
It
each
in size,
depending upon
the requirements of the occupant. See sketches of most widely used private offices. Only in
cases where it is necessary for the occupant meet with delegations of 10 or more people once a day should the size approach 300 sq ft. For the average Government function, the private office should not exceed 200 sq ft. to
at least
Conference Requirements
Conferences, meetings, and assemblies are an important part of Government operations. Since there is no established standard suggesting the number of conference rooms based on
number
needs will vary agency components, depending largely on the nature of their work. the
widely
of
the
people,
among agencies
or
Whenever possible, the establishment of conference rooms should be based on need established from past records and experience, rather than on anticipated needs. Unnecessary conference space is often allowed because planning is not based on such records of demonstrated need. The space planner should always evaluate the utilization of existing conference rooms before recommending others (Fig. 3).
Conference Space
in
Private
Offices
the
vs.
Confer-
Room Conferences are best conducted purpose. Conin space designed for that ference space should not be provided in ence
Semiprivate Offices
The semiprivate office is a room, ranging in size from 1 50 to 400 sq ft, occupied by two or more individuals. These offices can be enclosed by ceiling-high, three-quarter-high, or bank-type partitions. Examples of semi-
shown. Because
private offices are
of the loss
private offices. In lieu of large offices, it is desirable to provide a conference room adjoining the office of a top official who holds a large number of conferences and nearby conference rooms for officials with more limited
Separate
requirements.
conference through
rooms permit maximum
or for security reasons. When private offices are provided, they should be only large enough for the occupant to conduct his normal
introduced by the use of the partitions required to enclose these offices, the same rigid review given private offices should be employed. Generally, the need to house members of a work team or other groups of employees assigned to a common task is an acceptable justification for semiprivate
business with a reasonable degree of dignity
accommodations.
room should be
General or Open Space
Interior space, which is not the most desirable for office purposes, is well suited for conference use. This location eliminates outside distraction and the need for window cover-
fic,
(Fig. 2).
The following are some
Classification
Grade
The necessity
flexibility
of the factors
consideration prior to assignment: requiring
of
making the
for a private
office cannot be directly related to the classi-
The following paragraphs describe some of the factors affecting good office layout in general or open space:
fication grade of the employee. General
Open Space Supervisors who are working with their employees, rather than planning for them, should generally be in the same room or open space with them. The supervisor may be separated from the balance of his section by a distance of several feet which permits a degree of privacy.
Supervisors
in
A
frequent justification for a private impress visiting representatives of industry, and the general public, with the importance or dignity of the official being contacted. Recent studies of office planning in private industry tend to refute such a position. They show many highly paid employees housed in attractive open space. Moderately sized private offices are provided only for upper-echelon officials. The offices of many top executives of large, nationally known companies are less than 250 sq ft each. The provision of a private office, or too large a private office, for a GovPrestige
office is to
856
“General
office
open area occupied by supervisors,
a
to an employees, equipment, and
space''
number
furnishings,
scheduling at an appropriate level of management. Where feasible, training and conference requirements should be pooled and conference space used as auxiliary office area for visitors. Location
of
Conference
Rooms
The
conference
centrally located to the users.
ings during visual presentations. Access to conference rooms should be through corridors or through reception areas.
refers
of
area. Large open areas permit and effective utilization, aid office communications, provide better light and ventilation, reduce space requirements, make possible better flow of work, simplify supervision, and eliminate partition costs. In many cases, however, open-space housing for more than 50 persons should be subdivided either by use of file cabinets, shelving, railing, or low bank-type partitions.
circulation flexibility
The space allocated to Open-Area Work Stations these work stations is based on the furniture and equipment necessary to perform the work assigned as well as on circulation area. The space assigned to any specific work station may be increased due to special furniture and equipment requirements associated with the particular position.
utilization
Conference rooms of Conference Rooms should be designed to accommodate average but not maximum attendance. Extra chairs can be used to achieve additional seating. See illustrations of preferred layout of conference Sizes
rooms
of various sizes.
Reception Areas and Visitor Control Visitors receive their first impression of an organization from the decor and layout of the reception area. It should be attractive, neat, businesslike, and above all, adequate to accommodate normal visitor traffic. An allowance of 10 sq ft for each visitor to be served may be used for space allocation. For example, if space is required for a total of five visitors at any given time, a total of 50 sq ft should be used in planning the space. Size, decor, and equipment will depend largely on the type and volume of visitor traffic; thus special
Commercial OFFICES,
GENERAL Furniture
Secretory
jgECredenza S
U
Exec. Desk
60" 66"
*
x
^
HH
£b. CaseJ
End Tab,
72” x 18"
44"
x
14-1/2”
34"
42 ” x 14-
1/2"
26”* 14"
40" (L or R
comp.)
E-AT.«*4
24”x 18”
24”x 18”
48”
x
Con f. Table
20”
(16” high)
42"
x
30”
72"
x
36"
857
Commercial
GENERAL
OFFICES, Furniture
METAL Clerical 8
.
Typ
Desk
(Desk 1 1
i
|
I
Cent. Desk
*
•
i
x 34 "
60”
x
Typl
D T
40”
x
•
1
Desk
Desk D
I
1
i
O
34" 78"
Desk
|
i
_Q
0
O
.1-
45"
*
\
Desk t
it
1
O erlcol
T ypl St
j_
t
'
1
Cl erical
Cleri col
1
h-
.
-
50"
-
66 " x 18"
30"
x
D T
-
40" 66 ”
30" 24"
x
x
D
-
T
•
40" 66 ”
x *
30" 18”
D T
-
40" 66 ”
x
*
30" 18”
St
Creden za
B.C.
1
T abl
Desk
T abl
D
WASTE BASK ONE PERSON
D£
Vi at
j?
tUSft
TWO OR MORE PERSONS
EXECUTIVE AND SECRETARY
Fig.
Clearances
1
in
ONE PERSON, TWO OESKS
various types of offices.
r -WASTE
DESK AND WORK TABLE
H ^WASTE
BASKET
\
L
PATS AGE-1
1-3 ;
u
0 2
3’,
--
t-'t
"to
1-3"
3^9 5-0“
4'-
D 2
"to 3'-
7'-3"to to
8'-
0 0* l'-
1}
17 2lto II'-
10"
'
CV«bKT vrm ^TNiNtt in Hxrp CAe^NTte
MftaflED
ih
Fig.
D
strumentation.
ASSISTANT AND Df-NTlST
-n^TifexT
^F
WBMLB amd
£T a C^TTAL
Handpiece Delivery System
tools with
drill
This
is
bits that are
composed
of rotary
used to cut and shape
teeth.
ihMRl*aentat\oM
Wienra aubst Evacuation System Blood, debris, and water are removed from the mouth usually by suction (a
Plans A, B, C, D.
vacuum
system). This the dental assistant. Handheld Instruments
is
These
normally performed by
tools
include
probes,
scalers, forceps, etc. Three-way Syringe Often used by both the dentist and the assistant for spraying water, compressed air, or a combination thereof. In a well-equipped operatory. the assistant will have her own three-way syringe for drying or moistening preparations as well as for washing debris from the patient's i
mouth.
^
Methods of Delivery The instrumentation can be delivered to the oral cavity of the patient by three
methods. Mobile Delivery System
f
plan AN
(9PtrR>T FtTP wU